You are on page 1of 1386

AutoCAD

®

Command Reference

2004
February 2003

Copyright © 2003 Autodesk, Inc.
All Rights Reserved
This publication, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose.

AUTODESK, INC., MAKES NO WARRANTY, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE REGARDING THESE MATERIALS, AND
MAKES SUCH MATERIALS AVAILABLE SOLELY ON AN "AS-IS" BASIS.
IN NO EVENT SHALL AUTODESK, INC., BE LIABLE TO ANYONE FOR SPECIAL, COLLATERAL, INCIDENTAL, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES IN CONNECTION WITH OR ARISING OUT OF PURCHASE OR USE OF THESE MATERIALS. THE
SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE LIABILITY TO AUTODESK, INC., REGARDLESS OF THE FORM OF ACTION, SHALL NOT EXCEED THE
PURCHASE PRICE OF THE MATERIALS DESCRIBED HEREIN.
Autodesk, Inc., reserves the right to revise and improve its products as it sees fit. This publication describes the state of this product at the
time of its publication, and may not reflect the product at all times in the future.

Autodesk Trademarks
The following are registered trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and/or other countries: 3D Props, 3D Studio, 3D Studio MAX, 3D
Studio VIZ, 3DSurfer, ActiveShapes, ActiveShapes (logo), Actrix, ADI, AEC Authority (logo), AEC-X, Animator Pro, Animator Studio, ATC,
AUGI, AutoCAD, AutoCAD LT, AutoCAD Map, Autodesk, Autodesk Inventor, Autodesk (logo), Autodesk MapGuide, Autodesk University
(logo), Autodesk View, Autodesk WalkThrough, Autodesk World, AutoLISP, AutoSketch, Biped, bringing information down to earth, CAD
Overlay, Character Studio, Cinepak, Cinepak (logo), Codec Central, Combustion, Design Your World, Design Your World (logo), Discreet,
EditDV, Education by Design, gmax, Heidi, HOOPS, Hyperwire, i-drop, Inside Track, Kinetix, MaterialSpec, Mechanical Desktop, NAAUG,
ObjectARX, PeopleTracker, Physique, Planix, Powered with Autodesk Technology (logo), RadioRay, Revit, Softdesk, Texture Universe, The
AEC Authority, The Auto Architect, VISION, Visual, Visual Construction, Visual Drainage, Visual Hydro, Visual Landscape, Visual Roads,
Visual Survey, Visual Toolbox, Visual TugBoat, Visual LISP, Volo, WHIP!, and WHIP! (logo).
The following are trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and/or other countries: 3ds max, AutoCAD Architectural Desktop, AutoCAD
Learning Assistance, AutoCAD LT Learning Assistance, AutoCAD Simulator, AutoCAD SQL Extension, AutoCAD SQL Interface, Autodesk
Map, Autodesk Streamline, AutoSnap, AutoTrack, Built with ObjectARX (logo), Burn, Buzzsaw, Buzzsaw.com, Cinestream, Cleaner, Cleaner
Central, ClearScale, Colour Warper, Content Explorer, Dancing Baby (image), DesignCenter, Design Doctor, Designer's Toolkit,
DesignProf, DesignServer, Design Web Format, DWF, DWG Linking, DXF, Extending the Design Team, GDX Driver, gmax (logo), gmax
ready (logo),Heads-up Design, IntroDV, jobnet, ObjectDBX, onscreen onair online, Plans & Specs, Plasma, PolarSnap, ProjectPoint,
Reactor, Real-time Roto, Render Queue, Visual Bridge, Visual Syllabus, and Where Design Connects.

Autodesk Canada Inc. Trademarks
The following are registered trademarks of Autodesk Canada Inc. in the USA and/or Canada, and/or other countries: discreet, fire, flame,
flint, flint RT, frost, glass, inferno, MountStone, riot, river, smoke, sparks, stone, stream, vapour, wire.
The following are trademarks of Autodesk Canada Inc., in the USA, Canada, and/or other countries: backburner, backdraft, Multi-Master
Editing.

Third Party Trademarks
All other brand names, product names or trademarks belong to their respective holders.

Third Party Software Program Credits
ACIS Copyright © 1989-2001 Spatial Corp. Portions Copyright © 2002 Autodesk, Inc.
Copyright © 1997 Microsoft Corporation. All rights reserved.
International CorrectSpell™ Spelling Correction System © 1995 by Lernout & Hauspie Speech Products, N.V. All rights reserved.
InstallShield™ 3.0. Copyright © 1997 InstallShield Software Corporation. All rights reserved.
PANTONE ® Colors displayed in the software application or in the user documentation may not match PANTONE-identified standards.
Consult current PANTONE Color Publications for accurate color.
PANTONE ® and other Pantone, Inc. trademarks are the property of Pantone, Inc. © Pantone, Inc., 2002
Pantone, Inc. is the copyright owner of color data and/or software which are licensed to Autodesk, Inc., to distribute for use only in
combination with certain Autodesk software products. PANTONE Color Data and/or Software shall not be copied onto another disk or
into memory unless as part of the execution of this Autodesk software product.
Portions Copyright © 1991-1996 Arthur D. Applegate. All rights reserved.
Portions of this software are based on the work of the Independent JPEG Group.
RAL DESIGN © RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002
RAL CLASSIC © RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002
Representation of the RAL Colors is done with the approval of RAL Deutsches Institut für Gütesicherung und Kennzeichnung e.V. (RAL
German Institute for Quality Assurance and Certification, re. Assoc.), D-53757 Sankt Augustin."
Typefaces from the Bitstream ® typeface library copyright 1992.
Typefaces from Payne Loving Trust © 1996. All rights reserved.

GOVERNMENT USE
Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR 12.212 (Commercial Computer SoftwareRestricted Rights) and DFAR 227.7202 (Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software), as applicable.

Contents

Introduction .

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

Using AutoCAD Documentation . . . . . .
Using This Reference . . . . . . . . .
Executing Commands . . . . . . .
References to Other Sections . . . . .
Typographical Conventions . . . . . . .
3D . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3DARRAY . . . . . . . . . . .
3DCLIP . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adjust Clipping Planes Window . . . .
3DCONFIG . . . . . . . . . . .
3DCORBIT . . . . . . . . . . .
3DDISTANCE . . . . . . . . . .
3DFACE . . . . . . . . . . . .
3DMESH
. . . . . . . . . . .
3DORBIT . . . . . . . . . . .
Cursor Icons . . . . . . . . . .
3DOrbit Shortcut Menu . . . . . . .
3DORBITCTR . . . . . . . . . .
3DPAN . . . . . . . . . . . .
3DPOLY . . . . . . . . . . . .
3DSIN . . . . . . . . . . . .
3D Studio File Import Options Dialog Box .
3DSOUT. . . . . . . . . . . .
3D Studio File Export Options Dialog Box .

.

.

.

.

.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.

.
.

.

.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.

1

.
.

2
2
2
5
6
7
16
18
19
20
26
27
27
29
30
31
32
35
35
36
36
37
39
40

iii

3DSWIVEL . . . . . . . . . . . .
3DZOOM . . . . . . . . . . . .
ABOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ACISIN . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ACISOUT . . . . . . . . . . . .
ADCCLOSE . . . . . . . . . . . .
ADCENTER . . . . . . . . . . . .
DesignCenter Window . . . . . . . . .
Search Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . .
ADCNAVIGATE
. . . . . . . . . .
ALIGN . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AMECONVERT . . . . . . . . . . .
APERTURE . . . . . . . . . . . .
APPLOAD . . . . . . . . . . . .
Load/Unload Applications Dialog Box . . . .
Startup Suite Dialog Box . . . . . . . .
ARC. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AREA . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ARRAY . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Array Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . .
ARRAY Command Line . . . . . . . . .
ARX. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ASSIST . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Active Assistance Settings Dialog Box . . . .
ATTACHURL . . . . . . . . . . .
ATTDEF. . . . . . . . . . . . .
Attribute Definition Dialog Box . . . . . .
ATTDEF Command Line . . . . . . . .
ATTDISP . . . . . . . . . . . .
ATTEDIT . . . . . . . . . . . .
Edit Attributes Dialog Box . . . . . . . .
ATTEDIT Command Line . . . . . . . .
ATTEXT. . . . . . . . . . . . .
Attribute Extraction Dialog Box . . . . . .
ATTEXT Command Line . . . . . . . .
ATTREDEF . . . . . . . . . . . .
ATTSYNC . . . . . . . . . . . .
AUDIT . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BACKGROUND
. . . . . . . . . .
Background Dialog Box . . . . . . . . .
Adjust Background Bitmap Placement Dialog Box
BASE . . . . . . . . . . . . .

iv

|

Contents

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

42
42
43
43
44
44
45
. 45
. 49
. 52
. 53
. 55
. 56
. 57
. 58
. 60
. 61
. 64
. 66
. 67
. 72
. 75
. 76
. 78
. 79
. 80
. 80
. 82
. 84
. 85
. 86
. 86
. 91
. 91
. 93
. 94
. 95
. 95
. 97
. 97
. 100
.101

BATTMAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Block Attribute Manager . . . . . . . . . .
Edit Attribute Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . .
Settings Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . .
BHATCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Boundary Hatch and Fill Dialog Box . . . . . .
Hatch Pattern Palette Dialog Box . . . . . . .
BHATCH Command Line . . . . . . . . . .
BLIPMODE. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BLOCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Block Definition Dialog Box . . . . . . . . .
BLOCK Command Line . . . . . . . . . .
BLOCKICON . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BMPOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BOUNDARY . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Boundary Creation Dialog Box . . . . . . . .
BOUNDARY Command Line . . . . . . . . .
BOX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BREAK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BROWSER . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CAL
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Understanding Syntax of Expressions . . . . . .
Formatting Feet and Inches . . . . . . . . .
Formatting Angles . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using Points and Vectors . . . . . . . . . .
Using AutoLISP Variables . . . . . . . . . .
Using AutoCAD System Variables . . . . . . .
Converting Units of Measurement . . . . . . .
Using Standard Numeric Functions. . . . . . .
Calculating a Vector from Two Points . . . . . .
Calculating the Length of a Vector . . . . . . .
Obtaining a Point by Cursor . . . . . . . . .
Obtaining the Last-Specified Point . . . . . . .
Using AutoCAD Snap Modes in Arithmetic Expressions
Converting Points between UCS and WCS . . . .
Calculating a Point on a Line . . . . . . . .
Rotating a Point About an Axis . . . . . . . .
Obtaining an Intersection Point . . . . . . . .
Calculating a Distance . . . . . . . . . . .
Obtaining a Radius . . . . . . . . . . . .
Obtaining an Angle. . . . . . . . . . . .
Calculating a Normal Vector . . . . . . . . .
Using Shortcut Functions . . . . . . . . . .
CAMERA . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CHAMFER . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

. 102
102
103
105
. 106
107
116
117
. 121
. 122
122
124
. 126
. 127
. 127
127
128
. 129
. 131
. 133
. 135
135
136
137
137
139
139
140
140
141
143
143
143
144
145
146
146
147
147
149
149
150
152
. 153
. 154

Contents

|

v

CHANGE . . . . . . . . . .
CHECKSTANDARDS . . . . . . .
Check Standards Dialog Box . . . .
CHPROP . . . . . . . . . .
CIRCLE . . . . . . . . . . .
CLOSE . . . . . . . . . . .
CLOSEALL . . . . . . . . . .
COLOR . . . . . . . . . . .
Select Color Dialog Box . . . . . .
COLOR Command Line. . . . . .
COMPILE . . . . . . . . . .
CONE . . . . . . . . . . .
CONVERT . . . . . . . . . .
CONVERTCTB . . . . . . . . .
CONVERTPSTYLES . . . . . . . .
COPY . . . . . . . . . . .
COPYBASE . . . . . . . . . .
COPYCLIP . . . . . . . . . .
COPYHIST . . . . . . . . . .
COPYLINK . . . . . . . . . .
CUSTOMIZE . . . . . . . . .
Customize Dialog Box . . . . . .
New Toolbar Dialog Box . . . . .
Button Editor Dialog Box . . . . .
CUTCLIP . . . . . . . . . .
CYLINDER . . . . . . . . . .
DBCCLOSE . . . . . . . . . .
DBCONNECT . . . . . . . . .
dbConnect Manager . . . . . . .
Data View Window . . . . . . .
Query Editor . . . . . . . . .
Column Values Dialog Box. . . . .
Link Select Dialog Box . . . . . .
Configure a Data Source Dialog Box . .
Data View and Query Options Dialog Box
Export Links Dialog Box . . . . .
Export Query Set Dialog Box . . . .
Export Template Set Dialog Box . . .
Find Dialog Box . . . . . . . .
Format Dialog Box . . . . . . .
Import Query Set Dialog Box . . . .
Import Template Set Dialog Box . . .
Label Template Dialog Box . . . . .
Label Template Properties Dialog Box .
Link Conversion Dialog Box . . . .

vi

|

Contents

.
.
.

.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.158
.163
. 163
.164
.166
.168
.169
.169
. 169
. 173
.175
.175
.178
.179
.180
.182
.183
.183
.184
.185
.185
. 185
. 193
. 193
.195
.196
.201
.201
. 202
. 207
. 215
. 222
. 222
. 225
. 225
. 227
. 228
. 229
. 229
. 230
. 230
. 231
. 231
. 233
. 234

Link Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Link Template Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . .
Link Template Properties Dialog Box . . . . . . .
New Label Template Dialog Box . . . . . . . . .
New Link Template Dialog Box . . . . . . . . .
New Query Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . .
Replace Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Select a Database Object Dialog Box . . . . . . .
Select a Data Object Dialog Box . . . . . . . . .
Sort Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Synchronize Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . .
DBLCLKEDIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DBLIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DDEDIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Edit Text Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . .
Edit Attribute Definition Dialog Box . . . . . . .
DDPTYPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Point Style Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . .
DDVPOINT
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Viewpoint Presets Dialog Box . . . . . . . . .
DELAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DETACHURL . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DIM and DIM1
. . . . . . . . . . . . .
DIMALIGNED . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DIMANGULAR
. . . . . . . . . . . . .
DIMBASELINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DIMCENTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DIMCONTINUE . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DIMDIAMETER . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DIMDISASSOCIATE . . . . . . . . . . . .
DIMEDIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DIMLINEAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DIMORDINATE . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DIMOVERRIDE
. . . . . . . . . . . . .
DIMRADIUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DIMREASSOCIATE
. . . . . . . . . . . .
DIMREGEN
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DIMSTYLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimension Style Manager. . . . . . . . . . .
Create New Dimension Style Dialog Box . . . . . .
New, Modify, and Override Dimension Style Dialog Boxes
Compare Dimension Styles Dialog Box . . . . . .
DIMSTYLE Command Line . . . . . . . . . .
DIMTEDIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.

.
.
.

.

.
.

.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

Contents

237
238
239
240
240
241
241
242
243
243
244
. 246
. 246
. 247
248
248
. 249
249
. 250
250
. 252
. 252
. 253
. 255
. 258
. 261
. 263
. 264
. 266
. 268
. 269
. 271
. 276
. 278
. 279
. 282
. 284
. 285
285
288
288
308
309
. 312
. 314

|

vii

DIVIDE . . . . . . . . . .
DONUT. . . . . . . . . .
DRAGMODE . . . . . . . .
DRAWORDER . . . . . . . .
DSETTINGS. . . . . . . . .
Drafting Settings Dialog Box . . .
DSVIEWER . . . . . . . . .
Aerial View Window . . . . . .
DVIEW . . . . . . . . . .
DWGPROPS
. . . . . . . .
Drawing Properties Dialog Box . .
DXBIN . . . . . . . . . .
EATTEDIT . . . . . . . . .
Enhanced Attribute Editor . . . .
EATTEXT . . . . . . . . .
Attribute Extraction Wizard . . .
EDGE . . . . . . . . . .
EDGESURF . . . . . . . . .
ELEV . . . . . . . . . .
ELLIPSE . . . . . . . . . .
Arc . . . . . . . . . . .
ERASE . . . . . . . . . .
ETRANSMIT
. . . . . . . .
Create Transmittal Dialog Box. . .
Password Dialog Box . . . . . .
EXPLODE . . . . . . . . .
EXPORT
. . . . . . . . .
EXTEND . . . . . . . . .
EXTRUDE . . . . . . . . .
FILL . . . . . . . . . . .
FILLET . . . . . . . . . .
FILTER . . . . . . . . . .
Object Selection Filters Dialog Box .
FIND . . . . . . . . . .
Find and Replace Dialog Box . . .
Find and Replace Options Dialog Box
FOG. . . . . . . . . . .
Fog/Depth Cue Dialog Box . . . .
GOTOURL . . . . . . . . .
GRAPHSCR . . . . . . . . .
GRID . . . . . . . . . .
GROUP . . . . . . . . . .
Object Grouping Dialog Box . . .
Order Group Dialog Box . . . .
GROUP Command Line. . . . .

viii

|

Contents

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.

.
.

.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.

.

.
.
.

.
.
.

.

.
.
.

.
.

.

.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.

.
.

.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.

.
.

.
.

.
.
.

.

.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.

.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.

.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.314
.316
.316
.317
.318
. 318
.328
. 328
.331
.342
. 342
.347
.349
. 349
.351
. 351
.355
.357
.358
.359
. 360
.362
.363
. 363
. 368
.368
.370
.371
.374
.377
.377
.382
. 383
.386
. 386
. 389
.389
. 390
.393
.393
.393
.394
. 395
. 398
. 399

HATCH
. . . . . . . . .
HATCHEDIT . . . . . . . .
Hatch Edit Dialog Box . . . . .
HATCHEDIT Command Line . .
HELP . . . . . . . . . .
HIDE . . . . . . . . . .
HLSETTINGS . . . . . . . .
Hidden Line Settings Dialog Box .
HYPERLINK . . . . . . . .
Insert Hyperlink Dialog Box . . .
Edit Hyperlink Dialog Box . . .
Select Place in Document Dialog Box
HYPERLINK Command Line . . .
HYPERLINKOPTIONS . . . . . .
ID . . . . . . . . . . .
IMAGE . . . . . . . . . .
Image Manager . . . . . . .
IMAGE Command Line . . . .
IMAGEADJUST
. . . . . . .
Image Adjust Dialog Box . . . .
IMAGEADJUST Command Line . .
IMAGEATTACH . . . . . . .
Image Dialog Box . . . . . .
IMAGECLIP . . . . . . . .
IMAGEFRAME . . . . . . . .
IMAGEQUALITY . . . . . . .
IMPORT . . . . . . . . .
INSERT . . . . . . . . . .
Insert Dialog Box . . . . . .
INSERT Command Line . . . .
INSERTOBJ. . . . . . . . .
Insert Object Dialog Box . . . .
INTERFERE. . . . . . . . .
INTERSECT
. . . . . . . .
ISOPLANE . . . . . . . . .
JPGOUT . . . . . . . . .
JUSTIFYTEXT . . . . . . . .
LAYER . . . . . . . . . .
Layer Properties Manager . . . .
Named Layer Filters Dialog Box . .
Save Layer States Dialog Box . . .
Layer States Manager . . . . .
Select Linetype Dialog Box . . .
Lineweight Dialog Box. . . . .
LAYER Command Line . . . .

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.

.
.

.
.
.

.
.
.

.

.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.

.

.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.

.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.

.
.
.

.
.

.
.
.

.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.

.
.
.

.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

Contents

. 403
. 408
408
410
. 411
. 412
. 413
414
. 416
416
419
419
420
. 421
. 423
. 423
424
427
. 430
431
432
. 433
434
. 436
. 438
. 439
. 440
. 440
441
442
. 448
448
. 450
. 451
. 453
. 455
. 455
. 457
457
464
466
467
468
468
469

|

ix

LAYERP . . . . . . . . . . .
LAYERPMODE . . . . . . . . .
LAYOUT . . . . . . . . . .
LAYOUTWIZARD . . . . . . . .
Layout Wizard . . . . . . . . .
LAYTRANS . . . . . . . . . .
Layer Translator . . . . . . . .
Settings Dialog Box . . . . . . .
Edit/New Layer Dialog Box . . . . .
LEADER. . . . . . . . . . .
LENGTHEN. . . . . . . . . .
LIGHT . . . . . . . . . . .
Lights Dialog Box . . . . . . . .
New or Modify Point Light Dialog Box .
New or Modify Distant Light Dialog Box
New or Modify Spotlight Dialog Box. .
North Location Dialog Box. . . . .
Shadow Options Dialog Box . . . .
Sun Angle Calculator Dialog Box . . .
Geographic Location Dialog Box . . .
LIMITS . . . . . . . . . . .
LINE
. . . . . . . . . . .
LINETYPE . . . . . . . . . .
Linetype Manager . . . . . . .
Load or Reload Linetypes Dialog Box .
LINETYPE Command Line . . . . .
LIST . . . . . . . . . . . .
LOAD . . . . . . . . . . .
LOGFILEOFF . . . . . . . . .
LOGFILEON . . . . . . . . .
LSEDIT . . . . . . . . . . .
Landscape Edit Dialog Box . . . . .
LSLIB . . . . . . . . . . .
Landscape Library Dialog Box . . . .
Landscape Library Edit Dialog Box . .
LSNEW . . . . . . . . . . .
Landscape New Dialog Box. . . . .
LTSCALE . . . . . . . . . .
LWEIGHT . . . . . . . . . .
Lineweight Settings Dialog Box . . .
LWEIGHT Command Line . . . . .
MASSPROP . . . . . . . . . .
MATCHPROP . . . . . . . . .
Property Settings Dialog Box . . . .

x

|

Contents

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.

.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.

.
.

.
.

.
.
.

.

.
.
.

.
.
.

.
.

.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.

.
.

.
.
.
.

.

.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.475
.475
.475
.477
. 478
.478
. 478
. 480
. 481
.482
.486
.489
. 489
. 492
. 494
. 496
. 498
. 499
. 500
. 501
.502
.504
.506
. 506
. 509
. 510
.513
.514
.514
.515
.515
. 516
.517
. 517
. 518
.520
. 520
.522
.523
. 523
. 525
.527
.531
. 531

MATLIB
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 533
Materials Library Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . 533
Reconcile Imported Material Names Dialog Box. . . . . . 535
Reconcile Exported Material Names Dialog Box . . . . . . 536
MEASURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 537
MENU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 539
MENULOAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 540
Menu Customization Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . 540
MENULOAD Command Line . . . . . . . . . . . 543
MENUUNLOAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 543
MINSERT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 544
MIRROR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 553
MIRROR3D
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 554
MLEDIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 556
Multiline Edit Tools Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . 556
MLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 564
MLSTYLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 566
Multiline Styles Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . 567
Load Multiline Styles Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . 569
Element Properties Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . 569
Multiline Properties Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . 570
MODEL
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 573
MOVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 573
MREDO
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 574
MSLIDE
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 575
MSPACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 575
MTEXT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 576
Multiline Text Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 577
Indents and Tabs Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . 581
Replace Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 582
. . . . . . . . . . . . Stack Properties Dialog Box582
AutoStack Properties Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . 584
MTEXT Command Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . 585
Unicode Strings, Control Codes, and Special Characters . . . 589
MULTIPLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 590
MVIEW
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 591
MVSETUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 595
Using MVSETUP on the Model Tab . . . . . . . . . . 596
Using MVSETUP on a Layout Tab . . . . . . . . . . 596
NEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 605
Create New Drawing Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . 605
Quick Setup Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 608
Advanced Setup Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . 610
NEW Command Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 612
OFFSET. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 613

Contents

|

xi

OLELINKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .614
Links Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 615
Convert Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 616
Change Icon Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . 617
OLESCALE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .618
OLE Properties Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . 618
OOPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .620
OPEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .621
Standard File Selection Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . . . 621
Find Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 626
Add/Modify FTP Locations Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . 628
Partial Open Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 629
OPEN Command Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 632
OPTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .633
Options Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 633
Alternate Font Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . 664
Color Options Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . 665
Command Line Window Font Dialog Box . . . . . . . . 667
Right-Click Customization Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . 667
Add Profile Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 669
Change Profile Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . 670
ORTHO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .670
OSNAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .671
PAGESETUP
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .675
Page Setup Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 675
User Defined Page Setups Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . 682
Changes to a Printer Configuration File Dialog Box (Page Setup) . 682
PAN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .683
Panning in Real Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 683
PAN Command Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 684
Pan Shortcut Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 684
PARTIALOAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .685
Partial Load Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 685
PARTIALOAD Command Line . . . . . . . . . . . . 687
PARTIALOPEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .690
PASTEBLOCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .693
PASTECLIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .693
PASTEORIG. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .694
PASTESPEC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .694
Paste Special Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . 695
PCINWIZARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .696
PEDIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .696
PFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .710
PLAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .712
PLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .713

xii

|

Contents

PLOT

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Plot Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changes to a Printer Configuration File Dialog Box (Plot)
Plot Progress Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . .
Update PC3 File with New Printer Dialog Box . . . .
PLOT Command Line . . . . . . . . . . . .
PLOTSTAMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Plot Stamp Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . .
User Defined Fields Dialog Box . . . . . . . . .
Advanced Options Dialog Box . . . . . . . . .
PLOTSTAMP Command Line. . . . . . . . . .
PLOTSTYLE
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Current Plot Style Dialog Box . . . . . . . . .
Select Plot Style Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . .
PLOTSTYLE Command Line . . . . . . . . . .
PLOTTERMANAGER . . . . . . . . . . . .
Add-a-Plotter Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . .
Plotter Configuration Editor . . . . . . . . . .
Configure LPT Port Dialog Box . . . . . . . . .
Settings for COM Port Dialog Box . . . . . . . .
Advanced Settings for COM Port Dialog Box . . . . .
PNGOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
POINT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
POLYGON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PREVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PROPERTIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Properties Palette . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General Properties of Objects. . . . . . . . . .
Properties Palette with No Objects Selected . . . . .
3D Orbit View Properties . . . . . . . . . . .
3D Face Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3D Solid Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Arc Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Attribute Definition Properties . . . . . . . . .
Block Reference Properties . . . . . . . . . .
Body Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Circle Properties
. . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimension Properties . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ellipse Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . .
External Reference Properties . . . . . . . . .
Hatch Properties
. . . . . . . . . . . . .
Image Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Leader Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Line Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Multiline Properties . . . . . . . . . . . .

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

Contents

. 719
719
728
728
729
731
. 735
736
738
739
742
. 744
745
746
747
. 747
747
748
761
761
762
. 763
. 763
. 765
. 766
. 767
769
770
771
773
774
774
775
776
777
778
778
779
779
780
781
782
783
784
785

|

xiii

Multiline Text (Mtext) Properties
. . .
Multiple Insertion Properties . . . . .
Point Properties . . . . . . . . .
Polyline (2D and Lightweight) Properties .
Polyline (3D) Properties
. . . . . .
Polyline (3D Polygon Mesh) Properties . .
Polyline (Polyface Mesh) Properties . . .
Ray Properties . . . . . . . . . .
Region Properties
. . . . . . . .
Shape Properties . . . . . . . . .
Solid Properties . . . . . . . . .
Spline Properties . . . . . . . . .
Text Properties . . . . . . . . .
Tolerance Properties . . . . . . . .
Trace Properties . . . . . . . . .
Viewport Properties . . . . . . . .
Xline Properties . . . . . . . . .
PROPERTIESCLOSE
. . . . . . . .
PSETUPIN . . . . . . . . . . .
Import User Defined Page Setups Dialog Box
PSETUPIN Command Line . . . . . .
PSPACE . . . . . . . . . . . .
PUBLISH . . . . . . . . . . .
Publish Drawing Sheets Dialog Box . . .
Change Page Setup Dialog Box . . . .
Publishing Complete Dialog Box . . . .
PUBLISH Command Line . . . . . .
PUBLISHTOWEB . . . . . . . . .
Publish to Web Wizard . . . . . . .
PURGE . . . . . . . . . . . .
Purge Dialog Box . . . . . . . . .
PURGE Command Line . . . . . . .
QDIM . . . . . . . . . . . .
QLEADER . . . . . . . . . . .
Leader Settings Dialog Box . . . . . .
QNEW . . . . . . . . . . . .
QSAVE . . . . . . . . . . . .
QSELECT . . . . . . . . . . .
Quick Select Dialog Box . . . . . . .
QTEXT . . . . . . . . . . . .
QUIT . . . . . . . . . . . .
RAY . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RECOVER . . . . . . . . . . .

xiv

|

Contents

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.

.
.

.
.

.
.
.
.

.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

785
786
787
787
788
789
790
790
791
791
792
792
793
794
795
796
797
.798
.798
. 798
. 799
.799
.800
. 801
. 805
. 806
. 807
.808
. 808
.809
. 809
. 811
.813
.814
. 816
.819
.820
.820
. 821
.824
.824
.825
.825

RECTANG . . . . . . . . . . . .
REDEFINE . . . . . . . . . . . .
REDO . . . . . . . . . . . . .
REDRAW . . . . . . . . . . . .
REDRAWALL . . . . . . . . . . .
REFCLOSE . . . . . . . . . . . .
REFEDIT . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reference Edit Dialog Box. . . . . . . .
REFEDIT Command Line . . . . . . . .
REFSET . . . . . . . . . . . . .
REGEN . . . . . . . . . . . . .
REGENALL . . . . . . . . . . . .
REGENAUTO . . . . . . . . . . .
REGION . . . . . . . . . . . .
REINIT . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Re-initialization Dialog Box . . . . . . .
RENAME . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rename Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . .
RENAME Command Line . . . . . . . .
RENDER . . . . . . . . . . . .
Render Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . .
Render Window . . . . . . . . . . .
Windows Render Options Dialog Box . . . .
RENDSCR . . . . . . . . . . . .
REPLAY
. . . . . . . . . . . .
Image Specifications Dialog Box. . . . . .
RESUME . . . . . . . . . . . .
REVCLOUD . . . . . . . . . . .
REVOLVE . . . . . . . . . . . .
REVSURF . . . . . . . . . . . .
RMAT . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Materials Dialog Box . . . . . . . . .
New or Modify Standard Material Dialog Box .
Adjust Material Bitmap Placement Dialog Box .
New or Modify Granite Material Dialog Box . .
New or Modify Marble Material Dialog Box . .
New or Modify Wood Material Dialog Box . .
Attach by AutoCAD Color Index Dialog Box . .
Attach by Layer Dialog Box . . . . . . .
RMLIN . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Map Markup Dialog Box . . . . . . . .
RMLIN Command Line . . . . . . . .
ROTATE . . . . . . . . . . . .
ROTATE3D. . . . . . . . . . . .

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.

.
.

.
.

.
.
.

.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.

.
.
.
.

Contents

. 826
. 828
. 828
. 829
. 830
. 830
. 832
832
835
. 837
. 838
. 839
. 840
. 841
. 842
842
. 843
843
844
. 844
845
847
849
. 851
. 852
852
. 854
. 854
. 856
. 858
. 860
860
862
865
868
869
871
873
874
. 875
875
876
. 877
. 878

|

xv

RPREF . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rendering Preferences Dialog Box . . .
Render Options Dialog Box . . . . .
Photo Real Render Options Dialog Box . .
Photo Raytrace Render Options Dialog Box
File Output Configuration Dialog Box . .
RSCRIPT
. . . . . . . . . . .
RULESURF . . . . . . . . . . .
SAVE . . . . . . . . . . . .
SAVEAS . . . . . . . . . . . .
Save to Earlier Versions . . . . . . .
Template Description Dialog Box . . . .
Saveas Options Dialog Box . . . . . .
SAVEAS Command Line . . . . . .
SAVEIMG . . . . . . . . . . .
Save Image Dialog Box . . . . . . .
TGA Options Dialog Box . . . . . .
TIFF Options Dialog Box . . . . . .
SCALE . . . . . . . . . . . .
SCALETEXT
. . . . . . . . . .
SCENE . . . . . . . . . . . .
Scenes Dialog Box . . . . . . . .
New Scene Dialog Box . . . . . . .
Modify Scene Dialog Box . . . . . .
SCRIPT . . . . . . . . . . . .
SECTION . . . . . . . . . . .
SECURITYOPTIONS . . . . . . . .
Security Options Dialog Box . . . . .
Confirm Password Dialog Box . . . . .
Advanced Options Dialog Box. . . . .
SELECT . . . . . . . . . . . .
SETIDROPHANDLER . . . . . . . .
SETUV . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mapping Dialog Box . . . . . . . .
Adjust Planar Coordinates Dialog Box . .
Adjust Cylindrical Coordinates Dialog Box.
Adjust Spherical Coordinates Dialog Box .
Adjust UVW Coordinates Dialog Box . .
Adjust Object Bitmap Placement Dialog Box
SETVAR . . . . . . . . . . . .
SHADEMODE . . . . . . . . . .
SHAPE . . . . . . . . . . . .
SHELL . . . . . . . . . . . .
SHOWMAT . . . . . . . . . . .

xvi

|

Contents

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.882
882
885
886
888
891
.893
.893
.897
.897
. 898
. 899
. 899
. 901
.902
. 902
. 904
. 904
.905
.906
.908
. 908
. 909
. 910
.911
.911
.914
. 914
. 916
. 916
.917
.920
.920
. 920
. 922
. 924
. 926
. 927
. 928
.931
.931
.933
.934
.934

.
.
.
.
.

SIGVALIDATE . . . . . . . . . .
Validate Digital Signatures Dialog Box . .
Digital Signature Contents Dialog Box. .
SKETCH . . . . . . . . . . .
SLICE . . . . . . . . . . . .
SNAP . . . . . . . . . . . .
SOLDRAW . . . . . . . . . . .
SOLID . . . . . . . . . . . .
SOLIDEDIT
. . . . . . . . . .
SOLPROF . . . . . . . . . . .
SOLVIEW . . . . . . . . . . .
SPACETRANS . . . . . . . . . .
SPELL . . . . . . . . . . . .
Check Spelling Dialog Box . . . . .
Change Dictionaries Dialog Box. . . .
SPHERE
. . . . . . . . . . .
SPLINE . . . . . . . . . . . .
SPLINEDIT . . . . . . . . . . .
STANDARDS . . . . . . . . . .
Configure Standards Dialog Box. . . .
CAD Standards Settings Dialog Box. . .
STATS . . . . . . . . . . . .
Statistics Dialog Box . . . . . . .
STATUS
. . . . . . . . . . .
STLOUT . . . . . . . . . . .
STRETCH . . . . . . . . . . .
STYLE . . . . . . . . . . . .
Text Style Dialog Box . . . . . . .
STYLE Command Line . . . . . . .
STYLESMANAGER . . . . . . . . .
Add-a-Plot-Style-Table Wizard . . . .
Plot Style Table Editor . . . . . . .
Edit Lineweights Dialog Box . . . . .
SUBTRACT . . . . . . . . . . .
SYSWINDOWS. . . . . . . . . .
TABLET
. . . . . . . . . . .
TABSURF . . . . . . . . . . .
TEXT . . . . . . . . . . . .
Special Unicode Characters . . . . .
Control Codes and Special Characters . .
TEXT and the TEXTEVAL System Variable
TEXTSCR . . . . . . . . . . .
TIFOUT
. . . . . . . . . . .
TIME . . . . . . . . . . . .

.
.
.

.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.

.
.
.

.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.

.
.
.

.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.

. 935
935
936
. 937
. 939
. 943
. 946
. 947
. 948
. 964
. 966
. 974
. 975
975
977
. 978
. 979
. 981
. 988
988
990
. 991
992
. 993
. 995
. 996
. 997
998
1001
1003
1004
1004
1011
1012
1013
1015
1020
1021
1027
1027
1028
1028
1029
1029

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.

.
.
.

.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.

.
.
.

.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

Contents

|

xvii

TOLERANCE . . . . . . . . . .
Geometric Tolerance Dialog Box . . . .
Symbol Dialog Box . . . . . . . .
Material Condition Dialog Box . . . .
TOOLBAR . . . . . . . . . . .
TOOLBAR Command Line . . . . . .
TOOLPALETTES
. . . . . . . . .
View Options Dialog Box . . . . . .
Tool Properties Dialog Box . . . . . .
TOOLPALETTESCLOSE. . . . . . . .
TORUS . . . . . . . . . . . .
TRACE . . . . . . . . . . . .
TRANSPARENCY . . . . . . . . .
TRAYSETTINGS. . . . . . . . . .
Tray Settings Dialog Box . . . . . .
TREESTAT . . . . . . . . . . .
TRIM . . . . . . . . . . . .
U . . . . . . . . . . . . .
UCS . . . . . . . . . . . . .
UCSICON . . . . . . . . . . .
UCS Icon Dialog Box. . . . . . . .
UCSMAN . . . . . . . . . . .
UCS Dialog Box . . . . . . . . .
UCS Details Dialog Box . . . . . . .
UNDEFINE . . . . . . . . . . .
UNDO . . . . . . . . . . . .
UNION . . . . . . . . . . . .
UNITS . . . . . . . . . . . .
Drawing Units Dialog Box . . . . . .
Direction Control Dialog Box . . . . .
UNITS Command Line . . . . . . .
VBAIDE . . . . . . . . . . . .
VBALOAD . . . . . . . . . . .
AutoCAD Macro Virus Protection Dialog Box
VBAMAN . . . . . . . . . . .
VBA Manager . . . . . . . . . .
VBARUN . . . . . . . . . . .
Macros Dialog Box . . . . . . . .
Select Project Dialog Box . . . . . .
VBA Options Dialog Box . . . . . .
VBARUN Command Line . . . . . .
VBASTMT . . . . . . . . . . .
VBAUNLOAD . . . . . . . . . .

xviii

|

Contents

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.

.
.

.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.

.
.

.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.

.

.
.

.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

1030
.1031
.1033
.1035
1035
.1036
1038
.1039
.1040
1041
1042
1043
1044
1045
.1045
1046
1047
1051
1051
1060
.1062
1064
.1064
.1069
1070
1071
1074
1075
.1075
.1077
.1078
1081
1081
.1082
1083
.1083
1085
.1086
.1088
.1088
.1089
1090
1090

VIEW . . . . . . . .
View Dialog Box. . . . .
New View Dialog Box . . .
View Details Dialog Box . .
VIEW Command Line . . .
VIEWRES . . . . . . .
VLISP . . . . . . . .
VPCLIP. . . . . . . .
VPLAYER . . . . . . .
VPOINT . . . . . . .
VPORTS . . . . . . .
Viewports Dialog Box . . .
VPORTS Command Line . .
VSLIDE. . . . . . . .
WBLOCK . . . . . . .
Write Block Dialog Box . .
WBLOCK Command Line. .
WEDGE
. . . . . . .
WHOHAS . . . . . . .
WIPEOUT . . . . . . .
WMFIN
. . . . . . .
WMFOPTS . . . . . . .
WMF In Options Dialog Box .
WMFOUT . . . . . . .
XATTACH . . . . . . .
External Reference Dialog Box
XBIND . . . . . . . .
Xbind Dialog Box . . . .
XBIND Command Line . .
XCLIP . . . . . . . .
XLINE . . . . . . . .
XOPEN. . . . . . . .
XPLODE . . . . . . .
XREF . . . . . . . .
Xref Manager. . . . . .
Bind Xrefs Dialog Box . . .
XREF Command Line . . .
ZOOM . . . . . . . .
Zoom Shortcut Menu . . .

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.

.

.
.
.

.
.

.
.

.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.

.
.

.
.

.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.

.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.

.
.
.

.

.
.

.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.

.

Contents

1090
1091
1093
1094
1095
1098
1099
1099
1100
1102
1104
1104
1108
1112
1113
1113
1115
1116
1118
1119
1120
1125
1125
1125
1127
1127
1130
1131
1131
1132
1135
1137
1138
1140
1141
1143
1145
1149
1153

|

xix

Appendix A Command Aliases .

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

1155

Appendix B System Variables .

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

1161

Appendix C Dimension Variables Quick Reference

.

.

.

.

.

.

1235

Map of Dimension Variables in Dimension Style Dialog Boxes . .
Dimension Variable Settings for Common Dimensioning Standards

Appendix D Utilities

Appendix E

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

Attach Digital Signatures . . . . . .
Attach Digital Signatures Dialog Box.
Search Folders Dialog Box . . . .
Batch Standards Checker . . . . .
Batch Standards Checker . . . .
AutoCAD Batch Plot . . . . . .
SLIDELIB . . . . . . . . .

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

Standard Libraries.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

AutoCAD Graphical Objects .

Appendix G Unicode

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

|

Contents

.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

1245
.
.
.

.1246
.1246
.1247
. 1247
. .1248
. 1252
. 1252

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

1255
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.1256
.1257
.1258
.1264
.1265
.1265
.1267
.1268
.1269

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

1271

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

1277

Overview of Unicode Fonts . . .
Code Page Independent Format (CIF)
Multibyte Interchange Format (MIF)
Code Page Information . . . . .

xx

.

.
.
.
. . . .
. . . . .
. . . .
. . . .

Standard Linetypes . . . . . . . . . . .
Complex Linetypes . . . . . . . . . . .
Standard Hatch Patterns . . . . . . . . .
PostScript Fill Patterns . . . . . . . . . .
Standard Text and Symbol Fonts . . . . . . .
List of Standard Text and Symbol Fonts. . .
Examples of Standard Text and Symbol Fonts .
TrueType Fonts . . . . . . . . . . . .
Geometric Characteristic Symbols . . . . . .

Appendix F

.
.
.
.

.1236
.1239

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.1278
.1278
.1280
.1281

Appendix H Command Modifiers .

.

.

.

.

.

Coordinate Filters (Command Modifier) .
Direct Distance Entry (Command Modifier)
FROM (Command Modifier) . . . .
TRACKING (Command Modifier). . .
Object Snaps (Command Modifier) . .
Selection Modes (Command Modifier) .

Index .

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.

.

.

.

.

.

1283

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

1284
1284
1285
1285
1286
1286

.

.

.

.

.

1287

Contents

|

xxi

xxii

Introduction

The Command Reference, a comprehensive guide to

In this chapter

AutoCAD® commands, lists all AutoCAD commands in

■ Using AutoCAD

Documentation

alphabetical order.
In addition to the command listings, the Command

■ Using This Reference
■ Typographical Conventions

Reference covers several topics in the appendixes:
command aliases, system variables, dimension
variables, utilities, standard libraries, graphical
database objects, and Unicode fonts.
The index for the Command Reference is at the end of
Volume II.

1

Using AutoCAD Documentation
In addition to this Command Reference, several other resources are available to
help you learn and use AutoCAD. The complete documentation set for
AutoCAD is online. You can access it from the Help menu.

Note For the latest documentation corrections and additions, refer to the
Readme file.

Using This Reference
The Command Reference provides detailed information on all commands,
command options, and system variables. The explanations reflect the default
AutoCAD system variable settings and the default prototype drawing. If you
change system variable settings, the prompts on your screen might differ
from what you see here. For example, the setting of the FILEDIA system variable governs whether you work in a dialog box or on the command line
when you use certain commands. See appendix B, “System Variables.”

Executing Commands
The process of executing a command begins by starting the command, using
one of several methods. For some commands, such as REGEN, no further
action is required. For other commands, you must respond by providing
additional information or actions in order to complete the command.
As you work with commands, note that right-clicking in the drawing area
either acts as ENTER or displays a shortcut menu. You can control this behavior in the Options dialog box or with the SHORTCUTMENU system variable.

Starting Commands
You can start a command by doing one of the following:

Select the command from a menu, toolbar, status bar, or shortcut menu.
Enter the command name or command alias at the Command prompt
and press ENTER or SPACEBAR .

For a list of the aliases that correspond to each command, see appendix A,
“Command Aliases.”

2

|

Introduction

In this Command Reference, near the beginning of each command description
is a command access section, listing the specific ways you can start that command. For example, following is the command access section for the PAN
command:
Standard toolbar:
View menu: Pan ➤ Realtime
Shortcut menu: With no objects selected, right-click in the drawing area,
and choose Pan.
Command line: pan (or 'pan for transparent use)
The availability of certain shortcut menus depends on the current setting of
the SHORTCUTMENU system variable. The instructions in the command
access sections assume that you have made the indicated menu available.
You can exit a command at any time by pressing ESC .
Using Transparent Commands
In many cases, you can start a command while using another command. The
command you start is called a transparent command. For example, to turn on
the grid while drawing a line, you can start the GRID command transparently
by preceding the command with an apostrophe. Two right angle brackets
(>>) precede prompts for transparent commands.
Command: line
Specify first point: 'grid
>>Specify grid spacing(X) or [ON/OFF/Snap/Aspect] <current>: on
Resuming LINE command
Specify first point:
In the Command Reference, the command access sections identify commands
that you can use transparently.
Suppressing Dialog Boxes
Many commands provide both command line and dialog box interfaces. In
most cases, when both a command line and dialog box interface are available, the command line version is preceded with a hyphen character. For
example, the command line version of GROUP is -GROUP.
You can also control the display of file dialog boxes through the FILEDIA
system variable. See appendix B, “System Variables.”

Using This Reference

|

3

Responding to Prompts
If a command does not immediately execute, AutoCAD either displays a
dialog box or displays prompts on the command line requesting more
information. Command line prompts are structured as follows:
Command: commandname
Current settings: Setting1 Setting2 Setting3
Instructional text [Option1/oPtion2/opTion3/...] <default option or value>:
The optional current value line displays the current settings for the command or for system variables related to the command. The succeeding
prompts identify the type of input required to complete the command and,
when applicable, list the available options in straight brackets and a default
option or value in angle brackets. In some cases, AutoCAD determines
default options and values based on the option or value that you last specified, or based on the settings of certain system variables.
Typically, the first word of a prompt indicates the type of action you can take.
Most command line prompts begin with the word enter, select, or specify.
These words indicate how you can respond to the prompt.
Terminology in command line prompts
If the prompt starts with...

You can...

Select

Select objects on the screen using your pointing
device.

Enter

Enter text on the command line.

Specify

Use your pointing device or enter text on the
command line to select a point location on the
screen.

Selecting Options on the Command Line
To select one of the options contained within the straight brackets, you can
enter the entire option name or only the capitalized letters, and then press
ENTER or SPACEBAR . To select the default option enclosed in angle brackets
(<>), if available, press ENTER or SPACEBAR .

4

|

Introduction

You can also choose command options from a shortcut menu by rightclicking in the drawing area while the command is active. The options available on the command line appear in the shortcut menu. For information
about how to enable or disable this shortcut menu, see “Shortcut Menus” in
the User’s Guide.
Entering Data on the Command Line
Some prompts ask you to enter data, rather than (or as an alternative to)
choosing an option. To do so, enter the text on the command line and press
ENTER or SPACEBAR . However, be aware that when the command line prompt
requests an object name, SPACEBAR inserts a space on the command line
rather than acting as ENTER . This allows for the support of extended symbol
names.
Just as default command options are often provided, prompts may include
default values, enclosed in angle brackets (<>), when data is requested. For
example, the POLYGON command displays the following prompt, suggesting
4 as the number of sides for your polygon:
Command: polygon
Enter number of sides <4>:
To accept the default value, press ENTER or SPACEBAR .
Using Wild-Card Characters on the Command Line
When the prompt directions ask for a name list, such as a block name, variable name, named view, and so on, you can use wild-card characters to
specify names. See the table in “Filter and Sort the List of Layers” in the User’s
Guide.

Repeating Commands
If no command is active, you can repeat the previous command by pressing
ENTER or SPACEBAR or by right-clicking in the drawing area and choosing the
Repeat Command Name option from the shortcut menu.

Accessing Recently Used Commands
You can access the six most recently used commands from a shortcut menu
by right-clicking in the command window and choosing Recent Commands.

References to Other Sections
At the end of most command descriptions, you’ll find a section called “See
Also.” This section includes references to chapters in other AutoCAD guides
and other AutoCAD commands and system variables related to the current
command.

Using This Reference

|

5

specific terms are set in typefaces that distinguish them from the body text. sample code. c:\autocad 2002\support Text you enter At the Command prompt. DBCONNECT. SAVE AutoCAD system variables DIMBLK. ESC.Typographical Conventions To orient you to AutoCAD features as they appear on the screen. Throughout AutoCAD documentation. ENTER Keys you press simultaneously on the keyboard CTRL + C AutoLISP variable names. DWGNAME. Keys you press on the keyboard CTRL. STANDARD Prompts Select object to trim or [Project/Edge/Undo]: Instructions after prompt sequences Select objects: Use an object selection method File names and file name extensions acad. . Typographical conventions Text element Example AutoCAD commands ADCENTER. such as linetypes and styles DASHDOT.exe. enter shape. the following conventions are used. F10. LTSCALE AutoCAD named-objects.dwg file extension Folder or directory names Sample folder. and text in ASCII files The variable pi is preset to a value of pi AutoLISP and DIESEL function names command ads_command( ) Formal arguments specified in function definitions The string and mode arguments 6 | Introduction ***POP1 . Readme file.

tori.You can start a command by using one of the following methods: ■ ■ Click the command name on a menu. wedges. height Specify height of box: Specify a distance Specify rotation angle of box about the Z axis or [Reference]: Specify an angle or enter r angle 3D | 7 . length Specify corner point of box: Specify length of box: Specify a distance Specify width of box or [Cube]: Specify a distance or enter c width Width Specifies the width of the box. or rendered. Enter a distance or specify a point relative to the corner point of the box. including boxes. spheres. near the beginning of each command description is a command access section that lists the specific ways you can start that command. status bar. 3D Creates three-dimensional polygon mesh objects 3D creates three-dimensional polygon mesh objects in common geometric shapes. shaded.” In this Command Reference. For a list of the aliases that correspond to each command. Enter the command name or command alias at the Command prompt and press ENTER or SPACEBAR . cones. the resulting objects are surfaces that can be hidden. and pyramids. see “Command Aliases. toolbar. Draw menu: Surfaces ➤ 3D Surfaces Command line: 3d Enter an option [Box/Cone/DIsh/DOme/Mesh/Pyramid/Sphere/Torus/Wedge]: Box Creates a 3D box polygon mesh. When you use 3D to construct polygon mesh objects. or shortcut menu.

Cube Creates a cube using the length for the width and height of the box. enter an angle. the box remains orthogonal to the current X and Y axes. the new angle alone determines the rotation of the box. If you enter 0 as a reference angle.Rotation Angle Rotates the box about the first corner specified. Specify the reference angle <0>: Specify a point. After defining a reference angle. specify two points on the target object to define the new angle of rotation for the box. the box rotates the angular distance entered relative to the first corner of the box. The base point for the rotation is the first corner of the box. the box remains orthogonal to the current X and Y axes. The box rotates by the angle between the reference angle and the new angle. specify a point relative to the base point. you can rotate the box to align two specified points on the box with a point on another object. Specify rotation angle of box about the Z axis or [Reference]: Specify an angle or enter r Rotation Angle 8 | 3D Rotates the cube about the first corner of the box. If you want to align the box with another object. If the reference angle of rotation is 0. Specify the new angle: Specify a point or enter an angle To specify the new angle of rotation. The box then rotates around the first corner relative to the angle of rotation specified for the reference angle. If you enter 0. For example. The base point for the rotation is the first corner of the box. . specify a point for the reference angle to align with. or press ENTER You can define a reference angle by specifying two points or an angle from the X axis on the XY plane. If you enter 0. Reference Aligns the box with other objects in the drawing or relative to an angle you specify.

Reference Aligns the box with other objects in the drawing or relative to an angle you specify. After defining a reference angle. Specify the reference angle <0>: Specify a point. The base point for the rotation is the first corner of the box. The base point for the rotation is the first corner of the box. you can rotate the box to align two specified points on the box with a point on another object. specify a point relative to the base point. the box rotates the angular distance entered relative to the first corner point of the box. The box rotates the angular distance between the reference angle and the new angle. the new angle alone determines the rotation of the box. Specify radius for top of cone or [Diameter] <0>: Specify a distance. enter d. specify two points on the target object to define the new angle of rotation for the box. or press ENTER You can define a reference angle by specifying two points or an angle from the X axis on the XY plane. If the reference angle of rotation is 0. Specify the new angle: Specify a point or enter an angle To specify the new angle of rotation. enter an angle. If you want to align the box with another object. For example. or press ENTER 3D | 9 . If you enter 0 as a reference angle. Cone Creates a cone-shaped polygon mesh. The box then rotates around the first corner relative to the angle of rotation specified for the reference angle. specify a point for the reference angle to align with. Specify center point for base of cone: Specify a point (1) Specify radius for base of cone or [Diameter]: Specify a distance or enter d 1 Radius for Base Defines the base of the cone by its radius.

A value greater than 0 produces a truncated cone. A value greater than 0 produces a truncated cone. A value of 0 produces a cone. A value of 0 produces a cone. Specify height of cone: Specify a distance Enter number of segments for surface of cone <16>: Enter a value greater than 1 or press ENTER base radius Diameter for Top top diameter = 0 Defines the top of the cone by its diameter. A value greater than 0 produces a truncated cone. A value greater than 0 produces a truncated cone. or press ENTER Radius for Top top diameter height Defines the top of the cone by its radius. enter d.Radius for Top top radius height Defines the top of the cone by its radius. A value of 0 produces a cone. Specify height of cone: Specify a distance Enter number of segments for surface of cone <16>: Enter a value greater than 1 or press ENTER base diameter Diameter for Top Defines the top of the cone by its diameter. Specify diameter for base of cone: Specify a distance Specify radius for top of cone or [Diameter] <0>: Specify a distance. Specify diameter for top of cone <0>: Specify a distance or press ENTER Specify height of cone: Specify a distance Enter number of segments for surface of cone <16>: Enter a value greater than 1 or press ENTER Diameter for Base Defines the base of the cone by its diameter. A value of 0 produces a cone. Specify diameter for top of cone <0>: Specify a distance Specify height of cone: Specify a distance Enter number of segments for surface of cone <16>: Enter a value greater than 1 or press ENTER 10 | 3D .

Enter number of longitudinal segments for surface of dome: Enter a value greater than 1 or press ENTER Enter number of latitudinal segments for surface of dome <8>: Enter a value greater than 1 or press ENTER 3D | 11 . Specify center point of dish: Specify a point (1) Specify radius of dish or [Diameter]: Specify a distance or enter d Radius Defines the dish by its radius. Specify center point of dome: Specify a point (1) Specify radius of dome or [Diameter]: Specify a distance or enter d Radius Defines the dome by its radius. Specify diameter of dish: Specify a distance Enter number of longitudinal segments for surface of dish <16>: Enter a value greater than 1 or press ENTER Enter number of latitudinal segments for surface of dish <8>: Enter a value greater than 1 or press ENTER radius diameter 1 Dome Creates the upper half of a spherical polygon mesh. Enter number of longitudinal segments for surface of dish <16>: Enter a value greater than 1 or press ENTER Enter number of latitudinal segments for surface of dish <8>: Enter a value greater than 1 or press ENTER Diameter Defines the dish by its diameter.Dish Creates the lower half of a spherical polygon mesh.

Specify first corner point of mesh: Specify a point (1) Specify second corner point of mesh: Specify a point (2) Specify third corner point of mesh: Specify a point (3) Specify fourth corner point of mesh: Specify a point (4) Enter mesh size in the M direction: Enter a value between 2 and 256 Enter mesh size in the N direction: Enter a value between 2 and 256 1 M=6 2 Pyramid Creates a pyramid or a tetrahedron. 4 3 1 The Z value of the point specified determines the height for the pyramid’s apex. top. 2 12 Specify apex point of pyramid or [Ridge/Top]: Specify a point (5) or enter an option | 3D .Diameter Defines the dome by its diameter. The M and N directions are similar to the X and Y axes of an XY plane. Specify first corner point for base of pyramid: Specify a point (1) Specify second corner point for base of pyramid: Specify a point (2) Specify third corner point for base of pyramid: Specify a point (3) Specify fourth corner point for base of pyramid or [Tetrahedron]: Specify a point (4) or enter t apex point Fourth Corner Point 5 Defines the fourth corner point of the base of a pyramid. Specify diameter of dome: Specify a distance Enter number of longitudinal segments for surface of dome <16>: Enter a value greater than 1 or press ENTER Enter number of latitudinal segments for surface of dome <8>: Enter a value greater than 1 or press ENTER 1 radius diameter Mesh 3 4 N=8 Creates a planar mesh whose M and N sizes determine the number of lines drawn in each direction along the mesh. or ridge line.

2 Specify first ridge end point of pyramid: Specify a point (1) Specify second ridge end point of pyramid: Specify a point (2) Top Defines the top of the pyramid as a rectangle. Specify apex point of tetrahedron or [Top]: Specify a point or enter t Apex Point Defines the top of the tetrahedron as a point (apex). Specify first corner point for top of tetrahedron: Specify a point (1) Specify second corner point for top of tetrahedron: Specify a point (2) Specify third corner point for top of tetrahedron: Specify a point (3) 3D | 13 . If the top points cross. they create a self-intersecting polygon mesh.1 ridge points Apex Point Defines the top of the pyramid as a point (apex). The two endpoints must lie in the same direction as the base points to prevent a self-intersecting wireframe. Ridge Defines the top of the pyramid as a ridge line. they create a self-intersecting polygon mesh. If the top points cross. Specify first corner point for top of pyramid: Specify a point Specify second corner point for top of pyramid: Specify a point Specify third corner point for top of pyramid: Specify a point Specify fourth corner point for top of pyramid: Specify a point Tetrahedron Creates a tetrahedral polygon mesh. Top Defines the top of the tetrahedron as a triangle.

1 Specify center point of torus: Specify a point (1) Specify radius of torus or [Diameter]: Specify a distance or enter d The radius of the torus is measured from its center point to its outside edge. not to the center of the tube. 14 | 3D . Specify diameter of sphere: Specify a distance Enter number of longitudinal segments for surface of sphere <16>: Enter a value greater than 1 or press ENTER Enter number of latitudinal segments for surface of sphere <16>: Enter a value greater than 1 or press ENTER Torus Creates a toroidal polygon mesh that is parallel to the XY plane of the current UCS. 1 Specify center point of sphere: Specify a point (1) Specify radius of sphere or [Diameter]: Specify a distance or enter d Radius radius Defines the sphere by its radius.top points Sphere 3 2 1 Creates a spherical polygon mesh. Radius torus radius Defines the torus by its radius. Enter number of longitudinal segments for surface of sphere <16>: Enter a value greater than 1 or press ENTER Enter number of latitudinal segments for surface of sphere <16>: Enter a value greater than 1 or press ENTER Diameter diameter Defines the sphere by its diameter. Specify radius of tube or [Diameter]: tube radius Specify a distance or enter d The radius of the tube of the torus is measured from the center of the tube to the outside edge of the tube.

Specify diameter of tube: Specify a distance Enter number of segments around tube circumference <16>: Enter a value greater than 1 or press ENTER Enter number of segments around torus circumference <16>: Enter a value greater than 1 or press ENTER Diameter torus diameter tube diameter Defines the torus by its diameter. Specify diameter of torus: Specify a distance Specify radius of tube or [Diameter]: Specify a distance or enter d The radius of the tube of the torus is measured from the center of the tube to the outside edge of the tube. Specify diameter of tube: Specify a distance Enter number of segments around tube circumference <16>: Enter a value greater than 1 or press ENTER Enter number of segments around torus circumference <16>: Enter a value greater than 1 or press ENTER 3D | 15 . Enter number of segments around tube circumference <16>: Enter a value greater than 1 or press ENTER Enter number of segments around torus circumference <16>: Enter a value greater than 1 or press ENTER Diameter Defines the tube by its diameter.Radius Defines the tube by its radius. Radius Defines the tube by its radius. Enter number of segments around tube circumference <16>: Enter a value greater than 1 or press ENTER Enter number of segments around torus circumference <16>: Enter a value greater than 1 or press ENTER Diameter Defines the tube by its diameter.

wedge-shaped polygon mesh with a sloped face tapering along the X axis. 3DARRAY Creates a three-dimensional array Modify menu: 3D Operation ➤ 3D Array object selected Command line: 3darray Select objects: Use an object selection method The entire selection set is treated as a single element in the array. SHADEMODE provides shading and wireframe options for objects in the current viewport. and light information in the model. Specify corner point of wedge: Specify a point (1) Specify length of wedge: Specify a distance Specify width of wedge: Specify a distance Specify height of wedge: Specify a distance Specify rotation angle of wedge about the Z axis: Specify an angle height 1 length The base point for the rotation is the corner point of the wedge. If you enter 0. view. and levels (Z axis). HIDE temporarily removes lines that would be hidden by other objects. UCS controls user coordinate systems. the wedge remains orthogonal to the current UCS plane.Wedge Creates a right-angle. columns (Y axis). levels Enter type of array [Rectangular/Polar] <R>: Enter an option or press ENTER Rectangular Array columns rows 16 | 3DARRAY Copies objects in a matrix of rows (X axis). PLAN provides a convenient means of viewing the drawing from plan view. DVIEW establishes a viewpoint from anywhere in space. width See Also See “Create 3D Objects” in the User’s Guide. . An array must have at least two rows or two columns or two levels. RENDER creates a Commands realistically shaded image of a three-dimensional wireframe model using all the geometry. VPOINT sets the viewing position for a 3D visualization in the current viewport.

Enter the number of rows (—) <1>: Enter a positive value or press ENTER Enter the number of columns ( | | | ) <1>: Enter a positive value or press ENTER Enter the number of levels ( . AutoCAD prompts: Specify the distance between columns ( | | | ): Specify a distance If you specify more than one level. -=cw) <360>: Specify an angle or press ENTER 3DARRAY | 17 . AutoCAD® prompts: Specify the distance between rows (—): Specify a distance If you specify more than one column. AutoCAD prompts: Specify the distance between levels ( . ): Specify a distance Positive values generate the array along the positive X. and Z axes. Negative values generate the array along the negative X. Polar Array Copies objects about an axis of rotation. Y. ) <1>: Enter a positive value or press ENTER Specifying one row requires that more than one column be specified. Enter the number of items in the array: Enter a positive value Specify the angle to fill (+=ccw. and vice versa. Y. Specifying one level creates a two-dimensional array. If you specify more than one row. . . . and Z axes. .

MEASURE measures an object and places markers at specified intervals. right-click in the drawing area. MINSERT inserts multiple copies of a block into a single rectangular array. or Entering y or pressing ENTER rotates each array element. Commands ARRAY copies the selected objects to a rectangular or cir- cular pattern. 1 Rotate arrayed objects? [Yes/No] <Y>: press ENTER 2 Enter y or n. with which you can manipulate objects directly with the pointing device. A positive number produces a counterclockwise array rotation. and choose More ➤ Adjust Clipping Planes. Command line: 3dclip AutoCAD displays the Adjust Clipping Planes window. A negative number produces a clockwise array rotation. GROUP creates logical groups of objects. MULTIPLE causes the next command to repeat until canceled.The specified angle determines how far AutoCAD arrays the objects about the axis of rotation. System Variables GRIPS turns on grips. 18 | 3DCLIP . DIVIDE places evenly spaced point objects or blocks along the length or perimeter of a selected object. COPY duplicates objects. Each object can be independently edited. objects rotated Specify center point of array: Specify a point (1) Specify second point on axis of rotation: Specify a point (2) objects not rotated See Also See “Create an Array of Objects” in the User’s Guide. 3DCLIP Starts the interactive 3D view and opens the Adjust Clipping Planes window 3D Orbit toolbar: Shortcut menu: Start the 3DORBIT command.

you can see the clipping in the 3D Orbit view as you move the line up or down. or right-click in the Adjust Clipping Planes window and select an option from the shortcut menu. Use the Adjust Clipping Planes toolbar. you can see the clipping in the 3D Orbit view as you move the line up or down. and then choose Create Slice. If a check mark is displayed next to Back Clipping On. You can then move the front and back clipping planes as one unit. The line near the bottom of the window adjusts the front clipping plane. right-click in the Adjust Clipping Planes window. and the results are displayed in the main 3D Orbit view. Adjust the front and back clipping planes. The line near the top of the window adjusts the back clipping plane. 3DCLIP | 19 . Adjust Clipping Planes Shortcut Menu To choose any of the following options. Adjust Back Clipping Adjusts only the back clipping plane. which shows you a “slice” of the objects in the 3D Orbit view. If a check mark is displayed next to Front Clipping On. Adjust Front Clipping Adjusts only the front clipping plane. You set the clipping planes in the Adjust Clipping Planes window. Create Slice Causes the back and front clipping planes to move together.Adjust Clipping Planes Window The Adjust Clipping Planes window displays objects rotated at a 90-degree angle from the current 3D Orbit view.

As you rotate the view. Choose this option again to turn the back clipping plane off and remove the check mark. and ensure that the Front Clipping On and Back Clipping On options aren’t checked. and you can see the results of moving the line that adjusts the front clipping plane. Close the Adjust Clipping Planes window by clicking the Close button in the upper-right corner of the window. 20 | 3DCONFIG . Choose the option that you want to turn off. and you can see the results of moving the line that adjusts the back clipping plane. You can rotate the view in 3DORBIT and still see the effect of the clipping planes. A check mark indicates that the back clipping plane is on. Choose this option again to turn the front clipping plane off and remove the check mark. To turn clipping planes off. Right-click in the Adjust Clipping Planes window. Or. A check mark in front of Front Clipping On or Back Clipping On indicates that the clipping plane is on. You will stay in the 3DCONFIG command until you enter eXit or press ESC.Front Clipping On Turns the front clipping plane on or off. different portions of the objects are clipped as they pass in and out of the clipping planes. Closing the Adjust Clipping Planes window does not turn the clipping planes off. the following prompt is displayed on the command line: Enter option: [Adaptive degradation/Dynamic tessellation/Render options/ Geometry/acceLeration/eXit] <Adaptive degradation>: Enter the configuration you want to change or press ENTER to change adaptive degradation settings. 3DCONFIG Provides a command-line interface to the 3D graphics system’s configuration settings If you enter 3dconfig at the Command prompt. Back Clipping On Turns the back clipping plane on or off. See Also See “Adjust Clipping Planes (3D Orbit)” in the User’s Guide. choose More ➤ Adjust Clipping Planes from the shortcut menu. A check mark indicates that the front clipping plane is on. right-click in the drawing area and choose More from the shortcut menu.

then no degradation will occur. You can turn on one or more than one of the available options. Bounding Box Specifies that the display can change to a bounding box. A box is displayed in place of each object in your view. you can specify the type. if a large drawing is currently Gouraud shaded. you can select Wireframe to allow the drawing to degrade to a wireframe representation of the view. 3DCONFIG | 21 . If more than one option is turned on. This uses less of the system resources and allows the drawing to move at a faster speed. If no type is specified. For example. The drawing degrades to maintain the specified speed. Current display options: Wireframe Bounding Box Enter option [Flat shaded/Wireframe/Bounding box/Maintain speed fps/eXit] <Flat shaded>: Specify the type of adaptive degradation you want to use Configure: Flat shaded Enter mode [ON/OFF] <OFF>: Specify whether you want flat-shaded display turned on or off Configure: Wireframe Enter mode [ON/OFF] <OFF>: Specify whether you want wireframe display turned on or off Configure: Bounding box Enter mode [ON/OFF] <OFF>: Specify whether you want bounding box display turned on or off Configure: Maintain speed fps Enter speed <5>: Enter a value between 1 and 60 to adjust the frame rate Flat Shaded Specifies that the display can change to flat shaded. Wireframe Specifies that the display can change to wireframe. the display changes to the most detailed option first and then degrades until it reaches the least detailed option. Configure: Adaptive Degradation Enter mode [ON/OFF] <ON>: Specify whether you want adaptive degradation turned on or off If Adaptive Degradation is turned on.Adaptive Degradation Specifies the display options to which the view can degrade to maintain the speed of the view manipulation. This choice requires the least amount of system resources. Maintain Speed FPS Specifies the display speed in frames per second.

AutoCAD draws objects using many short lines (or triangles when drawing spheres). Configure: Dynamic tessellation Enter mode [ON/OFF] <ON>: Specify whether you want dynamic tessellation turned on or off If Dynamic Tessellation is turned on. 22 | 3DCONFIG . Objects in your drawing appear smoother when you use more tessellation lines. or tessellations to cache. Number of Tessellations to Cache Configures your system according to memory and performance requirements.Dynamic Tesselation Sets the options that determine the smoothness of the objects in a drawing. Configure: Dynamic tessellation Enter option [Surface tessellation/Curve tessellation/Tessellations to cache/eXit] <Surface tessellations>: Specify the type of dynamic tessellation you want to use Configure: Surface tessellation Enter tolerance <88>: Enter a value between 0 and 100 Configure: Curve tessellation Enter tolerance <88>: Enter a value between 0 and 100 Configure: Tessellations to cache Enter number of tessellations to cache <3>: Enter a value between 1 and 10 Surface Tessellation Determines the amount of detail for surfaces in your drawing. The 3D cache always stores at least one tessellation. The lower numbers provide less detail. A cache is a special memory subsystem that stores frequently accessed information. When the number of tessellations to cache is set to 1. The lower numbers provide less detail. Curve Tessellation Determines the amount of detail for curves in your drawing. the higher numbers provide more detail but use more tessellation lines and more memory. the tessellation for all viewports is the same and may cause some objects in the drawing to be regenerated as you zoom in and out. you can specify the number of surface tessellations. curve tessellations. These lines are called tessellation lines. the higher numbers provide more detail but use more tessellation lines and more memory.

illuminates objects and attached materials by lights that were defined with the LIGHT command. displays materials for objects that have materials that were attached using the RMAT command. materials. If the object has no attached material. Enable Materials In 3D views. the default global material is used.Setting the number of tessellations to cache to 2 or more is useful when you have more than one viewport with different views. If this option is not selected. and transparency in 3D views. or if the LIGHT command has not been used for the drawing. then no materials are displayed. then the default lighting for 3D views is used. Increasing the number requires more memory. 3DCONFIG | 23 . Configure: Render options Enter mode [ON/OFF] <ON>: Specify whether you want to turn on render options Configure: Render options Enter option [Lights/Materials/eXit] <Lights>: Specify whether you want to configure lights or materials Configure: Lights Enter mode [ON/OFF] <ON>: Specify whether you want lights turned on or off Configure: Materials Enter mode [ON/OFF] <ON>: Specify whether you want materials turned on or off If Render Options is turned on. If this option is not selected. Render Options Makes settings available for enhancing the display of lights. Lights In 3D views. you can specify if you want lights and materials turned on or off. Configure: Textures Enter mode [ON/OFF] <ON>: Specify whether you want textures turned on or off Configure: Transparency Enter mode [Low/Medium/High] <Low>: Select a transparency level If Materials is turned on. textures. you can also configure textures and transparency. This includes objects in the 3D Orbit view and objects shaded using the SHADEMODE command. or if the RMAT command has not been used in the drawing.

but at the expense of redraw time. Materials must also be turned on for textures to be visible. blending improves image quality. Transparency Adjusts the transparency quality to improve image quality. Discard Back Faces Discards back faces when drawing objects. At the high-quality setting. but at the cost of drawing speed. Materials must also be turned on for transparency to be visible. Isolines for the back faces are displayed on top of the shading for the objects in 3D. Turning this option off hides the isolines for the back faces. Geometry Determines how to display isolines in 3D and whether to display back faces in 3D. Configure: Geometry Enter option [Isolines on top/Discard backfaces] <Isolines on top>: Specify an option to configure Configure: Isolines on top Enter mode [ON/OFF] <ON>: Specify whether you want isolines on top Configure: Discard backfaces Enter mode [ON/OFF] <ON>: Specify whether you want back faces to be discarded 24 | Isolines on Top Displays isolines for front and back faces in all shade modes except Hidden. At the mediumquality setting. such as spheres. 3DCONFIG . Discarding back faces enhances performance. because you cannot see the back face even when it is present. You cannot see the effect of discarding back faces on some objects. shows textures attached to objects using the RMAT and SETUV commands. The effect of discarding back faces is visible on objects such as those that don’t have a top. At the lowquality setting. a screen-door effect achieves transparency without sacrificing speed.Enable Textures In 3D views. blending and extra processing produce an image free of visual artifacts.

you can also specify whether geometry acceleration and anti-alias lines are turned on or off. Select to use the software graphics system to perform all of the drawing tasks in 3D. 3DCONFIG | 25 . Geometry Acceleration Specifies whether to use geometry acceleration.hdi Enter driver name <wopengl8.Acceleration Specifies whether you want to use software or hardware acceleration in 3D. Software Specifies software acceleration. you can select a driver from a list of available hardware-accelerated drivers found in the AutoCAD drv directory. the default driver is set to the wopengl8. If you select the Driver Name option. Geometry acceleration must be supported by your graphics card. When you select Hardware. Select to use the hardware graphics card to perform most of the drawing tasks in 3D. If you want to use a hardware driver from another vendor.hdi driver that is included with AutoCAD. it must be supported by the Heidi Graphics System. Hardware Specifies hardware acceleration.hdi>: Enter a driver name Configure: Geometry acceleration Enter mode [ON/OFF] <ON>: Specify whether you want geometry acceleration turned on or off Configure: Antialias lines Enter mode [ON/OFF] <ON>: Specify whether you want anti-alias lines turned on or off If you select Hardware. Configure: Acceleration Enter option [Hardware/Software/eXit] <Hardware>: Specify whether you want to configure hardware or software Configure: Hardware Enter option [Driver name/Geometry acceleration/Antialias lines/eXit] <Driver name>: Specify an option to configure Available drivers: wopengl8. See your vendor documentation for information on your graphics card. This speeds up the drawing time.

Click in the drawing area and drag the pointing device in any direction to start the objects moving in the direction that you’re dragging. 3DCORBIT Starts the interactive 3D view and enables you to set the objects in the 3D view into continuous motion 3D Orbit toolbar: Shortcut menu: Start the 3DORBIT command. For example. and choose More ➤ Continuous Orbit. you are drawing in single precision. With this option turned on. Command line: 3dcorbit 3DCORBIT changes the cursor to a sphere with two continuous lines encir- cling it. Release the button on the pointing device and the objects continue their orbit in the direction that you specified. 26 | 3DCORBIT . Exit Exits the 3DCONFIG command. You can change the direction of the continuous orbit by clicking and dragging again.Using geometry acceleration makes more efficient use of the graphics card. The speed of the cursor movement determines the speed at which the objects spin. Use this option only if you know that your drawing is within the singleprecision limit. you can choose Visual Aids ➤ Grid to add a grid to the view without exiting Continuous Orbit. Lines appear smoother and less gradient. You can also change the display of the continuous orbit by right-clicking in the drawing area and choosing an option from the shortcut menu. right-click in the drawing area. See Also See “Use 3D Orbit Commands” in the User’s Guide. Anti-alias Lines Specifies using anti-aliasing lines.

Clicking and dragging the cursor vertically toward the top of the screen moves the camera closer to the objects. making them appear smaller. 3D Orbit toolbar: Shortcut menu: Start the 3DORBIT command. the 3D face cannot be extruded. and choose More ➤ Adjust Distance. 3DFACE creates a surface that is not filled in. Command line: 3ddistance 3DDISTANCE changes the cursor to a line with one arrow pointing up and one pointing down. Clicking and dragging the cursor vertically toward the bottom of the screen moves the camera away from the objects. Also.3DDISTANCE Starts the interactive 3D view and makes objects appear closer or farther away 3DDISTANCE simulates the effect of moving the camera closer to the objects or farther away. See Also See “Specify 3D Views Interactively (3D Orbit)” in the User’s Guide. 3DDISTANCE does not exaggerate the per- spective with which you view the objects or make them appear distorted. 3DFACE Creates a three-dimensional face 3DFACE creates a three. SOLID creates a filled-in surface. 3DFACE differs from SOLID. making them appear larger. You can specify different Z coordinate values for each corner point of a 3D face.or four-sided surface that is parallel to the current user coordinate system (UCS) and cannot use different Z coordinate values for each corner point.or four-sided surface anywhere in 3D space. right-click in the drawing area. Surfaces toolbar: Draw menu: Surfaces ➤ 3D Face Command line: 3dface 3DDISTANCE | 27 . but if you do. which creates a three. Unlike 3DZOOM.

Specify first point or [Invisible]: Specify a point (1) or enter i First Point Defines the start point for the 3D surface. Such a face is a phantom. XYZ filters. The invisible specification must precede any object snap modes. enter i. or coordinate input for that edge. it does not appear in wireframe presentations but can hide material in line drawings. 3D faces do appear in shaded renderings. . You can create a 3D face in which all edges are invisible. When you finish entering points. After entering the first point. visible edges invisible edges Specify second point or [Invisible]: Specify a point (2) or enter i Specify third point or [Invisible] <exit>: Specify a point (3). enter the remaining points in a natural clockwise or counterclockwise order to create a normal 3D face. allowing for accurate modeling of objects with holes. Invisible Controls which edges of a 3D face are visible. press ENTER . or press 5 6 4 ENTER Specify fourth point or [Invisible] <create three-sided face>: Specify a point (4). See Also Commands 28 | 3DFACE HIDE eliminates hidden lines in a wireframe. You can combine 3D faces to model complex 3D surfaces. PFACE creates a single polygon mesh containing many faces. Entering i or invisible before the first point of an edge makes the edge invisible. If you locate all four points on the same plane. When you shade or render the object. AutoCAD creates a planar face that is similar to a region object. Specify points 5 and 6 at these repeating prompts. enter i. or press ENTER 3 1 2 AutoCAD repeats the Third Point and Fourth Point prompts until you press ENTER . planar faces are filled.

System Variables SPLFRAME controls the display of invisible edges in faces. 3DMESH Creates a free-form polygon mesh Surfaces toolbar: Draw menu: Surfaces ➤ 3D mesh Command line: 3dmesh Enter size of mesh in M direction: Enter a value between 2 and 256 Enter size of mesh in N direction: Enter a value between 2 and 256 N Note 3DMESH is designed primarily for programmers. closed mesh 3DMESH | 29 . the size of which is determined by M and N size values. 0): Enter a 2D or 3D coordinate AutoCAD defines the location of each vertex in the mesh by m and n. Specify location for vertex (0. See Also See “Construct Meshes for Smooth Shading” in the User’s Guide. You must supply the coordinate locations for each vertex in row m before specifying vertices in row m + 1.0). AutoCAD defines a polygon mesh by a matrix. Other users should use M the 3D command. You can close a mesh with PEDIT. open mesh 3DMESH polygon meshes are always open in both M and N directions. Defining vertices begins with vertex (0. PROPERTIES and EDGE change the visibility of edges. M × N equals the number of vertices that you must specify.SOLID draws a solid-filled area. The M and N orientation of a mesh depends on the position of its vertices. Vertices may be any distance from each other. the row and column indices of the vertex.

the target of the view stays stationary and the camera location. a shaded 3D UCS icon representing the current UCS appears in the 3D Orbit view. is the target point. from the Tools menu. or fits a smooth surface to mesh vertices. RULESURF. 3DORBIT Controls the interactive viewing of objects in 3D 3DORBIT enables you to manipulate the view of 3D objects by clicking and dragging your pointing device. not the center of the objects you’re viewing. 3D creates three-dimensional polygon mesh objects. distant. and spot lights defined with the LIGHT command in 3D Orbit view. PROPERTIES edits edge visibility. which is a circle divided into four quadrants by smaller circles. To turn on lights. View menu: 3D Orbit Command line: 3dorbit. Gouraud Shaded. PEDIT opens and closes a mesh. Flat Shaded Edges On. PFACE creates a general polygon mesh called a polyface mesh. If the user coordinate system (UCS) icon is on. The center of the arcball. You can view your entire drawing or select one or more objects before starting the command. 30 | 3DORBIT . or point of view. you must set SHADEMODE to Flat Shaded. You can display ambient. SURFTYPE controls the type of surface fitted by the Smooth option of the PEDIT command.Commands EDGESURF. Viewing the entire drawing may degrade the video display. choose Options. The 3D Orbit view displays an arcball. moves around the target. REVSURF. choose the System tab. The Wireframe and Hidden SHADEMODE options do not display lights. point. System Variables SURFU and SURFV control the accuracy of surface approximation in the M and N direction when you use surface fitting. Note You cannot edit objects while the 3DORBIT command is active. To display these lights. and TABSURF create polygon meshes. choose Properties. moves selected vertices of a mesh. In the Options dialog box. 3do 3DORBIT activates a 3D view in the current viewport. When 3DORBIT is active. On the System tab under Current 3D Graphics Display. or Gouraud Shaded Edges On.

If you move the cursor back outside the arcball. If you click and drag in the drawing area you can move freely around the objects. If you drag the cursor into the arcball it changes to a sphere encircled by two lines and the view moves freely. you can access additional 3DORBIT options from a shortcut menu by right-clicking in the drawing area. Cursor Icons View rotation is determined by the placement and appearance of the cursor as follows: Sphere Encircled by Two Lines When you move the cursor inside the arcball. it becomes a circular arrow. Horizontal Ellipse When you move the cursor over one of the small circles on the left or right side of the arcball. Circular Arrow When you move the cursor outside the arcball. perpendicular to the screen. Vertical Ellipse When you move the cursor over one of the small circles on the top or bottom of the arcball. indicating the direction in which the view rotates. You can drag horizontally. This is called a roll. you revert to a roll. See “3DOrbit Shortcut Menu” on page 32. It works as if your cursor were grabbing a sphere surrounding the objects and dragging it around the target point. Clicking and dragging from either of these points rotates the view around the vertical or Y axis through the middle of the arcball. and diagonally using this method. it becomes a horizontal ellipse.Moving your cursor over different parts of the arcball changes the cursor icon. it changes to a small sphere encircled by two lines. vertically. Clicking outside the arcball and dragging the cursor around the arcball causes the view to move around an axis that extends through the center of the arcball. 3DORBIT | 31 . it becomes a vertical ellipse. or choosing buttons on the 3D Orbit toolbar. While the command is active. Clicking and dragging from either of these points rotates the view around the horizontal or X axis through the middle of the arcball.

See 3DCORBIT. the drawing is zoomed in and focused on the area you selected. such as Zoom. Zoom Simulates the effect of a camera’s zoom lens. cars. Zoom Window Changes the cursor to a window icon so you can select a specific area that you want the zoom to focus on. and maps. See 3DPAN. Orbit Maintains Z Keeps the Z axis in its current orientation when dragging horizontally within the arcball circle. Swivel Camera Changes the cursor to an arched arrow and simulates the effect of turning the camera.3DOrbit Shortcut Menu When the 3DORBIT command is active. Continuous Orbit Changes the cursor to a sphere with two continuous lines encircling it and enables you to set the objects into continuous motion. you can change the view using one or more of the options on the 3D Orbit shortcut menu. This setting is saved with the user profile. When the cursor changes. 3DORBIT . To access the 3D Orbit shortcut menu. See 3DDISTANCE. More Accesses one of the following view options: 32 | Adjust Distance Simulates the effect of moving the camera closer to the object or farther away. See 3DSWIVEL. Pan. click and drag the cursor to draw a window around the area you want to select. use this option to keep the object from tumbling end-over-end. or when dragging from the small circles on the left or right side of the arcball. When using 3D Orbit. See 3DZOOM. This option is useful for changing the view of such drawings as buildings. Zoom Extents Centers the view and sizes it to display all objects. Orbit Returns the view to Orbit mode after use of the other menu commands. Pan Moves objects in the view horizontally and vertically. When you release the pick button. or Continuous Orbit. right-click in the 3D Orbit view.

less smooth appearance. Parallel Displays objects so that two parallel lines in a drawing never converge at a single point. Adjust Clipping Planes Opens the Adjust Clipping Planes window. Objects appear to recede into the distance. A check mark displayed in front of an option indicates that the option is selected. 3DORBIT | 33 . Shading Modes Provides methods for shading objects. This gives the objects a faceted. A check mark in front of this option indicates that the front clipping plane is on and you can see the results of moving the line that adjusts the front clipping plane. The shapes are somewhat distorted when the object is very close. and parts of the objects appear larger and closer to you. Back Clipping On Turns the back clipping plane on or off. This view correlates more closely to what your eye sees. Wireframe Displays the objects in the 3D Orbit view using lines and curves to represent boundaries. See 3DCLIP. Front Clipping On Turns the front clipping plane on or off. Flat Shaded Shades the objects in the 3D Orbit view between the polygon faces. Projection Provides the projection options. The shapes in your drawing always remain the same and do not appear distorted when they are closer. A check mark in front of this option indicates that the back clipping plane is on and you can see the results of moving the line that adjusts the back clipping plane. Perspective Displays objects in perspective so that all parallel lines converge at one point. This feature is turned on by default.Orbit Uses AutoTarget Keeps the target point on the objects you are viewing rather than on the center of the viewport. See 3DCLIP. See 3DCLIP. Hidden Displays the objects in the 3D Orbit view as wireframes with the lines representing the back faces hidden.

Gouraud Shaded Shades the objects in the 3D Orbit view and smooths the edges between polygon faces. 34 | 3DORBIT . Y. and Z axes. Ten horizontal lines and ten vertical lines are drawn between the major lines. Flat Shaded. Choose a view from the list to change the current view of your model. Gouraud Shaded. which is stored in the GRIDUNIT system variable. Grid Displays a two-dimensional array of lines similar to graph paper. and SW Isometric. The X axis is red. Edges On Combines the Gouraud Shaded and Wireframe options. you can use the GRID command to set system variables that control the grid display. This gives the objects a smoother. more realistic appearance. The objects are Gouraud Shaded with the wireframe showing. The number of major grid lines corresponds to the value you set using the Grid Spacing option of the GRID command. Preset Views Displays a list of predefined views such as Top. The objects are flat shaded with the wireframe showing. UCS Icon Displays a shaded 3D UCS icon. and the Z axis is blue. or Z. This grid is oriented along the X and Y axes. Compass Draws a 3D sphere within the arcball composed of three lines representing the X. Reset View Resets the view back to the view that was current when you first started 3DORBIT. See Also See “Overview of 3D Orbit” in the User’s Guide. Each axis is labeled X. Y. Visual Aids Provides aids to visualizing the objects. the Y axis is green. Before starting 3DORBIT. Bottom. Edges On Combines the Flat Shaded and Wireframe options.

3DORBITCTR Sets the center of rotation in 3D Orbit view 3DORBITCTR starts 3D Orbit view and uses a center of rotation that you specify with your pointing device. horizontally. You can drag the view vertically. Command line: 3dorbitctr 3DPAN Starts the interactive 3D view and enables you to drag the view horizontally and vertically 3D Orbit toolbar: Shortcut menu: Start the 3DORBIT command. See Also See “Use 3D Orbit Commands” in the User’s Guide. 3DORBITCTR | 35 . or diagonally. Viewing the entire drawing may degrade video performance. right-click in the drawing area. or select one or more objects before entering 3DPAN. the view moves in the direction that you drag. You can view your entire drawing. 3DORBITCTR ignores the specified point and uses the default center of rotation. 3DORBITCTR overrides the AutoTarget feature of the 3DORBIT command. When you click and drag the cursor. and choose Pan. Command line: 3dpan 3DPAN changes the cursor to a hand cursor. If you specify a point outside the current view.

lights. 3DSIN cannot import 3D Studio procedural materials or smoothing groups. 3D Studio lights are converted to the nearest AutoCAD equivalent. Imported objects are assigned an AutoCAD color as close as possible to the object’s 3D Studio color. including meshes. To be closed. and cameras. Undo Deletes the last line created. Close Draws a closing line from the endpoint back to the first point. Insert menu: 3D Studio 36 | 3DPOLY . SPLINE creates an ACIS-based quadratic or cubic spline curve. and then ends the command. If the name of any 3D Studio object conflicts with a name already in the AutoCAD drawing. the 3D Studio name is assigned a sequence number to resolve the conflict. 3DSIN Imports a 3D Studio (3DS) file 3DSIN reads 3D Studio® geometry and rendering data (3DS files). You can continue drawing from the previous point. Omni lights become point lights. The name might be truncated to resolve the conflict. mapping. See Also Commands PEDIT edits polylines and 3D polygon meshes. a 3D polyline must contain at least two lines. materials.3DPOLY Creates a polyline of line segments in 3D space new point Draw menu: 3D Polyline previous point Command line: 3dpoly Specify start point of polyline: Specify a point (1) Specify endpoint of line or [Undo]: Specify a point or enter an option Specify endpoint of line or [Undo]: Specify a point or enter an option Specify endpoint of line or [Close/Undo]: Specify a point or enter an option closing segment Endpoint of Line Draws a straight line from the previous point to the specified new point. The prompt is repeated until you press ENTER to end the command. Ambient light loses its color. Spotlights become AutoCAD spotlights. 3D Studio cameras become AutoCAD named views.

3D Studio File Import Options Dialog Box Lists available and selected 3D objects. 3DSIN | 37 . Selected Objects Displays the selected 3D Studio objects to import. Object Name and Type Displays the type and assigned name of each object. Add All Adds all of the objects in the Available Objects list to the Selected Objects list.Command line: 3dsin AutoCAD displays the 3D Studio File Import dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box). saves 3D objects to layers. After you choose a file to import. Add Adds the objects currently selected in the Available Objects list to the Selected Objects list. Available Objects Displays the names of all objects in the 3D Studio file. You can select up to 70 objects. and handles objects that use multiple materials. Object Name and Type Displays the type and assigned name of each object. AutoCAD displays the 3D Studio File Import Options dialog box.

By Object Creates a layer for each object in the 3D Studio file and places the object on that layer. Remove All Removes all objects from the Selected Objects list and returns them to the Available Objects list. Multiple Material Objects 3D Studio assigns materials by face. Single Layer Creates a single layer called AVLAYER and places all objects on that layer. or object. Always Prompt Displays the Material Assignment Alert dialog box for each object with multiple materials. AutoCAD places each 3D Studio object on the layer corresponding to its color. AutoCAD must find a way to handle the assignment. The name of the layer is the same as the name of the object. The options you select determine how 3DSIN handles the assignment. . where nn is the 3D Studio color index. The name of the layer is the same as the name of the material. By Material Creates a layer for each material in the 3D Studio file and places objects to which that material is attached on that layer. one for each material. By Object Color Creates a layer for each object color in the 3D Studio file. When AutoCAD encounters a 3D Studio object assigned multiple materials. This preserves the material assignments that were made in the 3D Studio file. The options are as follows: Split Object by Materials 38 | 3DSIN Splits the object into multiple objects. If the 3D Studio file contains objects with no color. The dialog box displays the name of the object. It also increases the complexity of the drawing geometry. AutoCAD assigns materials by object only. Save to Layers Controls how 3D Studio objects are assigned to layers in the AutoCAD drawing. The name of the layer is COLORnn. element.Remove Removes objects selected in the Selected Objects list and returns them to the Available Objects list. AutoCAD places these objects on a layer called COLORNONE.

3DSOUT Exports to a 3D Studio (3DS) file You can use AutoCAD geometry and rendering data with 3D Studio by converting a drawing to the 3DS file format with 3DSOUT. as necessary. This option loses all material assignment information but preserves the 3D Studio geometry. Assign First Material Assigns the first material assigned to each multiple-material object to the entire object. 3DSOUT exports only those AutoCAD objects with surface characteristics. and polyface meshes are always exported. The object reverts to the AutoCAD default material. Geometry is tessellated on export. See the 3D Studio documentation for an explanation of how the first-assigned material is determined. or choose NONE to revert to the AutoCAD default material. Split by Material Splits all objects with multiple materials into multiple objects. Select the material from the list below this option. Don’t Assign a Material Assigns no material to each multiple-material object. This preserves the material assignments that were made in the 3D Studio file.Assign First Material Assigns the first material assigned to each multiplematerial object to the entire object. 3DSOUT | 39 . AME® (Advanced Modeling Extension® ) and AutoSurf ® objects must be converted to meshes before you use 3DSOUT. Circles. one for each material. A line or an arc must have a nonzero thickness. polygon meshes. Point lights become omni lights. Select a Material Assigns one of the materials that was assigned to the object in the 3D Studio file to the entire object. A trace or a polyline must have a nonzero width or thickness. 3DSOUT converts AutoCAD named views to 3D Studio cameras and Photo Real or Photo Raytrace lights to the nearest 3D Studio equivalent. See the 3D Studio documentation for an explanation of how the firstassigned material is determined. Solids and 3D faces must have at least three unique vertices. See Also See “Work with Data in Other Formats”in the User’s Guide. Spotlights and distant lights become 3D Studio spotlights. It also increases the complexity of the drawing geometry.

Layer 40 | 3DSOUT Creates an object from the objects on each AutoCAD drawing layer. Note 3DSOUT cannot convert a selection set containing more than 65. the AutoCAD name is assigned a sequence number to resolve the conflict. The name of the new object is based on the AutoCAD layer name.535 vertices. Command line: 3dsout Select objects: Use an object selection method AutoCAD displays the 3D Studio Output File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box). .If the name of any AutoCAD object conflicts with a name already in the 3D Studio drawing. converts blocks into 3D objects. 3D Studio File Export Options Dialog Box Defines the source of 3D objects. After you enter a name for the new file. and performs smoothing and welding during the export process. AutoCAD displays the 3D Studio File Export Options dialog box. simplify the geometry using the Auto-Welding option (see “Welding” on page 41). The name may have to be truncated to accommodate the sequence number. Derive 3D Studio Objects From Specifies how to group AutoCAD objects into 3D Studio objects. If necessary.

001. AutoCAD Blocks Splits a block into its components and converts them to 3D Studio objects according to the mode set under Derive 3D Studio Objects From. If this option is cleared. The name of the new object is based on the color. You can enter any positive value up to eight characters in length.” especially “3D Studio Files. See Also See “Work with Data in Other Formats. The decimal point can be in any location. Degrees Specifies the threshold angle for smoothing. Auto-Welding Welds vertices. The default value is 0. AutoCAD Object Type Creates an object from all AutoCAD objects of the same type. AutoCAD welds the vertices into a single vertex.AutoCAD Color Index (ACI) Creates an object from the objects that share an ACI number. 3DSOUT | 41 . If this option is cleared.” in the User’s Guide. The name of the object is based on the AutoCAD object type. Commands 3DSIN imports a 3D Studio file. Override (Each Block Is One Object) Overrides the current Derive setting and converts each block into a single 3D Studio object. Threshold Specifies a distance in WCS coordinates of the AutoCAD drawing. vertices remain unchanged upon export. If the distance between two vertices is less than or equal to this value. AutoCAD assigns no smoothing to new 3D Studio objects. Auto-Smoothing Creates 3D Studio smoothing groups. If the angle between two face normals is greater than this value. Welding Simplifies the geometry and improves rendering time by welding congruent or nearby vertices into a single vertex. AutoCAD does not smooth the face normals. Smoothing Assigns 3D Studio smoothing groups based on the controls set in this area.

42 | 3DSWIVEL .3DSWIVEL Starts the interactive 3D view and simulates the effect of turning the camera 3D Orbit toolbar: Shortcut menu: Start the 3DORBIT command. Clicking and dragging the cursor vertically toward the top of the screen zooms in on the image. the objects would move down in your viewing area. the object would move to the left in your viewing area. if you were pointing a camera at an object and then turned the camera to the right. right-click in the drawing area. 3DZOOM Starts the interactive 3D view so you can zoom in and out on the view 3D Orbit toolbar: Shortcut menu: Start the 3DORBIT command. It makes objects appear closer and farther away but does not change the position of the camera. if you pointed the camera up. Command line: 3dswivel 3DSWIVEL changes the cursor to an arched arrow and simulates the effect of turning a camera on a tripod. and choose More ➤ Swivel Camera. right-click in the drawing area. Zooming in magnifies the image. Swivel simulates this motion by using the cursor as the camera’s viewfinder. Command line: 3dzoom 3DZOOM simulates the effect of a camera’s zoom lens. It may slightly distort the shape of some objects. For example. This also exaggerates the perspective with which you view the objects if you’re using perspective projection. making the objects appear larger or closer. This command changes the target of the view. and choose Zoom. Zoom changes the cursor to a magnifying glass with plus (+) and minus (–) signs. Clicking and dragging the cursor vertically toward the bottom of the screen zooms out and makes the object appear smaller or farther away. Or.

AutoCAD reads the model stored in the ACIS file format and creates a body object. Commands ACISOUT exports AutoCAD solid objects to an ACIS file. ABOUT | 43 . ACISIN Imports an ACIS file ACIS (a solid modeler produced by Spatial Technology. Product information includes the version number and service pack. AMECONVERT converts Advanced Modeling Extension (AME) solid models to AutoCAD solid objects. or region in the AutoCAD drawing. See Also See “Overview of Object Linking and Embedding” in the User’s Guide. AutoCAD imports the SAT (ASCII) ACIS file into your AutoCAD drawing. Select the file to import in the File Name list. license type and expiration date. solid.ABOUT Displays information about AutoCAD Help menu: About Command line: about (or 'about for transparent use) AutoCAD® displays copyright information and product information.) provides a solid modeling file format that AutoCAD can use. Insert menu: ACIS File Command line: acisin AutoCAD displays the Select ACIS File dialog box. and the text of the license agreement. You can save the product information as a text file. serial number. Inc.

EXPORT saves objects to other file formats. See Also Commands 44 | ACISOUT ADCENTER opens DesignCenter. An AutoCAD solid. ADCCLOSE Closes DesignCenter Command line: adcclose Closes the DesignCenter™ window. AMECONVERT converts Advanced Modeling Extension (AME) solid models to AutoCAD solid objects. to export SAT files to AutoCAD Release 14 set ACISOUTVER to 16. you need to set the ACISOUTVER system variable to the ACIS version used for that release. Note When exchanging SAT files to earlier versions of AutoCAD. or a region can be stored as an SAT (ASCII) file. Enter the name of the file you want to create. AutoCAD exports the selected objects to an ASCII file. See Also See “ACIS Files” in the User’s Guide. For example.ACISOUT Exports AutoCAD solid objects to an ACIS file ACIS provides a solid modeling file format that AutoCAD can use to store solid objects. a body. . Command line: acisout Select objects: Use an object selection method AutoCAD ignores selected objects that are not solids or regions and displays the Create ACIS File dialog box. Commands ACISIN imports an ACIS file.

When you click the Folders tab or the Open Drawings tab. the following two panes are displayed from which you can manage drawing content: ■ ■ Content area (right pane) Tree view (left pane) content area tree view content preview content description ADCENTER | 45 . and external references (xrefs).ADCENTER Manages and inserts content such as blocks. and inserts content. and hatch patterns Standard toolbar: Tools menu: DesignCenter Command line: adcenter DesignCenter™ is displayed. DesignCenter Window Browses. hatches. and previews content. xrefs. which includes blocks. finds. Use the buttons in the toolbar at the top of DesignCenter for display and access options.

dimension styles. 46 | ADCENTER . xrefs. Back Returns to the most recent location in the history list. disk. hatch patterns. Up Displays the contents of the container one level above the current container. and then to select content to load in the content area. layouts.Content Area (DesignCenter) Displays the content of the "container" currently selected in the tree view. or by rightclicking and choosing Insert Block. You can drag blocks and hatches from DesignCenter to tool palettes. Use Load to navigate to files on local and network drives or on the Web. Named objects include blocks. the content area typically displays the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Folders containing drawings or other files Drawings Named objects contained in drawings. computer. you can insert blocks. A container is a network. Note You can access relevant content area and tree view options on a shortcut menu by right-clicking in the tree view or the content area. such as layers. Attach Xref. or Copy. file. Reload (DC Online tab) Reloads the current page. layers. and layouts. Stop (DC Online tab) Stops the current transfer. Load Displays the Load dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box). and text styles Images or icons representing blocks or hatch patterns Web-based content Custom content developed by third-party applications From the content area. Forward Returns to the next later location in the history list. dimension styles. by double-clicking. folder. You can drag or right-click to add other content to drawings. Depending on the container selected in tree view. or attach external references in a drawing by dragging. or web address (URL) containing information accessible by DesignCenter.

Search also displays custom content saved on your desktop. the description is displayed below it. the home folder is set to . You can add items to Favorites either by right-clicking the content area or right-clicking an item in the tree view. the Preview area is empty. If there is no description saved with the selected item. The Favorites folder contains shortcuts to items you access often.\Sample\DesignCenter. If a preview image is also displayed. When the tree view is hidden. To delete an item from Favorites. Description Displays and hides a text description of the selected item in a pane below the content area. Note AutoCAD automatically adds the DesignCenter folder to Favorites. This folder contains drawings with discipline-specific blocks that you can insert in drawings. Preview Displays and hides a preview of the selected item in a pane below the content area. and nongraphical objects within drawings. On installation. the Description area is empty. and then clicking Add to Favorites. Hide the tree view if you need more space in your drawing area.. ADCENTER | 47 . blocks. where you can specify search criteria to locate drawings. Tree View Toggle Displays and hides the tree view. Change the home folder using the shortcut menu in the tree view.Search Displays the Search dialog box (see page 49). The Tree View Toggle button is not available while you're using the History list in the tree view.. Favorites Displays the contents of the Favorites folder in the content area. you can use the content area to navigate to containers and to load content. use the Organize Favorites option on the shortcut menu and then use the Refresh option on the shortcut menu. Home Returns DesignCenter to your home folder. If there is no preview image saved with the selected item.

You can sort the items by name. directory location. Detail View Displays additional information about the loaded content. Folders Displays the hierarchy of files and folders on your computer and network drives. Open Drawings 48 | ADCENTER Displays all drawings currently open in the AutoCAD session. including My Computer and Network Neighborhood. type. These drawings are called symbol library drawings. Tree View (DesignCenter) Displays the hierarchy of files and folders on your computer and network drives. Small Icon Displays the names of the loaded content in small icon format. Note The sample\designcenter folder contains drawings containing disciplinespecific blocks that you can insert in drawings. and a history of the last locations you accessed. The default view varies for the type of content currently loaded in the content area. size. Right-click the content area background and click Refresh on the shortcut menu. List View Displays the names of the loaded content in a list. You can select a view from the Views list or click the Views button repeatedly to cycle through the display formats. Use the buttons in the toolbar at the top of DesignCenter to access tree view options. Select an item in the tree view to display its contents in the content area. including drawings that are minimized. a list of open drawings. See ADCNAVIGATE. depending on the type of content that is loaded in the content area. Refresh (Shortcut Menu Only) Refreshes the display in the content area to reflect any changes you have made. or network path in the DesignCenter tree view. . You can use ADCNAVIGATE to navigate to a specific file name. custom content.Views Provides different display formats for the content that is loaded in the content area. Large Icon Displays the names of the loaded content in large icon format. and other properties.

In Specifies a search path name. manufacturer sites. With the history displayed. ADCENTER | 49 . right-click a file to display information about the file or to delete the file from the History list. and additional content libraries. The Date Modified and Advanced tabs are displayed only when the Drawings option is selected in Look For. To enter multiple paths. it displays on the right-side and can be downloaded into your drawing. separate them with semicolons. When you establish a web connection. DC Online Accesses the DesignCenter Online web page. The content type you specify determines which tabs are displayed in the Search dialog box and the search fields it provides. The left side displays folders containing symbol libraries. Search Dialog Box Searches for content such as drawings.History Displays a list of the files that you opened most recently in DesignCenter. two panes are viewed on the Welcome page. Use Browse to select a path from a tree view list. Look For Specifies the type of content to search for. When a symbol is selected. hatch patterns. and blocks.

Use the following wild-card characters to broaden your search: ■ ■ * (Asterisk): Matches any string and can be used anywhere in the search string. New Search Clears the Search For the Name box and places the cursor in the box. Double-click an item to load it into DesignCenter. Search for the Word(s) Specifies the text string to look for in the field you specify. 3BC. You can use wild-card characters to extend or limit your search patterns. Search Now Starts the search based on criteria you specify. ? (Question mark): Matches any single character. select All Fields. for example. the Custom Content tab. in which you can specify the drives and folders to search. For drawings. all fields other than File Name are derived from the information entered in the Drawing Properties dialog box (DWGPROPS). Stop Stops the search and displays the accumulated results in the Search Results panel. Note Custom content developed by third-party applications may not provide fields for searches using the Search dialog box. Search Results Panel Displays the results of the search in resizable columns. ?BC matches ABC. Search Tabs (Search Dialog Box) Displays search fields relevant to the type of content specified in the Look For list.Browse Displays a tree view in the Browse for Folder dialog box. and so on. The name of the tab reflects the content type. This option is available on the Drawings tab and. 50 | ADCENTER . when available. To search all the fields. This option is available on the Drawings tab and the Custom Content tab. In the Field(s) Specifies the property fields to search. Search Subfolders Includes subfolders in the search path.

All Files Finds all the files that match the criteria you specify on other tabs. Date Modified Tab (Search Dialog Box) Finds content that was created or modified during a certain time period. Containing Text Specifies the text you want to search for. During the Previous Month(s) Searches for files created or modified within the number of months you specify. such as a manufacturer's catalog number. regardless of creation date or date modified. Find All Files Created or Modified Finds files created or modified during a specific time period. Size Is Specifies a minimum or maximum file size. This is the default setting. xref. block. Select At Least or At Most. or other content type that you want to find. The search locates files that match the criteria you specify on this and other tabs. layer. For example. This option is available on all tabs except Drawings and Custom Content. and enter a value in KB. this tab is available only when you select Drawings in Look For. Containing Specifies the type of text in a drawing that you want to search for. you can search for text contained within a block attribute. ADCENTER | 51 . During the Previous Day(s) Searches for files created or modified within the number of days you specify. Advanced Tab (Search Dialog Box) Finds content within drawings.Search for the Name Specifies the name of the drawing. Between Searches for files created or modified between the dates you specify.

52 | ADCNAVIGATE . ADCNAVIGATE Loads a specified DesignCenter drawing file. INSUNITSDEFSOURCE sets the units value for the source content. or network path Command line: adcnavigate Enter pathname <current>: The path or drawing file name you specify is loaded in the tree view of the DesignCenter™ Folders tab. OPTIONS sets the INSUNITSDEFSOURCE and INSUNITSDEFTARGET system variables. Commands ADCCLOSE closes DesignCenter on the command line. BLOCK creates blocks and saves them with preview images and text descriptions. folder. ADCNAVIGATE supports remote domains or workgroups if you have the target domain or workgroup mapped to a drive letter. At the prompt. INSUNITSDEFTARGET sets the units value for the target drawing. See Also Commands ADCCLOSE closes DesignCenter.See Also See “DesignCenter” in the User’s Guide. ADCENTER opens DesignCenter. and loads the path or drawing file name that you specified. directory location. switches to the Folder tab. you can enter a path in any of the following formats: ■ ■ ■ Folder path: c:\project files\electrical Folder path and a file name: c:\project files\electrical\circuit2. System Variables INSUNITS specifies the Autoscale setting AutoCAD uses when inserting blocks into drawings. or network path you specify.dwg UNC network path: \\server1\campus_project AutoCAD automatically displays DesignCenter. ADCNAVIGATE directs the Desktop tree view in Design- Center to the file name.

Add source points to the objects you want to align. or scale objects into alignment with other objects.ALIGN Aligns objects with other objects in 2D and 3D Use ALIGN to move. and add destination points to the objects to which you want the source objects to align. 1 2 two points specified ALIGN Using Two Pairs of Points result Specify first source point: Specify a point (1) Specify first destination point: Specify a point (2) Specify second source point: Specify a point (3) Specify second destination point: Specify a point (4) Specify third source point: Press ENTER Scale objects based on alignment points [Yes/No] <No>: Enter y or press ENTER ALIGN | 53 . Modify menu: 3D Operation ➤ Align Command line: align Select objects: Select the objects you want to align and press ENTER ALIGN Using One Pair of Points Specify first source point: Specify a point (1) Specify first destination point: Specify a point (2) Specify second source point: Press ENTER When you select only one source point and destination point pair. rotate. the selected objects move in 2D or 3D from the source point (1) to the destination point (2). You can add up to three pairs of source and destination points to align an object.

The second set of points defines the angle of rotation (3. Scaling is available only when you are aligning objects using two point pairs. rotate. you can move. and scale the selected objects in 2D or 3D to align with other objects. Note If you use two source and destination points to perform a 3D alignment on nonperpendicular working planes. AutoCAD uses the distance between the first and second destination points (2. After you enter the second set of points. ALIGN Using Three Pairs of Points 54 | ALIGN Specify first source point: Specify a point (1) Specify first destination point: Specify a point (2) Specify second source point: Specify a point (3) Specify second destination point: Specify a point (4) Specify third source point: Specify a point (5) Specify third destination point: Specify a point (6) . 2). AutoCAD prompts you to scale the object. 4).1 3 2 4 objects selected four points specified result When you select two point pairs. The first set of source and destination points defines the base point for the alignment (1. 4) as the reference length to which the object is scaled. you get unpredictable results.

3 5 1 6 2 4 objects selected six points specified result When you select three point pairs. This difference is noticeable where the previous version of the AutoCAD solid modeler identified the surfaces of two different shapes as so close as to be considered in the same AMECONVERT | 55 . System Variables GRIPS turns on grips. The selected object is rotated (1 and 3) so that it aligns with the destination object (2 and 4). ROTATE moves objects about a base point. See Also Commands MOVE displaces objects a specified distance in a specified direction. AME models may look slightly different after conversion. The selected object is then rotated again (3 and 5) so that it aligns with the destination object (4 and 6).1 regions or solids. AutoCAD ignores all other objects. with which you can manipulate objects directly using the pointing device. you can move and rotate the selected objects in 3D to align with other objects. AMECONVERT Converts AME solid models to AutoCAD solid objects Command line: ameconvert Select objects: Use an object selection method The objects you select must be Advanced Modeling Extension (AME) Release 2 or 2. Because of increased accuracy in the new AutoCAD solid modeler. The selected objects move from the source point (1) to the destination point (2).

not the pickbox displayed at the Select Objects prompt. with its much finer approximation capability. APERTURE Controls the size of the object snap target box Command line: aperture (or 'aperture for transparent use) Object snap target height (1–50 pixels) <current>: Enter a value (1–50) or press ENTER Object snap applies only to objects inside or crossing the object snap target box. The APBOX system variable controls whether the object snap target box is displayed. System Variables 56 | APERTURE APERTURE controls the object snap target box. See Also Commands OSNAP sets running object snap modes and changes the target box size. leaving the original shape unaltered. You can also change this setting in the Options dialog box. interprets what was once a through-hole as being slightly less wide than the solid. OPTIONS (the Selection tab) sets object selection modes and changes the pickbox size. target box target box APERTURE controls the object snap target box. This phenomenon is most apparent with aligned features such as fillets. Holes might become blind holes when the new modeler. the larger the target box. Likewise.plane. Drafting tab. . Typically. and through-holes. drawing fillets or chamfers slightly above the original surface creates an uneven transition between the solid and the fillet or chamfer. The higher the number. updated fillets or chamfers can occasionally be placed slightly below the surface. The number of pixels you enter using APERTURE controls the size of the object snap box. PICKBOX controls the object selection pickbox size. The new AutoCAD solid modeler’s finer tolerance may interpret these surfaces as being slightly offset. chamfers. not the pickbox displayed at the Select Objects prompt. the length of the remaining solid material is the difference between the tolerance of the previous modeler and that of the new modeler. creating a hole through the solid. Also. The object selection pickbox is controlled by the PICKBOX system variable.

APPLOAD | 57 .dvb) ObjectDBX™ (. unload applications. you can use APPLOAD to load applications. Tools menu: Load Application Command line: appload AutoCAD displays the Load/Unload Applications dialog box.dbx) Fast Load AutoLISP (.arx) VBA (. store a history list of applications you’ve loaded. Use the ARX command to load these applications.APPLOAD Loads and unloads applications and defines which applications to load at startup If you need to use applications that are not automatically loaded when you start AutoCAD.lsp) ObjectARX™ (. and create a start-up list of applications to be loaded each time you start AutoCAD.vlx) Some ObjectARX applications require user interaction upon loading the application and may not load properly with APPLOAD.fas) Visual LISP™ executables (. You can load applications of the following file types: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ AutoLISP® (.

and DBX applications immediately. VLX and FAS applications are queued and then loaded when you close the Load/Unload Applications dialog box. but LSP. and then load it again. You cannot reload ObjectARX applications. 58 | APPLOAD . The Load option is also available from a shortcut menu by right-clicking a file on the History List tab. Load reloads the application when applicable. If you select a file that is already loaded. Following are descriptions of the additional options provided by the Load/Unload Applications dialog box: Load Loads or reloads the applications that are currently selected in either the files list or on the History List tab. AutoCAD loads ObjectARX. In this case.Load/Unload Applications Dialog Box Loads and unloads applications and specifies applications to be loaded at start-up. you must first unload the ObjectARX application. VBA. Load is unavailable until you select a file that you can load. The options at the top of this dialog box are derived from the standard file selection dialog box (see page 621).

because these applications are unavailable once the cache for the application’s temporary location is emptied. LISP applications cannot be unloaded. the Web Browser downloads the application to a temporary location on your machine. such as Microsoft® Windows® Explorer. nor can ObjectARX applications that are not registered for unloading. Add to History Adds any applications that you load to the history list. Unload Unloads the selected applications.Loaded Applications Displays an alphabetical list (by file name) of currently loaded applications. You can also unload certain applications from this list. the dragged files are loaded but not added to the history list. If Add To History is not selected when you drag files into this list. and Remove options. LISP routines are displayed in this list only if you loaded them in the Load/Unload Applications dialog box. This is the location from which AutoCAD loads the application. If you use the AutoCAD Web Browser to load an application. See the Load. Unload is available only when you select a file that you can unload on the Loaded Applications tab. You may prefer to clear this option when loading applications with the AutoCAD Web Browser. or from any application with dragging capabilities. Files that you cannot unload are not available for selection. You can drag files into this list from the files list or from any application with dragging capabilities. you must use the Loaded Applications tab. History List Displays an alphabetical list (by file name) of applications that you previously loaded with Add To History selected. such as Windows Explorer. You can load and remove applications from this list. You can drag files into this list from the files list. as displayed in this list. Unload. See the Unload option for details. but to unload applications. APPLOAD | 59 .

or from any application with dragging capabilities such as Windows Explorer.Remove Removes the selected applications from the history list. Note that Remove does not unload the selected application. List of Applications 60 | APPLOAD Displays an alphabetical list (by file name) of the application files to load at startup. You can drag application files from the files list. Status Line Displays messages that indicate the status of loading and unloading operations. You can also add files to the Startup Suite by right-clicking an application on the History List tab and choosing Add to Startup Suite from the shortcut menu. Startup Suite Contains a list of applications that AutoCAD loads each time you start AutoCAD. You cannot add applications that you load with the AutoCAD Web Browser to the Startup Suite. Remove is available only when you select a file on the History List tab. Click the Start-up Suite icon or Contents to display the Startup Suite dialog box. Startup Suite Dialog Box Adds and removes application files from the Startup Suite. These are the applications that AutoCAD loads each time you start AutoCAD. The Remove option is also available from a shortcut menu by right-clicking an application on the History List tab. into the Startup Suite area to add them to the Startup Suite. .

The second point (2) is a point on the circumference of the arc. and provides information about ObjectARX applications.Add Displays the Add File to Startup Suite dialog box. The third point is the endpoint (3). Note If you press ENTER without specifying a point. Commands ARX loads. This creates an arc tangent to the last drawn line. unloads. Specify end point of arc: Specify a point (3) You can specify a three-point arc either clockwise or counterclockwise. ARC Creates an arc Draw toolbar: Draw menu: Arc Command line: arc Specify start point of arc or [CEnter]: Specify a point. enter ce. Remove Removes selected files from the Startup Suite. Specify second point of arc or [CEnter/ENd]: Second Point 2 3 1 Draws an arc using three specified points on the arc’s circumference. ARC | 61 . or polyline. AutoCAD uses the endpoint of the last drawn line or arc and immediately prompts you to specify the endpoint of the new arc. The first point is the start point (1). or polyline Start Point Specifies the starting point of the arc. or press ENTER to start tangent to last line. arc. See Also See “Use AutoLISP Applications” in the Customization Guide. You can use this dialog box to select files to add to the startup suite. arc.

with a specified included angle. length of chord Specify length of chord: Specify a length End Specifies the endpoint of the arc. If the angle is negative. The arc does not necessarily pass through this third point. 2 1 3 center point Specify included angle: Enter an angle in degrees or specify an angle by moving the pointing device counterclockwise 62 | ARC . Specify included angle: Specify an angle Chord Length 2 1 Draws either a minor or a major arc based on the distance of a straight line between the start point and endpoint. Specify end point of arc: Specify center point of arc or [Angle/Direction/Radius]: imaginary ray Center Point Draws an arc counterclockwise from the start point (1) to an endpoint that falls on an imaginary ray drawn from the center point (3) through the second point specified (2). If the chord length is negative. AutoCAD draws a clockwise arc. AutoCAD draws the major arc counterclockwise. included angle Angle 1 2 Draws an arc counterclockwise from the start point (1) using a center point (2) with a specified included angle. draws an arc counterclockwise from the start point (1) to an endpoint that falls on an imaginary ray drawn from the center point through the third point (3).Center Specifies the center of the circle of which the arc is a part. Specify center point of arc: Specify end point of arc or [Angle/chord Length]: End Point 3 1 2 Using the center point (2). as shown in the illustration. AutoCAD draws the minor arc counterclockwise from the start point. If the angle is negative. If the chord length is positive. Angle Draws an arc counterclockwise from the start point (1) to an endpoint (2). AutoCAD draws a clockwise arc.

AutoCAD draws the major arc. or Polyline Draws an arc tangent to the last line. arc. and ending at an endpoint (2). Specify length of chord: Tangent to Last Line. Specify tangent direction for the start point of arc: 2 Radius 1 radius Draws the minor arc counterclockwise from the start point (1) to the endpoint (2). Arc. 2 1 included angle Specify included angle: 1 2 Chord Length 2 1 length of chord Draws either a minor or a major arc based on the distance of a straight line between the start point and endpoint. AutoCAD draws a clockwise arc.Direction 2 angle 2 1 1 direction Begins the arc tangent to a specified direction. clockwise or counterclockwise. It creates any arc. major or minor. Angle Draws an arc counterclockwise from the start point (2) using a center point (1) with a specified included angle. If the angle is negative. If the chord length is negative. AutoCAD draws the major arc counterclockwise. or polyline drawn when you press ENTER at the first prompt. beginning with the start point (1). AutoCAD draws the minor arc counterclockwise from the start point. AutoCAD determines the direction from the start point. Specify center point of arc: Specify start point of arc: Specify end point of arc or [Angle/chord Length]: 3 End Point Draws an arc counterclockwise from the start point (2) to an endpoint that falls on an imaginary ray drawn from the center point (1) through a specified point (3). Specify radius of arc: Center Specifies the center of the circle of which the arc is a part. 1 Specify end point of arc: Specify a point (1) ARC | 63 . If the chord length is positive. If the radius is negative.

AutoCAD adds in that line length. polylines.See Also See “Draw Arcs” in the User’s Guide. and solids. 64 | AREA . Inquiry toolbar: Tools menu: Inquiry ➤ Area Command line: area Specify first corner point or [Object/Add/Subtract]: Specify a point (1) or enter an option First Corner Point 5 1 3 4 2 defining an area and perimeter Calculates the area and perimeter you define by specifying points. Commands ELLIPSE creates an ellipse or an elliptical arc. When calculating the perimeter. Note 2D solids (created with the SOLID command) do not have an area reported. You can calculate the area of circles. All points must lie in a plane parallel to the XY plane of the current user coordinate system (UCS). AREA Calculates the area and perimeter of objects or of defined areas Total area and perimeter are saved in the AREA and PERIMETER system variables. AutoCAD calculates the area as if a line were drawn from the last point entered to the first. If you do not close the polygon. area defined Object Calculates the area and perimeter of the selected object. Specify next corner point or press ENTER for total: Specify a point (2) Continue to specify points to define a polygon and then press ENTER to complete the definition of the perimeter. ellipses. polygons. regions. splines.

AutoCAD calculates the area as if a line were drawn from the last point entered to the first. however. When calculating the perimeter. AutoCAD returns the total area of all the areas defined by selecting points or objects since Add mode was turned on. Furthermore. open polyline selected area defined The centerline of a wide polyline is used to make area and perimeter (or length) calculations. AutoCAD calculates the area as if a line were drawn from the last point entered to the first. AREA | 65 . When calculating the perimeter. Press ENTER and AutoCAD calculates the area and perimeter. If you do not close the polygon. Add wide ployline Turns on Add mode and keeps a running balance of the total area as you continue to define areas.Select objects: If you select an open polyline. You can use the Subtract option to subtract specified areas from the total area. AutoCAD ignores that line. AutoCAD adds that line length. Specify first corner point or [Object/Subtract]: option First Corner Point 2 1 3 defined area to be added new area Specify a point (1) or enter an Calculates the area and perimeter you define by selecting points. Specify next corner point or press ENTER for total (ADD mode): Specify a point (2) Specify points to define a polygon (3). The Add option calculates the individual areas and perimeters of defined areas and objects as well as the total area of all defined areas and objects. All points must lie in a plane parallel to the XY plane of the current UCS.

(ADD mode) Select objects: AutoCAD calculates the area and perimeter. but subtracts areas and perimeters. Subtract Similar to the Add option. The centerline of a wide polyline is used to make area and perimeter calculations. Modify toolbar: Modify menu: Array Command line: array 66 | ARRAY . Furthermore. PERIMETER displays the perimeter of the object last found by AREA. ARRAY Creates multiple copies of objects in a pattern Each object in an array can be manipulated independently. MASSPROP calculates and displays the mass of selected solids. however. If you select multiple objects from which to construct the array. When calculating the perimeter. Commands BOUNDARY calculates and displays the area associated with the selected objects. AutoCAD calculates the area as if a line were drawn from the last point entered to the first. If you select an open polyline. AutoCAD returns the total area of all the areas defined by selecting points or objects since Add mode was turned on. System Variables AREA stores the sum of areas collected. AutoCAD counts the objects as one item to be copied and arrayed. LIST displays database information for the selected objects. Subtract selected area to be subtracted Turns on Subtract mode and keeps a running balance of the total area as you subtract specified areas. remaining area See Also See “Obtain Area Information” in the User’s Guide.Object Calculates the area and perimeter of the selected object. AutoCAD ignores that line.

The Array dialog box is displayed. Use the Polar Array option to create an array by copying the selected objects around a center point. Use the Rectangular Array option to create an array defined by a number of rows and columns of copies of the selected object. If you enter -array at the Command prompt. distance between rows 1 object selected distance between columns ARRAY | 67 . Rectangular Array Creates an array defined by a number of rows and columns of copies of the selected object. ARRAY displays prompts on the command line (see page 72). You can create rectangular or polar arrays by choosing the appropriate option. Array Dialog Box Creates multiple copies of objects in a pattern.

Rows Specifies the number of rows in the array. specify a negative value. To reset the limit to 200.000. the maximum number of array elements that you can generate in one command is 100. You can change the measurement conventions for angles using UNITS. If you specify a large number of rows and columns for the array. The ANGBASE and ANGDIR system variables affect the angle of arrays. By default. Column Offset Specifies the distance (in units) between columns. you must specify more than one column.000. enter (setenv "MaxArray" "200000") at the Command prompt.000. AutoCAD might take a while to create the copies. for example. Offset Distance and Direction Provides a space for you to specify the distance and direction of the array’s offset. To specify row spacing with the pointing device. enter (setenv "MaxArray" "200000") at the Command prompt. Pick Both Offsets Temporarily closes the Array dialog box so that you can use the pointing device to set the row and column spacing by specifying two diagonal corners of a rectangle. The limit is set by the MAXARRAY setting in the registry. 68 | Row Offset Specifies the distance (in units) between rows. use the Pick Both Offsets button or the Pick Column Offset button. To reset the limit to 200.000. so the rows and columns are orthogonal with respect to the X and Y drawing axes of the current UCS. AutoCAD might take a while to create the copies. If you specify a large number of rows and columns for the array. By default. the maximum number of array elements that you can generate in one command is 100. specify a negative value. Angle of Array Specifies the angle of rotation. To specify column spacing with the pointing device. This angle is normally 0. If you specify one column. Columns Specifies the number of columns in the array. To add columns to the left. The limit is set by the MAXARRAY setting in the registry. use the Pick Both Offsets button or the Pick Row Offset button. If you specify one row. ARRAY . you must specify more than one row. for example. To add rows downward.

Enter coordinate values for X and Y. AutoCAD prompts you to specify two points and uses the distance and direction between the points to specify the value in Row Offset. objects not rotated Center Point Specifies the center point of the polar array. Pick Column Offset Temporarily closes the Array dialog box so that you can use the pointing device to specify the distance between columns. The ANGBASE and ANGDIR system variables affect the angle of arrays. Pick Center Point Temporarily closes the Array dialog box so that you can use the pointing device to specify the center point in the AutoCAD drawing area. Polar Array Creates an array by copying the selected objects around a center point. AutoCAD prompts you to specify two points and uses the distance and direction between the points to specify the value in Column Offset. Pick Angle of Array Temporarily closes the Array dialog box so that you can specify the angle of rotation by entering a value or using the pointing device to specify two points. ARRAY | 69 . 1 1 2 polar array with objects rotated 2 polar array angle to fill=180. or choose Pick Center Point to use the pointing device to specify the location. You can change the measurement conventions for angles using UNITS.Pick Row Offset Temporarily closes the Array dialog box so that you can use the pointing device to specify the distance between rows.

Method Sets the method used to position objects.Method and Values Specifies the method and values used to position objects in the polar array. For example. if the method is Total Number of Items & Angle to Fill. Total Number of Items Sets the number of objects that appear in the resultant array. Angle to Fill Sets the size of the array by defining the included angle between the base points of the first and last elements in the array. Pick Angle to Fill Temporarily closes the Array dialog box so that you can define the included angle between the base points of the first and last elements in the array. Rotate Items as Copied Rotates the items in the array. This setting controls which of the Method and Value fields are available for specifying values. Angle Between Items Sets the included angle between the base points of the arrayed objects and the center of the array. A value of 0 is not permitted. A positive value specifies counterclockwise rotation. 70 | ARRAY . When you choose More. AutoCAD prompts you to select a point relative to another point in the AutoCAD drawing area. Pick Angle Between Items Temporarily closes the Array dialog box so that you can define the included angle between the base points of the arrayed objects and the center of the array. and the name of this button changes to Less. Note You can choose the Pick buttons and use the pointing device to specify the values for Angle to Fill and Angle Between Items. More/Less Turns the display of additional options in the Array dialog box on and off. The default direction value is 90. AutoCAD prompts you to select a point relative to another point in the AutoCAD drawing area. as shown in the preview area. The default value is 4. Enter a positive value. A negative value specifies clockwise rotation. The default value is 360. the related fields are available for specifying values. additional options are displayed. the Angle Between Items field is not available.

and the number of objects selected is shown below the Select Objects button. as shown in the following table. set the base point manually if you are constructing a polar array and do not want to rotate the objects. After you specify a point. line. 3D polyline. circle. You can select objects before or after the Array dialog box is displayed. press ENTER . ray. choose Select Objects. The dialog box temporarily closes. the Array dialog box is redisplayed. To construct a polar array. Select Objects Specifies the objects used to construct the array. The point used depends on the type of object. ARRAY | 71 . polyline. When you finish selecting objects. single-line text Insertion point Construction lines Midpoint Region Grip point Set to Object’s Default Uses the default base point of the object to position the arrayed object. Note To avoid unexpected results. The Array dialog box is redisplayed. Choose Pick Base Point to temporarily close the dialog box and specify a point. AutoCAD determines the distance from the array’s center point to a reference (base) point on the last object selected. Base point settings by object Object type Default base point Arc. paragraph text. clear this option. To select objects when the Array dialog box is displayed. spline Starting point Block.Object Base Point Specifies a new reference (base) point relative to the selected objects that will remain at a constant distance from the center point of the array as the objects are arrayed. rectangle First corner donut. Base Point Sets a new X and Y base point coordinate. ellipse Center point Polygon. To manually set the base point.

Note If you select multiple objects. The preview image is dynamically updated when you move to another field after changing a setting. the base point of the last selected object is used to construct the array. to be in the lower-left corner. Preview Area Shows a preview image of the array based on the current settings in the dialog box. Choose Modify to return to the Array dialog box to make changes. Preview Closes the Array dialog box and displays the array in the current drawing. distance between rows 1 object selected distance between columns Enter the number of rows (---) <1>: Enter a nonzero integer or press ENTER Enter the number of columns (|||) <1>: Enter a nonzero integer or press ENTER If you specify one row. ARRAY Command Line If you enter -array at the Command prompt. and generates the array up and to the right. AutoCAD assumes the selected object. 72 | ARRAY . ARRAY displays prompts on the command line. you must specify more than one column and vice versa. or cornerstone element. Select objects: Use an object selection method Enter the type of array [Rectangular/Polar] <current>: Enter an option or press ENTER Rectangular Creates an array defined by a number of rows and columns of copies of the selected objects.

ARRAY | 73 .The specified distance between the rows and columns includes the corresponding lengths of the object to be arrayed. specify a negative value for the distance between columns. By default. The SNAPANG system variable stores the snap rotation angle. The limit is set by the MAXARRAY setting in the registry. This angle is normally 0. objects not rotated Specify center point of array or [Base]: Specify a point or enter b to specify a new base point Center Point Creates an array defined by a center point.000. Polar Creates an array defined by specifying a center point or base point about which AutoCAD replicates the selected objects. specify a negative value for the distance between rows. If you specify a large number of rows and columns for the array.000. Specify the distance between columns (|||): To add columns to the left. the maximum number of array elements that you can generate in one command is 100. for example. AutoCAD might take a while to create the copies. Enter the distance between rows or specify unit cell (---): To add rows downward. so the rows and columns are orthogonal with respect to the X and Y drawing axes. AutoCAD constructs rectangular arrays along a baseline defined by the current snap rotation. enter (setenv "MaxArray" "200000") at the Command prompt. 1 1 2 polar array with objects rotated 2 polar array angle to fill=180. The Rotate option of the SNAP command changes the angle and creates a rotated array. AutoCAD skips the next prompt if you specify two points for the opposite corners of a rectangle. To reset the limit to 200.

If you defined the selection set by using window or crossing selection. the last object in the selection set is arbitrary. AutoCAD prompts for a positive or negative value to indicate the direction of the array: Angle between items (+=ccw. You can enter 0 for angle to fill only if you specify the number of items. or press ENTER In a polar array. Rotate arrayed objects? <Y>: Enter y or n. you must specify either the angle to fill or the angle between items. 74 | ARRAY . Removing an object from the selection set and adding it back forces that object to be the last object selected. If you press ENTER (and do not provide the number of items). You can also make the selection set into a block and replicate it. If you specify an angle to fill without providing the number of items. AutoCAD uses the center point of a circle or arc. AutoCAD prompts for the angle between items: Angle between items: Specify an angle If you specified the number of items and entered 0 as the angle to fill or pressed ENTER . or if you specify the number of items and enter 0 as the angle to fill or press ENTER . the insertion base point of a block or shape. Specify the angle to fill (+=ccw. -=cw): Enter a positive integer for a counterclockwise rotation or a negative integer for a clockwise rotation AutoCAD determines the distance from the array’s center point to a reference point on the last object selected. See Also See “Create an Array of Objects” in the User’s Guide. and one endpoint of a line or trace. -=cw) <360>: Enter a positive integer for a counterclockwise rotation or a negative integer for a clockwise rotation AutoCAD sees 0 as no response. you must specify both.Base Specifies a new reference (base) point relative to the selected objects that will remain at a constant distance from the center point of the array as the objects are arrayed. Specify the base point of objects: Specify a point Enter the number of items in the array: Enter a positive integer or press ENTER If you enter a value for the number of items. AutoCAD uses the reference point of the last object in the selection set for all objects. the start point of text.

Options Presents developer-related ObjectARX application options. SNAP locks points entered by a pointing device into alignment with an imaginary rectangular grid. and provides information about ObjectARX applications ObjectARX applications can be third-party programs or internal applications such as Render or the Multiline Text Editor. ARX Loads. These options are explained in greater detail in the ObjectARX Developer’s Guide. Load Displays the ObjectARX/DBX File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box).Commands BLOCK creates blocks from a group of objects. This option loads the specified ObjectARX application. System Variables SNAPANG stores the current UCS-relevant snap and grid rotation for the current viewport. Enter an option [Group/CLasses/Services]: Enter an option or press ENTER ARX | 75 . Unload Unloads the specified ObjectARX application. Enter ARX/DBX file name to unload: Commands Lists the AcEd-registered commands (AcEd-registered commands are described in the ObjectARX Developer’s Guide). Command line: arx Enter an option [?/Load/Unload/Commands/Options]: ?—List Applications Lists the currently loaded ObjectARX applications. unloads. the rotation and X and Y spacing of which can be changed.

Classes Displays a class hierarchy of C++ classes derived from objects registered in the system. Active Assistance icon 76 | ASSIST . Right-click the Active Assistance icon in the Windows system tray. Active Assistance options are available through the Active Assistance icon shortcut menu and the Active Assistance window shortcut menu. Active Assistance continually monitors your actions in AutoCAD and displays information directly related to the active command or dialog box in the Active Assistance window. You can manually hide and show the Active Assistance window at any time. which provides either automatic or on-demand context-sensitive information Help menu: Active Assistance Command line: assist (or 'assist for transparent use) When you open the Active Assistance window. You can also control how and when the window is automatically opened.Group Causes the specified group of commands to be the first group searched when resolving the names of AutoCAD commands. ASSIST Opens the Active Assistance window. you may prefer to open the Active Assistance window only while you work in a dialog box. Services Lists the names of all registered services. located on the Windows taskbar. For example. Active Assistance Icon Shortcut Menu Provides options for closing Active Assistance and controlling when and how Active Assistance displays information. the Active Assistance icon is added to your Windows system tray at the lower edge of your screen.

in which you can specify when and how Active Assistance displays information. Print Prints the current Help topic. Back Moves backward through the history of Help topics that you have viewed. ASSIST | 77 . which contains information relevant to the active command or dialog box. Active Assistance Window Shortcut Menu Provides options for working in the Active Assistance window and controlling when and how Active Assistance displays information.Show Active Assistance Displays the Active Assistance window. Settings Displays the Active Assistance Settings dialog box. in which you can specify when and how Active Assistance displays information. Home Displays the Active Assistance topic that describes how to use the Active Assistance window. Use the ASSIST command to restart Active Assistance. Right-click inside the Active Assistance window. When you display the window using either of these methods. the Activation option specified in the Active Assistance Settings dialog box is ignored until you close the window. Settings Displays the Active Assistance Settings dialog box (see page 78). Forward Moves forward through the history of Help topics that you have viewed. Exit Closes Active Assistance. You can also display the Active Assistance window by double-clicking the icon in the system tray.

To open the window. . On Demand Suppresses automatic display of the Active Assistance window. Dialogs Only Automatically opens the Active Assistance window when a dialog box is displayed. use the ASSIST command to restart Active Assistance.Active Assistance Settings Dialog Box Specifies when and how Active Assistance displays information. Activation Specifies the conditions in which the Active Assistance window is automatically displayed. See Also Commands 78 | ASSIST HELP opens the standard AutoCAD Help. Show On Start Starts Active Assistance when AutoCAD starts. double-click the Active Assistance icon in the system tray. All Commands Automatically opens the Active Assistance window when any command is activated. New and Enhanced Commands Automatically opens the Active Assistance window when any new or enhanced commands are activated. or right-click the icon and choose Show Active Assistance. If you clear this option and close all AutoCAD sessions. You cannot close the Active Assistance window while a dialog box is displayed.

Object Attaches a URL to the selected object. Commands DETACHURL removes hyperlinks from drawings. Select objects: Use an object selection method. First corner: Click in the drawing to indicate the lower-left corner of the area Other corner: Click to indicate the upper-right corner of the area Enter hyperlink <current drawing>: Enter a URL The polyline that represents the area is displayed in the color assigned to URLLAYER. draws a polyline on that layer. The default color is red. the cursor changes to a hyperlink cursor to indicate that a URL is attached to the area. See Also See “Add Hyperlinks to a Drawing” in the User’s Guide. When you move the cursor over the area in the drawing. HYPERLINK displays a dialog box to attach URLs to objects and offers additional options. the cursor changes to a hyperlink cursor to indicate that a URL is attached to the object.ATTACHURL Attaches hyperlinks to objects or areas in a drawing Command line: attachurl Enter hyperlink insert option [Area/Object] <Object>: Enter a or press ENTER Area Creates the URLLAYER layer. and attaches a URL to the polyline. and press ENTER to end selection Enter hyperlink <current drawing>: Enter a URL When you move the cursor over the object in the drawing. ATTACHURL | 79 .

and value. insertion point. and text options for an attribute. AutoCAD displays the attribute value at the same location in the block. When you finish defining the attribute. with the same text style and alignment. ATTDEF displays prompts on the command line (see page 82). Draw menu: Block ➤ Define Attributes Command line: attdef The Attribute Definition dialog box is displayed. AutoCAD erases the attribute tag from the drawing if you have selected the Delete option in the Block Definition dialog box. When you insert the block. it specifies the properties of an attribute and the prompts displayed when the block is inserted. attribute tag.ATTDEF Creates an attribute definition An attribute is informational text associated with a block. If you enter -attdef at the Command prompt. the attribute tag that you specified is displayed in the drawing. Attribute Definition Dialog Box Defines the mode. When you later include the attribute tag in a block definition using the BLOCK command. An attribute definition is a template for creating an attribute. prompt. 80 | ATTDEF .

Attribute Sets attribute data. ATTDISP overrides Invisible mode. Verify Prompts you to verify that the attribute value is correct when you insert the block. Preset Sets the attribute to its default value when you insert a block containing a preset attribute. You can enter up to 256 characters. Changing the AFLAGS setting affects the default mode for new attribute definitions and does not affect existing attribute definitions. Enter the attribute tag using any combination of characters except spaces. style. and rotation of the attribute text. height. Insertion Point Specifies the location for the attribute. Text Options Sets the justification. start the string with two backslashes. To make the first character a backslash. start the string with a backslash (\). the attribute tag is used as a prompt. AutoCAD changes lowercase letters to uppercase. Invisible Specifies that attribute values are not displayed or printed when you insert the block. Enter coordinate values or choose Pick Point and use the pointing device to specify the placement of the attribute in relation to the objects that it will be associated with. Tag Identifies each occurrence of an attribute in the drawing. If you need leading blanks in the prompt or the default value. The default values are stored in the AFLAGS system variable. If you select Constant in the Mode area. Prompt Specifies the prompt that is displayed when you insert a block containing this attribute definition. Value Specifies the default attribute value. If you do not enter a prompt. ATTDEF | 81 .Mode Sets options for attribute values associated with a block when you insert the block in a drawing. the Prompt option is not available. Constant Gives attributes a fixed value for block insertions.

If you select Align or Fit in the Justification list. ATTDEF Command Line If you enter -attdef at the Command prompt. ATTDEF displays prompts on the command line. Currently loaded text styles are displayed. Enter a value.0). or choose Height to specify a height with your pointing device. Enter a value. Rotation Specifies the rotation angle of the attribute text. or if you select Align in the Justification list. The height is measured from the origin to the location you specify. see STYLE. If you select a text style that has fixed height (anything other than 0. To load or create a text style. or choose Rotation to specify a rotation angle with your pointing device. the Height option is not available. See TEXT for a description of the justification options. Text Style Specifies a predefined text style for the attribute text. Align Below Previous Attribute Definition Places the attribute tag directly below the previously defined attribute. Current attribute modes: Invisible=current Constant=current Verify=current Preset=current Enter an option to change [Invisible/Constant/Verify/Preset] <done>: Enter attribute tag name: Enter any characters except spaces or exclamation points Enter attribute prompt: Enter the text for the prompt line or press ENTER (this prompt is not displayed if you turned on Constant mode) Enter default attribute value: Enter the appropriate text or press ENTER (this prompt is not displayed if you turned on Constant mode) Enter attribute value: Enter the appropriate text or press ENTER (this prompt is only displayed if you turned on Constant mode) 82 | ATTDEF . The rotation angle is measured from the origin to the location you specify. If you have not previously created an attribute definition. the Rotation option is not available. Height Specifies the height of the attribute text.Justification Specifies the justification of the attribute text. this option is not available.

v. AutoCAD skips this prompt and displays the Attribute Value prompt instead. The tag can contain any characters except spaces or exclamation marks (!). Current text style: "Standard" Text height: 0. Attribute Prompt Specifies the prompt that is displayed when you insert a block containing this attribute definition. c. If you turn on Constant mode. AutoCAD uses the attribute tag as the prompt. see TEXT. Default Attribute Value Specifies the default attribute value. The default attribute value appears when a block is inserted into your drawing. ATTDISP overrides Invisible mode. ATTDEF | 83 .Attribute Modes The current value line indicates the current settings for each attribute mode (either Y for on or N for off).2000 Specify start point of text or [Justify / Style]: Enter an option or press ENTER For a description of each option. Press ENTER when you have finished adjusting the mode settings. Entering i. Preset Sets the attribute to its default value when you insert a block containing a preset attribute. If you turn on Constant mode. which identifies each occurrence of an attribute in the drawing. or p toggles the modes on or off. If you press ENTER . AutoCAD changes lowercase letters to uppercase. ATTDEF then displays the same prompts as the TEXT command. The AFLAGS system variable stores the current mode settings and can be used to set the default modes. using the attribute tag instead of requesting a text string. This prompt is displayed only if you turn on Constant mode. Constant Gives attributes a fixed value for block insertions. Invisible Specifies that attribute values are displayed when you insert the block. Attribute Tag Name Specifies the attribute tag. this prompt does not display. A default value is not required. Verify Prompts for verification that the attribute value is correct when you insert the block. Attribute Value Specifies the value for a constant attribute.

ATTEDIT edits attributes independently of the block definition with which they’re associated. Normal Retains the current visibility of each attribute. Visible attributes are displayed. See Also Commands ATTDISP globally controls the visibility of attributes. ATTREDEF redefines a block and updates associated attributes. System Variables AFLAGS stores the current mode settings for attribute definitions. ATTDIA causes -INSERT to use dialog boxes for the entry of attribute values. using the attribute tag instead of requesting a text string. Off Makes all attributes invisible. ATTDISP controls whether the attributes in your drawing are visible. ATTMODE controls the attribute display mode.ATTDEF then displays the same prompts as the TEXT command. see TEXT. ATTEXT extracts attribute data. ATTDISP . On Makes all attributes visible. which controls automatic regeneration. ATTDISP Globally controls attribute visibility An attribute is informational text associated with a block. Invisible attributes are not displayed. Current text style: "Standard" Text height: 0.2000 Specify start point of text or [Justify / Style]: Enter an option or press ENTER For a description of each option. attribute View menu: Display ➤ Attribute Display Command line: attdisp (or 'attdisp for transparent use) Enter attribute visibility setting [Normal/ON/OFF] <current>: ATTDISP on ATTDISP off 84 | AutoCAD regenerates the drawing after you change the visibility unless REGENAUTO. AutoCAD stores the current visibility of attributes in the ATTMODE system variable. ATTREQ determines whether INSERT uses default attribute settings during the inser- tion of blocks. is off.

Use the following access methods to edit attribute values for a specific block: Modify menu: Object ➤ Attribute ➤ Single Command line: attedit Select block reference: Select a block with attributes The Edit Attributes dialog box is displayed. ATTDIA causes -INSERT to use dialog boxes for the entry of attribute values. ATTEDIT edits attributes independently of the block definition with which they’re associated. ATTEXT extracts attribute data. ATTREQ determines whether INSERT uses default attribute settings during the insertion of blocks. The Mode option of ATTDEF determines the visibility of newly created attribute definitions. and style. nonconstant attribute values associated with a specific block.See Also Commands System Variables ATTDEF creates an attribute definition for text to be associated with a block. height. independent of the block. ATTEDIT | 85 . In the Edit Attributes dialog box. Use the following access methods to edit attribute values and properties independent of a block: Modify menu: Object ➤ Attribute ➤ Global Command line: -attedit AutoCAD displays prompts on the command line (see page 82). you can edit individual. ATTEDIT Changes attribute information An attribute is informational text associated with a block. ATTMODE controls the attribute display mode. ATTREDEF redefines a block and updates associated attributes. use -ATTEDIT and edit attribute values and properties individually or globally. To change attribute properties such as position.

Edit the attribute values. To change attribute properties such as position. use Previous and Next to navigate through the list. use -ATTEDIT.Edit Attributes Dialog Box Displays the first eight attribute values contained in the block. and style. or enter n to edit attributes globally 86 | ATTEDIT . ATTEDIT displays prompts on the command line. You cannot edit attribute values on locked layers. Edit attributes one at a time? [Yes/No] <Y>: Enter y or press ENTER to edit attributes one at a time. ATTEDIT Command Line If you enter -attedit at the Command prompt. If the block contains additional attributes. height.

AutoCAD interprets the ? and * characters literally. You can change any properties of the attribute you select. or enter a tag or a partial tag with wild-card characters (? or *) to narrow the selection to specific attributes Enter attribute value specification <*>: Press ENTER . not as wild-card characters. or enter a block name or a partial block name with wild-card characters (? or *) to narrow the selection to specific blocks Enter attribute tag specification <*>: Press ENTER . except Next. X on first attribute Value Changes or replaces an attribute value. Attributes to be edited one at a time must be visible and parallel to the current UCS. Enter string to change: Enter string to change or press X on next attribute ENTER Enter new string: Enter replacement string or press ENTER Either string can be null. or specify a value or a value name with wild-card characters (? or *) to narrow the selection to specific attribute values Attribute values are case sensitive. Select Attributes: Select only attributes parallel to the current UCS AutoCAD marks the first attribute in the selection set with an X. Enter type of value modification [Change/Replace]: Enter c or r or press ENTER Change Modifies a few characters of the attribute value. the prompt does not include Angle. The X remains on the current attribute until you move to the next attribute. attributes selected Enter an option [Value/Position/Height/Angle/Style/Layer/Color/Next] <N>: Enter the property to change. The Height option is omitted for aligned text. or press ENTER for the next attribute If the original attribute was defined with aligned or fit text. Enter block name specification <*>: Press ENTER .Yes Edits attributes one at a time. ATTEDIT | 87 . AutoCAD prompts for a new value. For each of the options.

Replace Substitutes a new attribute value for the entire attribute value. Height Changes the text height. Style Changes the style setting. a true color. the height becomes the distance between the specified point and the start point of the text. Enter new attribute value: Enter a new attribute value or press ENTER If you press ENTER . specify a point. or press ENTER height changed When you specify a point. Enter new color name or value [Truecolor/Colorbook]<BYLAYER>: enter t. or press ENTER angle changed If you specify a point. enter c. Specify new height <current>: Enter a value. AutoCAD prompts for both ends of a new text baseline. the text is rotated along an imaginary line between the specified point and the start point of the text. Position Changes the text insertion point. Specify new rotation angle <current>: Enter a value. Enter new text style: Enter a style name or press ENTER style changed Layer Changes the layer. You can enter a color from the AutoCAD Color Index (a color name or number). . or press ENTER 88 | ATTEDIT Enter a color. Angle Changes the rotation angle. Enter new layer name <current>: Enter a layer name or press ENTER Color Changes the color. Specify new text insertion point: Specify a point or press ENTER position changed If the attribute is aligned. specify a point. the attribute value is empty (null). or a color from a color book.

or enter n to edit all attributes Yes Edits only visible attributes. Performing global editing of attribute values. Enter block name specification <*>: Press ENTER . Global editing applies to both visible and invisible attributes. Blue: Enter three integer values from 0 to 255 separated by commas to specify a true color Color Book Specifies a color from a loaded color book to be used for the selected object. such as PANTONE® If you enter a color book name. you can edit any or all of the attributes. AutoCAD prompts you to enter the color name in the color book. If there are no more attributes. or specify a value or a partial value with wild-card characters (? or *) to narrow the selection to specific attribute values ATTEDIT | 89 . Editing attributes globally limits you to replacing a single text string with another text string. Green. Edit only attributes visible on screen? [Yes/No] <Y>: Enter y or press ENTER to edit only visible attributes. or specify a block name or a partial block name with wild-card characters (? or *) to narrow the selection to specific blocks Enter attribute tag specification <*>: Press ENTER .You can enter a color name. Enter color name: Enter the name of a color included in the selected color book. or bylayer or byblock. such as PANTONE®573 Next Moves to the next attribute in the selection set. a color number between 1 and 255. Enter Color Book name: Enter the name of a color book that has been installed. or specify a tag or a partial tag with wild-card characters (? or *) to narrow the selection to specific attributes Enter attribute value specification <*>: Press ENTER . No Edits more than one attribute at a time. True Color Specifies a true color to be used for the selected object. Red. ATTEDIT ends. If you edit attributes one at a time.

90 | ATTEDIT . which controls automatic regeneration. AutoCAD regenerates the drawing at the end of the command unless REGENAUTO. not as wild-card characters. or press ENTER to append a new value to the existing value(s) Enter new string: Enter the new value to replace the specified value or to append to selected values Either string can be empty (null). Enter string to change: Enter string to change or press ENTER Enter new string: Enter replacement string or press ENTER Either string can be empty (null). Select Attributes: Select only attributes parallel to the current UCS Select the attribute you want to change. AutoCAD selects the attributes that match the specified block name. or press ENTER to select all attributes Attribute values are case sensitive. Enter string to change: Enter the attribute value you want to change. is off. To select empty (null) attributes. No Edits attributes whether they are visible or not. Enter block name specification <*>: Enter a full block name or a partial block name with wild-card characters (? or *). or press ENTER to select attributes in all blocks Enter attribute tag specification <*>: Enter a full attribute tag name or a partial name with wild-card characters (? or *). enter a backslash (\). which normally are not visible. not as wild-card characters. and attribute value. which normally are not visible and cannot be selected. attribute tag. enter a backslash (\). or press ENTER to select attributes in all attribute tags Enter attribute value specification <*>: Enter a full attribute value or a partial value with wild-card characters (? or *). The ? and * characters are interpreted literally. To select empty (null) attributes. The ? and * characters are interpreted literally.Attribute values are case sensitive. Changes to attributes are not reflected immediately.

ATTREQ determines whether INSERT uses default attribute settings during insertion of blocks. REGENAUTO controls automatic regenerations of a drawing. ATTEXT Extracts attribute data An attribute is informational text associated with a block. System Variables ATTDIA causes -INSERT to use dialog boxes for entry of attribute values. ATTEXT displays prompts on the command line (see page 93). and the template and output file names for the information.See Also See “Modify Blocks” in the User’s Guide. Commands ATTDEF creates an attribute definition for text to be associated with a block. ATTDISP globally controls the visibility of attributes. ATTEXT extracts attribute data. Attribute Extraction Dialog Box Specifies the file format for the attribute information. DDEDIT edits text and attribute definitions. ATTREDEF redefines a block and updates associated attributes. ATTMODE controls the attribute display mode. ATTEXT | 91 . Command line: attext The Attribute Extraction dialog box is displayed. the objects from which you want to extract information. If you enter -attext at the Command prompt. Use ATTEXT to extract the data stored in the attribute into a file.

Number Found shows the number of objects you selected. therefore. DXF™ format extraction requires no template. The fields of each record have a fixed width.txt. Enter the file name in the box. When the Attribute Extraction dialog box reopens. and end-of-sequence objects. attribute. the Template File option is not available. field separators or character string delimiters are not appropriate.dxx distinguishes the output file from normal DXF files. Template File Specifies a template extraction file for CDF and SDF formats. DXF Format Extract File (DXX) Produces a subset of the AutoCAD Drawing Interchange File format containing only block reference. 92 | ATTEXT . Single quotation marks enclose the character fields. If you select DXF under File Format. Select Objects Closes the dialog box so you can use the pointing device to select blocks with attributes. or choose Template File to search for existing template files using a standard file selection dialog box.File Format Sets the format for the file into which you are extracting the attribute data. The file name extension . Comma Delimited File (CDF) Generates a file containing one record for each block reference in the drawing that has at least one matching attribute tag in the template file. Space Delimited File (SDF) Generates a file containing one record for each block reference in the drawing that has at least one matching attribute tag in the template file. The default file extension is . Commas separate the fields of each record.

Output File Specifies the file name and location for the extracted attribute data. enter the name for the output file. Single quotation marks enclose the character fields.For information about creating a template file. enter the name of an existing attribute extraction template file. ATTEXT displays prompts on the command line. ATTEXT Command Line If you enter -attext at the Command prompt. The fields of each record have a fixed width.txt file name extension for CDF or SDF files and the . or choose Output File to search for existing template files using a standard file selection dialog box. enter the name of an existing attribute extraction template file. The extract file’s file name extension is . In the Create Extract File dialog box. In the Create Extract File dialog box. In the Select Template File dialog box. AutoCAD appends the .dxx file name extension for DXF files. In the Select Template File dialog box. ATTEXT | 93 . enter the name for the output file. see “Attach Data to Blocks (Block Attributes)” in the User’s Guide. SDF: SpaceDelimited File Generates a file containing one record for each block reference in the drawing. Commas separate the fields of each record. therefore. field separators or character string delimiters are not used.txt for CDF or SDF format.txt for CDF or SDF format. Enter extraction type or enable object selection [Cdf/Sdf/Dxf/Objects] <C>: Enter an option or press ENTER CDF: CommaDelimited File Generates a file containing one record for each block reference in the drawing. The extract file’s file name extension is . Enter the path and file name for the extracted attribute data.

ATTREQ determines whether INSERT uses default attribute settings during insertion of blocks. ATTDEF creates an attribute definition for text to be associated with a block. EXPORT saves objects to other file formats.DXF: Drawing Interchange File Produces a subset of the AutoCAD Drawing Interchange File format containing only block reference. -ATTEDIT edits both attribute values and attribute properties individually or globally. see “Attach Data to Blocks (Block Attributes)” in the User’s Guide. Select object: Use an object selection method Enter attribute extraction type [Cdf/Sdf/Dxf] <C>: an option or press ENTER Enter See Also For information about working with attributes. and end-of-sequence objects.dxx distinguishes the output file from normal DXF files.dxx for DXF format. Objects Selects objects whose attributes you want to extract. enter the name for the output file. The extract file’s file name extension is . attribute. nonconstant attribute values associated with a specific block. Commands ATTEDIT edits individual. In the Create Extract File dialog box. The file name extension . ATTREDEF redefines a block and updates associated attributes. independent of a block. ATTMODE controls the attribute display mode. ATTDISP controls attribute visibility. DDEDIT edits text and attribute definitions. ATTREDEF Redefines a block and updates associated attributes Command line: attredef Enter the name of the block you wish to redefine: Select objects for new block: Select objects: Insertion base point of new block: Specify a point 94 | ATTREDEF . DXF-format extraction requires no template. System Variables ATTDIA causes -INSERT to use dialog boxes for entry of attribute values.

Enter the name of the block you want to update. Old attributes in the new block definition retain their old values. ATTMODE controls the attribute display mode. ATTEXT extracts attribute data. AutoCAD deletes any old attributes that are not included in the new block definition. Pressing ENTER allows you to use your pointing device to select the block whose attributes you want to update. and you are prompted to specify another block. ATTSYNC does not change any values assigned to attributes in existing blocks. For every error detected. Entering ? displays a list of all block definitions in the drawing. AUDIT Evaluates the integrity of a drawing AUDIT is a diagnostic tool for examining the current drawing and correcting errors. See Also Commands System Variables ATTDEF creates an attribute definition for text to be associated with a block. ATTSYNC Updates all instances of a specified block with the current attributes defined for the block Modify II toolbar: Command line: attsync Enter an option [?/Name/Select] <Select>: You are prompted for the names of blocks you want to update with the current attributes defined for the blocks. ATTDISP globally controls the visibility of attributes.New attributes assigned to existing block references use their default values. ATTEDIT edits attributes independently of the block definition with which they’re associated. If a block you specify does not contain attributes or does not exist. AutoCAD provides a description of the error and recommends corrective action. ATTDIA causes -INSERT to use dialog boxes for entry of attribute values. an error message is displayed. ATTREQ determines whether INSERT uses default attribute settings during insertion of blocks. ATTSYNC | 95 .

with the file extension . use RECOVER to retrieve the drawing and correct its errors.File menu: Drawing Utilities ➤ Audit Command line: audit Fix any errors detected? [Yes/No] <N>: Enter y or n. or press ENTER For easy access. 96 | AUDIT . See Also Commands System Variables OPTIONS reconfigures AutoCAD. AUDITCTL controls whether AUDIT generates a report file. If a drawing contains errors that AUDIT cannot fix.adt. RECOVER fixes a damaged drawing. editing commands affect only the objects that belong to the current paper space or model space. However. AUDIT creates an ASCII file describing problems and the action taken and places this report in the same directory as the current drawing. OPEN alerts you if a drawing is damaged and optionally uses RECOVER to attempt to fix it. AUDIT places all objects for which it reports errors in the Previous selection set. If you set the AUDITCTL system variable to 1.

Use the color controls and Horizon. and Rotation to define the gradient. Gradient Specifies a two.BACKGROUND Sets up the background for your scene Render toolbar: View menu: Render ➤ Background Command line: background AutoCAD displays the Background dialog box. BACKGROUND | 97 . A three-color gradient is the default. set Height to 0 so that Render uses only the Top and Bottom colors. Background Dialog Box Defines the type.or three-color gradient background. Height. and position of the background for your drawing. effects. color. To create a two-color gradient. Solid Selects a one-color background. Use the color controls to specify the color.

blue (RGB) color system or the hue. See RENDER. Merge Uses the current AutoCAD® image as the background. To define the color of the background. For a solid background. For a two-color gradient. You can use the following file types for background images: BMP. green. This option is available only when Viewport is selected as Destination in the Render dialog box. Image Specifies the image file name. Select RGB to adjust the individual red. lightness. set the Top color. lightness. Select Custom Color Displays the Select Color dialog box. None of the colors is available when you select Image. . true colors. saturation (HLS) color system. This option is on by default.Image Uses a bitmap file for the background. Only Top is available when you select Solid. and Bottom colors. set the Top. set the Top and Bottom colors and set Height to 0. Color Controls Controls whether AutoCAD uses the red. and color book colors. you can select from the 255 AutoCAD Color Index (ACI) colors. For a three-color gradient. TGA. Middle. PCX. Top/Middle/ Bottom Sets colors. and blue components of the selected color. AutoCAD Background Uses the current AutoCAD background color. JPG. Colors Sets color for a solid or gradient background. Available only with a solid background. the others are not available. Select HLS to adjust the individual hue. green. and saturation components of the selected color. Name 98 | BACKGROUND Specifies the name of the image file to use. All three colors are available (by clicking the corresponding color tiles) when you select Gradient. and TIFF. You can also use Find File to select a file. Preview Displays a preview of the current Background settings.

Height Represents a percentage of the second color in a three-color gradient. Adjust Bitmap Displays the Adjust Background Bitmap Placement dialog box (see page 100). and the Photo Raytrace renderer uses it in addition to the geometry to determine reflections and refraction. BACKGROUND | 99 . Use the box or scroll bar to set the value. With the Photo Real renderer. the result is a raytraced environment. The program maps the environment onto a sphere surrounding the scene. raytraced materials. You can use the following file types for environment images: BMP. If you use an image file. Use the box or scroll bar to set the value.Find File Displays a standard file selection dialog box. JPG. PCX. Only available for gradient backgrounds. The start point of the second color is determined by the Horizon setting. Rotation is not available with a solid or image background. with the Photo Raytrace renderer. Horizon Represents the percentage of unrotated height. Name Specifies the image file name to create the raytraced environment. Use this dialog box to select the background image file to use. If the value is 0. the result is a two-color gradient that uses the Top and Bottom colors. Use the box or scroll bar to set the value. Rotation Sets an angle at which you can rotate a gradient background. the objects reflect that image rather than the background image. Environment Defines an environment in which you can create additional reflection and refraction effects on objects with reflective. and TIFF. Use Background Specifies that the selected objects in the current drawing reflect the background you specify. in which you can select the background image file to use. Find File Displays a standard file selection dialog box. TGA. the result is a mirrored effect.

Scale. the bitmap is not centered within the drawing area when you render it. Maintain Aspect Ratio Locks the X and Y coordinates together. except that they apply to the background image instead of a mapped material image. the bitmap is rendered only where you place it. Adjust a value by using the scroll bars to the left and above the diagram (enclosed by the inner box labeled Scale). Offset and Scale Sets the offset and scale. the offset acts as a displacement. You can still change Offset and Scale. Use Image Aspect Ratio Uses the aspect ratio of the image file.) However. Tile Tiles the bitmap (the default). not U. Fit to Screen Fits the image to your screen. If you select Use Image Aspect Ratio. and a value you enter in X or Y Scale changes the other. or by entering values in X and Y Scale. (During tiling. The Offset. if you select Crop. Offset and Scale refer to X. and Tiling controls all work the same as they do in the Adjust Material Bitmap Placement dialog box (see page 865). Tiling Controls how the bitmap is tiled with two radio buttons. the program fits the larger dimension to the screen while maintaining the image’s aspect ratio.V coordinates. or by entering values in X and Y Offset. Adjust a value by using the scroll bars to the right and below the diagram (enclosed by the outer box labeled Offset). not an absolute position. Scale values can range from ±0.Adjust Background Bitmap Placement Dialog Box Controls options that apply to the background image. as indicated by the diagram (enclosed by the inner 100 | BACKGROUND . When Maintain Aspect Ratio is turned on.1 to ±10 on either axis (X or Y). Offset values can range from −1 to 1 on either axis (X or Y).Y coordinates. moving one scroll bar moves the other. but the Maintain Aspect Ratio option is locked to the On setting. If you select Tile and you change the offset so the bitmap rectangle appears outside the projection rectangle. Crop Does not tile the bitmap.

Draw menu: Block ➤ Base Command line: base (or 'base for transparent use) Enter base point <current>: Specify a point or press ENTER See Also Commands INSERT inserts a drawing into the current drawing. If the diagram shows the bitmap outside the projection rectangle. Note The BASE command and the INSBASE system variable report values in the current UCS units.0. ACAD uses this base point as the insertion base point. other drawings and you need a base point other than 0. XREF links another drawing to the current drawing by creating an external reference. or externally reference the drawing from. the bitmap does not appear in a rendering. Center Sets the Offset coordinates to 0 (centers the image). When you insert or externally reference the current drawing into other drawings. BASE | 101 .box labeled Scale) in the Adjust Background Bitmap Placement dialog box. Commands ARX loads. BASE Sets the insertion base point for the current drawing Use BASE if you plan to insert the current drawing into. RENDER creates a photorealistic or realistically shaded image of a 3D wireframe or solid model using geometry. System Variables INSBASE stores the insertion base point. lighting. RMAT attaches and manages rendering materials. unloads. and materials information. and provides information about ObjectARX™ applications.0. BLOCK creates a block definition from a set of points and requires that you set BASE first. See Also See “Use Materials in Rendering” in the User’s Guide.

BATTMAN . You can specify which attribute properties you want displayed in the list by choosing Settings. 102 | Block Lists all block definitions in the current drawing that have attributes. If you modify attributes of a block and then select a new block before you save the attribute changes you made. a message is displayed. Tag. This does not affect any values assigned to attributes in each block. Block Attribute Manager Manages the attribute definitions for blocks in the current drawing. If the current drawing does not contain any blocks with attributes. For each selected block. Sync Updates all instances of the selected block with the attribute properties currently defined. By default. Select the block whose attributes you want to modify. Default. Select Block Allows you to use your pointing device to select a block from the drawing area. and change the order in which you are prompted for attribute values when inserting a block. remove attributes from blocks. Attributes of the selected block are displayed in the attribute list. you are prompted to save the changes before selecting another block. When you choose Select Block. and Mode attribute properties are displayed in the attribute list. a description below the attribute list identifies the number of its instances in the current drawing and in the current layout. Prompt.BATTMAN Edits attribute properties of a block definition Modify II toolbar: Modify menu: Object ➤ Attribute ➤ Block Attribute Manager Command line: battman The Block Attribute Manager is displayed. You can edit the attribute definitions in blocks. the dialog box closes until you select a block from the drawing or cancel by pressing ESC .

Edit Attribute Dialog Box Allows you to edit attributes for a block definition. The Move Up button is not available when a constant attribute is selected. Move Down Moves the selected attribute tag later in the prompt sequence. where you can customize how attribute information is listed in the Block Attribute Manager. If Apply Changes to Existing References is selected in the Settings dialog box before you choose Remove. where you can modify attribute properties. changes are immediately visible. Remove Removes the selected attribute from the block definition. The Move Down button is not available when a constant attribute is selected. The Remove button is not available for blocks with only one attribute. Settings Opens the Settings dialog box. Apply Updates the drawing with the attribute changes you have made and leaves the Block Attribute Manager open. Auto Preview Changes is not available if Apply Changes to Existing References is not selected. Auto Preview Changes Controls whether or not the drawing area is immediately updated to display any visible attribute changes you make. If Auto Preview Changes is cleared. The Edit Attribute dialog box contains the following tabs: ■ ■ ■ Attribute Text Options Properties BATTMAN | 103 . changes are not immediately visible. Clearing Auto Preview Changes results in a small improvement in performance. Edit Opens the Edit Attribute dialog box. the attribute is removed from all instances of the block in the current drawing. If Auto Preview Changes is selected.Move Up Moves the selected attribute tag earlier in the prompt sequence.

Change the color of attribute text on the Properties tab. If this option is cleared. Invisible Displays or hides the attribute in the drawing area. If selected. Text Style 104 | BATTMAN Specifies the text style for attribute text. Default values for this text style are assigned to the text properties displayed in this dialog box. Verify Turns value verification on and off. Text Options Tab (Edit Attribute Dialog Box) Sets the properties that define the way an attribute’s text is displayed in the drawing. If a check mark is shown in the check box. Constant Identifies whether the attribute is set to its default value. the attribute is set to its default value and cannot be changed. Data Data options set the attribute text that is displayed. ignores the attribute’s default value and prompts you to enter a value when inserting the block. Prompt Sets the text for the prompt that is displayed when you insert the block. If selected. sets the attribute to its default value when the block is inserted. Preset Turns default value assignment on and off. hides the attribute value in the drawing area. You cannot change this property. Tag Sets the identifier assigned to the attribute. If the check box is empty. If selected. If cleared. If cleared. Default Sets the default value assigned to the attribute when you insert the block. Mode Mode options determine whether and how attribute text appears. displays the attribute value. verification is not performed. . you can assign a value to the attribute. prompts you to verify the values you assign to the attribute when inserting a new instance of the block. and sets the string that prompts users to enter a value.Attribute Tab (Edit Attribute Dialog Box) Defines how a value is assigned to an attribute and whether or not the assigned value is visible in the drawing area. The Attribute tab also displays the tag name that identifies the attribute.

you can assign a plot style to the attribute using the Properties tab. Entering a value less than 1.0 condenses the text. Oblique Angle Specifies the angle that attribute text is slanted away from its vertical axis. Width Factor Sets the character spacing for attribute text. Entering a value greater than 1. Only the selected properties are displayed in the list. Properties Tab (Edit Attribute Dialog Box) Defines the layer that the attribute is on and the color. Changes you make to this option are not displayed if the LWDISPLAY system variable is off. Rotation Specifies the rotation angle of the attribute text. Color Specifies the attribute’s text color. Lineweight Specifies the lineweight of attribute text. Display in List Specifies the properties to be displayed in the attribute list. Layer Specifies the layer that the attribute is on. and linetype for the attribute’s line. Upside Down Specifies whether or not the text is displayed upside down. Linetype Specifies the linetype of attribute text. Select All Selects all properties. Height Specifies the height of the attribute text.Justification Specifies how attribute text is justified. If the drawing uses plot styles. Settings Dialog Box Controls the appearance of the attribute list in the Block Attribute Manager. The Tag property is always selected. the Plot Style list is not available. BATTMAN | 105 .0 expands it. lineweight. Plot Style Specifies the plot style of the attribute. Backwards Specifies whether or not the text is displayed backwards. If the current drawing uses color-dependent plot styles.

which is independent of its boundaries. In this event. Apply Changes to Existing References Specifies whether or not to update all existing instances of the block whose attributes you are modifying.000. or a gradient. AutoCAD won’t create a hatch pattern that consists of over 10. The limit can be reset to any value between 100 and 10. which is updated when its boundaries are modified. BHATCH creates an associative hatch or fill. BHATCH Fills an enclosed area or selected objects with a hatch pattern or gradient fill BHATCH first defines the boundaries of the area you want to hatch or fill. If this option is selected. You can choose Sync in the Block Attribute Manager to apply changes immediately to existing block instances.000. duplicate tags are not emphasized in the attribute list. duplicate attribute tags are displayed in red type in the attribute list. enter (setenv "MaxHatch" "50000") at the Command prompt. or a nonassociative hatch or fill. Note By default. If cleared. for example. You can preview any hatch or fill and adjust the definition. Draw toolbar: Draw menu: Hatch 106 | BHATCH . editing hatched or gradient-filled geometry can produce unexpected results.000 segments. either by computing a region or polyline boundary from a specified point within an enclosed area. a solid color. The limit is set by the MaxHatch setting in the registry.Clear All Clears all properties. This temporarily overrides the Apply Changes to Existing References option. To reset the limit to 50. If this option is cleared. updates all instances of the block with the new attribute definitions. Due to the large number of combinations of geometry that you can hatch or fill.000. updates only new instances of the block with the new attribute definitions. If selected. Emphasize Duplicate Tags Turns duplicate tag emphasis on and off. or by using selected objects as boundaries. delete the object containing the hatch or fill and redo the hatch or fill. It then fills the boundaries with a hatch pattern.

or preview the hatch or gradient fill. The objects must form an enclosed area. When you select Pick Points. change the island detection style. The island detection style (which you also set on the Advanced tab) then determines how to hatch the detected islands.Command line: bhatch The Boundary Hatch and Fill dialog box is displayed. Boundary Hatch and Fill Dialog Box Defines the boundary. and AutoCAD displays a prompt. pattern type. you can right-click in the drawing area at any time to display a shortcut menu. if the island detection method is Flood. internal point selected hatch boundary result BHATCH | 107 . pattern properties. and attributes for hatch and gradient fill objects. or press ENTER to end point specification and return to the dialog box While specifying points. AutoCAD detects objects within the outermost boundary as islands and includes them in the boundary definition. the dialog box closes temporarily. If you enter -bhatch at the Command prompt. How AutoCAD detects objects using this option depends on which island detection method is selected on the Advanced tab. Select internal point: Specify a point within the area to be hatched or filled Select internal point: Specify a point. For example. BHATCH displays prompts on the command line (see page 117). The Boundary Hatch and Fill dialog box includes the following tabs: Pick Points Determines a boundary from existing objects visible on the screen. enter u or undo to undo the last selection. You can undo the last or all point specifications. change the selection method.

AutoCAD clears the previous selection set. Remove Islands Removes from the boundary definition any of the objects that AutoCAD detects as islands when you use the Pick Points option. AutoCAD does not detect interior objects automatically. object selected text selected result Each time you choose Select Objects. change the island detection style.Select Objects Specifies objects for hatching or filling. you can right-click at any time in the drawing area to display a shortcut menu. While selecting objects. or preview the hatch or gradient fill. You must select the objects within the selected boundary to hatch or fill those objects according to the current Island Detection Style (which you set on the Advanced tab). You can undo the last selection or all selections. You cannot remove the outer boundary. 108 | BHATCH . object selected hatch boundary result When you use the Select Objects option. change the selection method. The dialog box closes temporarily. and AutoCAD prompts you to select objects.

Composition Controls whether the hatch or gradient fill is associative or nonassociative. you can right-click in the drawing area and use the shortcut menu to toggle between the Select Objects and Pick Points options to create boundaries. Preview Temporarily dismisses the dialog box and displays the currently defined boundaries with the current hatch or fill settings. This option is available only if you set Type to User Defined on the Hatch tab. This option is not available when you have not yet specified points or selected objects to define your boundaries. Nonassociative Creates a hatch or fill that is independent of its boundaries. See “Pick Points” on page 107 and “Select Objects” on page 108. This option is unavailable when no boundary has been defined. creating a crosshatch. Inherit Properties Hatches or fills specified boundaries using the hatch or fill properties of one object. AutoCAD stores this information in the HPDOUBLE system variable. Double For user-defined patterns. This option is not available for gradient fills. BHATCH | 109 .internal point selected object removed result View Selections Temporarily dismisses the dialog box and displays the currently defined boundaries with the hatch or fill settings that you last previewed. After selecting the associative hatch or fill object whose properties you want the hatch or fill to inherit. Associative Creates a hatch or fill that is updated when you modify its boundaries. draws a second set of lines positioned at 90 degrees to the original lines.

For predefined ISO patterns. You can control the angle and spacing of the lines in your user-defined pattern. Note When you use the Solid predefined pattern.HatchTab (Boundary Hatch and Fill Dialog Box) Defines the appearance of the hatch pattern to be applied.) You can control the angle and scale of any custom pattern.pat and acadiso. These patterns are stored in the acad.pat files. In addition. Custom Specifies a pattern that is defined in any custom PAT file that you have added to the AutoCAD search path. the loops must not intersect. Type Sets the pattern type. These limitations do not apply to standard hatch patterns. BHATCH .pat and acadiso. the boundary must be closed and must not intersect itself. choose Predefined. (To use the patterns in the supplied acad. Predefined Specifies a predefined AutoCAD pattern.pat files. 110 | User Defined Creates a pattern of lines based on the current linetype in your drawing. You can control the angle and scale of any predefined pattern. if the hatch area contains more than one loop. you can also control the ISO pen width.

AutoCAD stores the spacing in the HPSPACE system variable.] button displays the Hatch Pattern Palette dialog box (see page 116). The six most recently used predefined patterns appear at the top of the list. The [. The Pattern option is available only if you set Type to Predefined. This option is available only if you set Type to User Defined. Scale Expands or contracts a predefined or custom pattern. AutoCAD stores the selected pattern in the HPNAME system variable. You can click the swatch to display the Hatch Pattern Palette dialog box (see page 116). in which you can view preview images for all predefined patterns at once to help you make a selection. you can click the right arrow to display a list of colors or the Select Color dialog box (see page 169)..Pattern Lists the available predefined patterns. Spacing Specifies the spacing of lines in a user-defined pattern. AutoCAD stores the scale in the HPSCALE system variable. in which you can view preview images for all custom patterns at once to help you make a selection. you can easily display hatch patterns at a scale that is appropriate for your layout. This option is available only from a layout. When the SOLID pattern is selected.] button displays the Hatch Pattern Palette dialog box (see page 116).. Angle Specifies an angle for the hatch pattern relative to the X axis of the current UCS. The [. Custom Pattern Lists the available custom patterns. Relative to Paper Space Scales the hatch pattern relative to paper space units. Swatch Displays a preview of the selected pattern. Using this option.. The six most recently used custom patterns appear at the top of the list. AutoCAD stores the angle in the HPANG system variable. BHATCH | 111 .. The Custom Pattern option is available only if you set Type to Custom. This option is available only if you set Type to Predefined or Custom. AutoCAD stores the selected pattern in the HPNAME system variable.

Because you can define a precise set of boundaries. it’s often best to use the Normal style. If no internal boundaries exist. Advanced Tab (Boundary Hatch and Fill Dialog Box) Defines how AutoCAD creates and hatches or fills boundaries. Island Detection Style Specifies the method used to hatch or fill objects within the outermost boundary. specifying an island detection style has no effect. This option is available only if you set Type to Predefined and set Pattern to one of the available ISO patterns.ISO Pen Width Scales an ISO predefined pattern based on the selected pen width. 112 | BHATCH .

Outer.N to the pattern name in the HPNAME system variable.I to the pattern name in the HPNAME system variable. and areas separated by an even number of intersections are not. Thus. . Outer Hatches or fills inward from the outer boundary. BHATCH | 113 . Object Type Specifies whether to retain boundaries as objects. Note Hatching concave curves with the Outer and Ignore styles can cause hatching discrepancies. areas separated from the outside of the hatched or filled area by an odd number of intersections are hatched or filled. If AutoCAD encounters an internal intersection. AutoCAD hatches or fills only the outermost level of the structure and leaves the internal structure blank. Because this process starts from both ends of each hatch or fill line. The Normal. and the object type that AutoCAD applies to those objects. You can also set the Normal style by adding .. Normal Hatches or fills inward from the outer boundary. You can also set the Ignore style by adding . You can also set the Outer style by adding . AutoCAD turns hatching or filling off if it encounters an internal intersection. Ignore Ignores all internal objects and hatches or fills through them. and Ignore options are also available from a shortcut menu by right-clicking in the drawing area while you specify points or select objects to define your boundaries. it turns off hatching or filling until it encounters another intersection.O to the pattern name in the HPNAME system variable.

Object Type Controls the type of the new boundary object. Selecting this option discards any current boundary set and uses everything visible in the current viewport. If you have not created a boundary set with New. AutoCAD includes only the hatchable or fillable objects you select when it constructs the new boundary set. Until you exit BHATCH or create a new boundary set. Island Detection Method Specifies whether to include objects within the outermost boundary as boundary objects. AutoCAD analyzes all objects visible in the current viewport. when you use Pick Points to define a boundary. These internal objects are known as islands. Current Viewport Defines the boundary set from everything visible in the current viewport. replacing it with the new boundary set defined by the objects you select. If you don’t select any objects. Existing Set Defines the boundary set from the objects that you selected with New. For large drawings. see “Create and Combine Areas (Regions)” in the User’s Guide. For more information about regions. 114 | BHATCH . The selected boundary set has no effect when you use Select Objects to define a boundary. Boundary Set Defines the set of objects AutoCAD analyzes when defining a boundary from a specified point. AutoCAD creates the boundary as a region or a polyline. you can disregard certain objects when defining boundaries without having to hide or remove those objects. By redefining the boundary set. the Existing Set option is not available. This option is available only if you select Retain Boundaries. AutoCAD retains any current set.Retain Boundaries Adds the temporary boundary objects to the drawing. AutoCAD ignores objects that do not exist in the boundary set when you define your boundaries by using Pick Points. New Prompts you to select the objects that define the boundary set. By default. redefining the boundary set can also produce the boundary faster because AutoCAD examines fewer objects. AutoCAD discards any existing boundary set.

. true color. When One Color is selected. Ray Casting Runs a line from the point you specify to the nearest object and then traces the boundary in a counterclockwise direction. Gradient Tab (Boundary Hatch and Fill Dialog Box) Defines the appearance of the gradient fill to be applied.. Click the Browse button [. thus excluding islands as boundary objects.Flood Includes islands as boundary objects.] to display the Select Color dialog box. AutoCAD displays a color swatch with Browse button and a Shade and Tint slider. (GFCLRSTATE system variable) Two Color Specifies a fill that uses a smooth transition between two colors. AutoCAD displays a color swatch with a Browse button for color 1 and for color 2. When Two Color is selected. The default color displayed is the current color in the drawing. BHATCH | 115 . (GFCLRSTATE system variable) Color Swatch Specifies the color for the gradient fill. where you can select an AutoCAD Index color. One Color Specifies a fill that uses a smooth transition between darker shades and lighter tints of one color. or color book color.

If this option is not selected. (GFCLRLUM system variable) Centered Specifies a gradient configuration that is symmetrical. creating the illusion of a light source to the left of the object. (GFNAME system variable) Hatch Pattern Palette Dialog Box Displays preview images for all predefined and custom patterns. The dialog box organizes patterns on four tabs with images arranged alphabetically on each tab. spherical. Click an image to select a pattern and click OK. This option is independent of the angle specified for hatch patterns.Shade and Tint Slider Specifies the tint (the selected color mixed with white) or shade (the selected color mixed with black) of a color to be used for a gradient fill of one color. (GFSHIFT system variable) Angle Specifies the angle of the gradient fill. (GFANG system variable) Gradient Patterns Displays nine fixed patterns for gradient fills. . and parabolic. These patterns include linear sweep. The specified angle is relative to the current UCS. the gradient fill is shifted up and to the left. ANSI 116 | BHATCH Displays all ANSI patterns shipped with AutoCAD.

Custom Displays all patterns defined in any custom PAT file that you have added to the search path.ISO Displays all ISO patterns shipped with AutoCAD. Enter the pattern name followed by an optional hatch style code. which is set in the Options dialog box. If you turn on Island Detection. Files tab. Pattern(s) to list <*>: Enter a name list or press ENTER BHATCH | 117 . BHATCH displays prompts on the command line. enter u. Specify a scale for the pattern <current>: Specify a scale or press ENTER Specify an angle for the pattern <current>: Specify an angle or press ENTER ?—List Pattern Names Lists and describes the hatch patterns defined in the acad. BHATCH Command Line If you enter -bhatch at the Command prompt. enter ?. ACAD detects objects within the outermost boundary as islands. Precede the pattern name with an asterisk (*) to fill the area with individual lines instead of a hatch block. enter s.pat or acadiso.pat file or a custom pattern in its own PAT file. Other Predefined Displays all patterns other than ANSI and ISO shipped with AutoCAD. or press ENTER Pattern Name— Predefined or Custom Specifies a predefined pattern in the acad. Properties Specifies new hatch pattern properties to apply. Enter a pattern name or [?/Solid/User defined] <current>: Enter a predefined or custom pattern name. Hatching applied is associative and in the current style. Specify internal point or [Properties/Select/Remove islands/Advanced]: a point or enter an option Specify Internal Point Determines a boundary from existing objects visible on the screen that form an enclosed area.pat file.

User Defined Specifies a user-defined pattern. the loops must not intersect. or press ENTER Select Selects objects for hatching. Enter u. Select objects: Use an object selection method Remove Islands Removes from the boundary set objects defined as islands by the Internal Point option. followed by an optional hatch style code. Precede the u with an asterisk (*) to fill the area with individual lines instead of a hatch block. Select island to remove: Select an island Advanced Sets the method AutoCAD uses to create the hatch boundary.Solid Specifies a solid fill and redisplays the first BHATCH command line prompt. Specify candidate set for boundary [New/Everything] <current>: Enter an option or press ENTER 118 | BHATCH . Specify angle for crosshatch lines <current>: Specify an angle for the pattern or press ENTER Specify spacing between the lines <current>: Specify the distance between pattern lines or press ENTER Double hatch area? [Yes/No] <current>: Enter y to specify a second set of lines to be drawn at 90 degrees to the original lines. Enter an option [Boundary set/Retain boundary/Island detection/Style/ Associativity]: Enter an option or press ENTER to return to the previous prompt Boundary Set Defines the set of objects that AutoCAD analyzes when defining a boundary from a specified internal point. Note The boundary of a solid-fill hatch must be closed and must not intersect itself. where you can define a boundary. These limitations do not apply to standard hatch patterns. In addition. if the hatch area contains more than one loop.

Do you want island detection? [Yes/No] <current>: Enter y or n. Selecting this option discards any current boundary set and uses everything visible in the drawing or in the current viewport. Retain derived boundaries? [Yes/No] <current>: Enter y or n. Select objects: Use an object selection method Everything Creates a boundary set from everything visible in the current viewport. Retain Boundary Specifies whether to add the temporary boundary objects to the drawing after hatching is completed.New Creates a boundary set from a selection set you define. or press ENTER Island Detection Specifies whether to use objects within the outermost boundary as boundary objects. -Y Runs a line in the negative Y direction from the point you specify to the first object encountered and then traces the boundary in a counterclockwise direction. Enter type of ray casting [Nearest/+X/-X/+Y/-Y/Angle] <current>: Enter an option or press ENTER Nearest Runs a line from the point you specify to the nearest object and then traces the boundary in a counterclockwise direction. -X Runs a line in the negative X direction from the point you specify to the first object encountered and then traces the boundary in a counterclockwise direction. or press ENTER Specifying no island detection prompts for the ray casting method. +X Runs a line in the positive X direction from the point you specify to the first object encountered and then traces the boundary in a counterclockwise direction. ray casting direction (+X) ray casting direction (-X) ray casting direction (+Y) BHATCH | 119 . +Y Runs a line in the positive Y direction from the point you specify to the first object encountered and then traces the boundary in a counterclockwise direction.

by default. Hatching created with BHATCH is.O to the pattern name in the HPNAME system variable. Associativity Specifies that the new hatch pattern is updated when its boundaries are modified. and Wipeouts” in the User’s Guide. see “Custom Hatch Patterns” in the Customization Guide. AutoCAD stores the Outer style code by adding .Angle Runs a line at the specified angle from the point you specify to the first object encountered and then traces the boundary in a counterclockwise direction. If you have selected no internal objects.N to the pattern name in the HPNAME system variable. areas separated from the outside of the hatched area by an odd number of intersections are hatched. associative. Because you can define a precise set of boundaries. If AutoCAD encounters an internal intersection. it turns off hatching until it encounters another intersection. Enter hatching style [Ignore/Outer/Normal] <current>: Enter an option or press ENTER Ignore Ignores all internal objects and hatches through them. AutoCAD stores the Ignore style code by adding. AutoCAD stores the Normal style code by adding . a hatching style has no effect. or press ENTER See Also See “Standard Libraries” and “Hatches. 120 | BHATCH . Outer Hatches inward from the outer boundary. For information about the acad. Fills. I to the pattern name in the HPNAME system variable. Do you want associativity? [Yes/No] <current>: Enter y or n. Normal Hatches inward from the outer boundary. it’s often best to use the Normal style. while areas separated by an even number of intersections are not. Thus.pat file and creating your own hatch patterns. AutoCAD turns hatching off if it encounters an internal intersection and doesn’t turn it back on. AutoCAD hatches only the outermost level of the structure and leaves the internal structure blank. Because this process starts from both ends of each hatch line. Specify ray casting angle: Specify an angle ray casting direction (-Y) Style Specifies the method used to hatch objects within the outermost hatch boundary.

use REDRAW. HATCH fills a specified boundary. BLIPMODE | 121 . HPSPACE sets the spacing of a user. EXPLODE breaks a compound object into its component objects.defined hatch pattern. HATCHEDIT modifies an existing hatch block. BLIPMODE is off by default. System Variables HPANG sets the hatching angle. a temporary mark in the shape of a plus sign (+) appears where you specify a point.Commands CONVERT converts 2D polylines and associative hatches created in AutoCAD Release 13 or earlier to an optimized format. FILLMODE controls the display of all hatch objects created using AutoCAD Release 14 or later. or press ENTER When Blip mode is on. REGEN. objects drawn with BLIPMODE on objects drawn with BLIPMODE off To remove marker blips. or other commands that redraw or regenerate the drawing. BLIPMODE Controls the display of marker blips Command line: blipmode (or 'blipmode for transparent use) Enter mode [ON/OFF] <current>: Enter on or off. HPDOUBLE specifies whether a user-defined hatch is double-hatched. PICKSTYLE con- trols group selection and associative hatch selection. See Also System Variables BLIPMODE stores the Blip mode setting. SNAPBASE specifies the start point for the hatch pattern. BOUNDARY creates a region or a polyline from an enclosed area. ZOOM. HPNAME sets the hatch pattern name. HPBOUND specifies the type of boundary object that BHATCH creates. HPSCALE sets the hatch pattern scale. PAN.

Block Definition Dialog Box Defines and names a block. 122 | BLOCK . BLOCK displays prompts on the command line (see page 124).BLOCK Creates a block definition from objects you select Draw toolbar: Draw menu: Block ➤ Make Command line: block The Block Definition dialog box is displayed. numbers. The name can have up to 255 characters and can include letters. Name Names the block. if the system variable EXTNAMES is set to 1. blank spaces. and any special character not used by Microsoft® Windows® and AutoCAD for other purposes. If you enter –block at the Command prompt.

press ENTER to redisplay the Block Definition dialog box. Objects Selected Displays the number of selected objects. and OVERHEAD as valid block names. Convert to Block Converts the selected objects to a block instance in the drawing after you create the block. Select Objects Closes the Block Definition dialog box temporarily while you select the objects for the block.0.The block name and definition are saved in the current drawing. which defines a selection set. SH_SPOT. LIGHT. Z Specifies the Z coordinate value. X Specifies the X coordinate value. Base Point Specifies an insertion base point for the block. AVE_RENDER. The default value is 0.0. Y Specifies the Y coordinate value. Preview Icon Determines whether to save a preview icon with the block definition and specifies the source of the icon. Note You cannot use DIRECT. Do Not Include an Icon Specifies that no icon is created. When you finish selecting objects. Objects Specifies the objects to include in the new block and whether to retain or delete the selected objects or convert them to a block instance after you create the block. Quick Select Displays the Quick Select dialog box (see page 821). Retain Retains the selected objects as distinct objects in the drawing after you create the block. Pick Insertion Base Point Temporarily closes the dialog box so that you can specify an insertion base point in the current drawing. BLOCK | 123 . RM_SDB. Delete Deletes the selected objects from the drawing after you create the block.

Drag and Drop Units Specifies the units to which the block is scaled when it is dragged into a drawing using DesignCenter or i-drop. Description Specifies the text description associated with the block. Specify insertion base point: Specify a point (1) 1 AutoCAD uses the point specified as the base point for subsequent insertions of the block. If you enter the name of an existing block. numbers. The name can have up to 255 characters and can include letters.Create Icon from Block Geometry Creates a preview icon to be saved with the block definition from the geometry of the objects in the block. which you can use to associate a hyperlink with the block definition. However. new insertions of the block do not prompt for attributes unless the attribute definitions are included in the new block definition (use ATTREDEF to redefine blocks that contain attributes). BLOCK Command Line If you enter -block at the Command prompt. The base point is also the point about which you can rotate the block 124 | BLOCK . and any special character not used by Microsoft Windows and AutoCAD for other purposes if the system variable EXTNAMES is set to 1. you automatically update all references to that block. Redefine it? [Yes/No] <N>: Enter y or n. Enter block name or [?]: Enter a name or ? Block Name Names the block. Preview Image Displays an image of the preview icon you’ve specified. Attributes attached to existing block references remain unchanged in the drawing. a base point is the center of the block or its lower-left corner. or press ENTER By redefining a block. blank spaces. Typically. AutoCAD prompts you as follows: Block "NAME" already exists. BLOCK displays prompts on the command line. Hyperlink Opens the Insert Hyperlink dialog box (see page 416).

you can insert a block at any orientation in space by setting the UCS first. externally dependent blocks (blocks in an xref) are indicated with the notation xdep: XREFNAME where xrefname is the name of an externally referenced drawing. ?—List Previously Defined Blocks Lists the block names in the text window. When you insert the block into a drawing. BLOCK | 125 . and the name provided. its coordinate system is aligned parallel to the current UCS. external references (xrefs) are indicated with the notation Xref: resolved In addition. See Also See “Overview of Blocks” in the User’s Guide. the insertion base point. Entering a 3D point inserts the block at a specific elevation. Thus. Dependent Blocks: Number of externally dependent blocks in the list. Omitting the Z coordinate uses the current elevation. The following terms are used in the list: ■ ■ ■ ■ User Blocks: Number of user-defined blocks in the list. and then erases the selected objects from the drawing. A block with 0 rotation is oriented according to the UCS in effect when it was created. which is parallel to the UCS in effect at the time that you define the block. objects selected as a block The insertion base point becomes the origin of the block’s coordinate system. Select objects: Use an object selection method AutoCAD defines a block using the objects selected. You can restore the deleted objects by entering the OOPS command immediately after BLOCK. Enter block(s) to list <*>: Enter a name list or press ENTER In the list. External References: Number of xrefs in the list. Unnamed Blocks: Number of unnamed (anonymous) blocks in the drawing.during insertion.

AutoCAD displays a message describing the process as it proceeds. dimension. System Variables EXTNAMES sets the parameters for nongraphical names (such as linetypes and layers) stored in symbol tables. Commands BLOCK creates a block definition from objects you select.Commands -WBLOCK writes selected objects to a new drawing file using the command line. enter b1. MINSERT inserts multiple instances of a block in an array that is a single block reference. BLOCKICON Generates preview images for blocks displayed in DesignCenter File menu: Drawing Utilities ➤ Update Block Icons Command line: blockicon Enter block names <*>: Specify block names. After you enter the block names. or polyline into its constituent objects. You can enter a series of comma-delimited block names or wildcard characters. OOPS restores erased objects. to specify that block B1 and all two-character blocks ending with 2 should be updated. 126 | BLOCKICON . See Also See “Overview of Blocks” in the User’s Guide. WBLOCK writes selected objects to a drawing file. or press ENTER to update all blocks Use this command to generate icons for blocks created with an earlier release of AutoCAD.?2. ATTDEF creates an attribute definition for text that you can associate with a block. XREF controls xrefs. INSERT places a previously defined block or drawing in the current drawing. XPLODE breaks a block. Press ESC at any time to stop. ATTREDEF redefines a block and updates associated attributes. For example.

BOUNDARY displays prompts on the command line (see page 128). Boundary Creation Dialog Box Defines the object type. If you enter -boundary at the Command prompt. The Boundary Creation dialog box is a limited version of the Boundary Hatch and Fill dialog box. Enter the file name in the dialog box. Select objects or <all objects and viewports>: Press ENTER to select all objects and viewports or use an object selection method and press ENTER AutoCAD creates a bitmap file that contains the objects you select. prompts are displayed on the command line. boundary set. Note When the FILEDIA system variable is set to 0 (Off).BMPOUT Saves selected objects to a file in device-independent bitmap format Command line: bmpout The Create Raster File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box) is displayed. To access the other options in this dialog box. and island detection method for defining boundaries from points you specify. BOUNDARY Creates a region or a polyline from an enclosed area Draw menu: Boundary Command line: boundary The Boundary Creation dialog box is displayed. BMPOUT | 127 . use BHATCH. The file reflects what is displayed on the screen.

see “Boundary Hatch and Fill Dialog Box” on page 107. Once you set the available options. choose Pick Points to specify points in your drawing to create the boundaries. For information about all options in this dialog box. Specify internal point or [Advanced options]: Specify a point or enter a Internal Point Creates a boundary from existing objects that form an enclosed area. Specify a point inside the area. BOUNDARY displays prompts on the command line. Advanced Options Sets the method AutoCAD uses to create the boundary. Enter an option [Boundary set/Island detection/Object type]: press ENTER to return to the previous prompt 128 | BOUNDARY Enter an option or .For information about all options in this dialog box. see Boundary Hatch and Fill Dialog Box. BOUNDARY Command Line If you enter -boundary at the Command prompt.

BHATCH fills an enclosed area or selected objects with a hatch pattern. Solids toolbar: Draw menu: Solids ➤ Box Command line: box Specify corner of box or [CEnter]<0. BOX Creates a three-dimensional solid box Once you create a box. see the BHATCH command line option “Advanced” on page 118. Enter type of boundary object [Region/Polyline] <current>: Enter an option or press ENTER See Also Commands PLINE creates 2D polylines. For information about specifying island detection on the command line. Object Type Specifies the type of object AutoCAD creates as the boundary. REGION creates a region object from a selection set.Boundary Set Defines the set of objects AutoCAD analyzes when it creates a boundary from a specified point. you cannot stretch it or change its size.0>: Specify a point (1) or press ENTER for corner of box. System Variables HPBOUND controls the object type created by BHATCH and BOUNDARY. Island Detection Specifies whether AutoCAD uses objects within the outermost boundary as boundary objects.0. or enter c for center BOX | 129 . However. For information about defining a boundary set on the command line. you can extrude the faces of a box with SOLIDEDIT. see the BHATCH command line option “Advanced” on page 118.

and Z axes. 1 Specify center of box <0. The length corresponds to the X axis. and the height to the Z axis. Y. or height along the positive X. width. and Z axes. Specify length: Specify a distance Entering a positive value draws the length along the positive X. height Cube Creates a box with sides of equal length.Corner of Box Defines the first corner of the box. Y. Specify length: Specify a distance Specify width: Specify a distance Specify height: Specify a distance height length width Entering a positive value draws the length. Specify height: Specify a distance Entering a positive value draws the height along the positive Z axis of the current UCS. Y. and Z axes of the current UCS. width. and height values you specify. Y. Specify corner or [Cube/Length]: 1 Specify a point (2) or enter an option 2 Corner Specifies the other corner of the box. or height along the negative X. Entering a negative value draws the length. Entering a negative value draws the height along the negative Z axis. Entering a negative value draws the length along the negative X. length Length Creates a box with length. width.0. the width to the Y axis. Center Creates the box by using a specified center point.0>: Specify a point (1) or press ENTER Specify corner or [Cube/Length]: Specify a point or enter an option 130 | BOX . and Z axes of the current UCS.

and height values you specify. or specify the first break point (1) on an object BREAK | 131 . length width See Also See “Create 3D Solids” in the User’s Guide. Y. Cube Creates a box with sides of equal length. Commands 3D creates three-dimensional surface objects. and Z axes. the width to the Y axis. width. and Z axes of the current UCS. Entering a negative value draws the length. length Length Creates a box with length. Y. BREAK Breaks the selected object between two points Modify toolbar: Modify menu: Break Command line: break Select object: Use an object selection method. or height along the positive X. Entering a negative value draws the length along the negative X. and Z axes.Corner Specifies a point for the corner of the box. width. width. Specify length: Specify a distance Entering a positive value draws the length along the positive X. Y. and the height to the Z axis. The length corresponds to the X axis. and Z axes of the current UCS. Specify length: Specify a distance Specify width: Specify a distance Specify height: Specify a distance height Entering a positive value draws the length. or height along the negative X. Specify height: Specify a distance Entering a positive value draws the height along the positive Z axis of the current UCS. Entering a negative value draws the height along the negative Z axis. Y.

First Point Overrides the original first point with the new point that you specify.The prompts that are displayed next depend on how you select the object. AutoCAD converts a circle to an arc by removing a piece of the circle starting counterclockwise from the first to the second point. to break off one end of a line. If you select the object by using your pointing device. arc. circles. Lines. You can do this by entering @ to specify the second point. specify the second point beyond the end to be removed. 2 1 before break Specify second break point or [First point]: Specify the second break point (2) or enter f after break Second Break Point Specifies the second point for AutoCAD to use to break the object. donuts. 132 | BREAK 2 . enter the same point for both the first and second points. 2 1 1 See Also See “Create Breaks” in the User’s Guide. or polyline. If the second point is not on the object. AutoCAD selects the nearest point on the object. At the next prompt you can continue by specifying the second point or overriding the first point. AutoCAD both selects the object and treats the selection point as the first break point. and several other object types can be split into two objects or have one end removed. splines. Specify first break point: Specify second break point: AutoCAD erases the portion of the object between the two points that you specify. polylines. therefore. To split an object in two without erasing a portion. ellipses. arcs.

Note BROWSER requires that you have Netscape Navigator 3.0 (or later) or Microsoft Internet Explorer 3. see “Menu.0 (or later) installed. which automatically connects to the location you specify. you don’t need to enter http:// before the location Pressing ENTER displays your web browser. Because BROWSER does not append “http://” to web locations.BROWSER Launches the default web browser defined in your system’s registry Web toolbar: Command line: browser Enter Web location (URL) <current>: Press ENTER or enter a new location. Help. and Miscellaneous File Names” on page 635. you can specify an FTP or file location to your default web browser. BROWSER | 133 . See Also To specify the default Internet location launched by your browser. System Variables INETLOCATION stores default URL that is opened when you issue the BROWSER command.

134 .

and INS. You can insert AutoLISP® variables into the arithmetic expression and assign the value of the expression back to an AutoLISP variable. Numeric operators Operator Operation () Groups expressions ^ Indicates exponentiation *. END. The expressions can access existing geometry using the object snap functions such as CEN. real. subtracts CAL | 135 . vectors./ Multiplies. Understanding Syntax of Expressions CAL evaluates expressions according to standard mathematical rules of precedence: ■ ■ ■ Expressions in parentheses first. and addition and subtraction last Operators of equal precedence from left to right Numeric Expressions Numeric expressions are real integer numbers and functions combined with the operators in the following table. – Adds. multiplication and division second.CAL Evaluates mathematical and geometric expressions Command line: cal (or 'cal for transparent use) CAL is an online geometry calculator that evaluates point (vector). divides +. or numbers. starting with the innermost set Operators in standard order: exponents first. or integer expressions. You can use these arithmetic and vector expressions in any AutoCAD® command that expects points.

y. divides a vector by a real number a*[x. and functions combined with operators in the following table. as shown in the following examples: 136 | CAL . The first two points are in spherical coordinates. subtracts vectors (points) [a.6 (5.z] = [a*x.b+y.c+z] The following are examples of vector expressions: A+[1. 2] adds two points and subtracts a third point.2.b.c]*[x.a*z] +. Vector operators Operator Operation () Groups expressions & Determines the vector product of vectors (as a vector) [a. / Multiplies. vectors.The following are examples of numeric expressions: 3 3 + 0. 3. (c*x) – (a*z) .– Adds. (a*y) – (b*x) ] * Determines the scalar product of vectors (as a real number) [a. Formatting Feet and Inches Enter feet and inches using the following format: feet'-inches" or feet'inches" The expression converts to a real number based on inches.02.y.c] + [x.z] = ax + by + cz *.3] units relative to point A.3] provides the point positioned [1.b.5.c]&[x.z] = [a+x. The expression [2<45<45] + [2<45<0] – [1.y. numbers.8^2) + PI Vector Expressions A vector expression is a collection of points.a*y.z] = [ (b*z) – (c*y) .y.b.2.

such as pld and plt.2'-5" converts to 2*12+5 = 29 5" converts to 0*12+5 = 5 2' converts to 2*12+0 = 24 Formatting Angles The default units for angles are decimal degrees. A point defines a location in space. CAL | 137 . return a vector. and 100 grads is equal to 90 degrees. Pi radians is equal to 180 degrees. return a point. p2. The notation v1. The following examples show ways of entering angles: 124. v2.r2. Formatting Points and Vectors A point or vector is a set of three real expressions enclosed in brackets ([ ]): [r1. In drawings. Some CAL functions. You can omit the minutes or seconds if they are zero. Other functions.r3] The notation p1. Using Points and Vectors Both points and vectors are pairs or triples of real numbers.6r 14g 5d10'20" 0d10'20" AutoCAD converts angles entered in any format to decimal degrees. and so forth designates vectors. Enter a number followed by r to enter angles in radians. Enter a number followed by g to enter angles in grads. and vectors are displayed as lines with arrows. such as nor and vec. points are displayed as dots. Enter angles using the following format: degdmin'sec" You must enter 0 and d (0d) when entering an angle that is less than 1 degree (minutes and seconds only). but a vector defines a direction (or translation) in space. and so forth designates points.

z] You can omit the following components of a point or vector: coordinate values of zero and comma(s) immediately preceding the right bracket (]).0.0] [.0] In the following example. the angles are 10+20=30 degrees and 45 degrees..3] [ ] is the same as [0.4] The following example uses the Endpoint object snap and the vector [2. the point is entered in the relative spherical coordinate system with respect to the WCS.2*1.1. end + [2. 20 minutes.4–1.z] WCS (instead of UCS) Uses the * prefix [*x. The following are valid points: [1.y..2] is the same as [1. The distance is 1+2=3. Point formats Coordinate system Point format Polar [dist<angle] Cylindrical [dist<angle. [@*1+2<10+20<45d20"] The following is a valid point that contains arithmetic expressions as its components: [2*(1. 138 | CAL .0.CAL supports points expressed in all AutoCAD formats.0.3] is the same as [0.y.2.z] Spherical [dist<angle1<angle2] Relative Uses the @ prefix [@x.3] to calculate a point that is offset from a selected endpoint.3).3] The calculated point is offset two units in the X direction and three units in the Z direction relative to the selected endpoint.0+3.0.

This example saves the values of two expressions in AutoLISP variables P1 and R1.0] >> Select entity for CEN snap: Select a circle or an arc Command: cal >> Expression: R1=dist(end. enclose the variable name in apostrophes ('). precede the arithmetic expression with the variable name and the equal sign (=). such as +. Command: cal >> Expression: P1=cen+[1.1] Specify radius of circle or [Diameter] <last>: 'cal >> Expression: R1+0. or /. The variables must be one of the following types: real. A+[5.end)/3 >> Select entity for END snap: Select an object with an endpoint This example uses the values of variables P1 and R1: Command: circle Specify center point for circle or [3P/2P/Ttr (tangent tangent radius)]: >> Expression: P1+[0.5 'cal Using AutoCAD System Variables You can use the getvar AutoLISP function to read the value of an AutoCAD system variable. or 2D or 3D point (vector). for example: 'number-of-holes' Assigning Values to AutoLISP Variables To assign a value to an AutoLISP variable. *. integer. you can use the value of this variable for other calculations. This example defines a point positioned 5 units in the X direction and 1 unit in the Y direction from the point stored in AutoLISP variable A.1] If you enter an AutoLISP variable with a name containing a character with special meaning in CAL. –. The syntax is (getvar "variable_name") CAL | 139 . Later.Using AutoLISP Variables You can use AutoLISP variables within arithmetic expressions.

inch.cm) Using Standard Numeric Functions CAL supports the standard numeric functions in the following table. the number must be between –1 and 1 atan(real) Arctangent of the number ln(real) Natural log of the number log(real) Base-10 log of the number exp(real) Natural exponent of the number exp10(real) Base-10 exponent of the number sqr(real) Square of the number sqrt(real) Square root of the number. to_unit) The following example converts the value 1 from inches to centimeters: cvunit(1.The following example uses getvar to obtain the point that is the center of the view in the current viewport. the number must be between –1 and 1 acos(real) Arccosine of the number. Numeric functions 140 | CAL Function Description sin(angle) Sine of the angle cos(angle) Cosine of the angle tang(angle) Tangent of the angle asin(real) Arcsine of the number. from_unit. (setq c (getvar "viewctr")) Converting Units of Measurement The cvunit AutoLISP function converts either a number or a point from one unit of measurement to another. The syntax is cvunit(value. See the Support/acad. the number must be nonnegative .unt file for a list of units that you can convert.

cen) Select entity for CEN snap: Specify a circle or an arc Specify second point of displacement or <use first point as displacement>: Specify a point or press ENTER CAL | 141 . r2d(pi) converts the constant pi to 180 degrees d2r(angle) Angles in degrees converted to radians. for example. The following example uses CAL to move selected objects three units in the direction from the center of one selected circle to the center of another selected circle: Command: move Select objects Specify base point or displacement: 'cal >> Expression: 3*vec1(cen. d2r(180) converts 180 degrees to radians and returns the value of the constant pi pi The constant pi Calculating a Vector from Two Points The functions vec and vec1 calculate a vector from two points.p2) Provides the vector from point p1 to point p2.Numeric functions (continued) Function Description abs(real) Absolute value of the number round(real) Number rounded to the nearest integer trunc(real) Integer portion of the number r2d(angle) Angles in radians converted to degrees. for example. vec(p1. vec1(p1.p2) Provides the unit vector from point p1 to point p2.

b) Determines unit vector direction from point a to point b.b) Determines vector of length L in the direction from point a to point b. L*vec1(a.b) Determines vector translation from point a to point b. Note that [5<20] is a vector in polar coordinates.b) b a a+v 142 | CAL v b a a+[5<20] . vec1(a.b) vec1(a.b) a L*vec1(a. a+[5<20] Determines point b positioned 5 units away from point a under the angle of 20 degrees. a+v Determines point b.The following examples illustrate the meaning of vector and point calculations. Examples of vector and point calculations Expression Meaning vec(a. b b a a vec(a. which is a translation of the point a through vector v.

1] >> Select entity for CEN snap: Select a circle or an arc Specify next point or [Close/Undo]: 'cal >> Expression: @+3*vec1(cen.2. the dist is the length of the vector. In spherical coordinates (dist<ang<ang). use the cur function.2] Obtaining the Last-Specified Point Use the @ character in the expression to obtain the coordinate of the last point. AutoCAD prompts you to specify a point and uses the coordinate values of the point in the expression. The second point of the line is three units away from the first point. CAL | 143 . a nonnegative real number.cen) The first point of the line is one unit in the Y direction from the center of the first selected circle.6. The following example calculates the length of the vector [1.4.2*[3. abs(v) Calculates the length of vector v.2. This expression produces a point that is offset from the selected point.3]: abs([1.3]) Obtaining a Point by Cursor To enter a point using the pointing device. The cur function sets the value of the AutoCAD variable LASTPOINT. The point coordinate values are expressed in terms of the current UCS. The direction of the line is from the center of the first selected circle to the center of the second selected circle. as shown in the following example: Command: line Specify first point: 'cal >> Expression: cen+[0.0]—the result of 1. The following example adds the vector [3.Calculating the Length of a Vector The abs function calculates the length of a vector.2]— to the point you select. cur+1.2.2*[3.

CAL Snap modes set the value of the LASTPOINT system variable. 144 | CAL . enter cen. enter only the three-character name. AutoCAD prompts you to select an object and returns the coordinate of the appropriate snap point. Using arithmetic expressions with Snap modes greatly simplifies entering coordinates relative to other objects. When you use these Snap modes. when you use the Center Snap mode. It then determines the midpoint between the center of the circle or arc and the end of the selected object.Using AutoCAD Snap Modes in Arithmetic Expressions You can use the AutoCAD Snap modes as parts of arithmetic expressions. CAL Snap modes Abbreviation Snap mode END ENDPOINT INS INSERT INT INTERSECTION MID MIDPOINT CEN CENTER NEA NEAREST NOD NODE QUA QUADRANT PER PERPENDICULAR TAN TANGENT The following example uses the Center and Endpoint Snap modes in a CAL expression: (cen+end)/2 CAL prompts for a circle or arc and an object. For example.

u2w(p1) Converts point p1 expressed in the current UCS to the WCS. Y. X and Z components are set to 0. AutoCAD assumes all coordinates to be relative to the current UCS.0 yzof(p1) Y and Z components of a point. and Z Components of a Point or Vector The following functions filter the X. Y and Z components are set to 0.0 rxof(p1) X component of a point CAL | 145 . The following functions convert points between UCS and WCS. w2u(p1) Converts point p1 expressed in the WCS to the current UCS. X component is set to 0.0 xof(p1) X component of a point.1] The following example uses the Endpoint Snap mode to calculate the centroid of a triangle defined by three endpoints: (end+end+end)/3 Converting Points between UCS and WCS Normally.Using the Midpoint Snap mode. You can use w2u to find the WCS origin in terms of the current UCS: w2u([0. Y component is set to 0.0 xzof(p1) X and Z components of a point.0 zof(p1) Z component of a point. Z component is set to 0. and Z components of a point or vector.0 yof(p1) Y component of a point.0. in the following example CAL prompts for an object and returns a point one unit in the Y direction from the midpoint of the selected object: mid+[. Point-filter functions Function Description xyof(p1) X and Y components of a point. X and Y components are set to 0. Y.0]) Filtering the X.

Point-filter functions (continued) Function Description ryof(p1) Y component of a point rzof(p1) Z component of a point The following example provides the Z component of a point expressed in spherical coordinates: zof([2<45<45]) The following example provides a point whose X and Y coordinate values are taken from point a and the Z coordinate value from point b: xyof(a)+zof(b) Calculating a Point on a Line The plt and pld functions return a point on a given line.p2. plt(p1. as shown in the following example: .p2.origin.dist) Calculates a point on the line passing through points p1 and p2. The parameter t defines the parametric position of the point on the line. The parameter dist defines the distance of the point from the point p1.t) Calculates a point on the line passing through points p1 and p2.ang) 146 | CAL Rotates point p through angle ang about the Z axis passing through the point origin. pld(p1. The following are examples of the parameter t: If t=0 the point is p1 If t=0. You can specify the position of the point on the line either by its distance from the first point or parametrically by a t parameter.5 the point is the midpoint between p1 and p2 If t=1 the point is p2 Rotating a Point About an Axis The rot function rotates a point about an axis and returns the resulting point. rot(p.

p3.p2) and (p3.p4. as shown in the following example.p2) Determines the shortest distance between point p and the line passing through points p1 and p2. p1 and p2.p4).p5). ilp(p1.ang origin p rot(p. AxP2 ang p AxP1 Obtaining an Intersection Point The ill and ilp functions determine intersection points.p4.p4) Determines the intersection point between two lines (p1. ill(p1.p2.p2. This is the same as the vector expression abs(p1–p2).p2) Determines the distance between two points. The axis is oriented from the first point to the second point. p5) Determines the intersection point between a line (p1. CAL | 147 .p2) and a plane passing through three points (p3.AxP1. ang) Rotates point p through an angle ang about the axis passing through points AxP1 and AxP2.AxP2. AutoCAD considers all points three-dimensional.p1. dpl(p.p3. Calculating a Distance dist(p1.

p p2 90× p3 p1 The following example returns half the distance between the centers of two selected objects: dist(cen.p1 p2 shortest distance 90× p dpp(p.4].p2.4 and a plane you define by selecting three endpoints: dpp([3.2.p2.p3).end.p1.2.cen)/2 The following example finds the distance between the point 3.p2) Determines the distance between two points p1 and p2.p3) Determines the distance from a point p to a plane defined by three points (p1. end. end) 148 | CAL . dist(p1. This is the same as the vector expression abs(p1–p2).

ang(p1. CAL | 149 . rad Determines the radius of a selected object. The vector v is considered 2D. or a 2D polyline arc segment.p2). The following example uses rad with the CIRCLE command. an arc.p1) and (apex.p1. or to a user-specified axis. in the twodimensional case. ang(apex. oriented from p1 to p2. projected on the XY plane of the current UCS. The points are considered 2D.p2) Determines the angle between the X axis and the line (p1. ang(v) Determines the angle between the X axis and vector v. projected on the XY plane of the current UCS.Obtaining a Radius The rad function determines the radius of a selected object. arc or polyline segment for RAD function: Select the circle arc new circle center Obtaining an Angle The ang function determines the angle between two lines.p2). projected on the XY plane of the current UCS. The radius of the new circle is two-thirds of the radius of the selected polyline arc segment: Command: circle Specify center point for circle or [3P/2P/Ttr (tangent tangent radius)]: cen of Select the circle Specify radius of circle or [Diameter] <last>: 'cal >> Expression: 2/3*rad >> Select circle. in the three-dimensional case.p2) Determines the angle between lines (apex. Angles are measured counterclockwise with respect to either the X axis. The object can be a circle. The points are considered 2D.

The last parameter.p2) ang (apex.ang(apex. is used to define the orientation of the angle.p) p1 You can determine the angle between the two sides of a triangle using the ang function.p2. p) Determines the angle between lines (apex.p1. and then select the two opposite vertices. point p.p1) and (apex. The vector defines the direction of the normal. p2) p p2 Y X 0.end. You can add this normal vector to a point to obtain another point. not a point. as shown in the following example: Command: cal >> Expression: ang(end.0 X ang(p1.0 ang(v) p2 apex apex p1 0.p2). Y p2 v p1 0. 150 | CAL .0 ang(p1. not a location in space. The lines are considered 3D.end) Select the apex of the angle. The angle is measured counterclockwise with respect to the axis going from apex to p. The following examples show how angles are measured.p2.p1. Calculating a Normal Vector The nor function calculates the unit normal vector (a vector perpendicular to a line or plane).

p3) CAL | 151 . The orientation of the resulting normal vector points to the left from the original line (p1.nor Determines the three-dimensional unit normal vector of a selected circle.p2. p2. and p3. projected on the XY plane of the current UCS. Both vectors are considered 2D. The orientation of the normal vector is such that the given points go counterclockwise with respect to the normal. arc. The orientation of the resulting normal vector points to the left of the original vector v. nor(p1.p2).p2) nor (p1. or polyline arc segment. The following illustrations show how normal vectors are calculated: nor nor(v) p3 p2 p2 p1 p1 nor (p1.p2.p3) Determines the 3D unit normal vector to a plane defined by the three points p1. This normal vector is the Z coordinate of the object coordinate system (OCS) of the selected object.p2. nor(v) Determines the two-dimensional unit normal vector to vector v.p2) Determines the 2D unit normal vector to line p1. The line is oriented from p1 to p2. nor(p1.

end) Unit vector from two endpoints See Also See “Use the Geometry Calculator” in the User’s Guide.end.end) Vector from two endpoints vee1 vec1(end.The following example sets the view direction perpendicular to a selected object. Shortcut functions Function Shortcut for Description dee dist(end. AutoCAD displays the object in plan view and does not distort the object by the parallel projection.end) Intersection of two lines defined by four endpoints mee (end+end)/2 Midpoint between two endpoints nee nor(end. These functions combine some of the previously defined functions with the Endpoint Snap mode. 152 | CAL . Command: vpoint Current view direction: VIEWDIR=current Specify a view point or [Rotate] <display compass and tripod>: 'cal >> Expression: nor >> Select circle.end) Distance between two endpoints ille ill(end.end) Unit vector in the XY plane and normal to two endpoints vee vec(end. arc or polyline for NOR function: Using Shortcut Functions The following functions are shortcuts for commonly used expressions.end.

enter the CAMERA command before starting 3DORBIT. To set the camera and target locations for a 3D Orbit view.CAMERA Sets a different camera and target location Setting the camera and target locations gives you a different view of objects in your drawing. target at B camera location and target point camera at B. target at A View toolbar: Command line: camera Current camera position is: current Current camera target is: current Specify new camera position <current>: Enter a value or specify a point Sets the point from which you view the objects in your model. camera at A. CAMERA | 153 . Specify new camera target <current>: Enter a value or specify a point Sets the point in your model that you are viewing.

Modify toolbar: Modify menu: Chamfer Command line: chamfer (TRIM mode) Current chamfer Dist1 = current. associativity is maintained.CHAMFER Bevels the edges of objects If both objects you want to chamfer are on the same layer. AutoCAD creates the chamfer line on the current layer. First Line Specifies the first of two edges required to define a two-dimensional chamfer. This is also true for color. 154 | CHAMFER . AutoCAD deletes the segment and replaces it with a chamfer line. Otherwise. and lineweight. Dist2 = current Select first line or [Polyline/Distance/Angle/Trim/Method/mUltiple]: first selected line second selected line result Note Chamfering an associative hatch whose boundary was defined from line segments removes hatch associativity. or the edge of a three-dimensional solid to chamfer. they must be adjacent to each other or separated by no more than one segment. If they’re separated by one line or arc segment. AutoCAD creates the chamfer on that layer. Select second line: If the two lines you select are polyline segments. If you defined the boundary from a polyline. linetype.

select edge edge selected chamfered edge Loop Switches to Edge Loop mode.If you select an edge on a 3D solid. enter l. or press ENTER first base surface second base surface Edge Selects an individual edge to chamfer. Select an edge or [Loop]: first edge selected Select an edge. Enter surface selection option [Next/OK (current)] <OK>: Enter n or o. Base surface selection. or press ENTER Entering o or pressing ENTER sets the selected surface as the base surface. Entering n selects either of the two surfaces adjacent to the selected edge. Specify base surface chamfer distance <current>: Specify other surface chamfer distance <current>: After you select the base surface and the chamfer distances. you must indicate which one of the two surfaces adjacent to the edge is the base surface. select the edges of the base surface to chamfer. CHAMFER | 155 . You can select edges individually or all the edges at once.. or press ENTER Edge Loop Selects all edges on the base surface.. enter e. Select an edge loop or [Edge]: Select an edge.

Specify first chamfer distance <current>: Specify second chamfer distance <current>: equal distances unequal distances If you set both distances to zero. Polyline Chamfers an entire 2D polyline.selecting edge loop Edge edge selected chamfered edge loop Switches to Edge mode. If the polyline includes segments that are too short to accommodate the chamfer distance. those segments are not chamfered. AutoCAD extends or trims the two lines so they end at the same point. 156 | CHAMFER . Chamfers become new segments of the polyline. Select 2D polyline: AutoCAD chamfers the intersecting line segments at each vertex of the polyline. selected polyline result Distance Sets the distance of the chamfer from the endpoint of the selected edge.

Enter Trim mode option [Trim/No trim] <current>: Note Trim sets the TRIMMODE system variable to 1. AutoCAD creates the chamfer without trimming the selected lines. AutoCAD extends or trims them so that they do. If TRIMMODE is set to 0. Specify chamfer length on the first line <current>: Specify chamfer angle from the first line <current>: chamfer distance first selected second selected angle Trim Controls whether AutoCAD trims the selected edges to the chamfer line endpoints. CHAMFER trims the intersecting lines to the endpoints of the chamfer line. If the TRIMMODE system variable is set to 1. If the selected lines do not intersect. Enter trim method [Distance/Angle] <current>: Multiple Bevels the edges of more than one set of objects. AutoCAD displays the main prompt and the Select Second Object prompt repeatedly until you press ENTER to end the command. Method Controls whether AutoCAD uses two distances or a distance and an angle to create the chamfer. CHAMFER | 157 .Angle Sets the chamfer distances using a chamfer distance for the first line and an angle for the second line. No Trim sets TRIMMODE to 0.

or press ENTER to enter new values 158 | CHANGE . TRIMMODE controls whether selected edges are trimmed to the endpoints of the chamfer line. Commands FILLET rounds and fillets the edges of objects. CHAMFERB sets the second chamfer distance. CHAMFERD sets the chamfer angle. you get varying results depending upon the object selection sequence. If you select lines and other changeable objects in the same selection set. the objects selected must be parallel to the current user coordinate system (UCS). Specify change point or [Properties]: Specify a new point. CHAMFERC sets the chamfer length.If you enter an option other than First Object at the main prompt. The easiest way to use CHANGE is to select only lines in a selection set or select only objects other than lines in a selection set. CHANGE Changes the properties of existing objects Command line: change Select objects: Except for zero-thickness lines. All the chamfers you created with the Multiple option are removed if you click Undo. the prompts for that option are displayed and then the main prompt is displayed again. CHAMMODE controls whether CHAMFER uses two distances or a distance and an angle to create a chamfer. System Variables CHAMFERA sets the first chamfer distance. See Also See “Create Chamfers” in the User’s Guide.

2 1 1 Ortho off Circles 2 Ortho on Changes the circle radius. AutoCAD modifies the selected lines so that they become parallel to either the X or the Y axis rather than moving their endpoints to the specified coordinate. CHANGE | 159 . Enter new text style <current>: If the text has a fixed height. AutoCAD skips the next prompt. Specify new height <current>: Specify new rotation angle <current>: Enter new text <current>: AutoCAD highlights the next object and displays the prompts relating to it. AutoCAD moves on to the next circle and repeats the prompt. If Ortho mode is on. Lines Moves the endpoints of the selected lines that are closest to the change point to the new point.Change Point or Values Changes the selected objects. Pressing ENTER leaves the text in its original position. Specify new text insertion point <no change>: Specifying a new location repositions the text. If you selected more than one circle. The result depends on the type of objects you select. Specify new circle radius <no change>: Text Changes text position and other properties. unless Ortho mode is on.

AutoCAD displays varies as the current value. Enter property to change [Color/Elev/LAyer/LType/ltScale/LWeight/Thickness/ PLotstyle]: Note The Plotstyle option is displayed only when you are using named plot styles. 160 | CHANGE . Specify new block insertion point: press ENTER Specify a point (1). Pressing ENTER leaves the block in its original position. Pressing ENTER leaves the text at its original position. AutoCAD skips the next prompt. Enter new text style <current>: If the text has a fixed height. Specify new height <current>: Specify new rotation angle <current>: Enter new text <current>: Enter new tag <current>: Enter new prompt <current>: Enter new default value <current>: Blocks Changes the location or rotation of a block. Properties Modifies properties of existing objects. or Specifying a new location repositions the block.Attribute Definitions Changes the text and text properties of an attribute that is not part of a block. Specify new text insertion point: Specifying a new location repositions the text. 1 Specify new block rotation angle <current>: AutoCAD rotates the block about its insertion point to the specified angle. If you select several objects with different values for the property you want to change.

the object assumes the color of the layer on which it is located. enter co. to change a color to red. Enter new color [Truecolor/COlorbook]<current>: Enter a color name or a number from 1 through 255. Color Changes the color of the selected objects. enter red or 1. Specify new elevation <current>: You can change the elevation of an object only if all its points have the same Z value. True Color Specifies a true color to be used for the selected object. If you enter bylayer. enter bylayer or byblock. If you enter byblock. the object inherits the color of the block of which it is a component. enter t. Green. The Enter Property to Change prompt is redisplayed after each option is completed.You can change several properties at a time. Red. Enter Color Book name: Enter the name of a color book that has been installed such as PANTONE® If you enter a color book name. CHANGE | 161 . Blue: Enter three integer values from 0 to 255 separated by commas to specify a true color Color Book Specifies a color from a loaded color book to used for the selected object. AutoCAD prompts you to enter the color name in the color book. or press ENTER For example. Enter color name: Enter the name of a color included in the selected color book such as Pantone®573 Elev Changes the Z-axis elevation of 2D objects.

When you plot the drawing. Plotstyle Changes the plot style of the selected objects. If this procedure fails. Specify new thickness <current>: Changing the thickness of a 3D polyline. or layout viewport object has no effect. use LINETYPE to load the linetype. If you enter a value that is not a predefined value. Enter Plot Style or [?] <current>: Enter a name or enter ? Plot Style 162 | CHANGE Assigns the plot style to the selected objects.lin. . y Enter new layer name <current>: y Ltype x x Elev = 0 Elev = 2 Changes the linetype of the selected objects. Specify new linetype scale <current>: Lweight Changes the lineweight of the selected objects. Lineweight values are predefined values. acad. the closest predefined lineweight is assigned to the selected objects. Ltscale Changes the linetype scale factor of the selected objects. AutoCAD tries to load it from the standard linetype library file.Layer z z Changes the layer of the selected objects. dimension. A plot style is a collection of property settings that is saved in a plot style table. objects are plotted with the properties defined in the designated plot style. Plot styles assigned to objects can be overridden by other plot style assignments. Enter new lineweight <current>: Thickness Changes the Z-direction thickness of 2D objects. Enter new linetype name <current>: If the new linetype is not loaded.

If a recommended fix is not available. Replace With Lists possible replacements for the current standards violation. This button is unavailable if a recommended fix does not exist or if an item is not highlighted in the Replace With list. If a recommended fix is available. Preview of Changes Indicates the properties of the nonstandard AutoCAD object that will be changed if the fix currently selected in the Replace With list is applied. CHECKSTANDARDS | 163 . Next Problem Advances to the next nonstandard AutoCAD object in the current drawing without applying a fix. and advances to the next nonstandard object in the current drawing.?—List Plot Styles See Also Commands Lists all the plot style names defined in the drawing. Check Standards Dialog Box Analyzes the current drawing for standards violations. Fix Fixes the nonstandard AutoCAD object using the item currently selected in the Replace With list. and then click Fix. no items are highlighted in the Replace With list. To fix a problem. CHPROP and PROPERTIES perform the property functions of CHANGE without requiring the selected objects to be parallel to the current UCS. CHECKSTANDARDS Checks the current drawing for standards violations CAD Standards toolbar: Tools menu: CAD Standards ➤ Check Command line: checkstandards The Check Standards dialog box is displayed. it is preceded by a check mark. Problem Provides a description of a nonstandard object in the current drawing. select a replacement from the Replace With list.

Enter new color [Truecolor/COlorbook]<current>: Enter a color name or a number from 1 through 255. Settings Displays the CAD Standards Settings dialog box.Mark This Problem as Ignored Flags the current problem as ignored. If the Show Ignored Problems option is turned off in the CAD Standards Settings dialog box. linetype. the object assumes the color of the layer on which it is located. AutoCAD displays varies as the current value. or press ENTER For example. enter red or 1. which specifies additional settings for the Check Standards dialog box and the Configure Standards dialog box. thickness. If you enter bylayer. lineweight. enter bylayer or byblock. If you select several objects with different values for the property you want to change. enter t. to change a color to red. and plot style of an object Command line: chprop Select objects: Enter property to change [Color/LAyer/LType/ltScale/LWeight/Thickness/ PLotstyle]: Note The Plotstyle option is displayed only when you are using named plot styles. layer. If you enter byblock. 164 | CHPROP . the object inherits the color of the block of which it is a component. Color Changes the color of the selected objects. enter co. problems flagged as ignored are not displayed the next time the drawing is checked. CHPROP Changes the color. linetype scale factor. Close Closes the Check Standards dialog box without applying a fix to the standards violation currently displayed in Problem.

Blue: Enter three integer values from 0 to 255 separated by commas to specify a true color Color Book Specifies a color from a loaded color book to used for the selected object. AutoCAD tries to load it from the standard linetype library file. Green. Ltscale Changes the linetype scale factor of the selected objects. the closest predefined lineweight is assigned to the selected objects. Specify new linetype scale <current>: Lweight Changes the lineweight of the selected objects. If you enter a value that is not a predefined value. Enter color name: Enter the name of a color included in the selected color book such as PANTONE® 573 Layer Changes the layer of the selected objects. use LINETYPE to load the linetype. AutoCAD prompts you to enter the color name in the color book. Enter new layer name <current>: Ltype Changes the linetype of the selected objects.True Color Specifies a true color to be used for the selected object. If this procedure fails. Enter new lineweight <current>: CHPROP | 165 . Enter Color Book name: Enter the name of a color book that has been installed such as PANTONE® If you enter a color book name. acad. Red.lin. Lineweight values are predefined values. Enter new linetype name <current>: If the new linetype is not loaded.

Enter Plot Style or [?] <current>: Enter a name or enter ? Plot Style Assigns the plot style to the selected objects. See Also Commands PROPERTIES displays the Properties palette. 166 | CIRCLE . or layout viewport object has no effect. dimension. Specify new thickness <current>: Changing the thickness of a 3D polyline.Thickness Changes the Z-direction thickness of 2D objects. objects are plotted with the properties defined in the designated plot style. Plotstyle Changes the plot style of the selected objects. A plot style is a collection of property settings that is saved in a plot style table. or you can select objects to which the circle is tangent. This option is displayed only when you are using named plot styles. ?—List Plot Styles Lists all the plot styles defined in the drawing. CHANGE changes object properties from the command line for objects that are parallel to the current UCS. Plot styles assigned to objects can be overridden by other plot style assignments. When you plot the drawing. in which you can view or modify properties of the selected objects. CIRCLE Creates a circle You can create a circle by beginning with the center point or one of three points on the circumference.

Draws a circle using the center point and a specified distance for the diameter. or press ENTER 1 2 Radius radius Diameter 1 2 diameter Defines the radius of the circle. use the Isocircle option of the ELLIPSE command. The Isocircle option is available for ELLIPSE only when the Style option of Snap mode is set to Isometric (see DSETTINGS). enter a value. 2 3 Specify first point on circle: Specify a point (1) Specify second point on circle: Specify a point (2) Specify third point on circle: Specify a point (3) 3P CIRCLE | 167 . Enter a value.Note To draw an isometric circle. The distance between this point and the center point determines the radius of the circle. or specify a point (2). enter a value. or press ENTER 3P (Three Points) 1 Draws a circle based on three points on the circumference. Specify diameter of circle <current>: Specify a point (2). Specify radius of circle or [Diameter]: Specify a point. enter d. Draw toolbar: Draw menu: Circle Command line: circle Specify center point for circle or [3P (Three Points)/2P (Two Points)/Ttr (tan tan radius)]: Specify a point or enter an option Center Point Draws a circle based on a center point and a diameter or a radius.

Radius) Draws a circle with a specified radius tangent to two objects. CLOSE Closes the current drawing File menu: Close Command line: close AutoCAD closes the current drawing. or line Specify point on object for second tangent of circle: Select a circle. AutoCAD prompts you to save or discard the changes. arc. AutoCAD draws the circle of the specified radius whose tangent points are closest to the selected points. tan. If you modified the drawing since it was last saved. 168 | CLOSE . Tangent. Commands The Isocircle option of the ELLIPSE command draws an isometric circle. tan. arc.2P (Two Points) 1 Draws a circle based on two endpoints of the diameter. System Variables CIRCLERAD stores the default value for the circle radius. radius See Also See “Draw Circles” in the User’s Guide. Specify point on object for first tangent of circle: Select a circle. Specify first endpoint of circle’s diameter: Specify a point (1) Specify second endpoint of circle’s diameter: Specify a point (2) 2 2P TTR (Tangent. or line Specify radius of circle <current>: Sometimes more than one circle matches the specified criteria.

COLOR Sets the color for new objects Format menu: Color Command line: color (or 'color for transparent use) The Select Color dialog box is displayed. See Also Commands CLOSE closes the current drawing if there have been no changes since the drawing was last saved. COLOR displays prompts on the command line (see page 173). you must use the SAVEAS command. True Colors. Select Color Dialog Box You can use the Select Color dialog box to define the color of objects by selecting from the 255 AutoCAD Color Index (ACI) colors. in which you can save any changes to the drawing before closing it. To save changes to a read-only file. and Color Book colors. CLOSEALL Closes all currently open drawings Window menu: Close All Command line: closeall Closes all open drawings. A message box is displayed for each unsaved drawing.You can close a file that has been opened in Read-only mode if you have made no changes or if you are willing to discard changes. If you enter -color at the Command prompt. CLOSEALL | 169 .

AutoCAD Color Index (ACI) Specifies a color for new objects using the AutoCAD Color Index. Index Color Indicates the ACI color value for the selected color. Red. depending on your background color) until you group the objects into a block and insert the block. Green.color numbers 10–249 color numbers 1–9 color numbers 250–255 color BYBLOCK or BYLAYER color name or number current color preview tile Index Color Tab (Select Color Dialog Box) Specifies color settings using the 255 AutoCAD Color Index (ACI) colors. Blue Indicates the RGB color value for the selected color. The colors being used in available blocks are displayed next to the BYBLOCK button. When you click this button. This palette contains colors 1 through 255. the color assigned to the object’s layer is selected. When you insert the block into a drawing. 170 | COLOR . the color assigned to the block is selected. Byblock Specifies that new objects use the default color (white or black. The colors being used in available layers are displayed next to the BYLAYER button. the name or number of the color is displayed in the Color box as the current color. the objects in the block inherit the current Color setting. If you select an ACI color. Bylayer Specifies that new objects assume the color assigned to the layer on which you create them. Once the new object is part of a block.

Adjusting this value effects the RGB value. Color Specifies a color name. Green. By manipulating the values of these properties. Old Displays the previously selected color of the object. Saturation.Note The BYLAYER and BYBLOCK options do not apply to the LIGHT command. Valid hue values are from 0 to 360 degrees. Hues represent a specific wavelength of light within the visible spectrum. the BYLAYER and BYBLOCK colors. saturation. HSL Color Model Specifies to use the HSL color model for selecting colors. Hue Specifies the hue of a color. you can specify a wide range of colors. The New color swatch shows the object's current color. COLOR | 171 . Valid saturation values are from 0 to 100%. move the crosshairs (from top to bottom) over the color spectrum or specify a value in the Saturation box. The options available on the True Color tab are dependent on whether the HSL or RGB color model is specified. New Displays the currently selected color of the object. or an ACI number of 1 through 255. and luminance are properties of colors. To specify color saturation. Adjusting this value effects the RGB value. To specify a hue. and Blue (RGB) color model. True Color Tab (Select Color Dialog Box) Specifies color settings using true colors (24-bit color) with either the Hue. Over sixteen million colors are available when using true color functionality. Saturation Specifies the purity of a color. Hue. move the crosshairs (from side to side) over the color spectrum or specify a value in the Hue box. and Luminance (HSL) color model or the Red. High saturation causes a color to look more pure while low saturation causes a color to look washed-out.

Color Specifies the RGB color value. A value of 0% represents the color black. If this value is adjusted. You can also edit the RGB value directly using the following format: 000. Adjusting this value also affects the RGB value. Old Displays the previously selected color of the object. green. RGB Color Model Specifies to use the RGB color model for selecting colors. it will be reflected in the HSL color mode values. 172 | COLOR . Adjust the slider on the color bar or specify a value from 1 to 255 in the Blue box. Adjust the slider on the color bar or specify a value from 1 to 255 in the Red box. Valid luminance values are from 0 to 100%. Adjust the slider on the color bar or specify a value from 1 to 255 in the Green box. The values specified for each component represent the intensity of the red.000. The options available on the True Color tab are dependent on whether the HSL or RGB color model is specified. Blue Specifies the blue component of a color. Green Specifies the green component of a color.Luminance Specifies the brightness of a color. and blue components. it will be reflected in the HSL color mode values. Red Specifies the red component of a color. New Displays the currently selected color of the object. Colors can be broken down into components of red. This option is updated when changes are made to HSL or RGB options. To specify color luminance. 100% represents white. and blue. If this value is adjusted. If this value is adjusted.000. green. True Color Stored as RGB Indicates the value for each RGB color component. The combination of these values can be manipulated to create a wide range of colors. it will be reflected in the HSL color mode values. adjust the bar on the color slider or specify a value in the Luminance box. and 50% represents the optimal brightness for the color.

Once a color book is selected. RGB Equivalent Indicates the value for each RGB color component. COLOR Command Line If you enter -color at the Command prompt. Old Displays the previously selected color of the object. the Color Books tab will display the name of the selected color book. This list consists of all the color books that are found in the Color Book Locations specified in the Options dialog box. When you select a color book. or press ENTER COLOR | 173 . The corresponding colors and color names are displayed by page as you navigate through the color book. select an area on the color slider or use the up and down arrows to browse the color book. use the Color Book Locations option in the Options dialog box. Color Indicates the currently selected color book color. AutoCAD supports color books containing up to 10 colors per page. Enter default object color [Truecolor/COlorbook]<BYLAYER>: Enter a color. enter t. If there are no color books installed. The default location for color books is \support\color.Color Books Tab (Select Color Dialog Box) Specifies colors using third-party color books (such as PANTONE®) or userdefined color books. You can select a color book from the drop-down list. To load a color book. enter co. COLOR displays prompts on the command line. To navigate through color book pages. New Displays the currently selected color of the object. Color Book Specifies the color book to be used when selecting colors. the colors and the assigned color names are displayed. If a color book is not paginated. the Color Book dropdown list is unavailable. AutoCAD organizes the colors into pages containing 7 colors per page. on the Files tab.

You can enter the color number (1 through 255) or the color name (the names for the first seven colors). Enter Color Book name: Enter the name of a color book that has been installed such as Pantone If you enter a color book name. a true color. see “Control the Properties of Objects” in the User’s Guide. new objects assume the color assigned to the layer on which you create them. or a color from a color book. COLOR . When you insert the block in a drawing. 174 | Commands CHANGE. True Color Specifies a true color to be used for the selected object. Also. Red. AutoCAD draws all new objects in the default color (white or black.You can enter a color from the AutoCAD Color Index (a color name or number). inserting that block or changing its color produces complex results. Blue: Enter three integer values from 0 to 255 separated by commas to specify a true color Color Book Specifies a color from a loaded color book to be used for the selected object. If you enter byblock. and PROPERTIES set the color of existing objects. If you enter bylayer. System Variables CECOLOR sets the color for new objects. Enter color name: Enter the name of a color included in the selected color book such as Pantone 573 See Also See “Set the Current Color” in the User’s Guide. See the LAYER command for information about assigning a color to a layer. you can specify the color red by entering the ACI number 1 or the ACI name red. Green. the objects in the block inherit the current setting of COLOR. You can also enter bylayer or byblock. CHPROP. For example. depending on your background color) until they are grouped into a block. AutoCAD prompts you to enter the color name in the color book. Warning! If you used a mixture of color methods to draw the objects that make up a block.

CONE Creates a three-dimensional solid cone A cone is a solid primitive with a circular or elliptical base tapering symmetrically to a point perpendicular to its base. See Also For information about compiling PostScript font (PFB) files. AutoCAD compiles it into a file with this name. Enter the SHP or PFB file name in the dialog box. You can then use LOAD to insert the SHX files into a drawing. STYLE associates a style name with a font (SHX or PFB) file. see “Assign Text Fonts” in the User’s Guide.0.0>: Specify a point (1). Solids toolbar: Draw menu: Solids ➤ Cone Command line: cone 1 Current wire frame density: ISOLINES=current Specify center point for base of cone or [Elliptical] <0.shx. enter e. you must compile or convert them into SHX files. Command line: compile AutoCAD displays the Select Shape or Font File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box).COMPILE Compiles shape files and PostScript font files Before you can use AutoCAD shape files as fonts or shapes in a drawing. SHAPE inserts symbols from a previously loaded shape file. Commands LOAD loads symbols from a compiled shape (SHX) file. Also see “Shapes and Shape Fonts” in the Customization Guide. or press ENTER COMPILE | 175 . and automatically adds the file name extension . Compiling PostScript font PFB files improves the loading speed of drawings that use them.

which defines the height of the cone and the orientation with respect to the Z axis. Entering a negative value draws the height along the negative Z axis. height radius Specify apex point: Diameter 2 Defines the diameter of the circular base of the cone. Entering a negative value draws the height along the negative Z axis. Entering a positive value draws the height along the positive Z axis of the current UCS. Apex Specifies the apex of the cone. Apex Specifies the apex of the cone. Specify height of cone or [Apex]: Specify a distance or enter a Height Defines the height of the cone. Entering a positive value draws the height along the positive Z axis of the current UCS. diameter Specify apex point: Specify a point (2) 176 | CONE . Specify radius for base of cone or [Diameter]: Specify a distance or enter d Radius for Base Defines the radius of the circle. which defines the height of the cone and the orientation with respect to the Z axis. Specify diameter for base of cone: Specify a distance Specify height of cone or [Apex]: Specify a distance or enter a Height Defines the height of the cone.Center Point for Base Defines the center of the circular base of the cone.

0. 1 height 3 2 Specify apex point: Specify a point (4) CONE | 177 . height 2 3 Specify second axis endpoint of ellipse for base of cone: Specify a point (2) Specify length of other axis for base of cone: Specify a point (3) Specify height of cone or [Apex]: Specify a distance or enter a Height Defines the height of the cone. Apex Specifies the apex. 1 Specify axis endpoint of ellipse for base of cone or [Center]: or enter c Specify a point (1) Axis Endpoint Creates the elliptical base of the cone using its axes. Entering a negative value draws the height along the negative Z axis. Entering a positive value draws the height along the positive Z axis of the current UCS. Apex Specifies the apex. which defines the height and orientation of the cone with respect to the first axis specified.0>: Specify a point (1) or press ENTER Specify axis endpoint of ellipse for base of cone: Specify a point (2) Specify length of other axis for base of cone: Specify a point (3) Specify height of cone or [Apex]: Specify a distance or enter a Height Defines the height of the cone. Specify a second point to define the diameter of one axis and a third point to specify the radius of the other axis.Elliptical Creates a cone with an elliptical base. 4 Specify apex point: Specify a point (4) Center Creates the elliptical base of the cone using its center point and the radius of each axis. Specify center point of ellipse for base of cone <0. Entering a positive value draws the height along the positive Z axis of the current UCS. which defines the height and orientation of the cone with respect to the axis. Entering a negative value draws the height along the negative Z axis.

CIRCLE creates a circle from which you can produce a cone using EXTRUDE and specifying an extrusion taper angle. Enter object selection preference [Select/All] <All>: Enter s to select specific objects to convert or a to convert all objects in the drawing All Converts all polylines and hatches in the drawing. Enter object selection preference [Select/All] <All>: Enter s to select specific objects to convert or a to convert all objects in the drawing Polyline Converts all polylines in the drawing. shade. Enter object selection preference [Select/All] <All>: Enter s to select specific objects to convert or a to convert all objects in the drawing AutoCAD displays one or both of the following messages: number hatch objects converted number 2d polyline objects converted Hatches are not updated automatically when a drawing from a previous release is opened in Release 14 or later. or render it.See Also See “Create 3D Solids” in the User’s Guide. CONVERT Optimizes 2D polylines and associative hatches created in AutoCAD Release 13 or earlier Since Release 14. Use CONVERT to update hatches or polylines created in releases earlier than AutoCAD R14 or AutoCAD LT 97. AutoCAD creates 2D polylines and associative hatches using an optimized format that saves memory and disk space. 4 Commands The Cone option of the 3D command creates a conical shape that is displayed as a wireframe until you hide. Information about the rotation of a 178 | CONVERT . Command line: convert Enter type of objects to convert [Hatch/Polyline/All] <All>: Enter h for hatches. or a for both Hatch Converts all hatches in the drawing. p for polylines.

If necessary. The default name for the new named plot style table file is the same as the color-dependent plot style table name. the PLINETYPE system variable specifies that polylines are updated automatically when you open an older drawing. When updating hatches with CONVERT. AutoCAD editing commands make no distinction between the two formats. HATCH fills a specified boundary with a pattern. and a default named plot style called NORMAL. The original color-dependent plot style table is not affected by CONVERTCTB. In most cases. System Variables PLINETYPE specifies whether AutoCAD uses optimized 2D polylines. CONVERTCTB creates one named plot style for each color that has unique plot properties. where you can select the color-dependent plot style table file you want to convert. one named plot style for each group of colors that are assigned the same plot properties. CONVERTCTB | 179 .hatch pattern may not be updated properly if you have changed the UCS since creating the hatch. Note Polylines containing curve-fit or splined segments always retain the old format. The default location for the new named plot style table file is in the AutoCAD Plot Styles folder. as do polylines that store extended object data on their vertices. Polylines may be created in the old format by third-party applications. which you can then attach to drawings that use named plot styles. it is recommended that you use the Select option so that you can check your results. CONVERTCTB saves a copy of a color-dependent plot style table as a named plot style table. specify a new location or name for the converted plot style table file. PLINE creates two-dimensional polylines. CONVERTCTB Converts a color-dependent plot style table (CTB) to a named plot style table (STB) Command line: convertctb Displays the Select File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box). you do not need to update polylines with CONVERT. and they may be contained in an older drawing that was inserted as a block and then exploded. By default. PEDIT edits polylines and three-dimensional polygon meshes. See Also Commands BHATCH fills an enclosed area with a hatch pattern. The Save As dialog box is then displayed.

If these colors each have unique plot properties. For example. all objects with the same color have the same plot properties. In other words. CONVERTCTB gives the plot styles in the new named plot style table generic names such as STYLE 1. the default plot style. if all the colors in a color-dependent plot style table have the same plot properties. a drawing using color-dependent plot styles assigns plot properties to objects and layers by color. However. STYLE 2. CONVERTPSTYLES Converts the current drawing to either named or color-dependent plot styles A drawing can use either named or color-dependent plot styles. BLUE and GREEN. or from named plot styles to color-dependent plot styles. CONVERTCTB creates four named plot styles in the named plot style table: NORMAL. When you convert a drawing. 0 = color-dependent). you must do so before applying them to drawing layouts. depending on which plot style method the drawing is currently using. the default plot style. Command line: convertpstyles ■ ■ 180 | Converting drawings from color-dependent plot styles to named plot styles Converting drawings from named plot styles to color-dependent plot styles CONVERTPSTYLES . and STYLE 3. You can modify these generic plot style names in the the Plot Style Table Editor. If you want to rename the plot styles. Click the Edit button on the Plot Device tab in the Page Setup dialog box. In other words. CONVERTPSTYLES converts a currently open drawing from color-dependent plot styles to named plot styles. and STYLE 1. which assumes the plot properties that were assigned to all the other colors. but not both. CONVERTPSTYLES sets the PSTYLEMODE system variable to the appropriate setting (1 = named. CONVERTPSTYLES converts the drawing to use named plot styles that can be applied to objects or layers independent of color assignment. all objects with the same color can have different plot properties.For example. STYLE 1. which assumes the plot properties of GREEN. which assumes the plot properties of BLUE. suppose all the colors in a color-dependent plot style table have the same plot properties except for two colors. which assumes the plot properties that were assigned to all the colors in the colordependent plot style table. CONVERTCTB creates only two named plot styles in the named plot style table: NORMAL. STYLE 2.

Normally you should select the named plot style table that was converted from the colordependent plot style table that was assigned to the same drawing. Plot styles will be applied by color. After a drawing is converted to named plot styles. AutoCAD displays the Select File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box). you can change the named plot style table assignment or assign other named plot styles tables to model space or layouts. You can convert the color-dependent plot style tables assigned to the drawing to named plot style tables using CONVERTCTB. where you select the named plot style table file to attach to the converted drawing. You can also assign individual plot styles to drawing objects. CONVERTPSTYLES | 181 . Drawing objects that had the same colordependent plot style as their layer are assigned the named plot style BYLAYER.Converting Drawings from Color-Dependent to Named Plot Styles A dialog box advises you to convert the drawing's plot style tables before converting the drawing. Converting Drawings from Named to ColorDependent Plot Styles A dialog box advises you that the named plot styles attached to objects and named plot style tables attached to model space and layouts will be detached. Drawing objects that had a color-dependent plot style that was different from their layer are assigned a named plot style that has the same properties that their color-dependent plot style had. you can assign a color-dependent plot style table. CONVERTPSTYLES requires you to select a named plot style table that was converted using CONVERTCTB or created from a PC2 or PCP file. CONVERTPSTYLES attaches the selected named plot style table to model space and to all layouts. After a drawing is converted to color-dependent plot styles. Drawing layers are each assigned a named plot style (from the converted plot style table) that has the same plot properties that their color-dependent plot style had.

the object moves 2 units in the X direction and 3 units in the Y direction from its current position.Y. AutoCAD places a copy at that point relative to the base point. the first point is interpreted as a relative X. and choose Copy Selection. In this case. Specify second point of displacement or <use first point as displacement>: Specify a point or press ENTER If you specify two points.3 for the base point and press ENTER at the next prompt. right-click in the drawing area. AutoCAD prompts for an insertion base point for the selection object. The two points you specify define a displacement to determine how far the selected objects are moved and in what direction. the first point is usually entered at the keyboard.COPY Duplicates objects Modify toolbar: Shortcut menu: Select the objects to copy. The Specify Second Point of Displacement prompt is repeated for 182 | COPY . Command line: copy Select objects: Select objects and press ENTER Specify base point or displacement. or [Multiple]: Specify a point for a single copy or enter m for multiple copies Base Point or Displacement Makes a single copy. Multiple Makes multiple copies using one COPY command. object selected If you press ENTER at the Specify Second Point of Displacement prompt. 1 2 single copy Note The @ symbol should not be entered as part of this displacement coordinate. if you specify 2.Z displacement. AutoCAD uses the first point as a base point and places a single copy relative to that base point. For example. Specify base point: Specify second point of displacement or <use first point as displacement>: Specify a point or press ENTER If you specify a point.

Edit menu: Copy with Base Point Shortcut menu: End any active commands. and choose Copy with Base Point. If you press ENTER . right-click in the drawing area. The base point enables you to position the copied objects precisely when pasting them within the same drawing or into another drawing. Command line: copybase Specify base point: Select objects: The selected objects are copied to the Clipboard. and choose Copy.placement of multiple copies of the object. multiple copies System Variables GRIPS controls the use of grips to manipulate objects. COPYBASE | 183 . COPYBASE Copies objects with a specified base point Use COPYBASE to specify a base point when copying objects. MINSERT inserts copies of a block into a rectangular array. See Also Commands ARRAY creates multiple copies of objects in a rectangular or polar pattern. COPYCLIP Copies objects to the Clipboard Use COPYCLIP to copy objects or command line text from an AutoCAD drawing to another Windows® application. When you paste an object copied with COPYBASE. Use PASTECLIP to move the copied objects from the Clipboard to a location in the same document or to another document. right-click in the drawing area. the command ends. 3DARRAY creates three-dimensional rectangular or polar arrays. Standard toolbar: Edit menu: Copy Shortcut menu: End any active commands. AutoCAD places it relative to the specified base point.

AutoCAD copies the selected text to the Clipboard. Use scroll bars or open the text window to see the whole history. PASTECLIP inserts data from the Clipboard. If the cursor is on the command line or in the text window. See Also See “Use Windows Cut. See Also See “Navigate and Edit Within the Command Window” in the User’s Guide. 184 | COPYHIST . or you can drag the top edge of the window to change its size. Commands OPTIONS customizes the AutoCAD LT environment set- tings. System Variables WMFBKGND controls whether the background for the Windows metafile format of objects placed on the Clipboard and pasted into other applications is transparent. PASTESPEC inserts data from the Clipboard and controls the format of the data.Command line: copyclip Select objects: COPYCLIP copies all objects you select to the Clipboard. Copy. You can paste the contents of the Clipboard into a document or drawing as an OLE object. Commands COPYLINK copies the current viewport so that you can link it into other OLE applications. Command line: copyhist AutoCAD copies the text to the Clipboard. Also see “Link and Embed Data (OLE)” in the User’s Guide. AutoCAD copies the selected objects to the Clipboard. CUTCLIP copies objects to the Clipboard and erases the objects from the drawing. If the cursor is in the drawing area. Note You can also use CTRL+C to run COPYCLIP. and Paste” in the User’s Guide. You can use the Display tab in the Options dialog box to change the number of lines that are displayed in the command line window. COPYHIST Copies the text in the command line history to the Clipboard The command line history is above the command line.

Commands Tab (Customize Dialog Box) Adds buttons to the default AutoCAD toolbars. buttons. COPYLINK | 185 . and changes source files. You can paste the contents of the Clipboard into a document as an OLE object. Customize Dialog Box Provides an interface for customizing toolbars. and shortcut keys Tools menu: Customize Shortcut menu: Right-click any toolbar and choose Customize. OLELINKS edits links. Command line: customize The Customize dialog box is displayed. PASTESPEC inserts data from the Clipboard and controls the format of the data. and shortcut keys. or position a toolbar from the command line. CUSTOMIZE Customizes toolbars. Commands COPYCLIP copies objects to the Clipboard. Note You can use -TOOLBAR to display. CUTCLIP copies objects to the Clipboard and erases the objects from the drawing. buttons. removes buttons you use infrequently.COPYLINK Copies the current view to the Clipboard for linking to other OLE applications Edit menu: Copy Link Command line: copylink COPYLINK copies the current view to the Clipboard. close. updates objects. and creates toolbars. See Also See “Link and Embed Data (OLE)” in the User’s Guide.

186 | CUSTOMIZE . To add a command (button) to a toolbar. To create a new toolbar. You can filter this list by selecting a menu name. Toolbars Tab (Customize Dialog Box) Displays. Commands Displays a list of the commands associated with the menu you selected under Categories. only the button images are displayed. renames. drag its button from the toolbar to the drawing area while the Customize dialog box is displayed. creates. Button size and tooltip controls are also provided.Categories Displays a list of all the AutoCAD menus that you can use to filter the Commands list. and removes toolbars. drag the command from the Commands list to a toolbar in the AutoCAD window. drag a command from the Commands list to the drawing area. When Show Image and Name is clear. Show Image and Name Displays the button image and name in the Commands list. To remove a command from a toolbar.

or edit belong to a menu group other than AutoCAD.Toolbars Displays or hides toolbars. hide. Rename Renames the toolbar selected in the Toolbars list. Delete Removes the toolbar selected in the Toolbars list. CUSTOMIZE | 187 . The toolbars that belong to the selected menu group are displayed in the Toolbars list. in which you can create a new toolbar. Large Buttons Displays buttons in a larger format at 32 by 30 pixels. If the toolbars you want to display. click its check box to clear its check mark. Show Shortcut Keys in Tooltip Displays shortcut keys when you move the cursor over buttons on the toolbar. To hide a toolbar. Menu Group Displays a list of AutoCAD menu groups. Show Tooltips on Toolbars Displays tooltips when you move the cursor over buttons on the toolbar. New Displays the New Toolbar dialog box. Menu groups are listed in the order that they were installed. A check mark next to its name indicates that a toolbar is displayed. The default display size is 16 by 15 pixels. The menu group that was installed first has precedence regarding shortcut keys. select that menu group.

CUSTOMIZE .Properties Tab (Customize Dialog Box) Displays or modifies the properties of any button on a toolbar. Button Image Displays an enlarged bitmap image of the selected button. See Flyout Properties Tab (Customize Dialog Box). To access this tab. Description Displays the status bar help message for the command associated with the selected button. See Button Properties Tab (Customize Dialog Box). 188 | Name Displays the tooltip for the selected button. Macro Associated with This Button Displays the AutoCAD menu macro that runs the command associated with the selected button. If you select a flyout. If you select a button. the Flyout Properties tab is displayed. Button Properties Tab (Customize Dialog Box) Displays or modifies the properties of any button on a toolbar. the Button Properties tab is displayed. Edit Opens the Button Editor dialog box. select a button on a toolbar while the Properties tab of the Customize dialog box is displayed. Select a button or flyout from a toolbar to view or modify its properties.

Apply Applies specified changes to the button you selected from the toolbar. Reset Discards any changes you made to a toolbar button’s properties and restores its original settings. CUSTOMIZE | 189 . Toolbar Preview Displays the buttons of the currently selected toolbar. This button is unavailable until you make modifications to a toolbar button. Flyout Properties Tab (Customize Dialog Box) Displays or modifies the properties of any flyout button on a toolbar. Toolbar Associated with This Flyout Displays a list of available toolbars with the current flyout toolbar selected.List of Button Images Displays a scrollable list of all button images from which you can select an image to replace the one for the selected toolbar button. To substitute a different toolbar with the flyout. To access this tab. select a toolbar from the list and choose Apply. select a flyout button on a toolbar while the Properties tab of the Customize dialog box is displayed.

Commands Specifies the command you want to customize. CUSTOMIZE .Apply Substitutes a new toolbar for the selected flyout. Reset Discards any changes you made to a flyout button and restores its original toolbar settings. the key combination is displayed under Current Keys. This button is unavailable until you select a new toolbar from the Toolbar Name list. AutoCAD has a standard menu group called AutoCAD. 190 | Categories Lists all standard menus. Keyboard Tab (Customize Dialog Box) Assigns keyboard shortcuts to commands. the associated menu or toolbar items are displayed in the Commands list. Menu Group Specifies the current menu (MNU) file. If the selected command has a shortcut key or access key assigned to it. When you select a menu or toolbar from the list. and toolbars. custom menus.

F10. You can also simultaneously press CTRL+SHIFT and a letter. the “Currently assigned to” message is displayed. Assign Assigns the new shortcut key to the selected command. CTRL+B inserts blocks. You can reassign these shortcut keys to perform different actions. Show All Shows shortcut key assignments for all menu groups. if you assign CTRL+B to insert blocks in the first menu file and then assign CTRL+B to insert external references in the second menu file. If the keyboard shortcut you specify is already assigned to another AutoCAD command. To specify a value. Note AutoCAD automatically assigns many commands to shortcut keys. CTRL+F4. CTRL+F6. The menu group that was installed first has precedence regarding shortcut keys. for example. CUSTOMIZE | 191 . AutoCAD does not show the combination in the edit box. For example. menu group. The Shortcut Keys dialog box lists the command. and category associated with each shortcut key. but you cannot remove them. or CTRL+ALT+DEL.Menu groups are listed in the order that they were installed. If you use an invalid key combination. Try using another key combination. Press New Shortcut Key Specifies a key combination to be used as the keyboard shortcut for the selected menu or toolbar item. simultaneously press CTRL and a letter on the keyboard. Remove Removes the shortcut key assignment from the selected command. Current Keys Displays the key combination defined as a shortcut key for the selected menu or toolbar item. You cannot reassign shortcut keys that are internally assigned to Windows.

Import Adds a saved tool palette file to the Tool Palettes window.Tool Palettes Tab (Customize Dialog Box) Creates and modifies tool palettes.xlt extension. Up Moves highlighted tool palette higher on the list and its tab higher in the Tool Palettes window. Delete Permanently deletes the highlighted tool palette. New Creates a new tool palette. Down Moves highlighted tool palette lower on the list and its tab lower in the Tool Palettes window. Export Saves the highlighted tool palette to a file with an . CUSTOMIZE . Rename Displays the Rename Tool Palette dialog box so you can rename the highlighted tool palette. 192 | Tool Palettes Lists all tool palettes in the Tool Palettes window. Imports and exports tool palette files.

For information about adding buttons to the toolbar. Toolbar Name Specifies a name for the new toolbar.New Toolbar Dialog Box Creates a new toolbar. CUSTOMIZE | 193 . Save Toolbar in Menu Group Specifies a menu group for the new toolbar. Button Image Displays the button at its actual size. Button Editor Dialog Box Modifies or creates buttons. see Commands Tab (Customize Dialog Box).

Editing Area Provides a close-up view of the button image for editing.Editing Tools Provides tools for editing the button image. If you select a true color. Open Opens an existing button image for editing. Color Palette Sets the current color used by the editing tools. Release to complete the circle. Button images are stored as bitmap (BMP) files. Erase Sets pixels to white. it is displayed in the color swatch above the button. Save Saves the customized button image. Grid Displays a grid in the editing area. Pencil Edits one pixel at a time using the current color. Circle Creates circles using the current color. Click and drag the pointing device to edit several pixels simultaneously. Click to set the center and drag to set the radius. 194 | CUSTOMIZE . Click and drag to set the start point and draw the line. Clear Clears the editing area. Each grid square represents a single pixel. More Opens the True Color tab in the Select Color dialog box. Line Creates lines using the current color. Release to complete the line. Click and drag over colored pixels to change them to white. Undo Undoes the last action.

Reset Resets the button image to its default appearance. See Also See “Toolbars” or “Tool Palettes”in the User’s Guide. removing them from the drawing.Save As Saves the customized button image using a different name or a different location. right-click in the drawing area. and choose Cut. CUTCLIP | 195 . CUTCLIP Copies objects to the Clipboard and removes the objects from the drawing Standard toolbar: Edit menu: Cut Shortcut menu: End any active commands. Also see “Link and Embed Data (OLE)”in the User’s Guide. System Variables PALETTEOPAQUE turns transparency on and off for the Tool Palettes window and the floating Command Line window. COPYLINK copies the current view to the Clipboard for linking to other OLE applications. Command line: cutclip Select objects: CUTCLIP moves the selected objects to the Clipboard. You can paste the contents of the Clipboard into a document or drawing as an embedded OLE object (see PASTECLIP and PASTESPEC). See Also See “Use Windows Cut. Commands TOOLBAR modifies toolbars. retaining the original object in the drawing. Commands COPYCLIP copies objects to the Clipboard. CUTCLIP does not create OLE link information. and Paste” in the User’s Guide. Copy. CUSTOMIZE modifies tool palettes.

Solids toolbar: Draw menu: Solids ➤ Cylinder Command line: cylinder Current wire frame density: ISOLINES=current Specify center point for base of cylinder or [Elliptical] <0. 196 | CYLINDER .0.0>: Specify a center point (1). Entering a positive value draws the height along the positive Z axis of the current UCS. Specify height of cylinder or [Center of other end]: Specify a distance or enter c Height Defines the height of the cylinder. Specify center of other end of cylinder: Specify a point (2) Specifying the center of the other end also specifies the Z orientation of the cylinder.CYLINDER Creates a three-dimensional solid cylinder A cylinder is a solid primitive similar to an extruded circle or ellipse but without a taper. Specify radius for base of cylinder or [Diameter]: Specify a distance or enter d Radius Defines the radius of the circular base of the cylinder. or press ENTER Center Point 1 Defines the center of the circular base of the cylinder. Entering a negative value draws the cylinder along the negative Z axis. Center of Other End Defines the center point of the other end of the cylinder. enter e.

Specify diameter for base of cylinder: Specify height of cylinder or [Center of other end]: Specify a distance or enter c Height Defines the height of the cylinder. Entering a negative value draws the cylinder along the negative axis. Specify axis endpoint of ellipse for base of cylinder or [Center]: Specify a point (1) or enter c CYLINDER | 197 . Entering a positive value draws the height along the positive Z axis of the current UCS. Center of Other End Defines the center point of the other end of the cylinder.2 height radius Diameter Defines the diameter of the circular base of the cylinder. Specify center of other end of cylinder: Specify a point (2) Specifying the center of the other end also specifies the Z orientation of the cylinder. 2 height diameter Elliptical Creates a cylinder with an elliptical base.

0.Axis Endpoint Defines the axes of the elliptical base of the cylinder. A third point defines the radius of the other axis. Specify height of cylinder or [Center of other end]: Specify a distance or enter c Height Defines the height of the cylinder. Entering a positive value draws the height along the positive Z axis of the current UCS. Specify second axis endpoint of ellipse for base of cylinder: Specify a point (2) Specify length of other axis for base of cylinder: Specify a point (3) 1 The second point defines the diameter of one axis.0>: Specify a point (1) or press ENTER Specify axis endpoint of ellipse for base of cylinder: Specify a point (2) Specify length of other axis for base of cylinder: Specify a point (3) Specify height of cylinder or [Center of other end]: Specify a distance (4) or enter c 4 1 3 198 | CYLINDER 2 . Specify center of other end of cylinder: (4) or enter c Specify a distance 4 height 3 2 Center Defines the elliptical base of the cylinder by its center point and the radius of each axis. Center of Other End Defines the center point of the other end of the cylinder. Entering a negative value draws the cylinder along the negative axis. Specify center point of ellipse for base of cylinder <0.

CYLINDER | 199 . Commands 3D creates three-dimensional surface objects. Center of Other End Defines the center point of the other end of the cylinder. Entering a negative value draws the cylinder along the negative axis. Specify center of other end of cylinder: Specify a point (4) 4 height See Also See “Create 3D Solids” and “Create Surfaces” in the User’s Guide. Entering a positive value draws the height along the positive Z axis of the current UCS.Height Defines the height of the cylinder. EXTRUDE creates tapered cylinders.

200 .

The four primary interfaces (the dbConnect Manager. the Data View window. the Query Editor. The Column Values dialog box. a sub-dialog box of the Query Editor. The section describing each dialog box contains a list of methods that you can use to access it. is described in the Query Editor section. DBCONNECT replaces the ASE commands that were available in previous releases of AutoCAD®.DBCCLOSE Closes the dbConnect Manager Tools menu: Choose dbConnect when the dbConnect Manager is open. execute Structured Query Language (SQL) queries. from which you can view and edit database tables. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ dbConnect Manager (see page 202) Data View window (see page 207) Query Editor (see page 215) Link Select dialog box (see page 222) Configure a Data Source dialog box (see page 225) Data View and Query Options dialog box (see page 225) Export Links dialog box (see page 227) Export Query Set dialog box (see page 228) Export Template Set dialog box (see page 229) DBCCLOSE | 201 . See Also Commands DBCONNECT opens the dbConnect Manager. followed by descriptions of each additional dialog box presented in alphabetical order. and the Link Select dialog box) are described first. Command line: dbcclose DBCLOSE closes the dbConnect Manager and removes the dbConnect menu from the menu bar. Tools menu: dbConnect Command line: dbconnect AutoCAD displays the dbConnect Manager and adds the dbConnect menu to the menu bar. and link table records to graphical objects. DBCONNECT Provides an AutoCAD interface to external database tables DBCONNECT starts the dbConnect Manager.

By default. the dbConnect Manager opens as a docked window on the left side of the AutoCAD drawing area.■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Find dialog box (see page 229) Format dialog box (see page 230) Import Query Set dialog box (see page 230) Import Template Set dialog box (see page 231) Label Template dialog box (see page 231) Label Template Properties dialog box (see page 233) Link Conversion dialog box (see page 234) Link Manager (see page 237) Link Template dialog box (see page 238) Link Template Properties dialog box (see page 239) New Label Template dialog box (see page 240) New Link Template dialog box (see page 240) New Query dialog box (see page 241) Replace dialog box (see page 241) Select a Database Object dialog box (see page 242) Select a Data Object dialog box (see page 243) Sort dialog box (see page 243) Synchronize dialog box (see page 244) dbConnect Manager Provides the primary interface for the connectivity feature. 202 | DBCONNECT . The X indicates that these objects are currently unconnected. drawing node link template label template query data sources node table data source When you open the dbConnect Manager. double-click it in the dbConnect Manager. a small red X is displayed in the lower right corner of each database and data object. To connect to a database or data object.

you can use this button to display the Link Template dialog box (see page 238). This button is not available unless a single table. or label template is selected. Execute Query Executes a query. you can use this button to display the Query Editor (see page 215). dbConnect Manager Tree View Contains nodes for each drawing that’s currently open and a Data Sources node that contains all available data sources configured on your system. you can use this button to display the Label Template dialog box (see page 231). This button is not available unless a single table. View Table Edit Table New Label Template Execute Query New Link Template New Query View Table Opens an external database table in Read-only mode. in which you can edit the query. If a query is selected. Edit Table Opens an external database table in Edit mode. If a label template is selected. If a link template is selected. in which you can edit the label template. link template. This button is not available unless a single table or link template is selected. DBCONNECT | 203 . or label template is selected in the tree view. link template. New Query Displays the New Query dialog box (see page 241). New Label Template Displays the New Label Template dialog box (see page 240). link template. New Link Template Displays the New Link Template dialog box (see page 240).dbConnect Manager Buttons Let you view and manipulate database objects. Not available for link templates with links already defined in a drawing. This button is not available unless a query is selected in the tree view. This button is not available unless a single table. link template. This button is not available unless a single table. or label template is selected in the tree view. in which you can edit the link template. or query is selected.

and queries) attached to the drawing nodes.dbq. Edit Table Opens an external database table in Edit mode. Reload Labels Refreshes the field values of the labels in the selected drawing. updating them to reflect any changes made in the source database table. Hide Labels Turns off visibility of all labels in the selected drawing. The exported query set is saved with the file extension . in which you can save all link and label templates stored in the drawing to an external file. Right-click the node of an open drawing. in which you can import a set of queries stored in an external file with the file extension . Export Query Set Opens the Export Query Set dialog box (see page 228). Import Template Set Opens the Import Template Set dialog box (see page 231).Drawing Nodes Shortcut Menu Provides options available for an open drawing. Export Template Set Opens the Export Template Set dialog box (see page 229). Import Query Set Opens the Import Query Set dialog box (see page 230). in which you can save all queries stored in the drawing to an external file. Database Objects Shortcut Menu Provides options available for database objects (such as link templates.dbq. Show Labels Turns on visibility of all labels in the selected drawing. DBCONNECT . Available only for link templates. the shortcut menu options that are displayed when you right-click a query differ from the options that are available when you right-click a link template. label templates. Available only for link templates. Different database objects have different subsets of menu options available to them. 204 | View Table Opens an external database table in Read-only mode. The following shortcut menu options are available for various database objects. in which you can import a set of link and label templates that are stored in an external file. For example.

Any detected problems are reported in the Synchronize dialog box (see page 244). label templates. label templates. and queries. Available only for link templates. Rename Opens a dialog box in which you can rename the selected database object. Delete Links Deletes all links in the current drawing that use the selected link template. label templates. Not available for link templates with links already defined in the drawing. Available only for link templates. Delete Deletes the selected database object. Available for link templates and label templates. Available only for link templates. and queries. and queries.Edit Opens a dialog box in which you can edit the properties of the selected database object. Delete Labels Deletes all labels in the current drawing that use the selected label template. Available for link templates. Available only for label templates. Available for link templates. New Label Template Opens the New Label Template dialog box (see page 240). Available for link templates. Available for link templates and label templates. Available only for link templates. New Query Opens the New Query dialog box (see page 241). label templates. Available only for link templates. Duplicate Makes a copy of the selected database object and inserts it in the current drawing. DBCONNECT | 205 . Available for link templates. Hide Labels Hides all labels that are associated with the selected database object. Show Labels Displays all labels that are associated with the selected database object. Link Select Opens the Link Select dialog box (see page 222). and queries. Not available for link templates with links already defined in the drawing. Synchronize Verifies that all links in the current drawing based on the selected link template contain valid values.

Disconnect Closes the connection to the selected data object.Reload Refreshes the field values of all labels associated with the selected label template in the current drawing. catalogs. View Table Opens the selected database table in Read-only mode. Available only for disconnected data sources. and schemas. Configure Opens the Configure a Data Source dialog box (see page 225) where you can configure a new data source or edit an existing one. and schemas. Available only for tables. Right-click the data sources node. catalogs. Available only for connected data sources. Available only for tables. Delete Links Deletes all links in the current drawing that use the selected link template. Available only for queries. Data Sources Node Shortcut Menu Provides options available for data sources. Synchronize Opens the Synchronize dialog box (see page 244). Configure Data Source Opens the Configure a Data Source dialog box (see page 225) where you can configure a new data source or edit an existing one. DBCONNECT . Available only for label templates. Available for data sources. Available for data sources. Data Objects Shortcut Menu Provides options available for data objects. Available only for link templates. 206 | Connect Establishes a connection to the selected data object. Edit Table Opens the selected database table in Edit mode. New Link Template Opens the New Link Template dialog box (see page 240). Execute Executes the selected query. updating them to reflect any changes made in the source database table. Right-click a data object (such as a catalog or table) in the data sources node. Available only for tables.

New Query Opens the New Query dialog box (see page 241). View Linked Table.New Label Template Opens the New Label Template dialog box (see page 240). and a set of navigation controls for navigating through the record set. dbConnect menu: View Data ➤ View External Table. and then choose Allow Docking from the shortcut menu. To enable docking. or Edit Linked Table. When a cell is selected. You can open this dialog box using the following methods: View Table Edit Table dbConnect Manager buttons: Select a link template. The Data View window displays records from the selected database table. the cell background is shown using the system window color (white by default). Double-clicking a link template that has no links created in the drawing it’s associated with opens the Link Template dialog box (see page 238). DBCONNECT | 207 . If it is opened in Edit mode. the Data View is opened undocked with the Allow Docking option turned off.) Shortcut menu: Right-click a link template or a table in the dbConnect Manager and choose View Table or Edit Table. depending on the dbConnect Settings specified on the System tab of the Options dialog box. See OPTIONS. a label template. Available only for tables. Data View Window Provides the primary interface for viewing and editing external database tables from within AutoCAD. the cell background is shown using the system 3D objects button shade color (light gray by default). the Data View menu is added to the menu bar. Edit External Table. (AutoCAD displays a dialog box in which you can select a table to open. After you open the Data View window. Available only for tables. Pointing device: Double-click a table or a link template in the dbConnect Manager. The Data View comprises a set of buttons. By default. If the table is opened in Read-only mode. right-click over one of the Data View buttons. it is shown using the system selected items background and text colors. The appearance of the Data View window is governed by your computer’s system settings. or a table from the dbConnect Manager and choose View Table or Edit Table. The table is opened in either Edit mode or Read-only mode. Text in the cells is displayed using the system window text color. and it can be changed in the Windows Control Panel. a grid window for viewing and editing records.

choose the Link and Label Settings button. the label from the currently selected link and label templates in the Data View window. If the current drawing has a selection set already established. If the current drawing has a selection set already established. AutoCAD creates the link and. If the current drawing does not have a current selection set. you are prompted to select objects to link to. DBCONNECT . if desired. a link is created for each object in the selection set. Three distinct link methods are available: 208 | Link Creates a link to one or more graphical objects without creating a corresponding label. Link Links the currently selected table row or rows to one or more graphical objects.Link and Label Settings Data View Buttons Let you create links and view linked records and graphical objects. If the current drawing does not have a current selection set. a link is created for all objects in the selection set. Create Freestanding Label Creates a freestanding label that isn’t associated with a graphical object. You are prompted to specify an insertion point for the label. Create Attached Label Creates a link to one or more graphical objects and creates a corresponding label. you are prompted to select objects to link to. To change the current link creation setting.

Link Template List Creates a new link template. this button’s tooltip is Return to Query. Data View and Query Options Opens the Data View and Query Options dialog box (see page 225). If the Data View window was opened to return the results of a query. AutoView Linked Objects in Drawing Displays linked objects automatically in the current drawing as you select rows from the database table. in which you can specify a number of settings that affect the interaction and display of linked objects in the Data View window and the current AutoCAD drawing. and choosing it returns you to the Query Editor. and Return to Link Select Opens either the New Query dialog box (see page 241). and then choose the Link button flyout. or specifies a link template from those that are defined for the open table. this button’s tooltip is Query. To create a new link template. Query. The selected link template is applied when you create new links in the current drawing. AutoView Linked Records in Table Displays linked records automatically in the Data View window as you select graphical objects in the current AutoCAD drawing. View Linked Records in Table Selects records in the Data View window that are linked to the current selection set of graphical objects. If the Data View window was opened to return the results of a Link Select operation. DBCONNECT | 209 . Print Data View Prints the contents of the Data View window to the current Windows® system printer. and choosing it opens the New Query dialog box. this button’s tooltip is Return to Link Select. Return to Query. or the Link Select dialog box (see page 222). and choosing it returns you to the Link Select dialog box. If the Data View window was opened to view or edit a database table. depending on the method used to open the Data View window. select the New Link Template option from the Link Template list. the Query Editor (see page 215).View Linked Objects in Drawing Selects graphical objects in the current AutoCAD drawing that are linked to the currently selected Data View row or rows.

Unhide All Restores all hidden columns to the Data View display. To create a new label template. Double-clicking the grid header commits any changes made during an editing session and closes the Data View window. or specifies a label template from those that are defined for the currently selected table. Available only if you have hidden one or more columns. Double-clicking a column header sorts its records in ascending order. DBCONNECT . Hide Removes all selected columns from the Data View display. column headers grid cells grid headers record headers Column Shortcut Menu Displays the following options when you right-click one or more selected column headers. Double-clicking a cell selects it for editing. the New Link Template dialog box is displayed (see page 240). Grid cell: Selects one field of a given record. If there is no link template defined for the selected table in the current drawing. You can select records by clicking the following elements: ■ ■ ■ ■ Column header: Selects all records in that column. in which you can select a combination of up to five columns to use in specifying a sort order for the Data View. The selected label template is applied when you create new labels in the current drawing. Grid header: Selects the entire table. Double-clicking a record header selects any graphical objects that the record is linked to in the drawing area. Double-clicking a column header a second time sorts its records in descending order. Data View Grid Window Displays a subset of the records from a database table. select the New Label Template option from the Label Template list and choose either the Create Freestanding Label or the Create Attached Label button flyout. Record header: Selects an individual record. 210 | Sort Opens the Sort dialog box (see page 243).Label Template List Creates a new label template.

Replace Opens the Replace dialog box (see page 241). Find Opens the Find dialog box (see page 229). DBCONNECT | 211 . Available only if you have frozen one or more columns. or an attached label is created by changing the settings from the Link and Label Settings cell shortcut menu option.Freeze Freezes all selected columns so that they do not scroll when you use the horizontal scroll bar. which you can use to search for a specific value. Link and Label Settings Lists the currently selected link creation mode. Link Links the current row to a graphical object. a freestanding label. You can specify whether a link. You can specify whether a link. Find Opens the Find dialog box (see page 229). if desired. the label from the currently selected link and label templates in the Data View. or an attached label is created when the Link shortcut menu option is chosen. Cell Shortcut Menu Displays the following options when you right-click the selected cell. Left left-aligns the column cells. Replace is limited to the values stored in the currently selected column. which you can use to search for a specific value. and Right right-aligns the cells. Available only for tables that are opened in Edit mode. Center center-aligns the cells. Standard right-aligns numeric fields and left-aligns all others. Available only if the selected columns are contiguous. View Linked Objects Indicates graphical objects in the current AutoCAD drawing that are linked to the selected database record. Align Aligns the current column. a freestanding label. AutoCAD creates the link and. Find is limited to the values stored in the currently selected column. Unfreeze All Unfreezes all frozen columns so that they scroll when you use the horizontal scroll bar. which you can use to search for a specific value to overwrite with a replacement value that you specify. The Find shortcut menu option limits its search to records contained in the same column as the currently selected cell.

Available only for tables that are opened in Edit mode. Edit Enables you to change the value of the currently selected cell. You can specify whether a link. Available only for tables that are opened in Edit mode. a freestanding label.Replace Opens the Replace dialog box (see page 241). Paste Inserts the value currently stored on the Clipboard into the selected cell. Copy Copies the selected records to the Clipboard. or an attached label is created by choosing the Link and Label Settings shortcut menu option. if desired. which you can use to search for a specific value to overwrite with a replacement value that you specify. Cut Clears the current cell and copies its value to the Clipboard. Delete Record Deletes the selected records. or an attached label is created when the Link shortcut menu option is chosen. Available only for tables that are opened in Edit mode. You can specify whether a link. Available only for tables that are opened in Edit mode. the label from the currently selected link and label templates in the Data View window. Record Shortcut Menu Displays the following options when you right-click one or more selected record headers. Copy Copies the value from the current cell to the Clipboard. Available only for tables that are opened in Edit mode. Available only for tables that are opened in Edit mode. 212 | View Linked Objects Indicates graphical objects in the current AutoCAD drawing that are linked to the selected database records. AutoCAD creates the link and. a freestanding label. Clear Deletes the value in the current cell. DBCONNECT . Replace limits its search to records contained in the same column as the currently selected cell. Link Links the selected row or rows to one or more graphical objects. Link and Label Settings Lists the currently selected link creation mode.

Unhide All Columns Restores any hidden columns to the Data View window display.Add New Record Adds a new record with blank field values to the end of the record set. Clear All Marks Clears all record selection marks from the Data View window. in which you can preview your printed report. Restore Undoes any changes made to a database table during an editing session and closes the Data View window. Previous Button Selects the previous record. Print Prints the contents of the Data View window to the current Windows system printer. Next Button Selects the next record. Navigation Controls Cycle quickly through the records in the Data View window. Grid Header Shortcut Menu Displays the following options when you right-click the grid header. in which you can control how data is displayed in the Data View window. The following controls are available: First Button Selects the first record. Available only when a table is open in Edit mode and you have edited its values. Available only for tables that are opened in Edit mode. DBCONNECT | 213 . Last Button Selects the last record. Commit Saves all changes made in the Data View window to the source database table and closes the Data View window. Print Preview Opens the Print Preview window in the Data View window. Available only when a table is open in Edit mode and you have edited its values. Format Opens the Format dialog box (see page 230). Unfreeze All Columns Unfreezes any frozen columns so that they scroll when you use the horizontal scroll bar. Clear All Marks Clears record selection marks from the selected records in the Data View window.

the name of the button changes to One Page and vice versa.First button Last button Previous button Next button record number Data View Print Preview Window Loads into the Data View window a preview image of how the current table appears when you print it. If you choose Two Page. Prev Page Restores the preview image of the previous page of the table. none of the primary Data View buttons is available and the navigation buttons are removed from the bottom of the window. 214 | Print Opens the default system Print dialog box. Next Page Presents a preview image of the next page of the table. Zoom In Magnifies the preview page so that you can view the details more closely. You can open this dialog box using the following methods: Data View menu: Print Preview Shortcut menu: Right-click the grid header in the Data View window and choose Print Preview. DBCONNECT . When the Data View window is in Preview mode. Two Page Toggles the display between one and two preview pages.

You can open the Query Editor using the following methods: dbConnect buttons: Select a table or a link template in the dbConnect Manager and choose the New Query button. Quick Query Tab (Query Editor) Develops simple queries based on a single database field. and single value. New Query on a Link Template. Field Lists the fields from the current table.Zoom Out Shrinks the preview page to display a larger region of the table. or Edit Query. the New Query dialog box (see page 241) is displayed first. Data View buttons: Choose the Query or Return to Query button in the Data View window. If you are creating a new query. or right-click a query and choose Edit. (AutoCAD displays a dialog box in which you can select a database object to query. dbConnect menu: Queries ➤ New Query on an External Table. Close Closes the Data View Print Preview window and restores the default Data View window display. from which you can select one to apply to the query.) Shortcut menu: Right-click a table or link template in the dbConnect Manager and choose New Query. DBCONNECT | 215 . single operator. Query Editor Consists of a series of four tabs that you can use to build and execute queries.

Close Closes the dialog box without issuing the query. Store Saves the query with the current drawing. For information about operators. Indicate Objects in Drawing Indicates linked objects that match your search criterion in the current AutoCAD drawing. Look Up Values Returns a list of all values for the specified field from the database table in the Column Values dialog box (see page 222). Options Opens the Data View and Query Options dialog box (see page 225). Value Specifies a value for the field that you are using to construct your query.Operator Displays a list of available operators that can be applied to the query. Indicate Records in Data View Indicates records that match your search criterion in the Data View window. from which you can select the value you want. 216 | DBCONNECT . see “Construct Simple Queries” in the User’s Guide. Execute Issues the finished query and closes the dialog box. Range Query Tab (Query Editor) Constructs a query that returns all records or AutoCAD objects that fall within a given range of values.

Indicate Objects in Drawing Indicates linked objects that match your search criterion in the current AutoCAD drawing. Execute Issues the finished query and closes the dialog box. Options Opens the Data View and Query Options dialog box (see page 225). Through) Returns a list of all values for the specified field from the database table in the Column Values dialog box (see page 222). Look Up Values (From. Close Closes the dialog box without issuing the query. Query Builder Tab (Query Editor) Constructs queries based on multiple search criteria. from which you can select the value you want. Through Specifies the second value of the range. The query returns all records or graphical objects that are greater than or equal to this value. and specify a sort order for the fields. The query returns all records or graphical objects that are less than or equal to this value. Indicate Records in Data View Indicates records that match your search criterion in the Data View window. You can also group criteria parenthetically. From Specifies the first value of the range. DBCONNECT | 217 . Store Saves the query with the current drawing.Field Lists the fields from the current table. from which you can select one to apply to the query. select which fields to display in the returned query.

Operator Provides a space where you can select an operator to apply to the query condition of the current row. click in the cell to the right of the last Value cell that you want to group. To insert an end parenthesis. 218 | Parenthetical Grouping Groups a series of search criteria by bracketing them within parentheses. To insert a beginning parenthesis. Double-click in the Field cell of the current row to display a list of available fields from the current table that you can use in constructing your query. DBCONNECT . To add an additional parameter. Field Provides a space where you can select the field or fields to include in your query. click in the cell to the left of the first Field cell that you want to group.Query Builder Grid Provides a space for you to construct queries based on multiple search parameters. Double-click in the Operator cell to display a list of operators that you can use in constructing your query. You can nest up to four sets of parentheses within a single statement. specify an operator and a value for the current row and then select the Logical cell.

Repeat for additional fields that you want to apply to the sort. the query displays all fields from the table. drag the field to a new location in the Sort By list. To add a field.. select it in the Fields in Table list window and then choose Add. Click in the Value cell and enter a value. from which you can specify the fields to display in the Data View window when the query is executed.] button to retrieve a list of available values for the selected field in the Column Values dialog box (see page 222). To remove a field. If you don’t specify any fields to display. Logical Provides either an And or an Or operator to the query statement. drag it from the list to any area on the Query Builder tab or select the field and press DELETE . or double-click in the field. To change the sort order for a field. The first field added to the Sort By list is the primary sort. To remove a field from this list. Click in the Logical cell to add an And value. fields are added to the Sort By list in an ascending sort order. select it in the Fields in Table list window and then choose Add. Fields in Table Displays a list of available fields from the current table. Show Fields Specifies the fields that are displayed in the Data View window when the query is executed. click in the Logical cell again. Add (Sort By) Adds a field to the Sort By list. Double-clicking in a field in this list or selecting a field and choosing Add (Show Fields) adds the field to the list of those that are displayed in the Data View window by the returned query. To change the value to Or. To apply a descending sort. By default. You can also drag fields to add them to the Show Fields and Sort By areas. Add (Show Fields) Adds a field to include in the Data View window display of the returned query. drag it from the list to any area on the Query Builder tab. select a field and choose the Ascending/Descending Sort button. Sort By Specifies a sort order for the returned query.Value Provides a space where you can specify a value for the query condition of the current row.. DBCONNECT | 219 . To add a sort field. or choose the [.

Store Saves the query with the current drawing. Close Closes the dialog box without issuing the query. If an ascending sort order is currently applied. The SQL Query tab provides both a query editor text box where you can type a free-form SQL statement and a set of tools to assist you in constructing your query. Indicate Records in Data View Indicates records that match your search criteria in the Data View window.Ascending/Descending Sort Reverses the sort order for the currently selected field. As not all database management systems are fully compliant with the SQL 92 standard. choosing this button reverses the sort to descending order. Indicate Objects in Drawing Indicates linked objects that match your search criteria in the current AutoCAD drawing. 220 | DBCONNECT . and vice versa. Execute Issues the finished query and closes the dialog box. Options Opens the Data View and Query Options dialog box (see page 225). SQL Query Tab (Query Editor) Constructs any query statement that conforms with the SQL 92 protocol. you should review your system’s documentation to see what SQL commands are valid for your particular database.

by selecting them and choosing Add in the Table area. DBCONNECT | 221 . [... This function helps you isolate syntax errors before you issue your query. Add (Values) Adds the value specified in the Values area to the SQL text editor.] Button Returns a list of available values for the specified field from the selected database table in the Column Values dialog box (see page 222). Add (Fields) Adds the selected field to the SQL text editor. Store Saves the query with the current drawing. by selecting them and choosing Add in the Fields area. from which you can select a value to apply to the query. Indicate Records in Data View Indicates records that match your search criteria in the Data View window. by dragging them from the Table list to the SQL text editor. You can add tables to the SQL text editor by double-clicking them. Values Specifies a value for the selected field. Add (Operator) Adds the selected operator to the SQL text editor. Add (Table) Adds the currently selected table to the SQL text editor. Table Lists all database tables that are available in the current data source. Operator Displays a list of operators that you can apply to your query.SQL Text Editor Provides a space for you to type a free-form SQL query or add elements that you select using the various SQL Query tools. Close Closes the dialog box without issuing the query. or by entering their names directly in the SQL text editor. or by dragging them from the Fields list to the SQL text editor. Execute Issues the finished query and closes the dialog box. You can add fields to the SQL text editor by doubleclicking them. Check Checks your SQL query for proper syntax without actually executing it. Fields Displays a list of the fields in the selected database table. Indicate Objects in Drawing Indicates linked objects that match your search criteria in the current AutoCAD drawing.

known as ASE Select in previous releases of AutoCAD. Link Select Dialog Box Constructs iterative selection sets of AutoCAD graphical objects and database records. which can be operated on by an additional query or selection set (set B). In order to work with the Link Select dialog box.Options Opens the Data View and Query Options dialog box (see page 225). If you are constructing a query using the In operator. you can add additional values to the query by pressing the CTRL or SHIFT key as you select values. The Link Select dialog box. Select a value from the list and choose OK to apply it to the current operation. you must have a drawing open that has a number of links already created. you can select a value to apply to the current operation. You begin a Link Select operation by creating an initial query or selection set of graphical objects (set A). Column Values Lists all values for the selected database column. You can open this dialog box using the following methods: dbConnect menu: Links ➤ Link Select Shortcut menu: Right-click a link template in the dbConnect Manager and choose Link Select. and you can apply additional queries or selection sets to further refine your running query. is an advanced implementation of the Query Editor. Column Values Dialog Box Lists values for the selected database column. 222 | DBCONNECT . The results of the returned operation become the new running selection set (set A).

This operation returns all records or objects that are members of set A or set B. Do Applies a Link Select operator to the current query or selection set. DBCONNECT | 223 . and Query Builder tabs from the Query Editor (see page 215).The Link Select dialog box contains the Quick Query.B Subtracts the results of the new query or drawing selection from the existing running selection. Subtract A . The following operators are available: Select Creates an initial query or selection set. This operation returns all records or objects that are members of set A and set B. Union Adds the results of the new query or selection set to the running selection set. and the following additional controls. Intersect Returns the intersection of the existing running selection and the results of the new query or drawing selection. This selection set can be refined through subsequent Link Select operations. Range Query.

A Subtracts the existing running selection from the results of the new query or drawing selection. the Execute button is displayed. Use Query Uses any of the available Query Editor tabs to construct a query that returns a selection set to the Link Select operation. Using Lists available link templates that you can apply to the current selection set. you can apply more queries or select additional graphical objects to further refine your selection set. or both. The current drawing and table are displayed. a subset of Data View records. as well as the number of linked objects and records that currently meet the specified Link Select parameters. After choosing the Execute or Select button.Subtract B . 224 | DBCONNECT . Venn Diagram Displays a diagram of the currently selected Do operation. the Select button is displayed. depending on the parameters specified in the Link Select operation. Cancel Closes the dialog box and discards all actions. Finish Completes the Link Select operation and closes the dialog box. If the Select in Drawing option is selected. Select in Drawing Closes the Link Select dialog box when you choose the Select button so that you can construct a selection set of graphical objects to return to the Link Select operation. Execute/Select Executes the current Link Select query or temporarily dismisses the Link Select dialog box so you can select graphical objects from the AutoCAD drawing. Status Bar Displays the current status information based on the running Link Select operation. If the Use Query option is selected. Returns either a selection set of AutoCAD graphical objects. Reset Clears the Link Select dialog box and discards all previous actions so that you can begin a new Link Select operation.

Data View and Query Options Dialog Box Controls a number of settings related to the display of linked records and objects and the processing of SQL queries.hlp file in AutoCAD Help. in which you can continue configuring your data source. refer to the acad_asi. (The Data View menu is available only if you currently have a database table open in the Data View window.Configure a Data Source Dialog Box Configures an external database so it can be accessed from AutoCAD. Data Source Name Specifies a name for the OLE DB data source that you are configuring. Data Sources Lists all OLE DB data sources configured for use with AutoCAD that are present on your system. You can open this dialog box using the following methods: dbConnect menu: Data Sources ➤ Configure Shortcut menu: Right-click the Data Sources node and choose Configure Data Source. You can open this dialog box using the following methods: Data View buttons: Data View menu: Options. For detailed information about configuring a particular database system. OK Opens the Microsoft® Data Links Properties dialog box.) DBCONNECT | 225 .

Any records not linked to the current drawing selection set are not displayed. whichever value is less. All records that are linked to the current selection set are selected in the Data View window. Automatically Pan Drawing Pans the AutoCAD drawing automatically to display objects that are associated with the current selection set of Data View records.AutoPan and Zoom Controls how linked objects are displayed in the current AutoCAD drawing when you select their corresponding records in the Data View window. Show All Records. 226 | Show Only Indicated Records Displays in the Data View window only the record set that is associated with the current AutoCAD selection set. DBCONNECT . Select Indicated Records Displays all records in the current database table. The available range is 20 to 90 percent with a default value of 50 percent. Automatically Zoom Drawing Zooms the AutoCAD drawing automatically so that all objects associated with the current record set are displayed. A value of 50 percent means that either the height of the extents is 50 percent of the height of the window. Zoom Factor Specifies a zoom factor that limits the size of the extents of the indicated object set to a defined percentage of the drawing area. Record Indication Settings Controls the appearance of linked records in the Data View window when their corresponding objects are selected in the current drawing. or the width of the extents is 50 percent of the window.

in which you can select a link template whose links you want to export. Query Options Specifies options for SQL query processing.Mark Indicated Records Applies a marking color to linked Data View records to clearly differentiate them from records without links. Accumulate Selection Set in Drawing Adds additional objects to the selection set as you select additional Data View records. If this option is cleared. Export Links Dialog Box Exports a set of links that are associated with a selection set of AutoCAD graphical objects. Send as Native SQL Issues queries to database tables in the format of the source table rather than SQL 92 format. You can use this option to issue proprietary commands in native database format. DBCONNECT | 227 . the Data View window indicates a new set of records each time you select a new set of graphical objects. Automatically Store Automatically stores queries when they are executed with the current drawing. the Select a Database Object dialog box (see page 242) is displayed. the current drawing indicates a new set of objects each time you select a new set of Data View records. Accumulate Record Set in Data View Adds additional records to the record set as you select additional AutoCAD graphical objects. Marking Color Specifies the marking color to apply to linked Data View records. Accumulate Options Controls the accumulation of selection and record sets. The default color is yellow. If this option is cleared. You can open this dialog box using the following methods: dbConnect menu: Links ➤ Export Links If more than one link template exists for the set of graphical objects that you select.

Include Fields Specifies the table fields to export. You can open this dialog box using the following methods: dbConnect menu: Queries ➤ Export Query Set Shortcut menu: In the dbConnect Manager. 228 | File Name Specifies a name for the query set. The key fields for the selected link template are included automatically. Save as Type Specifies the file format for the query set. File Name Specifies a name for the exported link file. right-click the drawing node of a drawing that contains one or more queries and choose Export Query Set. Link Template Name Displays the name of the link template whose links you’re exporting.dbq file extension. Query sets are always saved with the . DBCONNECT . You can save the file in the native database format of the current table or as a comma-delimited or space-delimited text file. AutoCAD also exports the handle of the object that each link is associated with. Save as Type Specifies the file format for the exported links. Export Query Set Dialog Box Exports a set of queries that are associated with the current drawing.

including case.dbt extension. File Name Specifies a name for the template set. Save as Type Specifies the file format for the template set. The search is limited to a single table column.Export Template Set Dialog Box Exports a set of link templates and label templates that are associated with the current drawing. Template sets are always saved with the .) Shortcut menu: Right-click a record header or a single cell in the Data View window and choose Find. Find Dialog Box Searches for specified text or a numeric value in the currently loaded Data View table. Match Case Searches for the exact value. (The Data View menu is available only if you currently have a database table open in the Data View window. of what you enter in Find What. AutoCAD searches for the value regardless of case. right-click the drawing node of a drawing that has one or more templates defined and choose Export Template Set. You can open this dialog box using the following methods: Data View menu: Find. DBCONNECT | 229 . Find Next Finds the next occurrence of the value that you’re searching for. It is not possible to conduct a global search that scans all columns in the table. If this option is cleared. Find What Specifies the value to search for. You can open this dialog box using the following methods: dbConnect menu: Templates ➤ Export Template Set Shortcut menu: In the dbConnect Manager. Direction Toggles the direction that AutoCAD searches for the specified value in the Data View window.

Outline Specifies a style to apply to the current font. You can open this dialog box using the following methods: dbConnect menu: Queries ➤ Import Query Set Shortcut menu: Right-click a drawing node in the dbConnect Manager and choose Import Query Set. Not Bold. Effects Applies additional formatting to the Data View window display. Bold Italic. The available options are Normal. If the query set contains a name that matches a query in the current drawing.Format Dialog Box Controls how database table records are displayed in the Data View window. Strikeout draws a line through the center of all column data. Italic. Underline applies an underline to all column data. You can open this dialog box using the following methods: Data View menu: Format. AutoCAD displays an alert box where you can enter a different name for the query. . (The Data View menu is available only if you currently have a database table open in the Data View window. Textcolor Specifies the color that is applied to the Data View table records. Font Specifies the font style that is applied to the current Data View table. Preview Displays how the current Format option values look when applied to the Data View window. Import Query Set Dialog Box Imports a set of queries into the current AutoCAD drawing. Bold. Look In 230 | DBCONNECT Specifies the directory where the query set is located. Size Specifies the size in points that is applied to the current font. and Not Italic.) Shortcut menu: Right-click the grid header in the Data View window and choose Format.

Before the Label Template dialog box opens. Query sets always have the . Files of Type Specifies the file extension of the query set that you’re importing. You can open this dialog box using the following methods: dbConnect Manager buttons: Select a table.File Name Specifies the name of the query set to import. AutoCAD displays an alert box where you can enter a different name for the template. The options on the primary Multiline Text Editor tabs can be used to apply additional formatting to the multiline text label objects.dbt extension. Look In Specifies the directory where the template set is located. or label template in the dbConnect Manager. For more information about the Multiline Text Editor. Template sets always have the . AutoCAD opens the Label Template dialog box without first displaying the New Label Template dialog box. in which you can name the label template. see MTEXT. The Label Template dialog box is a modified version of the Multiline Text Editor that provides two additional tabs for applying formatting to labels. Import Template Set Dialog Box Imports a set of link templates and label templates into the current AutoCAD drawing. File Name Specifies the name of the template set to import. If a label template is selected. If the template set contains a link or label template with a name that matches a template in the current drawing. Label Template Dialog Box Applies formatting to labels. AutoCAD displays the New Label Template dialog box (see page 240). and choose the New Label Template button.dbq extension. link template. Files of Type Specifies the file extension of the template set that you’re importing. You can open this dialog box using the following methods: dbConnect menu: Templates ➤ Import Template Set Shortcut menu: Right-click a drawing node in the dbConnect Manager and choose Import Template Set. DBCONNECT | 231 .

Label Fields Tab (Label Template Dialog Box) Specifies which table fields are displayed when you create labels based on this template. 232 | DBCONNECT . You may include any number of fields from the source table. Table Displays the name of the current table. Select a link template in the Select a Database Object dialog box (see page 242) and choose Continue. the New Link Template dialog box (see page 240) is displayed. if it is an attached label. its associated leader object. If there is no link template defined for the selected table in the current drawing. Field Displays a list of available fields from the current database table that you can include in your label. Shortcut menu: Right-click a link template or a table in the dbConnect Manager and choose New Label Template. This method opens the Label Template dialog box directly without first displaying the New Label Template dialog box. Label Offset Tab (Label Template Dialog Box) Defines X and Y coordinate offsets for the insertion point of both your label and. dbConnect menu: Templates ➤ New Label Template. and then choose either the Create Freestanding Label or the Create Attached Label button flyout. Add Adds the selected field in the Field list to the label. Pointing device: Double-click a label template in the dbConnect Manager.Data View buttons: Choose New Label Template from the Label Template list.

from which you can select a label template. Leader Offset Specifies an X and Y offset for the multiline text object with respect to the associated leader object. indicating that the label text is offset 1 unit in the X and Y planes from the tip of the leader object. the Tip Offset specifies the X and Y offset from the value specified in Start for the tip of the leader object. as they have no associated leader object. AutoCAD displays the Select a Database Object dialog box. The Leader Offset settings only apply to attached labels. Before the Label Template Properties dialog box opens. Label Template Properties Dialog Box Displays the full data source path to a label template’s table. Tip Offset Specifies the leader tip or label text offset values for attached and freestanding labels. the X and Y Leader Offset options are set to 1. the Tip Offset specifies the X and Y offset from the insertion point you specified for the label. By default.Start Specifies the start point for the leader object. The point is defined with respect to the extents of the graphical object that the label is attached to. For attached labels. For freestanding labels. The Start option has no effect on freestanding labels. DBCONNECT | 233 . You can use this dialog box to update a label template with new data source information.

You can select a new catalog from this list to apply to the label template. Table Displays the name of the table specified for the selected label template. You can select a new schema from this list to apply to the label template. Data Source Displays the name of the data source specified for the selected label template. You can select a new data source from this list to apply to the label template. and Release 14 to AutoCAD 2000 (and later) format.You can open this dialog box using the following method: dbConnect menu: Templates ➤ Label Template Properties Template Name Displays the name of the selected label template. Schema Displays the name of the schema specified for the selected label template. Link Conversion Dialog Box Converts links created in AutoCAD Release 12. Release 13. Fields Displays the fields specified for the selected label template. You can select a new table from this list to apply to the label template. You can open this dialog box using the following methods: dbConnect menu: Link Conversion 234 | DBCONNECT . Catalog Displays the name of the catalog specified for the selected label template.

Link Format Specifies the format of the link that you are converting. Different fields are displayed depending on whether you select R12 or R13/R14. the link conversion process requires that you specify a mapping of the old AutoCAD SQL Extension™ (ASE) link values to the new ones used by AutoCAD 2000 and later. For example. you must identify the environment used by a particular link in Release 14 and specify the corresponding data source that you want substituted for this environment in AutoCAD 2000 and later. DBCONNECT | 235 .Because legacy links are stored in formats that differ significantly from AutoCAD 2000 and later. Similar mappings must be established between all old ASE link values and the new values that you want substituted for them.

Schema Lists available schemas that you can select for the converted link. Link Template Lists available link templates that you can select for the converted link. Table Specifies the table used by the link that you’re converting. Table Lists available tables that you can select for the converted link. Catalog Lists available catalogs that you can select for the converted link. Schema Specifies the schema used by the link that you’re converting. Database Specifies the database used by the link that you’re converting. Old Link Format (R13/R14) Specifies the path to the database table used by the link that you’re converting. New Link Format Specifies the path to the database table used by the converted link. Link Path Name Specifies the link path name used by the link that you’re converting. Catalog Specifies the catalog used by the link that you’re converting. 236 | Data Source Lists available data sources that you can select for the converted link. Environment Specifies the environment used by the link that you’re converting. DBMS Specifies the database management system used by the link that you’re converting. DBCONNECT .Old Link Format (R12) Specifies the path to the database table used by the link that you’re converting. Table Specifies the table used by the link that you’re converting.

ini file but keeps the dialog box open so that you can specify conversions for additional links. Link Manager Edits the values of the key fields for a selected linked object. Key Displays the key fields of the currently selected link template. You can open the Link Manager using the following methods: dbConnect menu: Links ➤ Link Manager. DBCONNECT | 237 . and then choose Link ➤ Link Manager. Apply Writes conversion mapping information to the asi. Cancel Closes the dialog box without converting any links. Link Templates Lists all link templates that are associated with the selected graphical object. Select the link template whose link values you want to view or edit. Select a linked graphical object.OK Writes conversion mapping information to the asi.ini file and closes the dialog box. Shortcut menu: Select and then right-click a linked graphical object.

Link dbConnect menu: Templates ➤ New Link Template. and then choose the Link button flyout. To display a list of values for a specific field. in which you can name the link template. You can open this dialog box using the following methods: dbConnect Manager buttons: Select a table in the dbConnect Manager and choose the New Link Template button. click a Value cell and choose [. Navigate to and select a table from the Select a Database Object dialog box (see page 242) and choose Continue. Delete Deletes the currently selected link from the graphical object it’s associated with. AutoCAD displays the New Link Template dialog box (see page 240).].Value Displays all key values that are defined for the selected link. without first displaying the New Link Template dialog box. Before the Link Template dialog box opens. Link Template Dialog Box Specifies the key fields that are used by a link template. This method opens the Link Template dialog box directly. Pointing device: Double-click a link template in the dbConnect Manager. Data View buttons: Choose New Link Template from the Link Template list.. Shortcut menu: Right-click a table in the dbConnect Manager and choose New Link Template.. 238 | DBCONNECT .

You can select a new table from this list to apply to the link template. and the second line lists the full data source path to the table in the following syntax: environment. You can open this dialog box using the following method: dbConnect menu: Templates ➤ Link Template Properties Template Name Displays the name of the selected link template.catalog. Schema Displays the name of the schema specified for the selected link template. Link Template Properties Dialog Box Displays the full data source path to a link template’s table. DBCONNECT | 239 .Template Name Displays the name of the link template. Before the Link Template Properties dialog box opens.table Key Fields Displays all fields that are available for the current table. The first line lists the name of the table. Table Displays the current database table. in the case of character fields. Keys Displays the key fields specified for the selected link template. Catalog Displays the name of the catalog specified for the selected link template. AutoCAD displays the Select a Database Object dialog box (see page 242). as well as the field type and. You can select a new catalog from this list to apply to the link template.schema. You specify the link template’s key fields by selecting the check box to the left of the field name. the field length. You can use this dialog box to update a link template with new data source information. from which you can select a link template. You can select a new data source from this list to apply to the link template. You can select a new schema from this list to apply to the link template. Data Source Displays the name of the data source specified for the selected link template. Table Displays the name of the table specified for the selected link template.

You can open this dialog box using the following methods: dbConnect Manager buttons: Select a table in the dbConnect Manager and choose the New Label Template button. dbConnect menu: Templates ➤ New Label Template. and then choose either the Create Freestanding Label or the Create Attached Label button flyout. Data View buttons: Choose New Label Template from the Label Template list.New Label Template Dialog Box Creates a new label template. After you enter a name for the label template and choose Continue. and then choose the Link button flyout. from which you can select one to use as a start point for your new label template. 240 | DBCONNECT . in which you specify the fields to display in your label and how to format them. Start with Template Lists available label templates in the current drawing. Link dbConnect menu: Templates ➤ New Link Template. New Label Template Name Specifies a name for the label template. You can open this dialog box using the following methods: dbConnect Manager buttons: Select a table in the dbConnect Manager and choose the New Link Template button. Navigate to and then select a table in the Select Data Object dialog box (see page 243) and choose Continue. the Label Template dialog box (see page 231) opens. Shortcut menu: Right-click a table in the dbConnect Manager and choose New Link Template. Select a link template from the Select a Database Object dialog box (see page 242) and choose Continue. Data View buttons: Choose New Link Template from the Link Template list. New Link Template Dialog Box Creates a new link template. Shortcut menu: Right-click a table in the dbConnect Manager and choose New Label Template. If there is no link template defined for the selected table in the current drawing. the New Link Template dialog box (see page 240) is displayed.

Existing Query Names Lists all available queries from the current drawing. You can open this dialog box using the following methods: Data View menu: Replace. or existing query in the dbConnect Manager and choose New Query. (AutoCAD displays a dialog box in which you can select a database object to query. You can specify a replacement value that overwrites the value that you’re searching for. It is not possible to conduct a global search that scans all columns in the table.After you enter a name for the link template and choose Continue. You can open this dialog box using the following methods: dbConnect Manager buttons: Select a link template. Replace Dialog Box Searches for specified text or a numeric value in the currently loaded Data View table. dbConnect menu: Queries ➤ New Query on an External Table. Start with Template Lists all available link templates from the current drawing. the Query Editor (see page 215) is displayed. table.) Shortcut menu: Right-click a link template. (This menu is available only if you have a database table open in the Data View window. The search is limited to a single table column.) DBCONNECT | 241 . or existing query in the dbConnect Manager and choose the New Query button. in which you specify the key fields that the link uses. New Query Dialog Box Creates a new query and opens the Query Editor. the Link Template dialog box (see page 238) opens. New Query Name Specifies a name for the query. New Query on a Link Template. table. After you enter a name for the query and choose Continue. from which you can select one to use as a starting point for the new link template. in which you can construct a new query. New Link Template Name Specifies a name for the link template.

Delete Link Template. including case. View Data ➤ View Linked Table. Select a Database Object Dialog Box Displays a list of the database objects. OK/Continue Either completes the current operation or opens a secondary dialog box in which you can continue the current operation. the New Label Template dialog box is displayed. Replace Replaces the next occurrence of the value that you’re searching for with the value specified in Replace With. for example. Labels ➤ Reload Labels. Find Next Finds the next occurrence of the value that you’re searching for. Queries ➤ Execute Query. You can select a database object from this list to apply to the current operation. Edit Query. or Delete Labels. Edit Link Template. that are associated with the current drawing. AutoCAD searches for the value regardless of case. or Delete Label Template. such as link templates. or queries. New Query on a Link Template. DBCONNECT . of what you enter in Find What. you are creating a new label template. Edit Label Template. Show Labels. Find What Specifies the value to search for. from which you must select one to apply to the current operation. Links ➤ Delete Links. You can open this dialog box using the following methods: dbConnect menu: Templates ➤ New Label Template. Replace With Specifies a replacement value for the value that you’re searching for. Replace All Replaces all occurrences of the value that you’re searching for with the value specified in Replace With. If. or Delete Query.Shortcut menu: Right-click a single cell or column header in the Data View window and choose Replace. If this option is cleared. Match Case Searches for exact value. Hide Labels. Edit Linked Table 242 | Database Object List Lists the available database objects that are associated with the current drawing. label templates.

Edit External Table Tree View Window Lists the available data sources. DBCONNECT | 243 . Sort Dialog Box Specifies a sort order that is applied to the table records displayed in the Data View window. If. The data from this column is sorted first.Select a Data Object Dialog Box Displays the Data Sources node of the dbConnect Manager. View Data ➤ View External Table. from which you can navigate to and select a table that the current operation is applied to. You can open this dialog box using the following method: Shortcut menu: Right-click a column header in the Data View window and choose Sort. you are creating a new link template. You can open this dialog box using the following methods: dbConnect menu: Data Sources ➤ Connect. from which you can select a table to apply to the current operation. Queries ➤ New Query on an External Table. OK/Continue Either completes the current operation or opens a secondary dialog box or window. the New Link Template dialog box is displayed. and then the data from any additional Then By columns that are specified is sorted. in which you can continue the current operation. for example. Sort By Specifies the primary column to apply to the sort operation. Templates ➤ New Link Template. You can select a combination of up to five columns to apply to the sort order.

Then By Specifies an additional column to apply to the sort operation. and link templates and any associated links must be updated. The column data is ordered with the smallest value at the beginning of the Data View record set and the largest value at the end of the record set. You can open this dialog box using the following methods: dbConnect menu: Synchronize Shortcut menu: Right-click a link template in the dbConnect Manager and choose Synchronize. Synchronize Dialog Box Updates links that AutoCAD is unable to resolve. Descending Applies a descending sort order to the selected column. Certain errors (such as a resized column in the source database table) can be fixed directly from the Synchronize dialog box.Ascending Applies an ascending sort order to the selected column. 244 | DBCONNECT . Other errors (such as links that point to nonexistent records) must be fixed in the source database table. the structure specified by the link template used to create the links is no longer valid. Links can become invalid if you change the underlying structure of their source table. The column data is ordered with the largest value at the beginning of the Data View record set and the smallest value at the end of the record set. Reset Clears all columns that are specified for the current sort order so that you can specify a new sort order. The Synchronize dialog box provides a list of detected errors. In these cases. or if you move the source table to a new location.

Fix Fixes the currently selected error.Errors Displays a list of errors detected. Description Provides a brief description of the error selected in the Errors list. DBCONNECT | 245 . Close Closes the dialog box. Delete Deletes the invalid link template and any associated links from the current drawing. Indicate Drawing Objects Indicates all objects in the current drawing that are associated with the invalid link template. You can select an error to fix. See Also Commands DBCCLOSE closes the dbConnect Manager.

Leader text: Displays the Multiline Text Editor (DDEDIT). Multiline text: Displays the Multiline Text Editor (DDEDIT). DBLIST Lists database information for each object in the drawing dblist The text window displays information about each object in the current drawing. Block: Displays the Reference Edit dialog box (REFEDIT). or frequently used. Objects that display specialized editors when double-clicked include ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Attribute: Displays the Edit Attribute Definition dialog box (DDEDIT). depending on the object type that is double clicked. convenient. When you double-click most objects. Attribute within a block: Displays the Enhanced Attribute Editor (EATTEDIT). the Properties palette is displayed. AutoCAD pauses when the window fills with information. Xref: Displays the Reference Edit dialog box (REFEDIT).DBLCLKEDIT Controls double-click behavior Command line: dblclkedit Enter double-click editing mode [ON/OFF] <ON>: If double-click editing is turned on. Text: Displays the Edit Text dialog box (DDEDIT). Hatch: Displays the Hatch Edit dialog box (HATCHEDIT). 246 | DBLCLKEDIT . Press ENTER to resume output. or press ESC to cancel. Multiline: Displays the Multiline Edit Tools dialog box (MLEDIT). one of several dialog boxes may be displayed. Double-clicking some types of objects displays specialized editors that are more powerful.

DDEDIT repeats the prompt until you press ENTER to end the command. and feature control frames An attribute is informational text associated with a block. attribute definitions. Command line: ddedit Select an annotation object or [Undo]: Object Selection Displays one of four dialog boxes. right-click in the drawing area. and choose Mtext Edit or Text Edit. DDEDIT | 247 . dimension text. Attribute definitions (not part of a block definition) display the Edit Attribute Definition dialog box (see page 248). Text toolbar: Shortcut menu: Select a text object. Text created using MTEXT displays the Multiline Text Editor (see page 577).DDEDIT Edits text. A feature control frame is a container for the tolerance information for a single dimension. An attribute definition is a template for creating an attribute. Feature control frames display the Geometric Tolerance dialog box (see page 1031). depending on the type of text you select: ■ ■ ■ ■ Text created using TEXT or DTEXT displays the Edit Text dialog box (see page 248).

Undo Returns the text or attribute definition to its previous value. Prompt Specifies the attribute prompt that displays when you insert a block containing this attribute definition. which identifies the attribute in the drawing. 248 | Tag Specifies the attribute tag. AutoCAD changes lowercase letters to uppercase. start the string with a backslash (\). start the string with two backslashes. start the string with two backslashes. start the string with a backslash (\). Edit Text Dialog Box Modifies text created with TEXT or DTEXT. You can use this option immediately after editing. DDEDIT . prompt. The tag can contain any characters except spaces or exclamation marks (!). and default value. Edit Attribute Definition Dialog Box Modifies an attribute definition’s tag. Enter the new text and choose OK to update the object. If you need leading blanks in the default value. If the first character must be a backslash. If you need a backslash as the first character. If you need leading blanks in the prompt. Default Specifies the default attribute value.

Point Style Dialog Box Shows the current point style and size. TOLERANCE creates geometric tolerances. -ATTEDIT edits both attributes values and attribute properties individually or globally. The point style is stored in the PDMODE system variable. Change the point style by selecting an icon. nonconstant attribute values associated with a specific block. DDPTYPE Specifies the display style and size of point objects Format menu: Point Style Command line: ddptype (or 'ddptype for transparent use) The Point Style dialog box is displayed. Commands ATTEDIT edits individual.See Also See “Change Text” in the User’s Guide. Point Display Images Specifies the image used to display point objects. independent of the block. TEXT creates text on the screen as you enter it. DDPTYPE | 249 . MTEXT creates a multiline text object that fits within a specified area.

System Variables PDMODE sets the Point Display mode. The point display does not change when you zoom in or out. Viewpoint Presets Dialog Box Defines 3D view settings. MEASURE places markers on an object at specified intervals. Set Size Relative to Screen Sets the point display size as a percentage of the screen size. Subsequent point objects that you draw use the new value. The value you enter can be relative to the screen or in absolute units. AutoCAD displays points larger or smaller when you zoom in or out. See Also See “Draw Reference Points” in the User’s Guide. Commands POINT creates point objects. 250 | DDVPOINT .Point Size Sets the point display size. DDVPOINT Sets the three-dimensional viewing direction View menu: 3D Views ➤ Viewpoint Presets Command line: ddvpoint The Viewpoint Presets dialog box is displayed. Set Size in Absolute Units Sets the point display size as the actual units you specify under Point Size. PDSIZE sets the point display size. AutoCAD stores the point display size in the PDSIZE system variable. DIVIDE uses points as markers in an object divided into equal parts.

DDVPOINT | 251 .Set Viewing Angles Sets the direction of the view relative to either the world coordinate system (WCS) or a user coordinate system (UCS). You can also use the sample image to specify viewing angles. Set to Plan View Sets the viewing angles to display the plan view (XY plane) relative to the selected coordinate system. The red arm indicates the current angle. Absolute to WCS Sets the view direction relative to the WCS. Relative to UCS Sets the view direction relative to the current UCS. Selecting the bounded outer regions rounds off the angle to the value displayed in that region. XY Plane Specifies the angle from the XY plane. From Specifies viewing angles. Specify an angle by selecting the inner region of the circle or half-circle. The black arm indicates the new angle. X Axis Specifies the angle from the X axis.

which is slightly less than 33 seconds.See Also See “View a Parallel Projection in 3D” in the User’s Guide. Commands VPOINT is the command line equivalent of DDVPOINT. VIEW saves and restores named views. See Also See “Create Command Scripts” in the Customization Guide. Commands 252 | DELAY ATTACHURL attaches hyperlinks to objects and areas in a drawings. HYPERLINK displays a dialog box to attach and detach URLs to objects and offers additional options. You can use PURGE to remove the URLLAYER layer. See Also See “Add Hyperlinks to a Drawing” in the User’s Guide. If an area is selected. DETACHURL Removes hyperlinks in a drawing Command line: detachurl Select objects: Use an object selection method. Entering delay 1000 in your script delays the start of execution of the next command for about one second. PLAN displays the plan view of a specified UCS. .767 Specifies the duration of a pause. The longest delay available is 32767. the polyline is deleted. DELAY Provides a timed pause within a script Command line: delay (or 'delay for transparent use) Enter delay time (in milliseconds): milliseconds Enter a value from 0 through 32. and press ENTER to end selection Hyperlinks are removed from the selected objects.

In Dimensioning mode. Command line: dim or dim1 Dim: Enter a Dimensioning mode command The Dim prompt indicates that you’re in Dimensioning mode. UNDO reverses the effects of the entire dimensioning session. When you exit Dimensioning mode.DIM and DIM1 Accesses Dimensioning mode DIM and DIM1 start Dimensioning mode. UNDO or U Erases the most recently created dimension objects and cancels any new dimension system variable setting. enter e or exit. (DIM and DIM1 are provided only for compatibility with previous releases. Use DIM1 to execute a dimensioning command and immediately return to the Command prompt. DIM and DIM1 | 253 . or press ESC . in which you can use the dimensioning subcommands from earlier releases of AutoCAD. STYLE Changes the current text style. REDRAW Redraws the current viewport. Dimensioning mode commands Command Description EXIT Exits Dimensioning mode and returns to the Command prompt. You can also press ESC to exit Dimensioning mode. Dimensioning Mode Commands The following commands are available at the DIM prompt. you can use a special set of dimensioning commands instead of the main dimension commands. To exit Dimensioning mode.) Use DIM to remain in Dimensioning mode after you have used a dimensioning command.

For information about these Dimensioning mode commands.The following table shows which AutoCAD commands are equivalent to the rest of the Dimensioning mode commands. see the equivalent AutoCAD command. Dimensioning mode command equivalents 254 | Dimensioning mode command Equivalent command ALIGNED DIMALIGNED ANGULAR DIMANGULAR BASELINE DIMBASELINE CENTER DIMCENTER CONTINUE DIMCONTINUE DIAMETER DIMDIAMETER HOMETEXT DIMEDIT Home HORIZONTAL DIMLINEAR Horizontal LEADER LEADER NEWTEXT DIMEDIT New OBLIQUE DIMEDIT Oblique ORDINATE DIMORDINATE OVERRIDE DIMOVERRIDE RADIUS DIMRADIUS RESTORE -DIMSTYLE Restore ROTATED DIMLINEAR Rotated SAVE -DIMSTYLE Save STATUS -DIMSTYLE Status TEDIT DIMTEDIT TROTATE DIMEDIT Rotate DIM and DIM1 .

or press ENTER for automatic extension lines After you specify either manual or automatic extension lines. AutoCAD prompts you to specify the second one.Dimensioning mode command equivalents (continued) Dimensioning mode command Equivalent command UPDATE -DIMSTYLE Apply VARIABLES -DIMSTYLE Variables VERTICAL DIMLINEAR Vertical DIMALIGNED Creates an aligned linear dimension Dimension toolbar: Dimension menu: Aligned Command line: dimaligned Specify first extension line origin or <select object>: Specify a point for manual extension lines. the following prompt is displayed: Specify dimension line location or [Mtext/Text/Angle]: Specify a point or enter an option Extension Line Origin Specifies the first extension line origin (1). Specify second extension line origin: Specify a point (2) DIMALIGNED | 255 .

If you select a line or an arc. offset from origin (stored in DIMEXO) object selected dimension line location designated If you select a circle. its endpoints are used as the origins of the extension lines. The extension lines are offset from the endpoints by the distance specified in Offset from Origin on the Lines and Arrows tab of the New. AutoCAD stores this value in the DIMEXO system variable. the endpoints of its diameter are used as the origins of the extension line. You cannot select objects in a nonuniformly scaled block reference. The point used to select the circle defines the origin of the first extension line. only the individual line and arc segments are dimensioned. Select object to dimension: For polylines and other explodable objects. Modify. 256 | DIMALIGNED .1 2 point specification dimension line location designated Object Selection Automatically determines the origin points of the first and second extension lines after you select an object. and Override Dimension Style dialog boxes (see DIMSTYLE).

Enter dimension text <current>: Enter the dimension text. which you can use to edit the dimension text. use angle brackets (< >) to represent the generated measurement. If alternate units are not turned on in the dimension style. If alternate units are not turned on in the dimension style. enter the new dimension text.” in the User’s Guide. and then choose OK. you can display alternate units by entering square brackets ([ ]). Mtext Displays the Multiline Text Editor (see page 577). To include the generated measurement. To add a prefix or a suffix to the generated measurement. delete the angle brackets. To edit or replace the generated measurement. AutoCAD displays the generated dimension measurement within angle brackets.Dimension Line Location Specifies the placement of the dimension line and determines the direction to draw the extension lines. Text Customizes the dimension text at the command line. Modify. the DIMALIGNED command ends. you can display them by entering square brackets ([ ]). and Override Dimension Style dialog boxes. The current dimension style determines the appearance of the generated measurements. For more information about formatting dimension text. After you specify the location. see “Dimensions and Tolerances. enter the prefix or suffix before or after the angle brackets. See “Control Codes and Special Characters” on page 1027. Use control codes and Unicode character strings to enter special characters or symbols. Dimension text properties are set on the Text tab of the New. AutoCAD represents the generated measurement with angle brackets (< >). DIMALIGNED | 257 . or press ENTER to accept the generated measurement.

The center of the arc is the angle vertex. Specify angle of dimension text: Enter an angle. or <specify vertex>: Select an arc. AutoCAD redisplays the Dimension Line Location prompt.Angle Changes the angle of the dimension text. line. or press ENTER to create the angular dimension by specifying three points After you define the angle to dimension. or line. MTEXT controls how text is displayed in multiline paragraphs. to rotate the text 45 degrees. the following prompt is displayed: Specify dimension arc line location or [Mtext/Text/Angle]: Arc Selection Uses points on the selected arc as the defining points for a three-point angular dimension. For example. angle vertex 258 | DIMANGULAR . The arc endpoints become the origin points of the extension lines. Commands DIMSTYLE creates and manages dimension styles. AutoCAD draws the extension lines from the angle endpoints to the intersection of the dimension line. circle. which define dimension properties. after Angle DIMANGULAR Creates an angular dimension Dimension toolbar: Dimension menu: Angular Command line: dimangular Select arc. AutoCAD draws the dimension line as an arc between the extension lines. circle. before Angle See Also See “Create Aligned Dimensions” in the User’s Guide. After you specify the angle. System Variables DIMEXO stores the offset between extension lines and origin points. enter 45.

If you need extension lines. After you specify the location. The dimension line spans the angle between the two lines. 2 3 1 Specify angle vertex: Specify a point (1) Specify first angle endpoint: Specify a point (2) Specify second angle endpoint: Specify a point (3) The angle vertex can be the same as one of the angle endpoints. The extension lines are drawn from the angle endpoints to the intersection of the dimension line. Dimension Arc Line Location Specifies the placement of the dimension line and determines the direction to draw the extension lines. AutoCAD adds extension lines as needed to extend one or both lines. 2 Specify second angle endpoint: Specify a point (2) angle vertex The second angle endpoint is the origin of the second extension line and does not have to lie on the circle. AutoCAD draws the dimension line as an arc between the extension lines. Select second line: angle displayed depends on cursor position AutoCAD determines the angle by using each line as a vector for the angle and the intersection of the lines for the angle vertex. Three-Point Specification Creates a dimension based on three points you specify. The arc is always less than 180 degrees. The center of the circle is the angle vertex. If the dimension line does not intersect the lines being dimensioned. Line Selection Defines the angle using two lines. DIMANGULAR ends. the endpoints are used as origin points.Circle Selection 1 Uses the selection point (1) as the origin of the first extension line. DIMANGULAR | 259 .

enter the prefix or suffix before or after the angle brackets. Dimension text properties are set on the Text tab of the New. you can display them by entering square brackets ([ ]). 260 | DIMANGULAR . to rotate the text 45 degrees. To add a prefix or a suffix to the generated measurement. See Also See “Create Angular Dimensions” in the User’s Guide. Use control codes and Unicode character strings to enter special characters or symbols. If alternate units are not turned on in the dimension style. you can display alternate units by entering square brackets ([ ]). AutoCAD represents the generated measurement with angle brackets (< >). and Override Dimension Style dialog boxes. To include the generated measurement. or press ENTER to accept the generated measurement. Text Customizes the dimension text at the command line. The current dimension style determines the appearance of the generated measurements. Specify angle of dimension text: Enter an angle. which you can use to edit the dimension text. enter the new dimension text. For more information about formatting dimension text. use angle brackets (< >) to represent the generated measurement. To edit or replace the generated measurement. AutoCAD displays the generated dimension measurement within angle brackets.Mtext Displays the Multiline Text Editor (see page 577). Modify. For example. see “Dimensions and Tolerances. Enter dimension text <current>: Enter the dimension text. delete the angle brackets. If alternate units are not turned on in the dimension style. and then choose OK. enter 45. Angle Changes the angle of the dimension text. See “Control Codes and Special Characters” on page 1027.” in the User’s Guide.

Select base dimension: Select a linear. DDEDIT controls the appearance of single. DIMBASELINE | 261 .Commands DIMSTYLE controls dimension styles. or angular dimension to use as the base for the baseline dimension. AutoCAD skips this prompt and uses the dimension object that was last created in the current session. enter an option. the following prompt is displayed: Specify feature location or [Undo/Select] <Select>: To end the command. and Override Dimension Style dialog boxes (see page 290). or ordinate dimension from the baseline of the previous dimension or a selected dimension DIMBASELINE creates a series of related dimensions measured from the same baseline. DIMBASELINE Creates a linear. or press ENTER to select a base dimension If the base dimension is ordinate.line text. which set dimension format. the following prompt is displayed: Specify a second extension line origin or [Undo/Select] <Select>: Specify a point. Modify. or press ESC . Baseline dimensioning is also called parallel dimensioning. ordinate. The current dimension style determines the appearance of the text. AutoCAD uses a baseline increment value to offset each new dimension line and to avoid overlaying the previous dimension line. If the base dimension is linear or angular. angular. AutoCAD stores this value in the DIMDLI system variable. The baseline increment value is specified in Baseline Spacing on the Lines and Arrows tab of the New. AutoCAD prompts you to select a linear. Dimension toolbar: Dimension menu: Baseline Command line: dimbaseline If no dimension was created in the current session. ordinate. or angular dimension Otherwise. press ENTER twice.

When you select a second point. press ESC . or press ESC to end the command. angular baseline dimensioning linear baseline dimensioning Feature Location Uses the endpoint of the base dimension as the endpoint for the baseline dimension.Second Extension Line Origin By default. or angular dimension to use as the basis for the baseline dimension. or angular dimension to use as the basis for the baseline dimension. To select another linear. ordinate. the extension line origin becomes the extension line of the base dimension closest to the pick point of the selection. or press ESC to end the command. you are prompted for the next feature location. When you select a feature location. Select base dimension: Select a linear. AutoCAD draws the baseline dimension and redisplays the Specify Feature Location prompt. press ESC . To end the command. or angular dimension Select a base dimension. press ENTER . To select another linear. Undo Undoes the last baseline dimension entered during this command session. 262 | DIMBASELINE . explicitly select the base dimension. To override this default behavior. AutoCAD draws the baseline dimension and redisplays the Specify a Second Extension Line Origin prompt. ordinate. AutoCAD uses the first extension line of the base dimension as the extension line origin for the baseline dimension. To end the command. press ENTER . ordinate. ordinate. or angular dimension Select a base dimension. Select base dimension: Select a linear.

which set dimension format. System Variables DIMCEN controls the generation of center marks or centerlines. You can also change center mark settings using the DIMCEN system variable. Commands DIMSTYLE controls dimension styles. ordinate.Select Prompts you to select a linear. DIMCENTER | 263 . or angular dimension to use as the base for the baseline dimension. System Variables DIMDLI specifies spacing between dimension lines of a baseline dimension. After you select a base dimension. centerlines See Also See “Create Radial Dimensions” in the User’s Guide. See Also See “Create Baseline and Continued Dimensions” in the User’s Guide. AutoCAD redisplays the Specify Second Extension Line Origin prompt or the Specify Feature Location prompt. Commands DIMSTYLE controls dimension styles. MTEXT controls how paragraph text is displayed. which set dimension format. See DIMSTYLE. DIMCENTER Creates the center mark or the centerlines of circles and arcs Dimension toolbar: Dimension menu: Center Mark Command line: dimcenter center mark Select arc or circle: Use an object selection method You can choose between center marks and centerlines and specify their size when you set up the dimension style.

the following prompt is displayed: Specify feature location or [Undo/Select] <Select>: To end the command. Dimension toolbar: Dimension menu: Continue Command line: dimcontinue If no dimension was created in the current session.DIMCONTINUE Creates a linear. and the DIMTMOVE system variable is 1). press ENTER twice. or angular dimension Otherwise. The current dimension style determines the appearance of the text. or press ESC . The current dimension style determines the appearance of the text. If the base dimension is linear or angular. or press ENTER to select a base dimension If the base dimension is ordinate. ordinate. These appear as overrides for the continued dimension (the DIMSE1 system variable is on. Continued dimensioning is also known as chain dimensioning. the following prompt is displayed: Specify a second extension line origin or [Undo/Select] <Select>: Specify a point. or angular dimension to use as the base for the continued dimension. enter an option. the first extension line is suppressed and the placement of text and arrowheads might include a leader line. ordinate. AutoCAD prompts you to select a linear. 264 | DIMCONTINUE . When you create linear continued dimensions. Select continued dimension: Select a linear. AutoCAD skips this prompt and uses the dimension object that was last created in the current session. Second Extension Line Origin Uses the second extension line origin of the continued dimension for the first extension line origin of the next dimension. angular. or ordinate dimension from the second extension line of the previous dimension or a selected dimension DIMCONTINUE draws a series of related dimensions. such as several shorter dimensions that add up to the total measurement.

To select another linear. or press ESC to end the command. ordinate. After you select a continued dimension. or angular dimension to use as the continued dimension. See Also See “Create Baseline and Continued Dimensions”in the User’s Guide. AutoCAD redisplays the Specify a Second Extension Line Origin prompt or the Specify Feature Location prompt. Select continued dimension: Select a linear. press ESC . or angular dimension to use as the basis for the continued dimension. Select Prompts you to select a linear. you are prompted for the next feature location. or angular dimension Select a base dimension. To end the command. press ESC . or press ESC to end the command. AutoCAD draws the continued dimension and redisplays the Specify Feature Location prompt. To end the command. press ENTER . To end the command. AutoCAD redisplays the Specify a Second Extension Line Origin prompt. When you select a feature location. ordinate.1 After you select a continued dimension. or angular dimension to use as the basis for the continued dimension. DIMCONTINUE | 265 . Undo Undoes the last continued dimension entered during the command session. Select continued dimension: Select a linear. ordinate. Feature Location Uses the endpoint of the base dimension as the endpoint for the continued dimension. press ENTER . Commands DIMSTYLE controls dimension styles. To select another linear. or angular dimension Select a base dimension. ordinate. which set dimension format. ordinate. press ESC .

After you specify the location. AutoCAD does not draw a center mark or a centerline when a dimension line is drawn inside the arc or circle. Specify dimension line location or [Mtext/Text/Angle]: Specify a point or enter an option Dimension Line Location Uses the point you specify to locate the dimension line. the dimension moves around or inside the circle or arc. 266 | DIMDIAMETER . the options set for the dimension style (see DIMSTYLE). Different types of diameter dimensions Dimension toolbar: Dimension menu: Diameter Command line: dimdiameter Select arc or circle: AutoCAD measures the diameter and displays the text with a diameter symbol (∅) in front of it. AutoCAD draws a hook line one arrowhead long next to the dimension text. For horizontal dimension text. AutoCAD draws the dimension. AutoCAD stores the setting for center marks and centerlines in the DIMCEN system variable. The dimension style controls center marks and centerlines. As you move the cursor. The position of the cursor determines the location of the dimension line. and the position of the cursor. as shown in the first two illustrations. if the angle of the diameter line is greater than 15 degrees from horizontal and is outside the circle or arc.DIMDIAMETER Creates diameter dimensions for circles and arcs DIMDIAMETER draws different types of diameter dimensions depending on the size of the circle or arc.

To add a prefix or a suffix to the generated measurement. you can display alternate units by entering square brackets ([ ]). and Override Dimension Style dialog boxes. For more information about formatting dimension text. Angle Changes the angle of the dimension text. Enter dimension text <current>: Enter the dimension text. to rotate the text 45 degrees. see “Dimensions and Tolerances. See “Control Codes and Special Characters” on page 1027. If alternate units are not turned on in the dimension style. and then choose OK. enter the prefix or suffix before or after the angle brackets. enter 45. To include the generated measurement. you can display them by entering square brackets ([ ]). delete the angle brackets. Dimension text properties are set on the Text tab of the New. which you can use to edit the dimension text. Modify. Specify angle of dimension text: Enter an angle. DIMDIAMETER | 267 . AutoCAD represents the generated measurement with angle brackets (< >). The current dimension style determines the appearance of the dimension text. If alternate units are not turned on in the dimension style. To edit or replace the generated measurement. AutoCAD displays the generated dimension measurement within angle brackets. After you specify the angle. For example. use angle brackets (< >) to represent the generated measurement.” in the User’s Guide. AutoCAD redisplays the Dimension Line Location prompt. Text Customizes the dimension text at the command line. Use control codes and Unicode character strings to enter special characters or symbols.Mtext Displays the Multiline Text Editor (see page 577). enter the new dimension text. or press ENTER to accept the generated measurement.

DIMJUST controls the horizontal justification of dimension text. associative dimensions in paper space are excluded). if model space is active. which set dimension format. DIMUPT controls user-positioned text. Command line: dimdisassociate Select dimensions to disassociate: Select one or more dimensions and then press ENTER DIMDISASSOCIATE filters the selection set to include only associative dimensions that are not on locked layers. and that are not in a different space than the current space (for example. DIMDISASSOCIATE then disassociates these dimensions and reports the number of dimensions that are filtered out and the number that are disassociated. System Variables DIMCEN controls the creation of center marks and centerlines. DIMREASSOCIATE associates selected dimensions to geometric objects. See Also See “Associative Dimensions” in the User’s Guide. DIMDISASSOCIATE . DIMTAD controls the vertical position of text in relation to the dimension line. Commands DIMSTYLE controls dimension styles. System Variables DIMASSOC controls the associativity property of dimensions and leaders. DIMDISASSOCIATE Removes associativity from selected dimensions DIMDISASSOCIATE converts selected dimensions that are associated with geometric objects into non-associative dimensions.See Also See “Create Radial Dimensions” in the User’s Guide. 268 | Commands DIMDISASSOCIATE removes the associativity from selected dimensions. DIMTIH and DIMTOH control the position of dimension text inside and outside the extension lines. DIMATFIT controls how text fits within the extension lines. DIMTOFL controls drawing of a dimension line between the extension lines even when the text is placed outside the extension lines.

Use control codes and DIMEDIT | 269 . The Oblique option controls the angle of extension lines.DIMEDIT Edits dimensions DIMEDIT affects dimension text and extension lines on one or more dimension objects. Select objects: Use an object selection method to select dimension objects before Home after Home The selected dimension text is returned to its default position and rotation as specified in its dimension style. New Changes dimension text using the Multiline Text Editor (see page 577). and Rotate options affect dimension text. To add a prefix or a suffix to the generated measurement. before New after New AutoCAD represents the generated measurement with angle brackets (< >). Dimension toolbar: Command line: dimedit Enter type of dimension editing [Home/New/Rotate/Oblique] <Home>: Enter an option or press ENTER Home Moves rotated dimension text back to its default position. The Home. New. enter the prefix or suffix before or after the angle brackets.

delete the angle brackets. The Oblique option is useful when extension lines conflict with other features of the drawing. see “Dimensions and Tolerances. If alternate units are not turned on in the dimension style. and then choose OK. To edit or replace the generated measurement. which is determined by the vertical and horizontal text settings on the Text tab of the New. you can display them by entering square brackets ([ ]). Rotate Rotates dimension text. rotated text Select objects: Use an object selection method to select dimension objects Oblique Adjusts the oblique angle of the extension lines for linear dimensions. Enter text angle: Entering 0 places the text in its default orientation.Unicode character strings to enter special characters or symbols. The DIMTIH and DIMTOH system variables control this orientation. For more information about formatting dimension text. Select objects: Use an object selection method to select dimension objects Enter oblique angle (press ENTER for none): angle or press ENTER 270 | DIMEDIT Enter an .” in the User’s Guide. This option is similar to the Angle option of DIMTEDIT. and Override Dimension Style dialog boxes. Modify. enter the new dimension text. AutoCAD creates linear dimensions with extension lines perpendicular to the direction of the dimension line. See DIMSTYLE. See “Control Codes and Special Characters” on page 1027.

DIMLINEAR Creates linear dimensions Dimension toolbar: Dimension menu: Linear Command line: dimlinear Specify first extension line origin or <select object>: Specify a point or press ENTER to select an object to dimension After you specify the extension line origin points or the object to dimension.See Also See “Modify Dimension Text” in the User’s Guide. System Variables DIMTIH and DIMTOH control the position of dimension text inside and outside the extension lines. the following prompt is displayed: Specify dimension line location or [Mtext/Text/Angle/Horizontal/Vertical/ Rotated]: Specify a point or enter an option DIMLINEAR | 271 . Commands DIMTEDIT repositions and rotates text in a dimension without affecting other parts of the dimension.

See “Control Codes and Special Characters” on page 1027. enter the prefix or suffix before or after the angle brackets. To add a prefix or a suffix to the generated measurement. 272 | DIMLINEAR . 3 dimension line location designated Mtext Displays the Multiline Text Editor (see page 577). After you specify the location. AutoCAD represents the generated measurement with angle brackets (< >). Use control codes and Unicode character strings to enter special characters or symbols. Specify second extension line origin: Specify a point (2) 1 2 point specification Dimension Line Location Uses the point you specify to locate the dimension line and determines the direction to draw the extension lines.First Extension Line Origin Prompts for the origin point of the second extension line after you specify the origin point of the first. AutoCAD draws the dimension. which you can use to edit the dimension text.

Modify. Text Customizes the dimension text on the command line. or press ENTER to accept the generated measurement. Specify angle of dimension text: Enter an angle. For more information about formatting dimension text. use angle brackets (< >) to represent the generated measurement. delete the angle brackets. For example. To include the generated measurement. enter the new dimension text. enter 90. The current dimension style determines the appearance of the generated measurements. If alternate units are not turned on in the dimension style. AutoCAD displays the generated dimension measurement within angle brackets. you can display alternate units by entering square brackets ([ ]). before Angle after Angle DIMLINEAR | 273 . and Override Dimension Style dialog boxes. see “Dimensions and Tolerances. Dimension text properties are set on the Text tab of the New.” in the User’s Guide. Angle Changes the angle of the dimension text. Enter dimension text <current>: Enter the dimension text. to rotate the text 90 degrees. you can display them by entering square brackets ([ ]). and then choose OK.To edit or replace the generated measurement. If alternate units are not turned on in the dimension style.

See the option descriptions provided earlier in this command.Horizontal Creates horizontal linear dimensions. Angle These text editing and formatting options are identical in all dimension commands. Rotated Creates rotated linear dimensions. Mtext. Text. After you specify the location. Specify angle of dimension line <current>: Specify an angle or press ENTER 274 | DIMLINEAR . Specify dimension line location or [Mtext/Text/Angle]: Specify a point or enter an option Dimension Line Location Uses the point you specify to locate the dimension line. Angle These text editing and formatting options are identical in all dimension commands. AutoCAD draws the dimension. See the option descriptions provided earlier in this command. Mtext. Specify dimension line location or [Mtext/Text/Angle]: Specify a point or enter an option Dimension Line Location Uses the point you specify to locate the dimension line. Vertical Creates vertical linear dimensions. After you specify the location. Text. AutoCAD draws the dimension.

If you select a line or an arc. offset from origin (DIMEXO system variable) 3 object selected dimension line location designated If you select a circle. See DIMSTYLE. System Variables DIMEXO stores the offset of the extension lines from the origin points. The extension lines are offset from the endpoints by the distance you specify in Offset from Origin in the Lines and Arrows tab of the New. Commands DIMSTYLE controls dimension styles. Select object to dimension: For polylines and other explodable objects.Object Selection Automatically determines the origin points of the first and second extension lines after you select an object. AutoCAD uses the line or arc endpoints as the origins of the extension lines. and Override Dimension Style dialog boxes. When the point used to select the circle is close to the north or south quadrant point. Modify. AutoCAD stores this value in the DIMEXO system variable. AutoCAD draws a vertical dimension. AutoCAD uses the diameter endpoints as the origins of the extension line. AutoCAD draws a horizontal dimension. When the point used to select the circle is close to the east or west quadrant point. MTEXT controls how AutoCAD displays text in multiline paragraphs. which set dimension format and behavior. AutoCAD dimensions only the individual line and arc segments. You cannot select objects in a nonuniformly scaled block reference. DIMLINEAR | 275 . See Also See “Create Linear Dimensions” in the User’s Guide.

where you can specify the endpoint. where you can specify the endpoint. The absolute value of the coordinate is used according to the prevailing standards for ordinate dimensions. AutoCAD uses the current user coordinate system (UCS) to determine the measured X or Y ordinate and draws the leader line in a direction orthogonal to the axes of the current UCS. Ydatum Measures the Y ordinate and determines the orientation of the leader line and dimension text. If the difference in the Y ordinate is greater. AutoCAD displays the Leader Endpoint prompt. Xdatum Ydatum 276 | DIMORDINATE . Dimension toolbar: Dimension menu: Ordinate Command line: dimordinate Specify feature location: Specify a point or snap to an object Specify leader endpoint or [Xdatum/Ydatum/Mtext/Text/Angle]: Specify a point or enter an option Leader Endpoint Specification Uses the difference between the feature location and the leader endpoint to determine whether it is an X or a Y ordinate dimension. the dimension measures the X ordinate. Otherwise. These dimensions are also known as datum dimensions.DIMORDINATE Creates ordinate point dimensions Ordinate dimensions display the X or Y ordinate of a feature along with a simple leader line. Xdatum Measures the X ordinate and determines the orientation of the leader line and dimension text. it measures the Y ordinate. AutoCAD displays the Leader Endpoint prompts.

and then choose OK. use angle brackets (< >) to represent the generated measurement.” in the User’s Guide. AutoCAD redisplays the Leader Endpoint prompt. To add a prefix or a suffix to the generated measurement. If alternate units are not turned on in the dimension style. Modify. For more information about formatting dimension text. DIMORDINATE | 277 . enter the new dimension text. If alternate units are not turned on in the dimension style. AutoCAD redisplays the Leader Endpoint prompt. which you can use to edit the dimension text. To edit or replace the generated measurement. or press ENTER to accept the generated measurement To include the generated measurement.Mtext Displays the Multiline Text Editor (see page 577). delete the angle brackets. Dimension text properties are set on the Text tab of the New. and Override Dimension Style dialog boxes. Use control codes and Unicode character strings to enter special characters or symbols. AutoCAD displays the generated dimension measurement within angle brackets. AutoCAD represents the generated measurement with angle brackets (< >). Enter dimension text <current>: Enter the dimension text. The current dimension style determines the appearance of the generated measurements. enter the prefix or suffix before or after the angle brackets. After you choose OK. After you press ENTER . See “Control Codes and Special Characters” on page 1027. see “Dimensions and Tolerances. Text Customizes the dimension text on the command line. you can display alternate units by entering square brackets ([ ]). you can display them by entering square brackets ([ ]).

DIMOVERRIDE Overrides dimensioning system variables DIMOVERRIDE overrides dimensioning system variable settings that are asso- ciated with a dimension object but doesn't affect the current dimension style. ORTHO constrains cursor movement to the horizontal or vertical directions or aligns movement with the current grid rotation angle.Angle Changes the angle of the dimension text. enter 45. Dimension menu: Override Command line: dimoverride Enter dimension variable name to override or [Clear overrides]: Enter the name of a dimension variable. Specify angle of dimension text: Enter an angle. which set dimension format and behavior. See Also See “Create Ordinate Dimensions” in the User’s Guide. After you specify the angle. or enter c Dimension Variable Name to Override 278 | DIMOVERRIDE Overrides the value of the dimensioning system variable you specify. AutoCAD redisplays the Leader Endpoint prompt. Enter new value for dimension variable <current>: Enter a value or press ENTER . Commands DIMSTYLE controls dimension styles. MTEXT controls how AutoCAD displays text in multiline paragraphs. to rotate the text 45 degrees. You can also use the command to clear overrides from dimensions. For example.

DIMTOH. next to the dimension text. and the dimension objects return to the settings defined by their dimension style. DIMRADIUS | 279 . which set dimension format and behavior. and DIMTAD system variables. Select objects: Use an object selection method to select the dimensions AutoCAD clears the overrides. DIMTOFL. the options in the New. AutoCAD stores the values of the options in the DIMUPT. AutoCAD draws a center mark if the DIMCEN system variable is not set to 0. System Variables For a list of dimension system variables.” DIMRADIUS Creates radial dimensions for circles and arcs A radial dimension consists of a radius dimension line with an arrowhead at the arc or circle end. If you press ENTER . Commands DIMSTYLE controls dimension styles. DIMRADIUS draws different types of radial dimensions depending on the size of the circle or arc. Select objects: Use an object selection method to select the dimensions AutoCAD applies the overrides to the selected dimensions. AutoCAD redisplays the Dimension Variable Name to Override prompt. and Override Dimension Style dialog boxes (see DIMSTYLE). Modify. also called a dogleg or landing. one arrowhead long. DIMATFIT. see “Dimension Variables Quick Reference. AutoCAD prompts you to select the dimensions.If you enter a new value. See Also See “Override a Dimension Style” in the User’s Guide. and the position of the cursor. if the angle of the radial dimension line is greater than 15 degrees from horizontal. AutoCAD draws a hook line. DIMTIH. Clear Overrides Clears any overrides on selected dimensions. For horizontal dimension text. DIMJUST.

AutoCAD represents the generated measurement with angle brackets (< >). See “Control Codes and Special Characters” on page 1027.AutoCAD measures the radius and displays the text with the letter R in front of it. which you can use to edit the dimension text. Dimension toolbar: Dimension menu: Radius Command line: dimradius Select arc or circle: Specify dimension line location or [Mtext/Text/Angle]: Specify a point or enter an option 280 | Dimension Line Location Uses the point you specify to locate the dimension line. Use control codes and Unicode character strings to enter special characters or symbols. AutoCAD draws the dimension. To add a prefix or a suffix to the generated measurement. Mtext Displays the Multiline Text Editor (see page 577). After you specify the location. enter the prefix or suffix before or after the angle brackets. DIMRADIUS .

delete the angle brackets. use angle brackets (< >) to represent the generated measurement. the Dimension Line Location prompt is displayed. Specify angle of dimension text: DIMRADIUS | 281 . and Override Dimension Style dialog boxes. or press ENTER to accept the generated measurement To include the generated measurement. The current dimension style determines the appearance of the generated measurements. AutoCAD displays the generated dimension measurement within angle brackets. Dimension text properties are set on the Text tab of the New. If alternate units are not turned on in the dimension style. Text Customizes the dimension text on the command line.To edit or replace the generated measurement. you can display alternate units by entering square brackets ([ ]). If alternate units are not turned on in the dimension style. For more information about formatting dimension text. see “Dimensions and Tolerances” in the User’s Guide. AutoCAD redisplays the Dimension Line Location prompt. Enter dimension text <current>: Enter the dimension text. you can display them by entering square brackets ([ ]). After you press ENTER . Modify. Angle Changes the angle of the dimension text. enter the new dimension text. and then choose OK. After you choose OK.

Dimension menu: Reassociate Dimensions Command line: dimreassociate Select dimensions to reassociate: Select dimension objects Each selected dimension is highlighted in turn. See Also See “Create Radial Dimensions” in the User’s Guide. A marker is displayed for each association point prompt. to rotate the text 45 degrees. Use UNDO to restore the previous state of the changed dimensions. enter 45. System Variables DIMCEN controls the creation of center marks and centerlines. Note The marker disappears if you pan or zoom with a wheel mouse. a nonassociative dimension can be associated to geometric objects. and prompts for association points appropriate for the selected dimension are displayed.Enter an angle. AutoCAD displays the Dimension Line Location prompt. For example. which set dimension format and behavior. Commands DIMSTYLE controls dimension styles. but if the definition point is associated. After you specify the angle. DIMREASSOCIATE Associates selected dimensions to geometric objects With DIMREASSOCIATE. or the existing associations in an associative dimension can be changed. The prompts for the different types of dimensions are 282 | DIMREASSOCIATE . the marker appears as an X inside a box. Press ESC to terminate the command without losing the changes that were already specified. the marker appears as an X. If the definition point of the current dimension is not associated to a geometric object.

enter s and select a geometric object. or press ENTER to skip to the next dimension object. if any Leader Specify leader association point <next>: Specify an object snap location. enter s and select a geometric object. if any Diameter Select arc or circle <next>: Select an arc or a circle.Linear Specify first extension line origin or [Select object] <next>: Specify an object snap location. if any DIMREASSOCIATE | 283 . if any Radius Select arc or circle <next>: Select an arc or a circle. or press ENTER to skip to the next dimension object. or press ENTER to skip to the next dimension object. or press ENTER to skip to the next prompt Specify first angle endpoint <next>: Specify an object snap location or press ENTER to skip to the next prompt Specify second angle endpoint <next>: Specify an object snap location or press ENTER to skip to the next dimension object. if any Ordinate Specify feature location <next>: Specify an object snap location. enter s and select an arc or a circle. or press ENTER to skip to the next prompt Specify second extension line origin <next>: Specify an object snap location. if any Angular (Two Line) Select first line <next>: Select a line. or press ENTER to skip to the next prompt Select second line <next>: Select another line. or press ENTER to skip to the next dimension object. or press ENTER to skip to the next dimension object. or press ENTER to skip to the next dimension object. if any Aligned Specify first extension line origin or [Select object] <next>: Specify an object snap location. or press ENTER to skip to the next dimension object. if any Angular (Three Point) Specify angle vertex or [Select arc or circle] <next>: Specify an object snap location. or press ENTER to skip to the next prompt Specify second extension line origin <next>: Specify an object snap location.

See Also See “Modify Dimension Geometry” in the User’s Guide. update associative dimensions if the dimensioned objects have been modified. After opening a drawing containing external references that are dimensioned in the current drawing. System Variables DIMASSOC controlsthe associativity property of dimensions and leaders. 284 | Commands DIMREGEN removes the associativity from selected dimensions. Associative dimensions need to be updated manually with DIMREGEN in three cases: ■ ■ ■ After panning or zooming with a wheel mouse in a layout with model space active. After opening a drawing that has been modified with a previous version of AutoCAD. DIMREGEN . update associative dimensions created in paper space.Note DIMREASSOCIATE does not change the setting of DIMLFAC in a dimension. See Also See “Associative Dimensions” in the User’s Guide. update associative dimensions if the associated external reference geometry has been modified. Use DIMOVERRIDE to clear dimension linear factors in legacy drawings. System Variables DIMASSOC controls the associativity property of dimensions and leaders. DIMREGEN Updates the locations of all associative dimensions Command line: dimregen The locations of all associative dimensions in the current drawing are updated. DIMDISASSOCIATE removes the associativity from selected dimensions. Commands DIMREASSOCIATE associates selected dimensions to geometric objects.

the primary dimension-style settings are used. Dimension styles can have multiple secondary styles with varying settings. AutoCAD uses the appropriate secondary style for the type of dimension you create. If there are no differences in settings for a dimension type. DIMSTYLE | 285 .DIMSTYLE Creates and modifies dimension styles A dimension style is a saved set of dimension settings that determines the appearance of the dimension. you can set all relevant dimensioning system variables and control the layout and appearance of any dimension. you can create a secondary style for radius dimensions and another secondary style for angular dimensions. sets the current style. modifies styles. AutoCAD presents options on the command line (see page 309). If you enter -dimstyle at the Command prompt. Dimension Style Manager Creates new styles. For example. By creating dimension styles. sets overrides on the current style. within a dimension style. Styles toolbar: Format menu: Dimension Style Dimension menu: Style Command line: dimstyle The Dimension Style Manager is displayed. and compares styles.

AutoCAD assigns styles to all dimensions. The current style is highlighted.Current Dimstyle Displays the current dimension style. AutoCAD displays dimension styles in externally referenced drawings using the syntax for externally referenced named objects.) While you cannot change. or make current externally referenced dimension styles. (See “Overview of External References” in the User’s Guide. You cannot delete a style that is current or in use in the current drawing. select it and choose Set Current. 286 | DIMSTYLE . and delete styles. AutoCAD assigns the default STANDARD style to dimensions. Styles Displays all dimension styles in the drawing. The item selected in List controls the dimension styles displayed. you can create new styles based on them. To make a style current. rename styles. If you do not change the current style. rename. Right-click in the Styles list to display a shortcut menu that you can use to set the current style. Unless you select Don’t List Styles in Xrefs.

Modify. Override Displays the Override Current Style dialog box. Set Current Sets the style selected under Styles to current. Don’t List Styles in Xrefs Suppresses display of dimension styles in externally referenced drawings under Styles. Modify. and Override Dimension Style Dialog Boxes” on page 288. New Displays the Create New Dimension Style dialog box. Dialog box options are identical to those in the New Dimension Style dialog box. DIMSTYLE | 287 . and Override Dimension Style Dialog Boxes” on page 288. in which you can modify dimension styles. AutoCAD displays overrides as unsaved changes under the dimension in the Styles list. which compares the properties of two dimension styles or lists all the properties of one style. Modify. See “New. Styles in Use Displays only the dimension styles that are referenced by dimensions in the drawing. in which you can define new dimension styles. See “New. All Styles Displays all dimension styles. Dialog box options are identical to those in the New Dimension Style dialog box. and Override Dimension Style Dialog Boxes” on page 288. Modify Displays the Modify Dimension Styles dialog box. Compare Displays the Compare Dimension Styles dialog box (see page 308). in which you can set temporary overrides to dimension styles. See “New.List Provides options that control which dimension styles are displayed.

Use For Creates a style that applies only to specific dimension types. New Style Name becomes unavailable because you are defining a substyle of STANDARD. After you choose Continue in the Create New Dimension Style dialog box. You define the properties for the new style in this dialog box. Start With Sets a style to use as a basis for the new one. you change only the properties that differ from the properties you start with. suppose the text color for the STANDARD style is black. New Style Name Names the new style. the text is blue. but you want the text to be blue only for diameter dimensions. and under Use For. Modify.Create New Dimension Style Dialog Box Names the new dimension style. the New Dimension Style dialog box is displayed. in which you define the new style properties. After you change the text color to blue in the New Dimension Style dialog box. 288 | DIMSTYLE . and Override Dimension Style Dialog Boxes Set properties for dimension styles. select STANDARD. For the new style. Continue Displays the New Dimension Style dialog box. sets the style on which to start the new one. and indicates the dimension types to which you want the new style to apply. When you use STANDARD for all other dimension types. select Diameter. the text is black. Whenever you use the STANDARD style for diameter dimensions. New. Under Start With. Diameter is displayed as a substyle under STANDARD in the Dimension Style Manager. The dialog box initially displays the properties of the dimension style that you selected to start the new style in the Create New Dimension Style dialog box. For example.

extension lines. You can also enter the color name or number in the text box. the Select Color dialog box is displayed (see page 169). Override Dimension Style Dialog Boxes) Sets the format and properties for dimension lines. and Color Book colors. Lines and Arrows Tab (New. Color Sets the color for the dimension line. and center marks. Modify. If you click Select Color (at the bottom of the Color list). You can select colors from the 255 AutoCAD Color Index (ACI) colors. The sample image on each tab displays the effects of each option. The content of these dialog boxes is identical to the New Dimension Style dialog box. Dimension Lines Sets the dimension line properties. (DIMCLRD system variable) DIMSTYLE | 289 .Choosing either Modify or Override in the Dimension Style Manager displays the Modify Dimension Style or the Override Dimension Style dialog box. arrowheads. although you are modifying or overriding an existing dimension style rather than creating a new one. True Colors.

You can select colors from the 255 AutoCAD Color Index (ACI) colors.Lineweight Sets the lineweight of the dimension line. and no marks for arrowheads. integral. (DIMLWD system variable) Extend Beyond Ticks Specifies a distance to extend the dimension line past the extension line when you use oblique. Suppress Suppresses display of dimension lines. (DIMEXE system variable) DIMSTYLE . and Color Book colors. You can also enter the color name or number in the text box. (DIMSD1 and DIMSD2 system variables) spacing 1 2 first dimension line suppressed 1 2 second dimension line suppressed Extension Lines Controls the appearance of the extension lines. Enter a distance. (DIMDLE system variable) extension Baseline Spacing Sets the spacing between the dimension lines of a baseline dimension. architectural. Dim Line 1 suppresses the first dimension line. This value is stored in the DIMDLI system variable. True Colors. 290 | Color Sets the color for the extension line. For information about baseline dimensions. (DIMCLRE system variable. Dim Line 2 suppresses the second dimension line. the Select Color dialog box is displayed (see page 169). If you click Select Color (at the bottom of the Color list). tick. (DIMLWE system variable) Extend Beyond Dim Lines Specifies a distance to extend the extension lines above the dimension line.) Lineweight Sets the lineweight of the extension line. see DIMBASELINE.

(DIMBLK2 system variable) To specify a user-defined arrowhead block.extension Offset From Origin Sets the distance to offset the extension lines from the points on the drawing that define the dimension.) 2nd Sets the arrowhead for the second dimension line. Ext Line 1 suppresses the first extension line. (DIMEXO system variable) offset Suppress Suppresses the display of extension lines. 1st Sets the arrowhead for the first dimension line. select User Arrow. When you change the first arrowhead type. (The block must be in the drawing. (The block must be in the drawing. Ext Line 2 suppresses the second extension line. Select the name of a user-defined arrowhead block. (DIMSE1 and DIMSE2 system variables) 1 2 first extension line suppressed 1 2 second extension line suppressed Arrowheads Controls the appearance of the dimension arrowheads.) DIMSTYLE | 291 . (DIMBLK1 system variable) To specify a user-defined arrowhead block. select User Arrow. Select the name of a user-defined arrowhead block. The Select Custom Arrow Block dialog box is displayed. The Select Custom Arrow Block dialog box is displayed. the second arrowhead automatically changes to match it.

The size of the centerline is stored as a negative value in the DIMCEN system variable. Modify. (DIMCEN system variable) Text Tab (New. Type Provides three center mark type options: ■ ■ ■ Size Mark: Creates a center mark.) Arrow Size Sets the size of arrowheads. select User Arrow. 292 | DIMSTYLE . For DIMDIAMETER and DIMRADIUS. Sets the size of the center mark or centerline. None: Creates no center mark or centerline. The DIMCENTER. Override Dimension Style Dialog Boxes) Sets the format. The size of the center mark is stored as a positive value in the DIMCEN system variable. and alignment of dimension text. (DIMASZ system variable) Center Marks for Circles Controls the appearance of center marks and centerlines for diameter and radial dimensions. Line: Creates a centerline. Select the name of a user-defined arrowhead block. (The block must be in the drawing. placement. (DIMLDRBLK system variable) To specify a user-defined arrowhead block. The Select Custom Arrow Block dialog box is displayed.Leader Sets the arrowhead for the leader line. and DIMRADIUS commands use center marks and centerlines. AutoCAD draws the center mark only if you place the dimension line outside the circle or arc. The value is stored as 0 in the DIMCEN system variable. DIMDIAMETER.

Text Style Displays and sets the current style for dimension text. Text Color Sets the color for the dimension text. the Select Color dialog box is displayed (see page 169). (DIMTXSTY system variable) Text Style Button Displays the Text Style dialog box (see page 998).Text Appearance Controls the dimension text format and size. in which you can define or modify text styles. To create and modify styles for dimension text. Select a style from the list. You can also enter the color name or number in the text box. If you click Select Color (at the bottom of the Color list).] button next to the list. (DIMCLRT system variable) DIMSTYLE | 293 . True Colors.. choose the [. and Color Book colors. You can select colors from the 255 AutoCAD Color Index (ACI) colors..

Text Placement Controls the placement of dimension text. The vertical setting is stored in the DIMTAD system variable. (DIMTFAC system variable) Draw Frame Around Text Draws a frame around dimension text. JIS: Places the dimension text to conform to a Japanese Industrial Standards (JIS) representation. make sure the text height in the Text Style is set to 0. the text style height is greater than 0). This option is available only when Fractional is selected as the Unit Format on the Primary Units tab. If you want to use the height set on the Text tab. . Outside: Places the dimension text on the side of the dimension line farthest away from the first defining point.Text Height Sets the height of the current dimension text style. that height overrides the text height set here. Vertical Position Controls the vertical placement of dimension text in relation to the dimension line. (DIMTXT system variable) Fraction Height Scale Sets the scale of fractions relative to dimension text. If a fixed text height is set in the Text Style (that is. See “Offset from Dim Line” on page 296. Vertical position options include the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ 294 | DIMSTYLE Centered: Centers the dimension text between the two parts of the dimension line. The distance from the dimension line to the baseline of the lowest line of text is the current text gap. Selecting this option changes the value stored in the DIMGAP system variable to a negative value. The value entered here is multiplied by the text height to determine the height of dimension fractions relative to dimension text. Above: Places the dimension text above the dimension line.

Centered Horizontal Position Above Outside JIS Controls the horizontal placement of dimension text in relation to the dimension line and the extension lines. See “Arrowheads” on page 291 and “Offset from Dim Line” on page 296. centered ■ ■ 1 2 first extension line 1 2 second extension line Over Ext Line 1: Positions the text over or along the first extension line. See “Arrowheads” on page 291 and “Offset from Dim Line” on page 296. The distance between the extension line and the text is twice the arrowhead size plus the text gap value. DIMSTYLE | 295 . Over Ext Line 2: Positions the text over or along the second extension line. The distance between the extension line and the text is twice the arrowhead size plus the text gap value. Horizontal position options include the following: ■ ■ ■ Centered: Centers the dimension text along the dimension line between the extension lines. At Ext Line 2: Right-justifies the text with the second extension line along the dimension line. The horizontal setting is stored in the DIMJUST system variable. At Ext Line 1: Left-justifies the text with the first extension line along the dimension line.

1 Text Alignment Controls the orientation (horizontal or aligned) of dimension text whether it is inside or outside the extension lines. Override Dimension Style Dialog Boxes) Controls the placement of dimension text. (DIMTIH and DIMTOH system variables) Horizontal Places text in a horizontal position. (DIMGAP system variable) DIMGAP = 0 DIMGAP = 0. AutoCAD also uses this value as the minimum length required for dimension line segments. AutoCAD positions text inside the extension lines only if the resulting segments are at least as long as the text gap. arrowheads. leader lines. Aligned With Dimension Line Aligns text with the dimension line. Modify. dimension text.1 2 text over first extension line Offset from Dim Line 1 2 text over second extension line Sets the current text gap. Fit Tab (New. but aligns it horizontally when text is outside the extension lines. and the dimension line. which is the distance around the dimension text when the dimension line is broken to accommodate the dimension text. Text above or below the dimension line is placed inside only if the arrowheads. 296 | DIMSTYLE . ISO Standard Aligns text with the dimension line when text is inside the extension lines. and a margin leave enough room for the text gap.

places text between the extension lines and places arrowheads outside the extension lines. DIMTIX. DIMSTYLE | 297 . When space is available. Whichever Fits Best Places text and arrowheads as follows: ■ ■ ■ ■ When enough space is available for text and arrowheads. AutoCAD moves either the text or the arrowheads based on the best fit. When space is available for neither text nor arrowheads. places both between the extension lines. places them between the extension lines and places text outside the extension lines. places them both outside the extension lines. Otherwise.Fit Options Controls the placement of text and arrowheads based on the space available between the extension lines. (DIMATFIT. and DIMSOXD system variables) Either the Text or the Arrows. Otherwise. When enough space is available for text only. text and arrowheads are placed according to the Fit options. AutoCAD places text and arrowheads between the extension lines. When enough space is available for arrowheads only.

When space is available for text only. This value is stored in the DIMTIX system variable. AutoCAD omits the leader when text is too close to the dimension line. When not enough space is available for text. Always Keep Text Between Ext Lines Always places text between extension lines. Suppress Arrows If They Don’t Fit Inside Extension Lines Suppresses arrowheads if not enough space is available inside the extension lines. DIMSOXD system variable) Text Placement Sets the placement of dimension text when it is moved from the default position. Both Text and Arrows When not enough space is available for text and arrowheads. places both outside the extension lines. with a Leader If text is moved away from the dimension line. places both text and arrowheads outside the extension lines. DIMSTYLE . (DIMTMOVE system variable) 298 | Beside the Dimension Line Places dimension text beside the dimension line. places the text between the extension lines and places arrowheads outside them. Places text and arrowheads as follows: ■ ■ ■ When space is available for text and arrowheads. that is. Over the Dimension Line.Arrows Places text and arrowheads as follows: ■ ■ ■ Text When enough space is available for text and arrowheads. When not enough space is available for arrowheads. places both between the extension lines. the position defined by the dimension style. places them between the extension lines and places text outside them. places both between the extension lines. creates a leader connecting the text to the dimension line. When space is available for arrowheads only. places both text and arrowheads outside the extension lines.

Without a Leader Keeps the dimension line in the same place when text is moved. Always Draw Dim Line Between Ext Lines Draws dimension lines between the measured points even when AutoCAD places the arrowheads outside the measured points.0 for the DIMSCALE system variable. This scale does not change dimension measurement values. This value is stored in the DIMUPT system variable. When you work in paper space. including text and arrowhead sizes. Scale for Dimension Features Sets the overall dimension scale value or the paper space scaling. Primary Units Tab (New. This value is stored as 0 in the DIMSCALE system variable.Over the Dimension Line. distance. Place Text Manually When Dimensioning Ignores any horizontal justification settings and places the text at the position you specify at the Dimension Line Location prompt. or when TILEMODE is set to 1. Override Dimension Style Dialog Boxes) Sets the format and precision of primary dimension units and sets prefixes and suffixes for dimension text. AutoCAD uses the default scale factor of 1. Fine Tuning Sets additional fit options. This value is stored in the DIMSCALE system variable. or spacing. Scale Dimension to Layout (Paper Space) Determines a scale factor based on the scaling between the current model space viewport and paper space. This value is stored in the DIMTOFL system variable. DIMSTYLE | 299 . but not in a model space viewport. Use Overall Scale Of Sets a scale for all dimension style settings that specify size. Modify. Text that is moved away from the dimension line is not connected to the dimension line with a leader.

If you enter a value of 0. This value is stored in the DIMDSEP system variable. if you enter a value of 1. Unit Format Sets the current units format for all dimension types except Angular. Decimal Separator Sets the separator for decimal formats. Similarly. Sets the format for fractions. This value is stored in the DIMLUNIT system variable. This value is stored in the DIMDEC system variable.25.Linear Dimensions Sets the format and precision for linear dimensions. Precision Fraction Format Sets the number of decimal places in the dimension text. all distances are rounded to the nearest 0.0.25 unit. Round Off Sets rounding rules for dimension measurements for all dimension types except Angular. AutoCAD rounds all dimension distances to the 300 | DIMSTYLE . The relative sizes of numbers in stacked fractions are based on the DIMTFAC system variable (in the same way that tolerance values use this system variable). This value is stored in the DIMFRAC system variable.

For example. Suffix Indicates a suffix for the dimension text. Measurement Scale Defines measurement scale options as follows: ■ ■ Scale Factor: Sets a scale factor for linear dimension measurements. This value is stored in DIMPOST. if you enter 2. it overrides any default prefixes such as those used in diameter (∅) and radius (R) dimensioning. AutoCAD adds the suffix to the tolerances as well as to the main dimension. You can enter text or use control codes to display special symbols (see “Control Codes and Special Characters” on page 1027). The number of digits displayed after the decimal point depends on the Precision setting. Prefix Indicates a prefix for the dimension text. If you specify tolerances. This value is stored in the DIMLFAC system variable. the length scaling value is stored as a negative value in the DIMLFAC system variable. AutoCAD displays a oneinch dimension as two inches. The value does not apply to angular dimensions and is not applied to rounding values or to plus or minus tolerance values. DIMSTYLE | 301 . When you enter a prefix. This sets the length scale factor to reflect the zoom scale factor for objects in a model space viewport. entering the control code %%c displays the diameter symbol. AutoCAD adds the prefix to the tolerances as well as to the main dimension. AutoCAD multiplies the dimension measurement by the value entered here. it overrides any default suffixes. You can enter text or use control codes to display special symbols (see “Control Codes and Special Characters” on page 1027). When you enter a suffix. This value is stored in the DIMPOST system variable. If you specify tolerances. entering the text mm results in dimension text similar to that shown in the illustration. This value is stored in the DIMRND system variable. For example. When you select this option.nearest integer. For example. Apply to Layout Dimensions Only: Applies the linear scale value only to dimensions created in layouts.

For example. 0 Inches: Suppresses the inches portion of a feet-andinches dimension when the distance is an integral number of feet.5000 becomes 12. and of feet and inches that have a value of zero.5. ■ ■ Leading: Suppresses leading zeros in angular decimal dimensions. Modify. Trailing: Suppresses trailing zeros in angular decimal dimensions.0000 becomes 30. AutoCAD stores this value in the DIMZIN system variable. Alternate Units Tab (New.5. ■ ■ ■ ■ Leading: Suppresses leading zeros in all decimal dimensions.5000 becomes . This value is stored in DIMAZIN. For example.5000 becomes 12. Trailing: Suppresses trailing zeros in all decimal dimensions.0000 becomes 30. 0. Override Dimension Style Dialog Boxes) Specifies display of alternate units in dimension measurements and sets their format and precision. 302 | DIMSTYLE . and 30. 0 Feet: Suppresses the feet portion of a feet-andinches dimension when the distance is less than one foot. This value is stored in the DIMADEC system variable.Zero Suppression Controls the suppression of leading and trailing zeros. Angular Dimensions Sets the current angle format for angular dimensions. For example. For example. 1'-0" becomes 1'.5000 becomes . 12. This value is stored in the DIMAUNIT system variable.5000. Precision Sets the number of decimal places for angular dimensions. Zero Suppression Suppresses leading and trailing zeros. Units Format Sets the angular units format. For example. 12. and 30. 0. Zero suppression settings also affect real-to-string conversions performed by the AutoLISP® rtos and angtos functions. For example. 0'-6 1/2" becomes 6 1/2".5000.

Precision Sets the number of decimal places in the alternate units. The relative sizes of numbers in stacked fractions are based on DIMTFAC (in the same way that tolerance values use this system variable). To determine the value of alternate units. This value is stored in the DIMALTU system variable. Alternate Units Sets the current alternate units format for all dimension types except Angular. Unit Format Sets the alternate units format. DIMSTYLE | 303 . This value is stored in the DIMALTD system variable. Multiplier for Alternate Units Specifies a multiplier to use as the conversion factor between primary and alternate units. AutoCAD sets the DIMALT system variable to 1. AutoCAD multiplies all linear distances (measured by dimensions and coordinates) by the current linear scale value.Display Alternate Units Adds alternate measurement units to dimension text.

0. For example. This value is stored in the DIMALTF system variable. You can enter text or use control codes to display special symbols (see “Control Codes and Special Characters” on page 1027). When you enter a suffix.0. This value is stored in the DIMAPOST system variable. entering the text cm results in dimension text similar to that shown in the illustration.5. For example. and AutoCAD does not apply it to the rounding value or the plus or minus tolerance values. The alternate rounding value is stored in the DIMALTRND system variable. This value is stored in the DIMAPOST system variable. and of feet and inches that have a value of zero. You can enter text or use control codes to display special symbols (see “Control Codes and Special Characters” on page 1027).The length scaling value changes the generated measurement value.5000 becomes 12.25. Similarly. The number of digits displayed after the decimal point depends on the Precision setting. 12. DIMSTYLE . entering the control code %%c displays the diameter symbol. AutoCAD rounds all dimension measurements to the nearest integer. For example. The value has no effect on angular dimensions. 304 | Leading Suppresses leading zeros in all decimal dimensions. and 30. If you enter a value of 0. Zero Suppression Controls the suppression of leading and trailing zeros. Suffix Includes the suffix in the alternate dimension text. Prefix Indicates a prefix for the alternate dimension text. Trailing Suppresses trailing zeros in all decimal dimensions.25 unit. if you enter a value of 1. For example. Round Distances To Sets rounding rules for alternate units for all dimension types except Angular. it overrides any default suffixes. all alternate measurements are rounded to the nearest 0.5000 becomes . This value is stored in the DIMALTZ system variable.0000 becomes 30.5000.

After Primary Units Places alternate units after the primary units. 1'-0" becomes 1'. DIMSTYLE | 305 . 0'-6 1/2" becomes 6 1/2". These values are stored in the DIMAPOST system variable. For example. Below Primary Units Places alternate units below the primary units. Modify. Tolerances Tab (New. 0 Inches Suppresses the inches portion of a feet-and-inches dimension when the distance is an integral number of feet. Override Dimension Style Dialog Boxes) Controls the display and format of dimension text tolerances. Placement Controls the placement of alternate units.0 Feet Suppresses the feet portion of a feet-and-inches dimension when the distance is less than one foot. For example.

The DIMTOL system variable is set to 1. Lower Value Sets the minimum or lower tolerance value. DIMSTYLE . This value is stored in the DIMTDEC system variable. Deviation: Adds a plus/minus tolerance expression. AutoCAD uses this value for the tolerance. Method Sets the method for calculating the tolerance. The distance between the text and the box is stored as a negative value in the DIMGAP system variable. A plus sign (+) precedes the tolerance value entered in Upper Value. The DIMLIM system variable is set to 0. This value is stored in the DIMTP system variable. one over the other. Basic: Creates a basic dimension in which AutoCAD draws a box around the full extents of the dimension. The DIMLIM system variable is set to 0. Upper Value Sets the maximum or upper tolerance value. The maximum value is the dimension value plus the value entered in Upper Value. Symmetrical: Adds a plus/minus expression of tolerance in which AutoCAD applies a single value of variation to the dimension measurement. and a minus sign (–) precedes the tolerance value entered in Lower Value. The minimum value is the dimension value minus the value entered in Lower Value. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 306 | None: Does not add a tolerance.Tolerance Format Controls the tolerance format. Precision Sets the number of decimal places. The DIMTOL system variable is set to 0. The DIMTOL system variable is set to 1. The DIMLIM system variable is set to 1. This value is stored in the DIMTM system variable. The DIMTOL system variable is set to 0. A ± appears after the dimension. AutoCAD applies different plus and minus values of variation to the dimension measurement. When you select Symmetrical in Method. Enter the tolerance value in Upper Value. Limits: Creates a limit dimension in which AutoCAD displays a maximum and a minimum value.

Zero suppression settings also affect real-to-string conversions performed by the AutoLISP rtos and angtos functions.5000 becomes 12. Zero Suppression Controls the suppression of leading and trailing zeros. Middle: Aligns the tolerance text with the middle of the main dimension text. the DIMTOLJ system variable is set to 1. and 30. Feet Suppresses the feet portion of a feet-and-inches dimension when the distance is less than one foot. 0. For example. the DIMTOLJ system variable is set to 0. 12. Precision Sets the number of decimal places. Bottom: Aligns the tolerance text with the bottom of the main dimension text. and of feet and inches that have a value of zero. Inches Suppresses the inches portion of a feet-and-inches dimension when the distance is an integral number of feet. This value is stored in the DIMALTTD system variable. the DIMTOLJ system variable is set to 2. When you select this option. The ratio of the tolerance height to the main dimension text height is calculated and stored in the DIMTFAC system variable.5000. Leading Suppresses leading zeros in all decimal dimensions. 0'-6 1/2" becomes 6 1/2". ■ ■ ■ Top: Aligns the tolerance text with the top of the main dimension text. For example.5000 becomes . 1'-0" becomes 1'. This value is stored in the DIMTZIN system variable. DIMSTYLE | 307 .5. When you select this option. Alternate Unit Tolerance Sets the precision and zero suppression rules for alternate tolerance units.0000 becomes 30. For example. For example.Scaling for Height Sets the current height for the tolerance text. When you select this option. Trailing Suppresses trailing zeros in all decimal dimensions. Vertical Position Controls text justification for symmetrical and deviation tolerances.

1'-0" becomes 1'.0000 becomes 30. For example.5000. You can print the results of the comparison to the Clipboard.5. For example. Compare Dimension Styles Dialog Box Compares the properties of two dimension styles or displays all properties of one style. 0.Zero Suppression Controls the suppression of leading and trailing zeros. and 30. 0'-6 1/2" becomes 6 1/2". This value is stored in the DIMALTTZ system variable.5000 becomes . Print to Clipboard button Compare 308 | DIMSTYLE Sets the first dimension style to compare. Trailing: Suppresses trailing zeros in all decimal dimensions. Inches: Suppresses the inches portion of a feet-andinches dimension when the distance is an integral number of feet. For example. For example. Feet: Suppresses the feet portion of a feet-and-inches dimension when the distance is less than one foot. and of feet and inches that have a value of zero. 12. and then paste to other Windows applications. ■ ■ ■ ■ Leading: Suppresses leading zeros in all decimal dimensions. .5000 becomes 12.

You can then paste the results to other Windows applications.With Sets the second dimension style to compare. Prints results of the style comparison to the Windows Clipboard. If you enter the name of an existing dimension style. Comparison results display automatically under the following headings: ■ ■ ■ Print to Clipboard button Description of the dimension style property System variable that controls the property System variable values of style properties that differ for each dimension style. DIMSTYLE | 309 . DIMSTYLE displays prompts on the command line: Current dimension style: <current> Enter a dimension style option [Save/Restore/STatus/Variables/Apply/?] <Restore>: Enter an option or press ENTER Save Saves the current settings of dimensioning system variables to a dimension style. AutoCAD displays all properties for the style. If you set With to <none> or to the same style as Compare. such as word processors and spreadsheets. AutoCAD regenerates associative dimensions that use the redefined dimension style. The new dimension style becomes the current one. DIMSTYLE Command Line If you enter -dimstyle at the Command prompt. redefine it? <N>: Enter y or press ENTER If you enter y. AutoCAD prompts: That name is already in use. Enter name for new dimension style or [?]: Enter a name or enter ? Name Saves the current settings of dimensioning system variables to a new dimension style using the name you enter.

To display the differences between the dimension style name you want to save and the current style. or press ENTER to select a dimension Name Makes the dimension style you enter the current dimension style. enter a tilde (~) followed by the style name at the Enter Dimension Style Name prompt. Select Dimension Makes the dimension style of the selected object the current dimension style. To display the differences between the dimension style name you want to restore and the current style. AutoCAD returns to the previous prompt. and the setting of the compared style in the second column. AutoCAD returns to the previous prompt. AutoCAD returns to the previous prompt. or press ENTER to list all dimension styles After listing the named dimension styles. with the current setting in the first column. Enter dimension style(s) to list <*>: Enter a name. Enter dimension style(s) to list <*>: Enter a name list or press ENTER After listing the dimension styles. Select dimension: 310 | DIMSTYLE . with the current setting in the first column. After displaying the differences. and the setting of the compared style in the second column. [?] or <select dimension>: Enter a name. After displaying the differences. enter ?. AutoCAD displays only settings that differ. ?—List Dimension Styles Lists the named dimension styles in the current drawing. a partial name with wild-card characters. Restore Restores dimensioning system variable settings to those of a selected dimension style. AutoCAD displays only settings that differ. ?—List Dimension Styles Lists the named dimension styles in the current drawing. AutoCAD returns to the previous prompt. Enter dimension style name. enter a tilde (~) followed by the style name at the Enter Name for New Dimension Style prompt.

Variables Lists the dimension system variable settings of a dimension style or selected dimensions without modifying the current settings.Status Displays the current values of all dimension system variables. AutoCAD returns to the previous prompt. AutoCAD returns to the previous prompt. DIMSTYLE | 311 . Select dimension: Apply Applies the current dimensioning system variable settings to selected dimension objects. or press ENTER to select dimensions Name Lists the settings of dimension system variables for the dimension style name you enter. After listing the variables. Select objects: Use an object selection method to select a dimension object AutoCAD does not update the dimension line spacing between existing baseline dimensions (see the DIMDLI system variable). Enter dimension style(s) to list <*>: Enter a name list or press ENTER After listing the dimension styles. enter ?. After displaying the differences. permanently overriding any existing dimension styles applied to these objects. enter a tilde (~) followed by the style name at the Enter Dimension Style Name prompt. ?—List Dimension Styles Lists the named dimension styles in the current drawing. with the current setting in the first column. Enter a dimension style name. AutoCAD displays only settings that differ. After listing the variables. and the setting of the compared style in the second column. [?] or <select dimension>: Enter a name. nor do dimension text variable settings update existing leader text. DIMSTYLE ends. DIMSTYLE ends. To display the differences between a particular dimension style and the current style. Select Dimension Lists the dimension style and any dimension overrides for the dimension object you select.

To determine whether text appears above. use the Text tab in the New. Modify. System Variables DIMSTYLE stores the name of the current dimension style. You must use the SETVAR command to access DIMSTYLE. . or press ENTER See Also See “Apply a New Dimension Style to Existing Dimensions” in the User’s Guide. below. DIMTEDIT Moves and rotates dimension text Dimension toolbar: Dimension menu: Align Text Command line: dimtedit Select dimension: Select a dimension object AutoCAD prompts you for the new location of the dimension text. and Override Dimension Style dialog box. Enter dimension style(s) to list <*>: Enter a name. or in the middle of the dimension line.?—List Dimension Styles Lists the named dimension styles in the current drawing. Specify new location for dimension text or [Left/Right/Center/Home/Angle]: Specify a point or enter an option dimension text with left and right justification Location for Dimension Text 312 | DIMTEDIT dimension text positioned by cursor dimension text positioned by angle Updates the location of the dimension text dynamically as you drag it. a partial name with wild-card characters.

Enter text angle: before Angle after Angle 90° The center point of the text does not change. before Home Angle after Home Changes the angle of the dimension text. before Right after Right Center Centers the dimension text on the dimension line. If the text moves or the dimension is regenerated. radial. before Left Right after Left Right-justifies the dimension text along the dimension line. System Variables DIMSHO controls redefinition of dimensions while dragging. This option works only with linear. See Also See “Modify Dimension Text” in the User’s Guide. radial. DIMTEDIT | 313 . This option works only with linear. Home Moves dimension text back to its default position. Commands DIMSTYLE controls dimension styles. and diameter dimensions. which control dimension format and behavior.Left Left-justifies the dimension text along the dimension line. and diameter dimensions. AutoCAD keeps the orientation set by the text angle. Entering an angle of 0 degrees puts the text in its default orientation.

System Variables DISTANCE stores the last distance measured by the DIST command. ellipses and elliptical arcs. Commands UNITS sets drawing units. AutoCAD displays the distance using the current units format.DIST Measures the distance and angle between two points Inquiry toolbar: Tools menu: Inquiry ➤ Distance Command line: dist (or 'dist for transparent use) Specify first point: Specify a point Specify second point: Specify a point Distance = calculated distance. DIST assumes the current elevation for the first or second point if you omit the Z coordinate value. Delta Z = change in Z AutoCAD reports the true 3D distance between points. Angle in XY plane = angle. DIVIDE Places evenly spaced point objects or blocks along the length or perimeter of an object DIVIDE marks off a specified number of equal lengths on a selected object by placing point objects or blocks along the length or perimeter of the object. 314 | DIST . Angle from XY plane = angle Delta X = change in X. and splines. Delta Y = change in Y. circles. The angle in the XY plane is relative to the current X axis. and Point Locations” in the User’s Guide. polylines. The angle from the XY plane is relative to the current XY plane. Angles. angle from XY plane delta Z angle in XY plane delta X delta Y See Also See “Obtain Distances. Objects that you can divide include arcs.

the divided object at the dividing points. select polyline divided into five parts Block Places blocks at equal intervals along the selected object. Point Display mode (PDMODE) has been set such that the points can be seen. The illustration shows a polyline divided into five parts. Enter number of segments: Enter a value from 2 through 32. or collinear with. block not aligned block aligned DIVIDE | 315 .Draw menu: Point ➤ Divide Command line: divide Select object to divide: Use an object selection method Enter number of segments or [Block]: Enter a value from 2 through 32. or enter b Number of Segments Places point objects at equal intervals along the selected objects. Enter name of block to insert: Enter the name of a block currently defined in the drawing Align block with object? [Yes/No] <Y>: Enter y or n or press ENTER Yes Specifies that the X axes of the inserted blocks be tangent to.767.767 The illustration shows an arc divided into five equal parts using a block consisting of a vertically oriented ellipse. No Aligns the blocks according to their normal orientation.

See Also See “Draw Donuts” in the User’s Guide. AutoCAD draws a donut at each point specified (2). Draw menu: Donut Command line: donut outside diameter Specify inside diameter of donut <current>: Specify a distance or press ENTER If you specify an inside diameter of 0. solids. System Variables PDMODE and PDSIZE values control the appearance of point objects. System Variables FILLMODE stores the FILL command setting. DONUT Draws filled circles and rings inside diameter A donut is constructed of a closed polyline composed of wide arc segments. 316 | DONUT . DRAGMODE Controls the way AutoCAD displays dragged objects You can draw new objects dynamically and drag them into position on the screen. With some computer configurations. Commands FILL controls the filling of traces. How AutoCAD fills the interior of a donut depends on the current setting of the FILL command. You can also drag existing objects with many editing commands. Commands POINT creates a point object. the donut is a filled circle. Use DRAGMODE to suppress dragging.See Also See “Divide an Object into Equal Segments” in the User’s Guide. 2 1 Specify outside diameter of donut <current>: Specify a distance or press ENTER Specify center of donut or <exit>: Specify a point (1) or press ENTER to end the command AutoCAD sets the location of the donut based on the center point. AutoCAD prompts you for the locations at which to draw donuts. dragging can be time consuming. and wide polylines. After you specify the diameters.

DRAWORDER Changes the display order of images and other objects DRAWORDER changes the drawing and plotting order of any object in the AutoCAD drawing database. above or below a selected object). Auto Turns on dragging for every command that supports it. Entering drag each time is not necessary. Select reference object: Use an object selection method DRAWORDER | 317 . you can order objects relative to another object (that is.Command line: dragmode (or 'dragmode for transparent use) Enter new value [ON/OFF/Auto] <current>: Enter an option or press ENTER On Permits dragging. Modify II toolbar: Tools menu: Display Order Command line: draworder Select objects: Use an object selection method Enter object ordering option [Above object/Under object/Front/Back] <Back>: Enter an option or press ENTER Above Object Moves the selected object above a specified reference object. Dragging is performed whenever it is possible. Select reference object: Use an object selection method Under Object Moves the selected object below a specified reference object. You must use the SETVAR command to access the DRAGMODE system variable. including those embedded in menu items. Off Ignores all dragging requests. but you must enter drag where appropriate in a drawing or editing command to initiate dragging. DRAGMODE on DRAGMODE off See Also System Variables DRAGMODE stores the current Drag mode setting. In addition to moving objects to the “front” or “back” of the sort order.

The command does not continue to prompt for additional objects to reorder. Drafting Settings Dialog Box Specifies drafting settings organized for drawing aids in three categories: Snap and Grid. or Otrack on the status bar and choose Settings. The command terminates once you reorder an object. Polar Tracking. and polar and object snap tracking DSETTINGS specifies the settings for a number of drafting aids to help you draw more quickly and precisely. AutoCAD maintains the relative display order of the objects selected. Osnap. grid. 318 | DSETTINGS . and Object Snap. Command line: dsettings (or 'dsettings for transparent use) The Drafting Settings dialog box is displayed. Tools menu: Drafting Settings Shortcut menu: Right-click Snap. Note DRAWORDER automatically turns on all Object Sort Method options on the User Preferences tab in the Options dialog box. See SORTENTS. Back Moves the selected object to the bottom of the order of objects in the drawing. Settings include Snap mode.Front Moves the selected object to the top of the order of objects in the drawing. The selection method has no impact on drawing order. the grid. Grid. Polar. object snaps. System Variables SORTENTS controls object sort order operations. and polar and object snap tracking. See Also See “Control the Display Order of Overlapping Objects” in the User’s Guide. Commands OPTIONS sets object selection modes. DSETTINGS Specifies settings for Snap mode. When you select multiple objects for reordering. This can result in slower regeneration and redrawing times.

(SNAPUNIT system variable) Snap Y Spacing Specifies the snap spacing in the Y direction. The value must be a positive real number. or by using the SNAPMODE system variable. Snap X Spacing Specifies the snap spacing in the X direction. (SNAPBASE system variable) DSETTINGS | 319 .Snap and Grid Tab (Drafting Settings Dialog Box) Specifies Snap and Grid settings. (SNAPUNIT system variable) Angle Rotates the snap grid by the angle specified. by pressing F9 . Snap Controls an invisible grid that restricts cursor movement to specified intervals. You can also turn Snap mode on or off by clicking Snap on the status bar. Snap On Turns Snap mode on or off. The value must be a positive real number. (SNAPANG system variable) X Base Specifies an X base coordinate point for the grid.

Grid Controls the display of a dot grid that helps you visualize distances. If neither tracking feature is enabled. When the snap type is set to Grid snap and Snap mode is on. the Polar Distance setting has no effect.Y Base Specifies a Y base coordinate point for the grid. the cursor snaps to an isometric snap grid. Grid X Spacing Specifies the dot spacing in the X direction. the grid assumes the value set for Snap Y Spacing. (POLARDIST system variable) Grid On Turns the grid dots on or off. If this value is 0. the cursor snaps to a rectangular snap grid. Note The limits of the dot grid are controlled by the LIMITS command. or by using the GRIDMODE system variable. (GRIDUNIT system variable) Grid Y Spacing Specifies the dot spacing in the Y direction. (SNAPTYPE system variable) ■ ■ 320 | DSETTINGS Rectangular Snap: Sets the snap style to standard Rectangular snap mode. Grid Snap Sets the snap type to Grid. the grid assumes the value set for Snap X Spacing. (GRIDUNIT system variable) Snap Type & Style Controls Snap mode settings. If this value is 0. If this value is 0. (SNAPSTYL system variable) Isometric Snap: Sets the snap style to Isometric snap mode. Polar Distance Sets the snap increment distance when PolarSnap is selected under Snap Type & Style. by pressing F7 . the PolarSnap distance assumes the value for Snap X Spacing. (SNAPSTYL system variable) . (SNAPBASE system variable) Polar Spacing Controls the PolarSnap™ increment distance. When the snap type is set to Grid snap and Snap mode is on. The Polar Distance setting is used in conjunction with polar tracking and/or object snap tracking. You can also turn grid dots mode on or off by clicking Grid on the status bar.

You can enter any angle. 10. This value is also controlled by the POLARDIST system variable. The Polar Distance setting is used in conjunction with polar tracking and/or object snap tracking.5. If neither tracking feature is enabled. 18. 22. Polar Tracking Tab (Drafting Settings Dialog Box) Controls the AutoTrack settings. You can also turn polar tracking on or off by pressing F10 or by using the AUTOSNAP system variable. (POLARANG system variable) DSETTINGS | 321 . 30. or select a common angle of 90. If this value is 0. the Polar Distance setting has no effect. Increment Angle Sets the polar increment angle used to display polar tracking alignment paths. Polar Angle Settings Sets the angles used with polar tracking. 45. and 5 degrees from the list.PolarSnap Sets the snap increment distance when PolarSnap is selected under Snap Type & Style. the PolarSnap distance assumes the value for Snap X Spacing. 15. Polar Tracking On Turns polar tracking on and off.

322 | Absolute Bases polar tracking angles on the current user coordinate system (UCS). Delete Deletes selected additional angles. New Adds up to 10 additional polar tracking alignment angles. Note Before adding fractional angles. Relative to Last Segment Bases polar tracking angles on the last segment drawn. and the list of additional angles is also controlled by the POLARADDANG system variable. Track Using All Polar Angle Settings Permits the cursor to track along any polar angle tracking path for acquired osnap points when object snap tracking is on while specifying points. you must set the AUPREC system variable to the appropriate decimal precision to avoid undesired rounding. DSETTINGS .Additional Angles Makes any additional angles in the list available for polar tracking. Object Snap Tracking Settings Sets options for object snap tracking. all fractional angles you enter are rounded to the nearest whole number. not incremental. Note Additional angles are absolute. This setting is also controlled by the POLARMODE system variable. Track Orthogonally Only Displays only orthogonal (horizontal/vertical) object snap tracking paths for acquired object snap points when object snap tracking is on. This setting is also controlled by the POLARMODE system variable. The Additional Angles check box is also controlled by the POLARMODE system variable. Polar Angle Measurement Sets the basis by which polar tracking alignment angles are measured. Note Clicking Polar and Otrack on the status bar also turns polar tracking and object snap tracking on and off. if the value of AUPREC is 0 (the default value). For example.

AutoCAD applies the selected snap modes to return a point closest to the center of the aperture box. elliptical arc. region. With running object snap settings. Object Snap On Turns running object snaps on and off. you can specify a snap point at an exact location on an object. DSETTINGS | 323 . When more than one option is selected. The object snaps selected under Object Snap Modes are active while object snap is on. polyline segment. Endpoint Snaps to the closest endpoint of an arc. With object snap tracking. or 3D face. spline.Object Snap Tab (Drafting Settings Dialog Box) Controls running object snap settings. Press TAB to cycle through the options. solid. or ray. or to the closest corner of a trace. To use object snap tracking. (AUTOSNAP system variable) Object Snap Modes Specifies the running object snap modes. multiline. (OSMODE system variable) Object Snap Tracking On Turns object snap tracking on and off. Select one or more options. also called Osnap. line. you must turn on one or more object snaps. the cursor can track along alignment paths based on other object snap points when specifying points in a command.

spline. or elliptical arc. multiline. ray. line. or xline. ellipse.selection point snap point Midpoint Snaps to the midpoint of an arc. multiline. ellipse. or elliptical arc. or xline. line. circle. circle. Extended Intersection snaps to the potential intersection of two objects that would intersect if the objects were extended along their natural paths. ellipse. elliptical arc. selection point snap point Center Snaps to the center of an arc. elliptical arc. or dimension text origin. dimension definition point. snap point selection point Intersection Snaps to the intersection of an arc. selection point snap point Node Snaps to a point object. Quadrant Snaps to a quadrant point of an arc. ellipse. 324 | DSETTINGS . region. polyline. spline. polyline segment. circle. region. solid.

or 3D solid edge as an object from which to draw a perpendicular line. or text. spline. You can use Deferred Perpendicular to draw perpendicular lines between such objects. solid. multiline. snap point DSETTINGS | 325 . a shape. region. polyline. so you can draw objects to and from points on the extension line. When the aperture box passes over a Deferred Perpendicular snap point. xline. selection point snap point Note You might get varying results if you have both the Intersection and Apparent Intersection running object snaps turned on at the same time. circle. arc. Intersection and Extended Intersection work with edges of regions and curves. circle. ray. polyline. multiline. You can use a line. line. a block. elliptical arc. ray. Extension Causes a temporary extension line to display when you pass the cursor over the endpoint of objects. Insertion Snaps to the insertion point of an attribute.AutoCAD automatically turns on Extended Intersection when you select the Intersection object snap mode. AutoCAD automatically turns on Deferred Perpendicular snap mode when the object you are drawing requires that you complete more than one perpendicular snap. selection point snap point Perpendicular selection point Snaps to a point perpendicular to an arc. ellipse. but not with edges or corners of 3D solids. or xline. AutoCAD displays an AutoSnap™ tooltip and marker.

polyline. spline. polyline. or xline) that do not intersect in 3D space but may appear to intersect in the current view. multiline. AutoCAD automatically turns on Deferred Tangent snap mode when the object you are drawing requires that you complete more than one tangent snap. ellipse. circle. spline. multiline. ray. elliptical arc. Apparent Intersection snaps to the apparent intersection of two objects (arc. snap point Note When you use the From option in conjunction with the Tangent snap mode to draw objects other than lines from arcs or circles. you can use Deferred Tangent to draw a line that is tangent to two arcs. ray. line. line. ellipse. Nearest Snaps to the nearest point on an arc. elliptical arc. Apparent Intersection Apparent Intersection includes two separate snap modes: Apparent Intersection and Extended Apparent Intersection. elliptical arc.Tangent selection point Snaps to the tangent of an arc. circle. When the aperture box passes over a Deferred Tangent snap point. or circles. AutoCAD displays a marker and an AutoSnap tooltip. ellipse. For example. or xline. You can also locate Intersection and Extended Intersection snap points while running Apparent Intersection object snap mode is on. or spline. the first point drawn is tangent to the arc or circle in relation to the last point selected in the drawing area. Extended Apparent Intersection snaps to the imaginary intersection of two objects that would intersect if the objects were extended along their 326 | DSETTINGS . point. polyline arcs. circle.

Parallel Draws a vector parallel to another object whenever AutoCAD prompts you for the second point of a vector. see “Restrict Cursor Movement” and “Snap to Locations on Objects (Object Snaps)” in the User’s Guide. and turns the AutoSnap magnet on or off. if you move the cursor over a straight line segment of another object. ORTHO constrains cursor movement to the horizontal or vertical directions. Select All Turns on all object snap modes. SNAP restricts cursor movement to specific intervals. DSETTINGS | 327 . You cannot access the Options dialog box from the Drafting Settings dialog box if you are running DSETTINGS transparently. AutoCAD displays an alignment path. Apparent and Extended Apparent Intersection work with edges of regions and curves but not with edges or corners of 3D solids. AUTOSNAP controls the display of the AutoSnap marker and Snaptip.natural paths. Commands ISOPLANE selects the current isometric plane. which you can use to create the parallel object. Options Displays the Drafting tab in the Options dialog box (see page 633). When the path of the object you create is parallel to the line segment. Clear All Turns off all object snap modes. AutoCAD acquires the point. System Variables APBOX turns the AutoSnap aperture box on or off. OSMODE sets object snap modes using bitcodes. After specifying the first point of a vector. Note You might get varying results if you have both the Intersection and Apparent Intersection running object snaps turned on at the same time. See Also For more information.

Aerial View Window Displays the entire drawing. Real-time updating of the AutoCAD window from the Aerial View window is not available in paper space. AutoCAD marks the current view with a wide outline box. With the Aerial View window open. It displays a view of the entire drawing in a separate window so that you can quickly locate and move to a specific area. Global Zoom In Zoom Out View box View Menu (Aerial View Window) Changes the magnification of the Aerial View by zooming in and out of the drawing or by displaying the entire drawing in the Aerial View window. 328 | DSVIEWER . View menu: Aerial View Command line: dsviewer The Aerial View window is displayed. you can zoom and pan without choosing a menu option or entering a command.DSVIEWER Opens the Aerial View window The Aerial View window is a navigation tool. including viewport borders. In paper space. the Aerial View window shows only paper space objects.

Zoom Out Decreases the magnification of the drawing in the Aerial View window by zooming out by a factor of 2. DSVIEWER | 329 . All of the menu options are also available from a shortcut menu you can access by right-clicking in the Aerial View window. the Zoom In menu option and button are unavailable. such as after using ZOOM Extents. When the current view nearly fills the Aerial View window. Zoom In Increases the magnification of the drawing in the Aerial View window by zooming in by a factor of 2.When the entire drawing is displayed in the Aerial View window. both options are unavailable. Global Displays the entire drawing and the current view in the Aerial View window. centered on the current view box. If both of these conditions exist at the same time. the Zoom Out menu option and button are unavailable. centered on the current view box.

Options Menu (Aerial View Window) Provides toggles for automatic viewport display and dynamic updating of the drawing. 330 | DSVIEWER . When Auto Viewport is off. AutoCAD does not update the Aerial View window to match the current viewport. Dynamic Update Updates the Aerial View window while you edit the drawing. All of the menu options are also available from a shortcut menu you can access by right-clicking in the Aerial View window. See Also See “Pan and Zoom with the Aerial View Window” in the User’s Guide. AutoCAD does not update the Aerial View window until you click in the Aerial View window. Realtime Zoom Updates the drawing area in real time when you zoom using the Aerial View window. When Dynamic Update is off. Auto Viewport Displays the model space view of the current viewport automatically when multiple viewports are displayed.

DVIEW | 331 . PAN. or enter an option Object Selection Specifies objects to use in the preview image as you change views. and scroll bars are not available while that view is current. DVIEW uses objects you select or a special block named DVIEWBLOCK to display a preview image. is the line between the camera and the target. AutoCAD regenerates the drawing based on the view you set. Transparent ZOOM. DSVIEWER. When you end the command. DVIEW uses a camera-target metaphor.DVIEW Defines parallel projection or perspective views To help you view a model from any point in space. transparent ZOOM and PAN. target camera plan view 3D perspective view Command line: dview Select objects or <use DVIEWBLOCK>: Enter option [CAmera/TArget/Distance/POints/PAn/Zoom/TWist/CLip/Hide/Off/Undo]: Specify a point with your pointing device. The line of sight. DSVIEWER. When you define a perspective view. or viewing direction. The preview image shows the changes you make in the view. and scroll bars are not available in DVIEW. PAN. ZOOM. Selecting too many objects slows image dragging and updating.

graphics cursor Point Specification Rolls the view under the camera. Your viewing direction changes about the target point as you move the pointing device. The following illustration shows an example of using the default DVIEWBLOCK to set the view (moving the graphics cursor adjusts the view). AutoCAD uses DVIEWBLOCK for the preview image. You can create your own DVIEWBLOCK block in a 1×1×1-unit area. separated by a comma. The angles must be positive. 332 | DVIEW . or specify a point with your pointing device Enter both angles. The point you select with your pointing device is a start point for the dragging operation. Enter direction and magnitude angles: Enter angles between 0 degrees and 360 degrees. with its origin at the lower-left corner. The direction angle indicates the front of the view.DVIEWBLOCK If you press ENTER at the Select Objects prompt. and the magnitude angle determines how far the view rolls.

and an angle of –90 looks up from below. This angle measures from –180 to 180 degrees. Entering an angle on the command line locks the cursor movement so you see only the positions available for that angle. Enter Angle from the XY Plane Sets the camera’s position at an angle above or below the XY plane. Toggle (Angle In) Switches between two angle input modes. enter t. A camera angle of 0 degrees places the camera parallel to the XY plane of the UCS. and you can use the cursor to rotate the camera. Enter Angle in XY Plane from X Axis Sets the camera’s position at an angle in the XY plane relative to the X axis of the current user coordinate system (UCS). A rotation angle of 0 degrees looks down the X axis of the UCS toward the origin. After you toggle the angle input mode or specify the angle from the XY plane. enter an angle. AutoCAD returns to the previous prompt.Camera Specifies a new camera position by rotating the camera about the target point. or enter angle in XY plane <from X axis>. Two angles determine the amount of rotation. or [Toggle (angle current)] <current>: Specify an XYZ point. or press ENTER Camera Location Sets the camera’s position based on the specified point. An angle of 90 degrees looks down from above. DVIEW | 333 . Toggle unlocks the cursor movement for the angle. Specify camera location.

enter t. leaving its angle from the XY plane unchanged. Toggle (Angle From) Switches between two angle input modes. Entering an angle on the command line locks the cursor movement so you see only the positions available for that angle. or enter angle in XY plane <from X axis>. Two angles determine the amount of rotation.camera at A plan view camera rotated to B The illustration shows the camera rotating to the left from its initial position. Toggle unlocks the cursor movement for the angle. Specify camera location. and you can use the cursor to rotate the camera. The effect is like turning your head to see different parts of the drawing from one vantage point. Target Specifies a new position for the target by rotating it around the camera. or [Toggle (angle current)] <current>: Specify an XYZ point. or press ENTER 334 | DVIEW . enter an angle.

Toggle (Angle In) Switches between two angle input modes. After you toggle the angle input mode or specify the angle from the XY plane. AutoCAD returns to the previous prompt. Enter Angle in XY Plane from X Axis Sets the target’s position at an angle in the XY plane relative to the X axis of the current UCS.Enter Angle from the XY Plane Sets the target's position at an angle above or below the XY plane. A target angle of 0 degrees means that the target is parallel to the XY plane of the UCS. An angle of 90 degrees looks down from above. A rotation angle of 0 degrees means you look down the X axis of the UCS toward the origin. target at A camera plan view target at B The illustration shows the effect of moving the target point from left to right. Toggle unlocks the cursor movement for the angle. This angle measures from –180 to 180 degrees. Entering an angle on the command line locks the cursor movement so you see only the positions available for that angle. and you can use the cursor to rotate the target. DVIEW | 335 . and an angle of –90 looks up from below. leaving its angle from the XY plane unchanged.

choose the Off option from the main DVIEW prompt. Moving the slider bar to the right increases the distance between camera and target. If the target and camera points are close together. Moving it to the left decreases that distance. or if you specify a longfocal-length lens. and you can use the cursor to rotate the target. which causes objects farther from the camera to appear smaller than those closer to the camera. To turn off perspective viewing. you might see very little of your drawing when you specify a new distance. This option turns on perspective viewing.Toggle (Angle From) Switches between two angle input modes. 336 | DVIEW . Distance Moves the camera in or out along the line of sight relative to the target. try the maximum scale value (16x) or enter a large distance. Toggle unlocks the cursor movement for the angle. AutoCAD prompts for the new camera-to-target distance. To magnify the drawing without turning perspective viewing on. with 1x representing the current distance. If you see little or none of your drawing. Entering an angle on the command line locks the cursor movement so you see only the positions available for that angle. use the Zoom option of DVIEW (see page 338). A special perspective icon replaces the coordinate system icon. Specify new camera-target distance <current>: Enter a distance or press ENTER A slider bar along the top of the drawing area is labeled from 0x to 16x.

where the field of view remains constant.Y. Specify target point <current>: Specify a point or press ENTER To help you define a new line of sight. Points Locates the camera and target points using X. If perspective viewing is on. You can use XYZ point filters. AutoCAD draws a rubber-band line from the current camera position to the crosshairs.camera at A plan view camera at B The illustration shows the effect of moving the camera along the line of sight relative to the target. AutoCAD turns it off while you specify new camera and target locations. enter direction and magnitude angles.Z coordinates. Specify camera point <current>: Specify a point. and then redisplays the preview image in perspective view. AutoCAD prompts you for a new camera location. You must specify these points in a nonperspective view. or press ENTER DVIEW | 337 .

The illustration shows the change in view as you swap the camera and target points. with 1x representing the current scale. Lens and distance settings are the same in each case. dynamically increases or decreases the apparent size of objects in the current viewport. Moving it to the left decreases the scale. Specify displacement base point: Specify a point Specify second point: Specify a point Zoom If perspective viewing is off. 338 | DVIEW . Specify zoom scale factor <current>: Specify a scale or press ENTER A slider bar along the top of the drawing area is labeled from 0x to 16x.A rubber-band line connects the target point to the crosshairs to help you place the camera relative to the target. Pan Shifts the image without changing the level of magnification. target at A For information about entering direction and magnitude angles. see “Point Specification” on page 332. Moving the slider bar to the right increases the scale. camera at A. target at B camera location and target point camera at B.

lens length = 50mm plan view lens length = 25mm Twist Twists or tilts the view around the line of sight. Increasing the lens length is similar to switching to a telephoto lens. with 0 degrees to the right. simulating what you’d see with a 35mm camera and a 50mm lens. Moving it to the left decreases the lens length. as with a wide-angle lens. with 1x representing the current lens length. The default lens length is 50mm.If perspective viewing is on. Specify lens length <50. AutoCAD measures the twist angle counterclockwise. which changes the field of view and causes more or less of the drawing to be visible at a given camera and target distance. Moving the slider bar to the right increases the lens length.000mm>: Specify a value or press ENTER A slider bar along the top of the drawing area is labeled from 0x to 16x. Zoom adjusts the camera lens length. Decreasing the lens length widens the field of view. Specify view twist angle <current>: Specify an angle or press ENTER DVIEW | 339 .

On Turns on front clipping. or press ENTER Distance from Target Positions the back clipping plane and turns on back clipping. A negative distance places it beyond the target. Eye Positions the front clipping plane at the camera. A positive distance places the clipping plane between the target and the camera. Specify distance from target or [ON/OFF] <current>: Specify a distance. Off Turns off front clipping. You can use the slider bar to drag the clipping plane. or press ENTER 340 | Distance from Target Positions the front clipping plane and turns on front clipping. Specify distance from target or [set to Eye (camera)/ON/OFF] <current>: Specify a distance. A positive distance places the clipping plane between the target and the camera.Clip Clips the view. enter an option. This option is available only when perspective viewing is off. Off Turns off back clipping. On Turns on back clipping at the current clipping distance. Enter clipping option [Back/Front/Off] <Off>: Enter an option or press ENTER Back Obscures objects located behind the back clipping plane. You can use the slider bar to drag the clipping plane. enter e. obscuring portions of the drawing that are behind or in front of the front clipping plane. This option is available only when perspective viewing is off. The front and back clipping planes are invisible walls that you can position perpendicular to the line of sight between the camera and target. Front Obscures objects located between the camera and the front clipping plane. A negative distance places it beyond the target. DVIEW .

wide polyline segments. Hide Suppresses hidden lines on the selected objects to aid in visualization. Undo Reverses the effects of the last DVIEW action. The Distance option turns on perspective viewing. and the extruded edges of objects with nonzero thickness to be opaque surfaces that hide objects.This hidden line suppression is quicker than that performed by HIDE. See Also See “Overview of Specifying a 3D View” in the User’s Guide. polygon meshes.back clip front clip camera position of clipping planes view resulting from camera position Off Turns off front and back clipping. solids. regions. front clipping remains on at the camera position. DVIEW | 341 . You can undo multiple DVIEW operations. If perspective viewing is on. traces. 3D faces. Off Turns off perspective viewing. AutoCAD considers circles. but it can't be plotted.

Commands With 3DORBIT. HIDE regenerates a 3D model with hidden lines removed. you can manipulate the view of 3D objects by clicking and dragging your pointing device. and assigns names and values to custom properties. DSVIEWER opens the Aerial View window. This data is derived from the operating system. BLOCK creates a block definition from a group of objects. DWGPROPS Sets and displays the properties of the current drawing File menu: Drawing Properties Command line: dwgprops The Drawing Properties dialog box is displayed. PAN moves the drawing display in the current viewport. 342 | DWGPROPS . assigns summary properties. You can use it to create an alternate DVIEWBLOCK. ZOOM increases or decreases the apparent size of objects in the current viewport. These custom properties can help you identify your drawing. General Tab (Drawing Properties Dialog Box) Displays read-only information about the drawing file. Drawing Properties Dialog Box Displays read-only statistics or general information about your drawing.

Created. DWGPROPS | 343 . it cannot be changed or deleted accidentally.File Name Shows the file icon and the file name. These values can be modified in Windows Explorer. Location. Modified. the file location. Accessed Shows MS-DOS name. and the date and time it was last modified and last accessed. when the file was created. Read-Only Indicates that the file is read-only. AutoCAD uses this setting to determine which files should be backed up. Archive Indicates that this file should be archived. Size Shows the file type. MS-DOS Name. File Type. and the size of the file. Attributes Shows system-level file attributes.

Subject Specifies the subject of the drawing. System Indicates that the file is a system file. you can add keywords to all your drawing files and then use DesignCenter™ to search for all drawing files with a particular keyword. The title can be different from the drawing file name. DWGPROPS . title. Author Specifies the author of the drawing. delete the existing name and enter a new one. To change the author.Hidden Indicates that the file is hidden. For example. Summary Tab (Drawing Properties Dialog Box) Displays properties such as author. The author name can only be entered or changed by the user. you cannot see or use it unless you know its name. An AutoCAD drawing cannot have the System attribute set. You can use the subject name to group drawings that have the same subject. and subject that are predefined. 344 | Title Specifies the title you want to use when searching for this drawing.

This value is stored in the TDCREATE system variable.com. DWGPROPS | 345 . These file properties are automatically maintained for you and can help you search for drawings created or modified during a specific period. or a path to a folder on a network drive. Hyperlink Base Specifies the base address that AutoCAD uses for all relative links inserted within the drawing. for example.Keywords Specifies the keywords you want to use to locate the drawing. Statistics Tab (Drawing Properties Dialog Box) Displays data such as the dates the drawing was created and last modified. This value is stored in the DWGCHECK system variable. Comments Specifies the comments you want to use to locate the drawing. a warning message is displayed. Note If AutoCAD detects that the drawing was last saved using an application other than Autodesk® software. http:// www. Created Displays the date and time the drawing was created. You can specify an Internet location.autodesk.

such as AutoLISP. Total Editing Time Displays the total amount of editing time in the drawing. The Last Saved By name is stored in the LOGINNAME system variable. you could create the custom fields in your drawing templates. This value is stored in the TDUPDATE system variable. For example. To ensure that all your drawings use the same custom field names.Modified Displays the date and time the drawing was last modified. Revision Number Displays the revision number. Last Saved By Displays the name of the last person who modified the file. The custom fields can be used in searches to help locate a drawing. you could create a custom field called “Project” and assign the actual project name as the value. This value is stored in the TDINDWG system variable. 346 | DWGPROPS . such as when you use the Find dialog box in DesignCenter. AutoCAD also provides access to the properties data using programming interfaces. Custom Tab (Drawing Properties Dialog Box) Provides ten custom fields for assigning names and values.

DXBIN | 347 . To enter a value for a custom field. Commands ADCENTER displays DesignCenter. Enter text in the Name column. enter text in the Value column. See Also See “Add Identifying Information to Drawings” in the User’s Guide. Enter the name of the file to import.Custom Properties Lists names and values for custom fields for the current drawing. DXBIN Imports specially coded binary files Insert menu: Drawing Exchange Binary Command line: dxbin The Select DXB File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box) is displayed.

348 .

Enhanced Attribute Editor Lists the attributes in a selected block instance and displays the properties of each attribute. the Enhanced Attribute Editor is displayed. You can change the attribute properties and values. You can change only the attribute value. If you modify attributes of a block and then select a new block before you save the attribute changes you made.EATTEDIT Edits attributes in a block reference Modify II toolbar: Modify menu: Object ➤ Attribute ➤ Single Command line: eattedit Select a block: You are prompted to select a block in the drawing area. When you choose Select Block. The Enhanced Attribute Editor contains the following tabs: ■ ■ ■ Attribute Text Options Properties Attribute Tab (Enhanced Attribute Editor) Displays the tag. and you are prompted to select another block. the dialog box closes until you select a block from the drawing or cancel by pressing ESC . and leaves the Enhanced Attribute Editor open. and value assigned to each attribute. After you select a block with attributes. If the block you select does not contain attributes. an error message is displayed. you are prompted to save the changes before selecting another block. Apply Updates the drawing with the attribute changes you have made. or you select something that is not a block. Select Block Allows you to use your pointing device to select a block from the drawing area. prompt. EATTEDIT | 349 .

Changes you make to this option are not displayed if the LWDISPLAY system variable is off.0 expands it. Width Factor Sets the character spacing for the attribute text. Backwards Specifies whether or not the attribute text is displayed backwards. Properties Tab (Enhanced Attribute Editor) Defines the layer that the attribute is on and the lineweight. Entering a value less than 1. Layer Specifies the layer that the attribute is on. Plot Style Specifies the plot style of the attribute. If the drawing uses plot styles. Default values for this text style are assigned to the text properties displayed in this dialog box. Justification Specifies how the attribute text is justified (left-. If the current drawing uses color-dependent plot styles. Text Options Tab (Enhanced Attribute Editor) Sets the properties that define the way an attribute’s text is displayed in the drawing. the Plot Style list is not available. linetype. Entering a value greater than 1. Lineweight Specifies the lineweight of the attribute. Height Specifies the height of the attribute text. or right-justified). center-. Color Specifies the color of the attribute. and color for the attribute text. Change the color of attribute text on the Properties tab. Linetype Specifies the linetype of the attribute. Text Style Specifies the text style for the attribute text. Rotation Specifies the rotation angle of the attribute text. you can assign a plot style to the attribute using the Properties tab. Oblique Angle Specifies the angle that the attribute text is slanted away from its vertical axis. Upside down Specifies whether or not the attribute text is displayed upside down.0 condenses the text.Value The value assigned to the selected attribute. 350 | EATTEDIT .

where you can locate and select drawing files from which to extract block attribute information.] Button Displays the Select File dialog box.. Select Drawings Makes the [.. Select Objects Button Allows you to close the wizard temporarily while you select the set of blocks in the drawing area from which you want to extract block attribute information. EATTEXT | 351 .] button available. Select Objects Makes the Select Objects button available. [..EATTEXT Exports block attribute information to an external file Modify II toolbar: Tools menu: Attribute Extraction Command line: eattext The Attribute Extraction wizard is displayed.. Current Drawing Specifies that block attribute information is extracted from all blocks in the current drawing. and the block attributes to be extracted. Attribute Extraction Wizard Specifies the set of blocks from which to extract block attribute information. the types of block attribute information you want. The Attribute Extraction wizard includes the following pages: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Drawing Settings Use Template Select Attributes View Output Save Template Export Select Drawing Page Allows you to select drawing files from which to extract block attribute information.

In the Block Alias column. Next Displays the Use Template page. you can assign an alias to the block. Select the box next to an attribute name to extract the information for that attribute.Drawing Files Displays the selected drawing files that contain the block attributes you want to extract. Next Displays the Settings page. 352 | Blocks Displays the list of blocks in the selected drawings. In the Alias column. The Number column displays the number of instances of the block that are present in the selected drawings. Attributes for Block Displays a list of block attributes corresponding to the block or blocks selected.blk file name extension. where you can locate and select a block attribute template file to use. Include Nested Blocks Specifies that block attribute information is extracted from blocks nested in other blocks. The Value column displays the value of the block attribute. Next Displays the Select Attributes page. EATTEXT . you can assign an alias to the block attribute. Use Template Button Displays the Select File dialog box. No Template Specifies that block attribute settings from a template file are not used. Select Attributes Page Allows you to select blocks and attributes. Select the box next to a block name to display that block’s attributes in the Attributes for Block list. Include Xrefs Specifies that block attribute information is extracted from external references (xrefs). Use Template Page Allows you to use the block attribute settings from ones previously saved in a template file with the . Use Template Makes the Use Template button available. Settings Page Allows you to specify whether to extract block attribute information from external reference files and nested blocks.

The Value column displays the value of the attribute. Two different views of the information can be displayed: ■ ■ Attributes for each block by block name. other columns display names of attributes associated with each block. Enhanced Attribute Extract renames blocks of the same name but that have different attributes that are found in multiple drawings or xrefs. When you use Enhanced Attribute Extract. Values for each block attribute by block name. Next Displays the View Output page. the instance of WND in the first file is shown with the block name WND. View Output Page Allows you to preview the block attributes to be extracted. a block named WND is in both c:\drawings\offic. Enhanced Attribute Extract renames the block by appending to the block name a tilde character (~) and the path name and file in which the block was found. Copy to Clipboard Copies all or selected portions of the table to the Clipboard. Uncheck All Clears the selection of all blocks or block attributes. The Block Name column displays the names of blocks selected for attribute extraction. For each instance after the first one of duplicate-named blocks with different attributes. The list displays the attributes currently selected for extraction. the instance of WND in the second file is shown with the block name WND~c:\drawings\adminoffice.Check All Selects all blocks or block attributes for extraction. The rows display the values for each attribute. but the block has different attributes in each file. In exported files. The Count column displays the number of attributes in the drawing with the same name and value.dwg. Alternate View Switches between the two views of the information in the table. Next Displays the Save Template page. EATTEXT | 353 .dwg and c:\drawings\adminoffice.dwg. The Block Name column displays the names of the blocks selected for attribute extraction. For example. The Attribute column displays the name of the attribute.

[. In attribute names that will be field names in files exported to Microsoft® Access file format. Restricted characters in Microsoft Access fields Character Character name . attribute tag names that appear as column headings will be field names in Microsoft Access.blk file name extension. and any instance of the restricted characters will be replaced by an underscore.. Enhanced Attribute Extract substitutes an underscore character (_) for the characters shown in the following table. Period ! Exclamation mark [ Left square bracket ] Right square bracket For example. Save Template Displays the Save As dialog box. 354 | File Name Specifies the file name for the extracted block attribute information.. EATTEXT . where you can specify a location and name for a template file of the current block attribute settings. Next Displays the Export page.] Button Allows you to specify the file by locating it with the standard file dialog box.Save Template Page Allows you to save the attribute extraction settings you have made to a template file with the . Export Page Allows you to specify the attribute extraction file name and format and export the attribute information to the specified file.

EDGE Changes the visibility of three-dimensional face edges Surfaces toolbar: Draw menu: Surfaces ➤ Edge Command line: edge Specify edge of 3dface to toggle visibility or [Display]: Select an edge or enter d Edge Controls the visibility of the edges you select. Specify edge of 3d face to toggle visibility or [Display]: AutoCAD® repeats the prompt until you press ENTER . File formats that are displayed in the list depend on the applications installed on the computer. The comma-separated file format (CSV) and tab-separated file format (TXT) are always available.csv) is based on the locale. The delimiter used in the comma-separated file format (. Finish Extracts the block attribute information and exports it to the file specified.File Type Specifies the format for the attribute extraction file. If Microsoft Excel and Microsoft Access are installed. EDGE | 355 . the list separator for the locale separates the exported data. If the edges of one or more 3D faces are colinear. AutoCAD alters the visibility of each colinear edge. the XLS and MDB file formats are available.

This prompt continues until you press ENTER . use the Edge option. indicating the apparent snap locations on each invisible edge. use the Edge option. You must select each edge with your pointing device to display it. You must select each edge with your pointing device to display it. AutoSnap markers and Snaptips are automatically displayed. Select objects: If you want to make the edges of the 3D faces visible once again. EDGE . AutoSnap™ markers and Snaptips are automatically displayed. System Variables SPLFRAME turns on or off the display of invisible edges. This prompt continues until you press ENTER . Select Selects hidden edges of a partially visible 3D face and displays them. Enter selection method for display of hidden edges [Select/All] <All>: option or press ENTER All Enter an Selects the hidden edges of all 3D faces in the drawing and displays them. If you want to make the edges of the 3D faces visible once again. indicating the apparent snap locations on each invisible edge.Display Selects invisible edges of 3D faces so that you can redisplay them. 356 | See Also Commands 3DFACE creates a 3D triangular or quadrilateral surface.

The edges can be lines.” in the User’s Guide. The Coons surface patch mesh not only meets the corners of the defining edges. See Also See “Overview of 3D Objects. splines. System Variables SURFTAB1 and SURFTAB2 control the number of divisions along the M and N directions of a polygon mesh. M N You can select the four edges in any order. or open 2D or 3D polylines. providing control over the boundaries of the generated surface patch. but also touches each edge. arcs. The first edge (SURFTAB1) determines the M direction of the generated mesh. EDGESURF | 357 . A Coons surface patch mesh is a bicubic surface interpolated between four adjoining edges (which can be general space curves). which extends from the endpoint closest to the selection point to the other end. The edges must touch at their endpoints to form a topologically rectangular closed path. Surfaces toolbar: Draw menu: Surfaces ➤ Edge Surface Command line: edgesurf Current wire frame density: SURFTAB1=current SURFTAB2=current Select object 1 for surface edge: Select object 2 for surface edge: Select object 3 for surface edge: Select object 4 for surface edge: 3 2 1 4 You must select the four adjoining edges that define the surface patch.EDGESURF Creates a three-dimensional polygon mesh EDGESURF constructs a three-dimensional (3D) polygon mesh approximating a Coons surface patch mesh from four adjoining edges. The two edges that touch the first edge form the N edges (SURFTAB2) of the mesh.

THICKNESS sets the current extrusion thickness. Specifying an elevation setting in one viewport makes that elevation current in all viewports regardless of whether viewports are set up to retain their own user coordinate systems (UCSs). Command line: elev (or 'elev for transparent use) Specify new default elevation <current>: Specify a distance or press ENTER Specify new default thickness <current>: Specify a distance or press ENTER The thickness sets the distance to which AutoCAD extrudes a 2D object above or below its elevation. a negative value extrudes along the negative Z axis. new viewports inherit the settings of the current viewport. and extrusion direction. z y y x with elevation x with thickness ELEV controls only new objects. 358 | ELEV . VPORTS creates tiled viewports. it does not affect existing objects. elevation.0 whenever you change the coordinate system. AutoCAD resets the elevation to 0. AutoCAD maintains separate current elevations in model space and paper space. A positive value extrudes along the positive Z axis. System Variables ELEVATION sets the current elevation.ELEV Sets elevation and extrusion thickness of new objects The current elevation is the Z value that AutoCAD uses whenever it expects a 3D point but receives only X and Y values. See Also Commands UCS and UCSMAN control construction plane orientation.

ELLIPSE
Creates an ellipse or an elliptical arc
Draw toolbar:
Draw menu: Ellipse
Command line: ellipse
Specify axis endpoint of ellipse or [Arc/Center/Isocircle]: Specify a point or enter
an option
The Isocircle option is available only when you set the Style option of SNAP
to Isometric.

Axis Endpoint
3
2

1
ellipse by axis
endpoint

Defines the first axis by its two endpoints. The angle of the first axis determines the angle of the ellipse. The first axis can define either the major or the
minor axis of the ellipse.
Specify other endpoint of axis: Specify a point (2)
Specify distance to other axis or [Rotation]: Specify a distance by entering a value
or locating a point (3), or enter r
Distance to Other
Axis
Rotation

Defines the second axis using the distance from the
midpoint of the first axis to the endpoint of the second
axis (3).
Creates the ellipse by appearing to rotate a circle about
the first axis.
Specify rotation around major axis: Specify a point (3), or
enter an angle value between 0 and 89.4
Move the crosshairs around the center of the ellipse and
click. If you enter a value, the higher the value, the
greater the eccentricity of the ellipse. Entering 0 defines
a circular ellipse.

ELLIPSE

|

359

3

Arc
Creates an elliptical arc. The angle of the first axis determines the angle of the
elliptical arc. The first axis can define either the major or the minor axis of
the elliptical arc.

ellipse by rotation

Specify axis endpoint of elliptical arc or [Center]:

Specify a point or enter c

Axis Endpoint
Defines the start point of the first axis.
Specify other endpoint of axis:
Specify distance to other axis or [Rotation]: Specify a distance or enter r
The descriptions of the Distance to Other Axis and Rotation options match
those of the corresponding options under Center.

Center
Creates the elliptical arc using a center point you specify.
Specify center of elliptical arc:
Specify endpoint of axis:
Specify distance to other axis or [Rotation]: Specify a distance or enter r
Distance to Other Axis
Defines the second axis as the distance from the center of the elliptical arc,
or midpoint of the first axis, to the point you specify.
1

Specify start angle or [Parameter]: Specify a point (1), enter a value, or enter p
The descriptions of the Start Angle and Parameter options match those of the
corresponding options under Rotation.
Rotation
Defines the major to minor axis ratio of the ellipse by rotating a circle about
the first axis. The higher the value (from 0 through 89.4 degrees), the greater
the ratio of minor to major axis. Entering 0 defines a circle.
Specify rotation around major axis: Specify a rotation angle
Specify start angle or [Parameter]: Specify an angle or enter p
Start Angle

Defines the first endpoint of the elliptical arc. The Start
Angle option toggles from Parameter mode to Angle
mode. The mode you are in determines how AutoCAD
calculates the ellipse.
Specify end angle or [Parameter/Included angle]: Specify
a point (2), enter a value, or enter an option

360

|

ELLIPSE

Parameter

Requires the same input as Start Angle, but creates the
elliptical arc using the following parametric vector
equation:
p(u) = c + a* cos(u) + b* sin(u)

2

where c is the center of the ellipse and a and b are its
major and minor axes, respectively.
Specify start parameter or [Angle]: Specify a point, enter a
value, or enter a
Specify end parameter or [Angle/Included angle]: Specify
a point, enter a value, or enter an option

End Parameter: Defines the end angle of the elliptical
arc by using a parametric vector equation. The Start
Parameter option toggles from Angle mode to
Parameter mode. The mode you are in determines
how AutoCAD calculates the ellipse.
Angle: Defines the end angle of the elliptical arc. The
Angle option toggles from Parameter mode to Angle
mode. The mode you are in determines how
AutoCAD calculates the ellipse.
Included Angle: Defines an included angle beginning
at the start angle.

Center
Creates the ellipse by a center point you specify.

3
1

2

Specify center of ellipse: Specify a point (1)
Specify endpoint of axis: Specify a point (2)
Specify distance to other axis or [Rotation]: Specify a distance by entering a value
or locating a point (3), or enter r
Distance to Other
Axis

Defines the second axis as the distance from the center
of the ellipse, or midpoint of the first axis, to the point
you specify.

ELLIPSE

|

361

Rotation

Creates the ellipse by appearing to rotate a circle about
the first axis.
Specify rotation around major axis: Specify a point, or
enter an angle value between 0 and 89.4
Specify start angle or [Parameter]: Specify an angle or
enter p
Move the crosshairs around the center of the ellipse and
click. If you enter a value, the higher the value, the
greater the eccentricity of the ellipse. Entering 0 defines
a circle.

Isocircle
Creates an isometric circle in the current isometric drawing plane.

Note The Isocircle option is available only when you set the Style option of
SNAP to Isometric.

Specify center of isocircle:
Specify radius of isocircle or [Diameter]: Specify a distance or enter d
Radius

Creates a circle using a radius you specify.

Diameter

Creates a circle using a diameter you specify.
Specify diameter of isocircle:

Specify a distance

See Also
See “Draw Ellipses” in the User’s Guide.

ERASE
Removes objects from a drawing
Modify toolbar:
Modify menu: Erase
Shortcut menu: Select the objects to erase, right-click in the drawing area,
and choose Erase.

362

|

ERASE

Command line: erase
Select objects: Use an object selection method and press ENTER when you finish
selecting objects
AutoCAD removes the objects from the drawing.

object selected

object erased

See Also
See “Remove Objects” in the User’s Guide.
Commands

OOPS restores previously erased objects. U reverses the
effect of the previous command. UNDO reverses the
effect of multiple commands and provides control over
the Undo feature. REDO reverses the immediately previous UNDO or U command.

ETRANSMIT
Creates a transmittal set of a drawing and related files
File Menu: eTransmit
Command line: etransmit
AutoCAD displays the Create Transmittal Dialog Box.

Create Transmittal Dialog Box
Creates a transmittal set of a drawing and related files.

General Tab (Create Transmittal Dialog Box)
Creates a transmittal set of a specific type.

ETRANSMIT

|

363

Notes
Provides a space where you can enter notes related to a transmittal set. The
notes are included in the transmittal report. You can specify a template of
default notes to be included with all your transmittal sets by creating an
ASCII text file called etransmit.txt. This file must be saved to a location specified by the Support File Search Path option on the “Files Tab (Options Dialog
Box)” on page 634. See the Report tab.
Type
Specifies the type of transmittal set created.

364

|

Folder

Creates a transmittal set of uncompressed files in a new
or existing folder.

Self-extracting
Executable

Creates a transmittal set of files as a compressed, selfextracting executable file. Double-clicking the resulting
EXE file decompresses the transmittal set and restores
the files.

ETRANSMIT

Zip

Creates a transmittal set of files as a compressed ZIP file.
To restore the files, you need a decompression utility
such as the shareware application PKZIP or WinZip.

Password
Opens the Password dialog box (see page 368), where you can specify a password for your transmittal set.
Location
Specifies the location in which the transmittal set is created. Location lists
the last ten locations in which transmittal sets were created. To specify a new
location, choose Browse and navigate to the location you want.
Browse
Opens a standard file selection dialog box, in which you can navigate to a
location where you create the transmittal set.
Convert Drawings To
Specifies the file format of all drawings included in a transmittal set. When
this option is selected, you can select an AutoCAD drawing format from the
drop-down list.
Preserve Directory Structure
Preserves the directory structure of all files in the transmittal set, facilitating
ease of installation on another system. If this option is cleared, all files are
installed to the target directory when the transmittal set is installed. This
option is not available if you’re saving a transmittal set to an Internet
location.
Remove Paths from Xrefs and Images
Removes paths from any cross-referenced drawings or images in the transmittal set.
Send E-mail with Transmittal
Launches the default system email application when the transmittal set is
created so that you can send an email notifying others of the new transmittal
set.
Make Web Page Files
Generates a web page that includes a link to the transmittal set.

Files Tab (Create Transmittal Dialog Box)
Lists the files to be included in the transmittal set. By default, all files associated with the current drawing (such as related xrefs, plot styles, and fonts)
are listed. You can add additional files to the transmittal set or remove
existing files. Related files that are referenced by URLs are not included in the
transmittal set.

ETRANSMIT

|

365

List of Files
Displays the names of all files to be included in the transmittal set. Choose
the List View and Tree View buttons to switch back and forth between these
views.
List View

Toggles file display to list view.

Tree View

Toggles file display to tree view. All files to be included
in the transmittal set are indicated by a check mark
next to the file name. To remove a file from the
transmittal set, click in the check box. Right-click in the
file list to display a shortcut menu, from which you can
clear all check marks or apply check marks to all files.

Add File
Opens a standard file selection dialog box, in which you can select an additional file to include in the transmittal set.

366

|

ETRANSMIT

Include Fonts
Includes the current drawing’s associated font files (TXT and SHX) with the
transmittal set. Because TrueType fonts are proprietary, they are not included
with the transmittal set. If any required TrueType fonts are not present on the
computer to which the transmittal set is copied, the font specified by the
FONTALT system variable is substituted.

Report Tab (Create Transmittal Dialog Box)

Displays report information that is included with the transmittal set.
Includes any transmittal notes that you entered on the General tab and distribution notes automatically generated by AutoCAD that detail what steps
must be taken for the transmittal set to work properly. For example, if
AutoCAD detects SHX fonts in one of the transmittal drawings, you are
instructed where to copy these files so that AutoCAD can detect them on the
system the transmittal set is being installed on. If you have created a text file
of default notes, the notes are also included in the report. See Notes on the
General tab.

ETRANSMIT

|

367

Save As
Opens a File Save dialog box, in which you can specify a location in which
to save a report file. Note that a report file is automatically included with all
transmittal sets that you generate; by choosing Save As, you can save an
additional copy of a report file for archival purposes.

Password Dialog Box

Password for Compressed Transmittal
Provides a space for an optional password for the transmittal set. When
others attempt to open the transmittal set, they will need to provide this
password to access the files. Password protection cannot be applied to folder
transmittal sets (see “Type” on page 364).
Password Confirmation
Provides a space to confirm the password that you entered in the Password
field. If the two passwords do not match, you are prompted to re-enter them.

EXPLODE
Breaks a compound object into its component objects
A compound object comprises more than one AutoCAD object. For example,
a block is a compound object.
Modify toolbar:
Modify menu: Explode
Command line: explode
Select objects:

368

|

EXPLODE

Use an object selection method and press ENTER when you finish

The color, linetype, and lineweight of any exploded object might change.
Other results differ depending on the type of compound object you’re
exploding. See the following list of objects that can be exploded and the
results for each.

Note If you’re using a script or an ObjectARX™ function, you can explode only
one object at a time.

before EXPLODE

2D and
Lightweight
Polyline

Discards any associated width or tangent information.
For wide polylines, AutoCAD places the resulting lines
and arcs along the center of the polyline.

3D Polyline

Explodes into line segments. Any linetype assigned to
the 3D polyline is applied to each resulting line
segment.

3D Solid

Explodes planar surfaces into regions. Nonplanar
surfaces explode into bodies.

Arc

If within a nonuniformly scaled block, explodes into
elliptical arcs.

Block

Removes one grouping level at a time. If a block
contains a polyline or a nested block, exploding the
block exposes the polyline or nested block object,
which must then be exploded to expose its individual
objects.

after EXPLODE

Blocks with equal X, Y, and Z scales explode into their
component objects. Blocks with unequal X, Y, and Z
scales (nonuniformly scaled blocks) might explode into
unexpected objects.
When nonuniformly scaled blocks contain objects that
cannot be exploded, they are collected into an
anonymous block (named with a “*E” prefix) and
referenced with the nonuniform scaling. If all the
objects in such a block cannot be exploded, the selected
block reference will not be exploded. Body, 3D Solid,
and Region entities in a nonuniformly scaled block
cannot be exploded.
Exploding a block that contains attributes deletes the
attribute values and redisplays the attribute definitions.
Blocks inserted with MINSERT and external references
(xrefs) and their dependent blocks cannot be exploded.

EXPLODE

|

369

Body

Explodes into a single-surface body (nonplanar
surfaces), regions, or curves.

Circle

If within a nonuniformly scaled block, explodes into
ellipses.

Leaders

Explodes into lines, splines, solids (arrow heads), block
inserts (arrow heads, annotation blocks), multiline text,
or tolerance objects, depending on the leader.

Multiline text

Explodes into text objects.

Multiline

Explodes into lines and arcs.

Polyface Mesh

Explodes one-vertex meshes into a point object. Twovertex meshes explode into a line. Three-vertex meshes
explode into 3D faces.

Region

Explodes into lines, arcs, or splines.

See Also
See “Disassemble a Block Reference (Explode)” in the User’s Guide.
Commands

BLOCK creates blocks from a group of objects. LIST displays the properties of objects. XPLODE explodes objects
and controls the color, layer, linetype, and lineweight
of the component objects.

EXPORT
Saves objects to other file formats
File menu: Export
Command line: export
The Export Data dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box) is displayed.
In Files of Type, select the format type to export objects to. In File Name,
enter the name of the file to create. AutoCAD exports the objects to the
specified file format using the specified file name.
The following output types are available:



370

|

WMF—Windows® Metafile (see WMFOUT)
SAT—ACIS solid object file (see ACISOUT)
STL—Solid object stereolithography file (see STLOUT)
DXX—Attribute extract DXF® file (see ATTEXT)

EXPORT



BMP—Device-independent bitmap file (see BMPOUT)
3DS—3D Studio® file (see 3DSOUT)
DWG—AutoCAD drawing file (see WBLOCK)

EXTEND
Extends an object to meet another object
Objects that you can extend include arcs, elliptical arcs, lines, open 2D and
3D polylines, and rays.

boundary selected

objects to extend selected

result

Modify toolbar:
Modify menu: Extend
Command line: extend
Select boundary edges...
Select objects: Select one or more objects and press ENTER or press ENTER to select
all objects (implied selection)
Select object to extend or shift-select to trim or [Project/Edge/Undo]: Select an
object to extend, or hold down SHIFT and select an object to trim, or enter an option

Boundary Object Selection
Uses selected objects to define the boundary edges to which you want to
extend the object. Valid boundary objects include 2D and 3D polylines, arcs,
blocks, circles, ellipses, layout viewports, lines, rays, regions, splines, text,
and xlines.

EXTEND

|

371

If you select a 2D polyline as a boundary object, AutoCAD ignores its width
and extends objects to the centerline of the polyline. You can use only the
single, crossing, fence, and implied selection options to select boundaries
that include blocks.
If you extend a tapered polyline segment, AutoCAD corrects the width of the
extended end to continue its original taper to the new endpoint. If this
causes the segment to have a negative ending width, the ending width
becomes zero.

selected boundary

polylines to extend

result

Extending a spline-fit polyline adds a new vertex to the control frame for the
polyline.

Object to Extend
Specifies the object to extend. AutoCAD repeats the main prompt so you can
extend multiple objects. Pressing SHIFT while selecting an object trims it to
the nearest boundary rather than extending it. Pressing ENTER ends the
command.

Project
Specifies the projection method AutoCAD uses when extending objects.
Enter a projection option [None/Ucs/View] <current>: Enter an option or press
ENTER

selected
boundary

372

|

EXTEND

objects to
extend

None

Specifies no projection. AutoCAD extends only objects
that intersect with the boundary edge in 3D space.
arc not intersecting
with boundary edge in
3D space
arc intersecting with
boundary edge in 3D
space

UCS

Specifies projection onto the XY plane of the current
user coordinate system (UCS). AutoCAD extends
objects that do not intersect with the boundary objects
in 3D space.

projection of arcs onto
current UCS that intersect
with boundary edge

View

left viewport

Specifies projection along the current view direction.

right viewport

Edge
Extends the object to another object’s implied edge, or only to an object that
actually intersects it in 3D space.

EXTEND

|

373

Enter an implied edge extension mode [Extend/No extend] <current>: Enter an
option or press ENTER
selected boundary

selected object to
extend

Extend

Extends the boundary object along its natural path to
intersect another object or its implied edge in 3D space.

No Extend

Specifies that the object is to extend only to a boundary
object that actually intersects it in 3D space.

Undo
extended

Reverses the most recent changes made by EXTEND.

not extended

See Also
See “Trim or Extend Objects” in the User’s Guide.
Commands

LENGTHEN lengthens an object. TRIM trims objects at a

cutting edge you specify.
System Variables

EDGEMODE determines whether to extend an object to
another object’s implied edge or only to an object that
intersects it in 3D space. PROJMODE specifies the Projection mode AutoCAD uses when extending objects.

EXTRUDE
Creates unique solid primitives by extruding existing two-dimensional objects
With EXTRUDE, you can create solids by extruding (adding thickness to)
selected objects. You can extrude an object along a path, or you can specify
a height value and a tapered angle.
Use EXTRUDE to create a solid from a common profile of an object, such as a
gear or sprocket. EXTRUDE is particularly useful for objects that contain
fillets, chamfers, and other details that might otherwise be difficult to reproduce except in a profile. If you create a profile using lines or arcs, use the Join
option of PEDIT to convert them to a single polyline object or make them into
a region before you use EXTRUDE.
Solids toolbar:
Draw menu: Solids ➤ Extrude
Command line: extrude
Current wire frame density: ISOLINES=current
Select objects:
Specify height of extrusion or [Path]: Specify a distance or enter p

374

|

EXTRUDE

Object Selection

select object

Specifies the objects to extrude. You can extrude planar 3D faces, closed
polylines, polygons, circles, ellipses, closed splines, donuts, and regions. You
cannot extrude objects contained within a block or polylines that have crossing or self-intersecting segments.
A polyline must contain at least 3 but not more than 500 vertices. If a
selected polyline has width, AutoCAD ignores the width and extrudes from
the center of the polyline path. If a selected object has thickness, AutoCAD
ignores the thickness.

Height of Extrusion
Extrudes the objects along the positive Z axis of the object’s coordinate
system if you enter a positive value. If you enter a negative value, AutoCAD
extrudes the objects along the negative Z axis.

height

Specify angle of taper for extrusion <0>:
degrees or press ENTER

Specify an angle between –90 and +90

Positive angles taper in from the base object. Negative angles taper out. The
default angle, 0, extrudes a 2D object perpendicular to its 2D plane. AutoCAD
tapers all objects and loops in the selection set to the same value. Tapered
extrusions are possible only with loops that are continuous at the vertices.

taper
angle

Specifying a large taper angle or a long extrusion height can cause the object
or portions of the object to taper to a point before reaching the extrusion
height.
AutoCAD always extrudes individual loops of the region to the same height.

path

profile

When an arc is part of a tapered extrusion, the angle of the arc remains constant, and the radius of the arc changes. On a straight extrusion, each arc
results in a single cylindrical face. Whenever possible, EXTRUDE uses the
taper angle as the angle by which it slants faces from the Z axis.

Path
Selects the extrusion path based on a specified object. AutoCAD extrudes the
profiles of the selected object along the chosen path to create solids.
Select extrusion path:

Use an object selection method

Lines, circles, arcs, ellipses, elliptical arcs, polylines, or splines can be paths.
The path should not lie on the same plane as the profile, nor should it have
areas of high curvature.

EXTRUDE

|

375

The extruded solid starts from the plane of the profile and ends on a plane
perpendicular to the path at the path’s endpoint. One of the endpoints of the
path should be on the plane of the profile; otherwise, AutoCAD moves the
path to the center of the profiles.
If the path is a spline, it should be perpendicular to the plane of the profile
at one of the endpoints of the path. Otherwise, AutoCAD rotates the profile
to be perpendicular to the spline path. If one of the endpoints of the spline
is on the plane of the profile, AutoCAD rotates the profile about the point;
otherwise, AutoCAD moves the spline path to the center of the profile and
rotates the profiles about its center.
If the path contains segments that are not tangent, AutoCAD extrudes the
object along each segment and then miters the joint along the plane bisecting the angle formed by the segments. If the path is closed, the profile should
lie on the miter plane. This allows the start and end sections of the solid to
match up. If the profile is not on the miter plane, AutoCAD rotates it until it
is on the miter plane.
AutoCAD extrudes profiles with multiple loops so that all the loops appear
on the same plane at the end section of the extruded solid.
See Also
See “Extrude Faces on 3D Solids” in the User’s Guide.

376

|

EXTRUDE

FILL
Controls the filling of objects such as hatches, two-dimensional solids, and wide polylines
Some displays and plotters take a long time to fill the interior of objects; turn
off Fill mode to improve performance. Objects affected by FILL include
hatches, two-dimensional solids, wide polylines, AutoCADmultilines and
traces.
Command line: fill (or 'fill for transparent use)
Enter mode [ON/OFF] <current>: Enter on or off, or press ENTER

Fill mode on

Fill mode off

On

Turns on Fill mode. For the filling of a 3D object to be
visible, its extrusion direction must be parallel to the
current viewing direction, and hidden lines must not be
suppressed.

Off

Turns off Fill mode. Only the outlines of objects are
displayed and plotted. Changing Fill mode affects
existing objects after the drawing is regenerated. The
display of lineweights is not affected by the Fill mode
setting.

See Also
See “Control the Display of Polylines, Hatches, Gradient Fills, Lineweights,
and Text” in the User’s Guide.
Commands

OPTIONS displays the Options dialog box, in which you

can set Fill mode and other display settings.
System Variables

FILLMODE stores the FILL command setting.

FILLET
Rounds and fillets the edges of objects
FILLET rounds the edges of two arcs, circles, elliptical arcs, lines, polylines,
rays, splines, or xlines with an arc of a specified radius. FILLET also rounds the
edges of 3D solids.

before FILLET

after FILLET

If the TRIMMODE system variable is set to 1, FILLET trims the intersecting lines
to the endpoints of the fillet arc. If the selected lines do not intersect,
AutoCAD® extends or trims them so that they do.
If both objects you want to fillet are on the same layer, AutoCAD creates the
fillet line on that layer. Otherwise, AutoCAD creates the fillet line on the
current layer. The same is true for the fillet color, lineweight, and linetype.

FILL

|

377

You can fillet line segments of a polyline that are adjacent, nonadjacent,
intersecting, or separated by one segment. If they are nonadjacent, the
polyline segments are extended to accommodate the fillet. If they are intersecting, the polyline segments are trimmed to accommodate the fillet. To
create a fillet, the polyline segments must converge within the drawing limits
when limits checking is on.
The result is a single polyline that includes the fillet as an arc segment. All
the properties of this new polyline, such as its layer, color, and linetype, are
inherited from the first polyline selected.

Note Filleting an associative hatch whose boundary was defined from line segments removes hatch associativity. If the boundary was defined from a polyline,
associativity is maintained.

Modify toolbar:
Modify menu: Fillet
Command line: fillet
Current settings: Mode = current, Radius = current
Select first object or [Polyline/Radius/Trim/mUltiple]: Use an object selection
method or enter an option

First Object
Selects the first of two objects required to define a 2D fillet or the edge of a
3D solid to fillet.
Select second object:

first selected object

378

|

FILLET

second selected object

result

If you select lines, arcs, or polylines, AutoCAD extends them until they intersect or trims them at the intersection. You can fillet two lines with different
extrusion directions only if the Z values of the endpoints of both lines are
equal in the current user coordinate system (UCS).
If the selected objects are straight line segments of a 2D polyline, they can be
adjacent or separated by one other segment. If they are separated by another
polyline segment, FILLET deletes the segment that separates them and
replaces it with the fillet.
More than one fillet can exist between arcs and circles. AutoCAD chooses the
fillet with endpoints closest to the points you select.

selection points

result (with radius greater than 0)

FILLET does not trim circles; the fillet arc meets the circle smoothly.

FILLET

|

379

selection points

results (with radius
greater than 0)

If you select a 3D solid, you can select multiple edges, but you must select the
edges individually.
Enter fillet radius <current>: Specify a distance or press ENTER
Select an edge or [Chain/Radius]: Select edge(s), enter c, or enter r

Edge
Selects a single edge. You can continue to select single edges until you press
ENTER .

selecting edges

single edge fillets

If you select three or more edges that converge at a vertex to form the corner
of a box, AutoCAD computes a vertex blend that is part of a sphere if the
three incident fillets have the same radii.

380

|

FILLET

Chain
Toggles from selection of single edges to selection of sequential tangent
edges.
Select edge chain or <Edge/Radius>: Select an edge chain, enter e, or enter r
Edge Chain

Selects a tangential sequence of edges when you select
a single edge. For example, if you select an edge on the
top of a 3D solid box, AutoCAD also selects the other
tangential edges on the top.

Edge

Switches to a single edge selection mode.

Radius

Defines the radius of the fillet arc.

chain fillets

Radius
Defines the radius of the fillet arc.
Enter fillet radius <current>: Specify a distance or press ENTER
AutoCAD displays the previous prompt:
Select an edge or [Chain/Radius]: Select one or more edges or enter c or r

Polyline
Inserts fillet arcs at each vertex of a 2D polyline where two line segments
meet.
Select 2D polyline:
If one arc segment separates two line segments that converge as they
approach the arc segment, AutoCAD removes the arc segment and replaces
it with a fillet arc.

before

after

Radius
Defines the radius of the fillet arc.
Specify fillet radius <current>: Specify a distance or press ENTER

FILLET

|

381

The value you enter becomes the current radius for subsequent FILLET
commands. Changing this value does not affect existing fillet arcs.

Trim
Controls whether AutoCAD trims the selected edges to the fillet arc
endpoints.
Enter Trim mode option [Trim/No trim] <current>: Enter an option or press
ENTER

Trim

Trims the selected edges to the fillet arc endpoints.

No Trim

Does not trim the selected edges.

Multiple
Rounds the edges of more than one set of objects. AutoCAD displays the
main prompt and the Select Second Object prompt repeatedly until you press
ENTER to end the command.
If you enter an option other than First Object at the main prompt, the
prompts for that option are displayed and then the main prompt is displayed
again.
All the fillets you created with the Multiple option are removed if you click
Undo.
See Also
See “Create Fillets, Chamfers, or Breaks in Objects” in the User’s Guide.
Commands

CHAMFER bevels the edges of objects.

System Variables

FILLETRAD stores the current fillet radius. TRIMMODE
controls whether selected lines are trimmed to the fillet
arc endpoints.

FILTER
Creates reusable filters for object selection
FILTER creates a list of requirements that an object must meet to be included

in a selection set.

382

|

FILTER

Use FILTER to


Select objects before using an editing command
Select objects during an editing command; at any Select Objects prompt,
use FILTER transparently to select objects to use with the current command
Create named filters to use later at any Select Objects prompt

FILTER finds objects by property only when you have assigned those proper-

ties to the object directly. If objects assume properties from the layer on
which they reside, FILTER does not find them. You can, however, use FILTER
to find objects with properties set by layer or by block.
Command line: filter (or 'filter for transparent use)
The Object Selection Filters dialog box is displayed.

Object Selection Filters Dialog Box
Selects, edits, and names filters for object selection.

Filter Property List
Displays a list of the filter properties that compose the current filter. The
current filter is the filter that you select in Current in the Named Filters area.

Select Filter
Adds filter properties to the current filter.

FILTER

|

383

Object Types and
Logical Operators

Lists object types that you can filter and logical
operators (AND, OR, XOR, and NOT) for grouping the
filter expressions.
If you use logical operators, such as AND, OR, XOR, and
NOT, make sure that you pair and balance them
correctly in the filter list. The number of operands you
can enclose depends on the operation.

Logical operators
Starting operator

Encloses

Ending operator

Begin AND

One or more operands

End AND

Begin OR

One or more operands

End OR

Begin XOR

Two operands

End XOR

Begin NOT

One operand

End NOT

For example, the following filter selects all circles
except the ones with a radii greater than or equal to 1.0:
Object=Circle
**Begin NOT
Circle Radius>= 1.00
**End NOT
X, Y, Z
Parameters

Define additional filter parameters depending on the
object. For example, if you select Line Start, you can
enter the X, Y, and Z coordinate values that you want to
filter.
In the filter parameters, you can use relative operators
such as < (less than) or > (greater than). For example,
the following filter selects all circles with center points
greater than or equal to 1,1,0 and radii greater than or
equal to 1:
Object=Circle
Circle CenterX >= 1.0000 Y >= 1.0000 Z >= 0.0000
Circle Radius>= 1.0000

384

|

FILTER

Select

Displays a dialog box listing all items of the specified
type in the drawing. Select the items to filter. For
example, if you select the object type Color, Select
displays a list of colors to choose for the filter.

Add to List

Adds the current Select Filter property to the filter list.
Filter properties that you add to the unnamed filter
remain available during the current AutoCAD session
unless you manually delete them.

Substitute

Replaces the filter property selected in the filter
property list with the one displayed in Select Filter.

Add Selected
Object

Adds one selected object in the drawing to the filter list.

Edit Item
Moves the selected filter property into the Select Filter area for editing. To
edit a filter property, select it and choose Edit Item. Edit the filter property
and choose Substitute. The edited filter replaces the selected filter property.

Delete
Deletes a selected filter property from the current filter.

Clear List
Deletes all the listed properties from the current filter.

Named Filters
Displays, saves, and deletes filters.
Current

Displays saved filters. Select a filter list to make it
current. AutoCAD loads the named filter and its list of
properties from the default file, filter.nfl.

Save As

Saves a filter and its list of properties. AutoCAD saves
the filter in the filter.nfl file. Names can contain up to 18
characters.

Delete Current
Filter List

Deletes a filter and all its properties from the default
filter file.

FILTER

|

385

AutoCAD uses the current filter on the objects you select. Command line: find The Find and Replace dialog box is displayed. selects. Commands QSELECT quickly creates selection sets based on search criteria. See Also See “Filter Selection Sets”in the User’s Guide. right-click in the drawing area. replace. Find and Replace Dialog Box Specifies the text you want to find. select. replace. FIND Finds. replaces. or select and controls the scope and results of the search. If you partially opened the current drawing. SELECT places selected objects in the Previous selection set. Edit menu: Find Shortcut menu: End any active commands. FIND does not consider objects that you did not load. or zoom to text contained in any loaded object in model space and in any layout defined in the current drawing. and choose Find.Apply Exits the dialog box and displays the Select Objects prompt. or zooms to specified text You can find. 386 | FIND . where you create a selection set.

If nothing is selected. Enter a string. If something is already selected. FIND | 387 . or choose one of the most recently used strings from the list.Find Text String Specifies the text string you want to find. Enter a string. Entire Drawing is the default value. Press ENTER to return to the dialog box. You can use the Select Objects button to temporarily close the dialog box and create or modify the selection set. Select Objects Closes the dialog box temporarily so that you can select objects in your drawing. When you select objects. or choose one of the six most recently used strings from the list. Replace With Specifies the text string you want to use to replace the found text. Search In displays Current Selection. Search In Specifies whether to search the entire drawing or only the current selection. Current Selection is the default value.

Context Displays and highlights the currently found text string in its surrounding context. Once you find the first instance of the text. If you have not entered text in Find Text String. The status area confirms the replacements and indicates the number of replacements that were made. the dialog box closes and AutoCAD displays a message on the command line indicating the number of objects that it found and selected. in some cases the found text string may not be displayed in a visible area of the drawing. this option is not available. Select All Finds and selects all loaded objects containing instances of the text that you enter in Find Text String. Zoom To Displays the area in the drawing that contains the results of a find or replace search. you can only zoom to text in the current Model or layout tab. When you choose Select All. This option is available only when you set Search In to Current Selection. . Although AutoCAD searches model space and all layouts defined for the drawing. If you choose Find Next. Status Displays confirmation of find and replace searches. the Find option becomes Find Next. Note that Select All does not replace text. AutoCAD displays found text in the Context area. in which you can define the type of objects and words that you want to find. Replace All Finds all instances of the text that you enter in Find Text String and replaces it with the text in Replace With. AutoCAD refreshes the Context area and displays the next found text string in its surrounding context. Replace Replaces found text with the text that you enter in Replace With. When zooming to text found in a multiline text object. which you can use to find the next instance. AutoCAD ignores any text in Replace With. as specified in Search In. AutoCAD finds and replaces either text in the entire drawing or in the current selection.388 | FIND Options Displays the Find and Replace Options dialog box (see page 389). Find/Find Next Finds the text that you enter in Find Text String.

For example. By default. FOG Provides visual cues for the apparent distance of objects Fog and depth cueing are actually two extremes of the same effect: a white color is fog. You can use any color in between.” FIND does not locate the text string “Front Doormat. Include Specifies the type of objects you want to include in the search. and a black color is traditional depth cueing. if you select Find Whole Words Only and search for “Front Door. Match Case Includes the case of the text in Find Text String as part of the search criteria. FOG | 389 . all options are selected. Find Whole Words Only Finds only whole words that match the text in Find Text String. Render Toolbar: View menu: Render ➤ Fog Command line: fog AutoCAD displays the Fog/Depth Cue dialog box.Find and Replace Options Dialog Box Defines the type of objects and words that you want to find.” See Also See “Change Multiline Text” in the User’s Guide.

Blue Adjusts the individual red. and blue components of the selected color.Fog/Depth Cue Dialog Box Defines the cues for distance between objects and the current viewing direction. Moving one scroll box affects the mix of the three colors. green. lightness. Red. green. blue (RGB) color system or the hue. Color System Controls whether AutoCAD uses the red. Green. green. Moving all three scroll boxes all the 390 | FOG . Red. and blue are the primary light colors shaded from black to the full intensity of the color. Fog Background Applies fog to the background as well as to the geometry. AutoCAD displays the result in the Color Selected swatch. Enable Fog Turns fog on and off without affecting the other settings in the dialog box. saturation (HLS) color system.

RENDER creates a shaded image of a 3D wireframe model. See Also See “Overview of Rendering” in the User’s Guide. Moving the Hue scroll box changes the color. unloads. Moving red and green to the right and blue to the left produces yellow. Near/Far Fog Percentage Define the percentage of fog at the near and far distances. Commands ARX loads. To define the color. FOG | 391 . and provides information about ObjectARX™ applications. lightness. ranging from zero fog to 100 percent fog.way to the left produces black. The higher the saturation. the less gray in the color. Hue. AutoCAD displays the result in the Color Selected swatch. and saturation components of the selected color. true colors. Moving the Lightness scroll box increases the luminance or brightness of the hue by adding white. and Color Book colors. Moving the Saturation scroll box to the right increases the purity of the color. The values are percentages of the distance from the camera to the back clipping plane. Lightness. Near/Far Distance Define where the fog starts and ends. Saturation Adjusts the individual hue. Select Custom Color Displays the Select Color dialog box. you can select from the 255 AutoCAD Color Index (ACI) colors. moving them all the way to the right produces white.

392 .

GRID Displays a dot grid in the current viewport The grid is for visual reference only. It is not plotted. See Also Commands HYPERLINK Attaches a hyperlink to an object or modifies an existing hyperlink. The file or Web page (URL) that is associated with the hyperlink opens. and it is not part of the drawing. See Also Commands TEXTSCR switches from the drawing area to the text window. Command line: grid (or 'grid for transparent use) Specify grid spacing(X) or [ON/OFF/Snap/Aspect] <current>: Specify a value or enter an option Grid Spacing (X) Sets the grid to the specified value. GOTOURL | 393 .GOTOURL Opens the file or Web page associated with the hyperlink attached to an object Command line: gotourl Select an object that has an attached hyperlink. GRAPHSCR Switches from the text window to the drawing area Command line: graphscr (or 'graphscr for transparent use) GRAPHSCR closes the text window. You can turn the grid display on and off with the Grid button on the status bar. You can also press F2 to open or close the text window. Entering x after the value sets the grid spacing to the specified value multiplied by the snap interval. This command is ignored on dual-screen systems.

GRIDUNIT sets the grid spacing in the current viewport. GRID turned off The Aspect option is not available when the current snap style is Isometric. GRID set to Aspect Commands DSETTINGS sets drawing aids. including the grid display. Snap Sets the grid spacing to the snap interval specified by the SNAP command. System Variables GRIDMODE turns the grid on or off in the current viewport. Off Turns off the grid. SNAP specifies a minimum interval for point entry. GROUP displays prompts on the command line (see page 399).GRID turned on On Turns on the grid using the current spacing. Aspect Changes the grid spacing in the X and Y directions. 394 | GROUP . See Also See “Adjust Grid and Grid Snap” in the User’s Guide. GROUP Creates and manages saved sets of objects called groups Command line: group AutoCAD displays the Object Grouping dialog box. If you enter -group at the Command prompt. Specify the horizontal spacing(X) <current>: Enter a value or press ENTER Specify the vertical spacing(Y) <current>: Enter a value or press ENTER Entering x following either value defines it as a multiple of the snap interval rather than the drawing units.

selecting one object in the group selects the whole group. GROUP | 395 . Selectable Specifies whether a group is selectable. and changes object groups. and the special characters dollar sign ($). Group names can be up to 31 characters long and can include letters.Object Grouping Dialog Box Displays. and underscore (_) but not spaces. Group Identification Displays the name and description (if any) of the group selected in the Group Name list. numbers. Group Name Displays the names of existing groups. When a group is selectable. no groups are selectable. AutoCAD converts the name to uppercase characters. identifies. hyphen (-). names. Group Name Specifies the group name. Objects on locked or frozen layers are not selected. When the PICKSTYLE system variable is set to 0.

After you select the objects. AutoCAD assigns a default name. Change Group Modifies existing groups. Create Group Specifies properties of new groups. if there is one. When this option is cleared. To use this option. computer. Remove Removes objects from the selected group. New desk. clear the Selectable option. AutoCAD creates a group using the name and description under Group Name and Description. only named groups are displayed. Find Name Lists the groups to which an object belongs. and telephone selected Creates a new group from the selected objects. AutoCAD displays the group name in the Group Name list. *An. Include Unnamed Specifies whether unnamed groups are listed. Highlight Shows the members of the selected group. Remove objects: Use an object selection method AutoCAD removes the selected objects from the group and redisplays the Object Grouping dialog box. Selectable Specifies that a new group is selectable. Pick a member of a group: Select one object AutoCAD displays the Group Member List dialog box. showing the groups to which the object belongs. to unnamed groups. Unnamed Indicates that a new group is unnamed. AutoCAD highlights the member objects in the drawing area.Description Displays the description of the selected group. The n represents a number that increases with each new group. 396 | GROUP .

AutoCAD returns them to their previous position in the numerical order of the group. Select objects: Use an object selection method AutoCAD adds the selected objects to the group and redisplays the Object Grouping dialog box. Re-Order Displays the Order Group dialog box (see page 398). For example. in which you can change the numerical order of objects within the selected group. AutoCAD numbers objects in the order in which you select them for inclusion in the group. You can remove the group definition from the drawing by using the Explode option. chair selected chair added to group Note AutoCAD alphabetizes the order of the group names. Rename Renames the selected group to the name entered in Group Name under Group Identification. Note When you remove objects from a group and then later add them back during the same drawing session. Reordering is useful when creating tool paths. you can change the order in which AutoCAD cuts the horizontal and vertical lines of a tool path pattern. Add Adds objects to the selected group. the group remains defined. GROUP | 397 .telephone selected telephone removed from group If you remove all the group’s objects.

not number 1. The group’s objects remain in the drawing. Replace at Position (0–n) Specifies the position to which the object moves. GROUP . Selectable Specifies whether the group is selectable. Remove from Position (0–n) Specifies the current position of the object to reorder. Explode Deletes the definition of the selected group. Description Updates the selected group’s description to the name that you enter in Description. The first object in a group is number 0. Order Group Dialog Box Reorders objects in groups. AutoCAD accepts up to 64 characters for a description name. 398 | Group Name Displays the names of all groups. Description Displays the description of the selected group.You can either change the numerical position of individual group members or ranges of group members or reverse the order of all members.

Enter group name(s) to list <*>: Enter a name list or press ENTER to list all groups Order Changes the numerical order of objects within a group.Number of Objects (1–n) Specifies the object number or range of numbers to reorder. AutoCAD highlights the group members in the drawing area. specify the first object’s position number. in the current group order. GROUP Command Line If you enter -group at the Command prompt. Re-Order Changes the numerical order of objects as specified. one by one. Enter a group option [?/Order/Add/Remove/Explode/REName/Selectable/Create] <Create>: Enter an option or press ENTER ?—List Groups Lists names and descriptions of groups defined in the drawing. For example. GROUP displays prompts on the command line. Replace at position <0 .n>: Enter the position number to which you want the object to move Number of objects to re-order <0 . you can change the order in which AutoCAD cuts the horizontal and vertical lines of a tool path pattern.n) or [Reverse order]: Enter a position number or enter r Position Number Specifies the position number of the object to reorder. GROUP | 399 .n>: Enter the number of objects to reorder Reverse Order Reverses the order of all members in a group. To reorder a range of objects. Highlight Displays the members of the selected group. Enter a group name or [?]: Enter a name list or enter ? to list all groups Enter position number of the object to reorder (0 . Reordering is useful when creating tool paths. Reverse Order Reverses the order of all group members.

. selecting one object in the group selects the whole group. the group remains defined. You can remove the group definition from the drawing by using the Explode option.. Explode Deletes a group definition by exploding the group into its component objects. Enter a group name or [?]: Enter a name or enter ? to list all groups This group is current. Enter a group name or [?]: 400 | GROUP Enter a name or enter ? . When a group is selectable. Select objects: Remove Removes objects from a group. Objects on locked or frozen layers are not selected.Add Adds objects to a group. or press ENTER Create Creates a group. Enter a group name to rename or [?]: Enter an existing group name or enter ? to list all groups Enter a new name for group or [?]: Enter a new name or enter ? to list all groups Selectable Specifies whether a group is selectable. do you want to change it [Yes/No]? <Y>: Enter y or n. Enter a group name or [?]: Enter a name or enter ? to list all groups Rename Assigns a new name to an existing group.. Enter a group name or [?]: Enter a name or enter ? to list all groups Select objects to remove from group. Remove objects: If you remove all the group’s objects.. Enter a group name or [?]: Enter a name or enter ? to list all groups Select objects to add to group.

numbers. With SELECT you can select groups by name at the Select Objects prompt. and special characters dollar sign ($). System Variables PICKSTYLE controls whether groups are selectable. GROUP | 401 . Commands FILTER creates lists used to select objects based on properties. and underscore (_) but not spaces. AutoCAD converts the name to uppercase characters.Group names can be up to 31 characters long and can include letters. hyphen (-). Enter a group description: Select objects: Enter up to 64 text characters or press ENTER See Also See “Group Objects” in the User’s Guide.

402 .

You can also fill an area that does not have a closed boundary. Precede the name with an asterisk (*) to fill the area with individual lines instead of a hatch block. for example. which can reduce the amount of disk space a drawing occupies and can also reduce regeneration time. Hatches are stored as single hatch objects. by defining a polyline hatch boundary with the Direct Hatch option. The limit can be reset to any value between 100 and 10.000. Note By default. enter (setenv "MaxHatch" "50000") at the Command prompt.pat or acadiso. angle=30 Specify an angle for pattern <current>: Specify an angle or press ENTER Select objects to define hatch boundary or <direct hatch>.000. Command line: hatch Enter a pattern name or [?/Solid/User defined] <current>: Enter a predefined or custom pattern name. If the boundary is made up of multiple objects. A hatch boundary consists of an object or objects that completely enclose an area.000 segments. Select objects: Select objects or press ENTER to define a polyline boundary HATCH | 403 . To reset the limit to 50.5 angle=0 scale=1 If the drawing is in model space and you enter a scale factor followed by xp. AutoCAD won’t create a hatch pattern that consists of over 10.HATCH Fills an area with a nonassociative hatch pattern A nonassociative hatch is not updated when its boundaries are modified. or press ENTER Use BHATCH to create hatches and fills in a dialog box and to create associative hatches. their endpoints must coincide for the hatch to be created properly.pat file or a custom pattern in its own PAT file. HATCH combines the lines that make up the hatch into a block. Enter the name followed by an optional hatch style code. Unless you specify otherwise.000. The limit is set by the MaxHatch setting in the registry. Pattern Name—Predefined or Custom Specifies a predefined pattern in the acad. AutoCAD calculates a scale factor relative to paper space. enter an option. Specify a scale for the pattern <current>: Specify a value or press ENTER scale=.

pat files. or press ENTER define boundary These options are also available in the PLINE command. AutoCAD prompts you for additional points. When you complete the polyline boundary. HATCH prompts you to create additional polyline boundaries. Press ENTER to end the command and create the hatch. ?—List Pattern Names Lists and provides a brief description of the hatch patterns defined in the acad. Retain polyline boundary? [Yes/No] <current>: Enter y to retain the hatch boundary or n to discard it after the area is hatched Specify start point: Specify a start point for the polyline boundary Specify next point or [Arc/Close/Length/Undo]: Specify a point. Selecting part of a block for hatching selects the entire block.Select Objects Uses the selected objects to define the outer boundary of the hatching area and objects internal to the hatching boundary. retain boundary Specify start point for new boundary or <apply hatch>: Specify a point or press ENTER to apply a hatch to the existing hatch boundary discard boundary If you specify a point. enter an option. Press ENTER to end the command and create the hatch. Enter pattern(s) to list <*>: Enter a name list or press ENTER to list all patterns 404 | HATCH .pat or acadiso. Direct Hatch Uses specified points to define the boundary of the hatching area. press ENTER .

Selecting part of a block for solid fill selects the entire block. or press ENTER These options are also available in the PLINE command. Note The boundary of a solid fill hatch must be closed and must not intersect itself. Retain polyline boundary? [Yes/No] <current>: Enter y to retain the fill boundary or n to discard it after the area is filled Specify start point: Specify a start point for the polyline boundary Specify next point or [Arc/Close/Length/Undo]: Specify a point. press ENTER . enter an option. In addition. the loops must not intersect. When you complete the polyline boundary. Select objects: Select objects or press ENTER to define a polyline boundary Select Objects Uses the selected objects to define the outer boundary of the fill area and objects internal to the fill boundary. Direct Hatch Uses specified points to define the boundary of the fill area.Solid Specifies a solid fill. HATCH | 405 . AutoCAD prompts you for additional points. if the hatch area contains more than one loop. Press ENTER to end the command and create the solid fill. Press ENTER to end the command and create the solid fill. HATCH prompts you to create additional polyline boundaries. These limitations do not apply to standard hatch patterns. Select objects to define hatch boundary or <direct hatch>. Specify start point for new boundary or <apply hatch>: Specify a point or press ENTER to apply a solid fill to the existing fill boundary If you specify a point.

406 | HATCH . Enter u. followed optionally by a hatch style code (see “Hatch Style Codes” on page 407). Precede the u with an asterisk (*) to fill the area with individual lines instead of a hatch block. Press ENTER to end the command and create the hatch. enter an option. When you complete the polyline boundary. AutoCAD prompts you for additional points. press ENTER . Specify start point for new boundary or <apply hatch>: Specify a point or press ENTER to apply a hatch to the existing hatch boundary If you specify a point. Direct Hatch Uses specified points to define the boundary of the hatching area. Retain polyline boundary? [Yes/No] <current>: Enter y to retain the hatch boundary or n to discard it after the area is hatched Specify start point: Specify a start point for the polyline boundary Specify next point or [Arc/Close/Length/Undo]: Specify a point. Select objects: Select objects or press ENTER to define a polyline boundary Select Objects Uses the selected objects to define the outer boundary of the hatching area and objects internal to the hatching boundary.User-Defined Pattern Specifies a pattern of lines using the current linetype. or press ENTER These options are also available in the PLINE command. Selecting part of a block for hatching selects the entire block. Specify angle for crosshatch lines <current>: Specify an angle or press ENTER Specify spacing between the lines <current>: Specify the distance between the lines or press ENTER Double hatch area? [Yes/No] <current>: Enter y to specify a second set of lines to be drawn at 90 degrees to the original lines Select objects to define hatch boundary or <direct hatch>. Press ENTER to end the command and create the hatch. HATCH prompts you to create additional polyline boundaries.

If AutoCAD encounters an internal boundary.o at the Pattern prompt. You can list the hatch style codes by following the pattern name with a comma (. HATCH | 407 . Thus. See Also See “Standard Libraries” and “Hatches.) and a question mark (?). AutoCAD stores the style by adding the comma and code to the pattern name in the HPNAME system variable. For example. To opt for a user-defined pattern and use the Ignore style. and areas separated by an even number of boundaries are not. n (Normal) Hatches inward from the outermost area boundary. Because this process starts from both ends of each hatch line.i. This style hatches inward from the area boundary. enter u. i (Ignore) Ignores all internal objects and hatches through them. to hatch only the outermost area of a structure with several internal boundaries using the MUDST pattern. For information about the acad. it turns off hatching until it encounters another boundary. see “Custom Hatch Patterns” in the Customization Guide. Note Hatching concave curves using the Outer and Ignore styles can cause discrepancies. o (Outer) Hatches outermost areas only. but it turns off hatching if it encounters an internal boundary and does not turn it back on again. Specify a hatch style by following the pattern name with a comma and the hatch style code. areas separated from the outside of the hatched area by an odd number of boundaries are hatched. and Wipeouts” in the User’s Guide. enter mudst.Hatch Style Codes Hatching styles control the method that AutoCAD uses to hatch internal boundary objects. this style hatches only the outermost area of the structure and leaves the internal structure blank.pat file and creating your own hatch patterns. Fills. ? (List Styles) Lists hatch styles.

You can modify only the available properties. The Hatch Edit dialog box displays the current properties of the selected hatch or fill object. HPSPACE sets the spacing of a userdefined hatch pattern. HPSCALE sets the hatch pattern scale. SNAPBASE specifies the start point of the hatch pattern. CONVERT converts 2D polylines and associative hatches to the optimized Release 14 format. HPDOUBLE specifies whether a user-defined hatch is double-hatched.Commands BHATCH fills an enclosed area with a hatch pattern. Command line: hatchedit Select associative hatch object: Use an object selection method The Hatch Edit dialog box is displayed. HPNAME sets the hatch pattern name. HATCHEDIT Modifies an existing hatch or gradient fill Modify II toolbar: Modify menu: Object ➤ Hatch Shortcut menu: Select a hatch object to edit. 408 | HATCHEDIT . HATCHEDIT displays prompts on the command line (see page 410). Hatch Edit Dialog Box Modifies the characteristics of an existing hatch or gradient fill. System Variables HPANG sets the hatching angle. PLINE creates two- dimensional polylines. FILLMODE controls the display of all hatch objects created using Release 14 or later. and choose Hatch Edit. If you enter -hatchedit at the Command prompt. right-click in the drawing area.

Gradient Tab Modifies the gradient fill properties. Inherit Properties Applies the properties of a selected hatch or fill object to the object you are editing. Preview Temporarily dismisses the dialog box and displays the selected object with the specified properties. This option is not available for gradient fills. For information about these options. see “HatchTab (Boundary Hatch and Fill Dialog Box)” on page 110. Composition Controls whether the hatch is associative or nonassociative. see “Gradient Tab (Boundary Hatch and Fill Dialog Box)” on page 115. creating a crosshatch. draws a second set of lines positioned at 90 degrees to the original lines. For information about these options. This option is available only if you set Type to User Defined on the Hatch tab. HATCHEDIT | 409 . Double For user-defined patterns. Advanced Tab Modifies the island detection style. See “Island Detection Style” on page 112. See “Composition” on page 109.Hatch Tab Modifies the hatch pattern properties. The other options on this tab are unavailable. AutoCAD stores this information in the HPDOUBLE system variable.

Select associative hatch object: Enter hatch option [Disassociate/Style/Properties] <Properties>: Enter an option or press ENTER Note You may have difficulty when trying to select a solid-fill hatch pattern because there are no visible grips or lines to click. Because this process starts from both ends of each hatch line.HATCHEDIT Command Line If you enter -hatchedit at the Command prompt. Disassociate Removes the associative quality from an associative hatch. AutoCAD stores the Ignore style code by adding . this style hatches only the outermost area of the structure and leaves the internal structure blank. but it turns off hatching if it encounters an internal boundary and does not turn it back on again. it turns off hatching until it encounters another boundary. AutoCAD stores the Outer style code by adding . Ignore Ignores all internal objects and hatches through them. Normal 410 | HATCHEDIT Hatches inward from the outer boundary. If AutoCAD encounters an internal boundary.O to the pattern name in the HPNAME system variable. either click the outer edges of the hatch pattern or use a crossing window selection. Style Changes the hatch style type. For best results. HATCHEDIT displays prompts on the command line. Thus. and areas .I to the pattern name in the HPNAME system variable. Outer Hatches outermost areas only. areas separated from the outside of the hatched area by an odd number of boundaries are hatched. This style hatches inward from the area boundary. AutoCAD displays the following prompt: Enter hatching style [Ignore/Outer/Normal] <current>: Note Hatching concave curves with the Outer and Ignore styles can cause hatching discrepancies.

EXPLODE breaks a compound object into its component objects. HATCH fills a specified boundary. see BHATCH. For example. System Variables HPANG sets the hatching angle. Commands BHATCH fills an enclosed area or selected objects with a hatch pattern or gradient fill.separated by an even number of boundaries are not.000. HPSPACE sets the spacing of a userdefined hatch pattern. See Also See “Modify Hatches and Solid-Filled Areas” in the User’s Guide. SNAPBASE specifies the starting point for the hatch pattern. The limit is set by the MAXHATCH setting in the registry. The limit can be reset to any value between 100 and 10. AutoCAD won’t create a hatch pattern that consists of over 10. HELP Displays Help Standard toolbar: Help menu: Help Command line: help or ? or press F1 (or 'help for transparent use) To display Help for a menu. Pressing F1 or entering 'help while a command is active displays Help for that command. and then press F1 .000. AutoCAD stores the Normal style code by adding . HPDOUBLE specifies whether a user-defined hatch is double-hatched. Choosing the Help button in a dialog box displays Help for that dialog box. to reset the limit to 8.000 segments.000. CONVERT converts 2D polylines and associative hatches to the optimized Release 14 format. For an explanation of setting pattern properties on the command line. open the menu. HPNAME sets the hatch pattern name. enter (setenv "MaxHatch" "8000") at the Command prompt. Properties Specifies new hatch properties for the selected hatch. HELP | 411 .N to the pattern name in the HPNAME system variable. HPSCALE sets the hatch pattern scale.

traces. In order to hide text created with DTEXT. however. polygon meshes. AutoCAD produces a wireframe display in the current viewport. Render toolbar: View menu: Hide Command line: hide HIDE considers the following to be opaque surfaces that hide objects: circles. If they are extruded. MTEXT. traces. and wide polyline segments as solid objects with top and bottom faces. before HIDE after HIDE 412 | HIDE . solids. regions. text. HIDE Regenerates a three-dimensional model with hidden lines suppressed When you use VPOINT. including those hidden by other objects. and the extruded edges of objects with nonzero thickness. solids. or VIEW to create a 3D view of your drawing. DVIEW. wide polyline segments. face-to-face intersections of 3D surfaces are displayed as polylines. 3D faces. you can use HIDE on objects whose layers have been turned off. HIDE eliminates the hidden lines from the screen.See Also Commands ASSIST opens a window that provides automatic or on- demand context-sensitive Help. When using the HIDE command. AutoCAD treats circles. or TEXT. You cannot use HIDE on objects whose layers have been frozen. the HIDETEXT system variable must be set to 1 or the text must be assigned a thickness value. All lines are present. if the INTERSECTIONDISPLAY system variable is on.

HLSETTINGS Changes the display properties of hidden lines Command line: hlsettings The Hidden Line Settings dialog box is displayed. See Also See “Hide Lines or Shade 3D Objects” in the User’s Guide. and objects obscured by text objects are unaffected. The settings in this dialog box affect the display properties of hidden lines. If the HIDETEXT system variable is off. Text objects are always displayed regardless of whether they are obscured by other objects.INTERSECTIONDISPLAY set to off INTERSECTIONDISPLAY set to on If the DISPSILH system variable is on. HLSETTINGS | 413 . HIDE ignores text objects when producing the hidden view. VIEW saves and restores named views. It won’t show the internal edges produced by objects that have facets. HIDE displays 3D solid objects with silhouette edges only. Commands DVIEW defines parallel projection or perspective views on the screen as you change views. VPOINT sets the viewing direc- tion for a 3D visualization of the current drawing.

The distance is specified as a percentage of one inch and is not affected by zoom level. Obscured Lines Specifies the linetype and color of obscured lines. An obscured line is a hidden line that is made visible by changing its color and linetype.Hidden Line Settings Dialog Box Sets the display properties of hidden lines. 414 | HLSETTINGS . Unlike regular linetypes. You can also change this setting by using the HALOGAP system variable. obscured linetypes are not affected by zoom level. Linetype Lists the available linetypes to apply to obscured lines. These settings are visible only when the HIDE command or the Hidden option of the SHADEMODE command is used. A haloed line is shortened at the point where it will be hidden. Halo Gap Percentage Specifies the distance to shorten a haloed line. Color Lists the available colors to apply to obscured lines. You can also change this setting by using the OBSCUREDCOLOR system variable. You can also set this option by using the OBSCUREDLTYPE system variable.

HLSETTINGS | 415 . Hides can be set to either low (single) precision or high (double) precision.Include Text in HIDE Operations Specifies whether text objects created by the TEXT. You can also set this option by using the INTERSECTIONDISPLAY system variable. You can also set this option by using the HIDETEXT system variable. Low (single) Sets the hide precision to low (single). Face Intersections Specifies the display and color of intersection polylines. or MTEXT commands are included during a HIDE command. which uses less memory. An intersection polyline displays at the face-to-face intersection of 3D surfaces. Hide Precision Controls the accuracy of hides and shades. You can also change this setting by using the INTERSECTIONCOLOR system variable. You can also change this setting by using the HIDEPRECISION system variable. Color Lists the available colors to apply to intersection polylines. INTERSECTIONDISPLAY set to off Display Intersections INTERSECTIONDISPLAY set to on Specifies the display of intersection polylines. DTEXT.

High (double) Sets the hide precision to high (double). This is useful when the file name or URL is not helpful in identifying the contents of the linked file. right-click in the drawing area. Text to Display 416 | HYPERLINK Specifies a description for the hyperlink. and choose Hyperlink ➤ Edit Hyperlink. including an option to define an area to associate with a hyperlink (see page 420). If you enter -hyperlink at the Command prompt. select an object that contains a hyperlink. HYPERLINK Attaches a hyperlink to an object or modifies an existing hyperlink Insert menu: Hyperlink Shortcut menu: To edit a hyperlink. especially when hiding solids. Insert Hyperlink Dialog Box Attaches hyperlinks to graphical objects. To open the hyperlink. HYPERLINK displays options on the command line. The PICKFIRST system variable must be set to 1 to open files associated with hyperlinks. . the hyperlink icon is displayed when you move the cursor over the attached object. which produces more precise hides. right-click the selected object and choose Hyperlink. but also uses more memory and can affect performance. Command line: hyperlink Select objects: Use an object selection method AutoCAD displays one of the following dialog boxes depending on the object you selected: ■ ■ Insert Hyperlink dialog box (for graphical objects that do not already contain hyperlinks) Edit Hyperlink dialog box (see page 419) (for graphical objects that already contain hyperlinks) After you insert a hyperlink.

The file can be stored locally. File Opens the Browse the Web—Select Hyperlink dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box). or on an Internet or intranet location. from which you can select one to link to. from which you can select one to link to. Target Opens the Select Place in Document dialog box (see page 419). Web Page Opens the AutoCAD browser. in which you can navigate to the file that you want to associate with the hyperlink. from which you can select one to link to.Existing File or Web Page Tab (Insert Hyperlink Dialog Box) Creates a hyperlink to an existing file or web page. Type the File or Web Page Name Specifies the file or web page to associate with the hyperlink. in which you can select a named location in a drawing to link to. in which you can navigate to a web page that you want to associate with the hyperlink. Browsed Pages Displays a list of recently browsed web pages. Recent Files Displays a list of recently linked files. Inserted Links Displays a list of recently inserted hyperlinks. on a network drive. HYPERLINK | 417 .

If you select this option. When the hyperlink is executed. Select a View of This Displays an expandable tree view of the named views within the current drawing. AutoCAD sets the relative path to the value specified by the HYPERLINKBASE system variable or. If Use Relative Path for Hyperlink is cleared. the full path and the file name are listed. from which you can select one to link to.Path Displays the path to the file associated with the hyperlink. the full path to the associated file is stored with the hyperlink. Use Relative Path for Hyperlink Sets a relative path for hyperlinks. the full path to the linked file is not stored with the hyperlink. only the file name is listed. If Use Relative Path for Hyperlink is selected. View of This Drawing Tab (Insert Hyperlink Dialog Box) Specifies a named view in the current drawing to link to. If this option is cleared. 418 | HYPERLINK . to the current drawing path. E-mail Address Tab (Insert Hyperlink Dialog Box) Specifies an email address to link to. if no value is specified for HYPERLINKBASE. a new email is created using the default system email program.

HYPERLINK | 419 . Select Place in Document Dialog Box Navigates to a view or layout within a drawing. Subject Specifies a subject for the email. Edit Hyperlink Dialog Box Edits hyperlinks. from which you can select one to use for the hyperlink. Recently Used E-mail Addresses Lists recently used email addresses. The Edit Hyperlink dialog box is a modified version of the Insert Hyperlink dialog box. from which you can select a named location to link to. Remove Link Deletes the hyperlink from the selected objects. The named location that you select is the initial view that is restored when the hyperlink is executed. with one additional option.E-mail Address Specifies an email address. Select an Existing Place in the Document Provides an expandable tree view of the named locations within the linked drawing.

AutoCAD presents a numbered list on the command line of all the hyperlinks that were found. Enter an option [Remove/Insert] <Insert>: Enter an option or press ENTER Remove Removes the hyperlink from the selected objects.HYPERLINK Command Line If you enter -hyperlink at the Command prompt. AutoCAD prompts you to create one. Insert Attaches a hyperlink to an object or an area. hyperlink. Enter hyperlink insert option [Area/Object] <Object>: Select a method for attaching a hyperlink Area Defines a bounding rectangle and places it on a layer called URLLAYER. Enter number. If this layer doesn’t exist in the current drawing. 420 | HYPERLINK . The command line version of HYPERLINK inserts hyperlinks to areas or to selected objects and also removes hyperlinks. AutoCAD creates it. Note To turn off the display of hyperlink bounding rectangles in the drawing area or in your drawing plots. See “Use Layers to Manage Complexity” in the User’s Guide. or * for all: Enter the number or name of the hyperlink. HYPERLINK displays options on the command line. Select objects: Select graphical objects in the drawing If the selection set contains more than one hyperlink. or enter * to remove all hyperlinks in the selection set AutoCAD displays the number of removed hyperlinks on the command line. you must freeze the URLLAYER layer. First corner: Specify the start point of the rectangle Other corner: Specify the end point of the rectangle AutoCAD prompts you to enter the path to the file you want associated with the hyperlink. If a selection set does not exist.

Display hyperlink tooltip? [Yes/No] <Yes>: Enter y to display hyperlink tooltips HYPERLINKOPTIONS | 421 . AutoCAD displays an additional prompt. HYPERLINKOPTIONS Controls the display of the hyperlink cursor and tooltips Command line: hyperlinkoptions Display hyperlink cursor and shortcut menu? [Yes/No] <Yes>: If you enter y to display the hyperlink cursor and shortcut menu. or press ENTER to create a hyperlink to a named view in the current drawing AutoCAD prompts you to enter a named location for the hyperlink. Enter named location <none>: Enter the named location. or press ENTER to create a hyperlink to a named view in the current drawing AutoCAD prompts you to enter a named location for the hyperlink. Select objects: Select graphical objects in the drawing AutoCAD prompts you to enter the path to the file you want associated with the hyperlink. or press ENTER to create the hyperlink without one Object Specifies graphical objects to attach the hyperlink to. or press ENTER to create the hyperlink without one Enter description <none>: Enter a descriptive name for the hyperlink.Enter hyperlink <current drawing>: Enter the full path to a local file or the complete URL to an Internet file. or press ENTER to create the hyperlink without one See Also See “Overview of Using Hyperlinks in a Drawing” in the User’s Guide. Enter hyperlink <current drawing>: Enter the full path to a local file or the complete URL to an Internet file. or press ENTER to create the hyperlink without one Enter named description <none>: Enter a description. such as a view in an AutoCAD drawing or a bookmark in a word processing file. Enter named location <none>: Enter the named location. such as a view in an AutoCAD drawing or a bookmark in a word processing file.

422 .

right-click in the drawing area. 8-bit color. Angles. Reference toolbar: Insert menu: Image Manager Shortcut menu: Select an image. RLE. color depth. and TGA) with AutoCAD drawings. 8-bit gray.ID Displays the coordinate of a location Tools menu: Inquiry ➤ ID Point Command line: id (or 'id for transparent use) Point: Use the pointing device to specify a point The UCS coordinate of the location is displayed on the command line. AutoCAD does not limit the number and size of images. and resolution of the selected image. JPG. You can view image details such as pixel width. and Z values of the specified point and stores the coordinate of the specified point as the last point. You can reload and unload images. System Variables LASTPOINT stores the coordinate information. you can attach or detach a raster or bit-mapped bitonal. If you snap to an object in 3D space. as well as specify a new path for the images. Y. the Z coordinate value is the same as that of the selected feature of the object. PCX. TIFF. You can display more than one image in any viewport. You can reference the last point by entering @ at the next prompt that requests a point. See Also See “Obtain Distances. and choose Image ➤ Image Manager. ID | 423 . IMAGE can combine images in a variety of formats (including BMP. IMAGE Manages images In the Image Manager. or 24-bit color image file to a drawing. and Point Locations” in the User’s Guide. Command line: image The Image Manager is displayed. ID lists the X.

Each image name appears only once regardless of how many times the image is attached (inserted). or the saved path and file name. unloaded. AutoCAD displays the list alphabetically by image name. hold down SHIFT or CTRL while selecting items. ■ ■ 424 | IMAGE To select multiple images. type (TIFF. click that column’s heading. You can use F3 and F4 to toggle between list view and tree view. IMAGE displays prompts on the command line (see page 427). reload. . status (loaded. size. List View Lists the image definitions attached to the drawing. You can attach new image files and detach. for example). You can view the parameters and details for selected images. To sort the list alphabetically or numerically by a specific column. By default.If you enter -image at the Command prompt. locate. and unload attached images. List of Images Displays the names of all image files attached to the drawing. date. or not found). You can sort the list of images by name. Image Manager Lists all the image files attached to the current drawing.

Detach Removes the selected image definitions from the drawing database and erases all the associated image objects from the drawing and from the display. See IMAGEATTACH. When you unload and then reload an image. Tree view lists the image names only (not file names) and lists the image name just once. see SORTENTS and DRAWORDER. or by selecting it and then pressing F2 . Image names can include up to 255 characters and can contain letters. spaces. IMAGE | 425 . and the names of externally referenced drawings containing images. and any special characters not used by Microsoft® Windows® or AutoCAD. The image name can be identical to the file name. you cannot select more than one image at a time. Displays all the image definitions and the levels of nesting of images within xrefs. images nested in block references. The top level of the tree view shows images that you attached directly to the drawing. AutoCAD draws that image on top. However. and then choose Attach. You can edit an image name by selecting it and then clicking it again. AutoCAD saves and restores the settings when you reopen the dialog box. or select it and then press F2 . regardless of how many times the image is attached (insert). Attach Displays the Select Image File dialog box. select it and then click it again.■ ■ Tree View To change the width of the column. digits. To change an image name. For more information about how to control where and how AutoCAD places the image. drag the line between the column headings to the right or left. You cannot edit names of images that reside in external references (xrefs). select it. but changing the image name does not change the file name. The names of the images attached to the externally referenced drawings appear nested within the drawing at the next tree level. To insert a copy of an already attached image. Images remain loaded or unloaded from one drawing session to the next.

which displays the image name. and a preview image. and File Locations” in the User’s Guide. You can selectively load and unload individual images from a working list of images associated with the drawing file.Reload Loads the most recent version of an image or reloads an image that was previously unloaded. active path. file creation date and time.tga become tree. it removes relative or absolute path information from the name (for example. file size and type. resolution. color system. AutoCAD first searches the standard AutoCAD search path for the image’s saved path. saved path. (See “Specify Search Paths. if you have moved the file to a different directory than the one that was saved with the image). An unloaded image cannot be displayed or plotted. this field remains blank. color depth. File Names. If you select multiple images. Unload Unloads image data from working memory without erasing the image objects from the drawing. Details Opens the Image File Details dialog box.) If AutoCAD cannot locate the drawing (for example. Image Found At Shows the path of the selected image. default size in units. width and height in pixels. It is recommended that you unload images no longer needed for editing to improve performance.tga or c:\my project\images\tree.tga) and searches the paths defined in the Project Files Search Path in the Options 426 | IMAGE . If AutoCAD does not find the file at the path in the Saved Path column. but it ensures display of the most current image. Reloading does not control whether the image is displayed. The path shown is the actual path where the image resides. \images\tree.

If you do not choose Save Path after editing the path. or enter an image name Detach Detaches the named image from the drawing. If AutoCAD cannot find the referenced image in the new path. IMAGE Command Line If you enter -image at the Command prompt. Enter list of images to detach: Enter an image name. Browse Opens the Select Image File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box). and the path where the image is stored. See “Project Files Search Path” on page 635. or enter * to detach all images IMAGE | 427 . If the drawing does not reside in the paths specified in the Project Files search paths.dialog box. Save Path Stores the new path information. AutoCAD uses the original image path the next time you load the drawing. The path you select appears under Image Found At. the image’s status changes to Not Found. See IMAGEATTACH. Enter image option [?/Detach/Path/Reload/Unload/Attach/] <Attach>: Enter an option or press ENTER ?—List Images Lists the images by name in alphabetical order. Press ESC while editing the path to restore the old path. AutoCAD attempts the first search path again. IMAGE displays prompts on the command line. marks it for deletion. the number of times each is attached to the drawing. AutoCAD lists images in alphabetical order. Images to list <*>: Enter * to list all images. regardless of the setting of the MAXSORT system variable. and erases all occurrences of the image.

AutoCAD lists the current path name for each image and prompts for the new path. Unload Removes image data from working memory so that the images are not displayed. you can update image01. for instance. This option is useful if you change the location of an image file.. Reload image <image name>: <hard-coded path name> <image name> loaded and relinked. AutoCAD reads image data into memory.. or enter * to unload all images Attach Attaches a new image or a copy of an attached image to the current drawing. making that information available for display and plotting. or replace an old image file with a new file.pcx. Old path: Lists the current path name for each image Enter New path: Enter the new path name for the specified image Reload Reloads the selected images. or enter * to reload all images Reloading. 428 | IMAGE . Enter list of images for path modification: Enter an image name. The image frame of each attached image remains visible.Path Updates the path name (including file name) associated with a particular image. thus improving performance. rename the file. AutoCAD displays the Select Image File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box). Enter list of images to unload: Enter a loaded image name. Enter list of images to reload: Enter an image name. All information associated with the image remains stored with the drawing.pcx and save it as image02. or enter * to list all images If you enter an asterisk (*).

changing the number as necessary to avoid duplicate image names. AutoCAD searches for the file in this order: first. Image file name_1 created from file file name. Use IMAGE Reload to update its definition.bmp" If you enter a valid image name without a file extension. AutoCAD searches for all the image files with the specified name.bmp or imagename="path name\long file name.0>: Specify an insertion point Base image size: Width: current width. If no image name or image file is found. Height: current height.bmp If a definition with the same name and path exists in the drawing. an existing image definition in the drawing. current unit Specify scale factor: Enter a value or press ENTER Specify rotation angle <0>: Enter a value or press ENTER If the FILEDIA system variable is set to 0. and any special characters not used by Microsoft Windows or AutoCAD. and second. spaces. Specify insertion point <0. Image names can include up to 255 characters and contain letters. and uses the first name found. the Substitute Image Name dialog box is displayed. To avoid errors when entering an image name. AutoCAD automatically generates a valid image name from the file name and appends an underscore and number to the name. AutoCAD displays the following prompts and inserts the image as a copy: Image file name has already been loaded. digits. an image file in the folders in order of the search path. IMAGE | 429 .AutoCAD assigns the file name without the extension as the image name. If the file name is not a valid name for a nongraphical object. AutoCAD displays the message “Image Not Found” and repeats the prompt. AutoCAD displays the following prompt instead of the dialog box: Enter image file name to attach <last>: Enter an image name The last image name attached to the drawing during the current session is the default. it is recommended that you specify both the image name and the file name as follows: imagename=path name\long file name. regardless of extension.

IMAGECLIP creates new clipping boundaries for an image object. IMAGEADJUST Controls the image display of the brightness. enter the name as follows: "imagename=filename" You can use a dialog box to search for image files but still enter the imagename=filename convention on the command line. and choose Image ➤ Adjust. and fade values of images Reference toolbar: Modify menu: Object ➤ Image ➤ Adjust Shortcut menu: Select an image to adjust. right-click in the drawing area. Command line: imageadjust Select image(s): Select one or more images AutoCAD displays the Image Adjust dialog box. If you press ESC after the dialog box opens. IMAGEFRAME controls whether AutoCAD displays the image frame or hides it from view. DRAWORDER changes the display order of images and other objects.To specify a long file name that does not conform to AutoCAD naming rules. See Also Commands IMAGEADJUST controls the brightness. 430 | IMAGEADJUST . If you enter -imageadjust at the Command prompt. contrast. IMAGEADJUST displays prompts on the command line (see page 432). contrast. TRANSPARENCY controls whether the background of images is transparent or opaque. and fade values of images. IMAGEATTACH attaches an image object and definition. IMAGEQUALITY controls the display quality of images. AutoCAD redisplays the Enter Image Name prompt. Enter a tilde (~) at the Enter Image File Name to Attach prompt.

moving the slider to the right increases the value. The greater the value. the more each pixel is forced to its primary or secondary color. of the image. The greater the value.Image Adjust Dialog Box Controls how the image is displayed by adjusting the brightness. IMAGEADJUST | 431 . contrast and fade settings of the selected image. Brightness Controls the brightness. the brighter the image and the more pixels that become white when you increase contrast. moving the slider to the right increases the value. and indirectly the fading effect. Moving the slider to the left decreases the value. In plotting. Values range from 0 through 100. the more the image blends with the current background color. and indirectly the contrast. moving the slider to the right increases the value. Adjusting these values changes the display of the image but does not change the image file itself. the background color for fade is white. of the image. A value of 100 blends the image completely into the background. Moving the slider to the left decreases the value. The greater the value. Moving the slider to the left decreases the value. Values range from 0 through 100. Contrast Controls the contrast. Values range from 0 through 100. Fade Controls the fading effect of the image. Changing the screen background color causes the image to fade to the new color.

Select image (s): Select one or more images Enter image option [Contrast/Fade/Brightness] <Brightness>: Enter c or f. Contrast Controls the contrast. 50. or press ENTER to adjust brightness If you selected a single image. Contrast. and 0. Changing the screen background color causes the image to fade to the new color. If you selected multiple images. 50. and 0. Enter contrast value (0-100) <50>: Enter a value Fade Controls the fading effect of the image. Values range from 0 through 100. the more the image blends with the current background color. Contrast. the default values for Brightness. A value of 100 blends the image completely into the background. IMAGEADJUST Command Line If you enter -imageadjust at the Command prompt. the default values for Brightness. The greater the value. and indirectly the fading effect.Image Preview Displays a preview of the selected image. contrast. Reset Resets values for brightness. and Fade are the current property settings of the image selected. and fade settings. and Fade are 50. of the image. the more each pixel is forced to its primary or secondary color. Enter fade value (0-100) <0>: Enter a value 432 | IMAGEADJUST . and fade to default settings (50. In plotting. The preview image updates dynamically to reflect changes to the brightness. you can select more than one image to adjust. With the command line version of IMAGEADJUST. Values range from 0 through 100. respectively. respectively). The greater the value. contrast. the background color for fade is white. IMAGEADJUST displays prompts on the command line.

IMAGEFRAME controls whether AutoCAD displays the image frame or hides it from view. and indirectly the contrast. Enter brightness value (0-100) <50>: Enter a value See Also Commands IMAGE attaches. reloads. Attaching an image creates an image definition. The greater the value. AutoCAD displays the Image dialog box. loads the image into memory. Reference toolbar: Insert menu: Raster Image Command line: imageattach AutoCAD displays the Select Image File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box). and shows details of images. changes the path of. IMAGEATTACH Attaches a new image to the current drawing IMAGEATTACH opens the Select Image File dialog box without displaying the Image Manager first. IMAGEATTACH | 433 . and displays the image. 8-bit gray. of the image. detaches. Once you select an image file.Brightness Controls the brightness. or 24-bit color image files to a drawing. unloads. TRANSPARENCY controls whether the background of images is transparent or opaque. Values range from 0 through 100. You can view and attach raster or bitmapped bitonal. IMAGEATTACH attaches a new image object. 8-bit color. the brighter the image and the more pixels that become white when you increase contrast. IMAGEQUALITY controls the display quality of images. IMAGECLIP creates new clipping boundaries for an image object.

If Retain Path is not selected. inserts. If no paths are set with PROJECTNAME. Name Identifies the image you have selected to attach. either from the Select Image File dialog box (an unattached image) or from the list of previously attached images. 434 | IMAGEATTACH . Browse Opens the Select Image File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box). You can set PROJECTNAME on the command line or on the Files tab in the Options dialog box (see page 633). If Show Preview is selected. AutoCAD displays a preview of the selected file. See PROJECTNAME. AutoCAD searches the Support File Search Path. and defines the parameters and details of attached images. Retain Path Saves the path of the image file with the image definition.Image Dialog Box Locates. names. only the image name is saved and AutoCAD searches the Project Files Search Path stored in the PROJECTNAME system variable. To add another instance of an image file that is already attached. You can set the Support File Search Path on the Files tab in the Options dialog box. select the image name from the list and choose OK.

If INSUNITS has a value such as millimeters. inches. If INSUNITS is set to “unitless” or if the image does not contain resolution information. and the size in units (such as millimeters. enter the insertion point in X. The default insertion point is 0. Rotation Specifies the rotation angle of the selected image. and Z. Y. Image information consists of the following: ■ ■ ■ Image resolution in horizontal and vertical pixels per drawing unit Width and height in pixels Width and height in current drawing units IMAGEATTACH | 435 . or feet. enter the rotation angle value in the dialog box. If Specify On-Screen is cleared. kilometers. miles. centimeters. the resolution. centimeters. inches. Specify On-Screen is the default. unitless. Z Sets the Z coordinate value. Specify On-Screen Directs input to the command line or the pointing device. The default scale factor is 1. and many others). the scale factor is applied after the true width of the image in AutoCAD units is determined. enter a value for the scale factor. Details Displays the Image Information section. and the image has resolution information. If Specify On-Screen is cleared. The default rotation angle is 0.0. feet. You can view width and height in pixels. The image size is automatically converted to AutoCAD units and is displayed at the default width and height. the scale factor becomes the image width in AutoCAD units. Scale Specifies the scale factor of the selected image. meters. If Specify On-Screen is cleared. yards. If Specify On-Screen is selected. X Sets the X coordinate value. Y Sets the Y coordinate value. you may wait until you exit the dialog box to rotate the object with your pointing device or enter a rotation angle value on the command line. The default value for unitless images is unitless. Specify On-Screen directs input to the command line or the pointing device.Insertion Point Specifies the insertion point for the selected image.

DRAWORDER changes the display order of images and other objects. IMAGEFRAME controls the display of the image frame. IMAGECLIP Creates new clipping boundaries for an image object With IMAGECLIP. IMAGE inserts images in many formats into an AutoCAD drawing file.See Also Commands System Variables IMAGEADJUST controls the brightness. On Turns on clipping and displays the image clipped to the previously defined boundary. contrast. TRANSPARENCY controls whether the background of images is transparent or opaque. you can define a subregion of an image for display and plotting. AutoCAD automatically turns clipping back on. 436 | IMAGECLIP . and fade values of images. INSUNITS specifies image units. and choose Image ➤ Clip. AutoCAD prompts you to delete the old boundary even when clipping is turned off and the clipping boundary is not visible. Command line: imageclip Select image to clip: Select an edge of an image Enter image clipping option [ON/OFF/Delete/New boundary] <New>: option or press ENTER Enter an The boundary you specify must be in a plane parallel to the image object. IMAGECLIP creates new clipping boundaries for an image object. If you reclip the image while clipping is turned off. IMAGEQUALITY controls the display quality of images. Off Turns off clipping and displays the entire image and frame. Reference toolbar: Modify menu: Clip ➤ Image Shortcut menu: Select an image to clip. right-click in the drawing area.

the command ends. Enter clipping type [Polygonal/Rectangular] <Rectangular>: Enter p or press ENTER Polygonal Uses specified points to define a polygonal boundary. Self-intersecting vertices are valid. If the image already has a clipping boundary defined. Rectangular is the default option. specify vertices within the image boundary. or enter c or u You must specify at least three points to define a polygon. Rectangular Specifies a rectangular boundary by its opposite corners. When defining a clipping boundary. AutoCAD interprets the point as the first corner of a rectangle. AutoCAD redraws the entire image and the command continues. New Boundary Specifies a new clipping boundary. and consists only of straight line segments. If you use the pointing device to specify a point at the Enter Clipping Type prompt. The boundary can be rectangular or polygonal.Delete Removes a predefined clipping boundary and redisplays the full original image. Specify first point: Specify a point Specify next point or [Undo]: Specify a point or enter u Specify next point or [Undo]: Specify a point or enter u Specify next point or [Close/Undo]: Specify a point. if you choose No. AutoCAD displays the following prompt: Delete old boundary? [No/Yes] <Yes>: Enter n or press ENTER If you choose Yes. Specify first corner point: Specify a point Specify opposite corner point: Specify a point IMAGECLIP | 437 . AutoCAD always draws the rectangle parallel to the edges of the image.

Because you select an image by clicking its frame. IMAGECLIP creates new clipping boundaries for an image object.See Also Commands IMAGE inserts images in many formats into an AutoCAD drawing file. 438 | IMAGEFRAME . and fade values of images. TRANSPARENCY controls whether the background of images is transparent or opaque. TRANSPARENCY controls whether the background of images is transparent or opaque. IMAGEFRAME Controls whether image frames are displayed or hidden from view Reference toolbar: Modify menu: Object ➤ Image ➤ Frame Command line: imageframe Enter image frame setting [ON/OFF] <current>: Enter an option or press ENTER Raster images can be displayed with or without a frame. IMAGEFRAME controls the display of the image frame. IMAGEQUALITY controls the display quality of images. contrast. On Displays image frames so you can select images. IMAGEATTACH attaches a new image object and definition. System Variables IMAGEHLT highlights the selected raster image or the image frame. Off Hides image frames so you cannot select images. IMAGEQUALITY controls the display quality of images. System Variables IMAGEHLT highlights the selected raster image or the image frame. contrast. See Also Commands IMAGE inserts images in many formats into an AutoCAD drawing file. setting IMAGEFRAME to Off prevents you from accidentally selecting an image. IMAGEADJUST controls the brightness. and fade values of images. IMAGEATTACH attaches a new image object and definition. IMAGEADJUST controls the brightness.

IMAGEQUALITY Controls the display quality of images The quality setting affects display performance. AutoCAD displays the image more quickly than a highquality image. AutoCAD always plots images using a high-quality display. contrast. and fade of images. IMAGEATTACH attaches a new image object and definition. IMAGEADJUST controls the brightness. AutoCAD displays the image more slowly than a draft-quality image. Draft Produces a lower-quality display of the image. Changing the setting updates the display immediately without causing a regeneration of the drawing. IMAGEFRAME controls whether AutoCAD displays the image frame or hides it from view. IMAGECLIP creates new clipping boundaries for an image object. Reference toolbar: Modify menu: Object ➤ Image ➤ Quality Command line: imagequality Enter image quality setting [High/Draft] <current>: Enter an option or press ENTER High Produces a high-quality display of the image. TRANSPARENCY con- trols whether the background of images is transparent or opaque. high-quality images take longer to display. See Also Commands IMAGE inserts images in many formats into an AutoCAD drawing file. IMAGEQUALITY | 439 .

The following input types are available: ■ ■ ■ WMF—Windows metafile (see WMFIN) SAT—ACIS solid object file (see ACISIN) 3DS—3D Studio file (see 3DSIN) For the WMF file type. 440 | IMPORT . choosing Options from the Tools menu in this dialog box displays the WMF In Options dialog box (see page 1125). If you enter -insert at the Command prompt. In File Name. select the format type to import. INSERT displays prompts on the command line (see page 442). INSERT Places a drawing or named block into the current drawing Insert toolbar: Insert menu: Block Command line: insert The Insert dialog box is displayed. select the file to import. AutoCAD displays the following prompt on the command line: Enter import file name: Enter path and file name See Also Commands EXPORT saves objects to other file formats.IMPORT Imports files in various formats into AutoCAD Insert toolbar: Command line: import The Import File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box) is displayed. You can display this dialog box directly by using WMFOPTS. In Files of Type. If FILEDIA = 0. AutoCAD imports the file into the AutoCAD drawing.

Scale Specifies the scale for the inserted block. Z Sets the Z coordinate value. Specifying negative values for the X. Path Specifies the path to the block. INSERT | 441 . or the name of a file to insert as a block. Insertion Point Specifies the insertion point for the block. The position of the inserted block depends on the orientation of the UCS. Y Sets the Y coordinate value. X Sets the X coordinate value. Y. and Z scale factors inserts a mirror image of a block. Specify On-Screen Specifies the insertion point of the block using the pointing device. The last block you insert during the current editing session becomes the default block for subsequent uses of INSERT. Name Specifies the name of a block to insert. Browse Opens the Select Drawing File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box) where you can select a block or drawing file to insert.Insert Dialog Box Specifies the name and position of the block or drawing to insert.

or press ENTER Specify insertion point or [Scale/X/Y/Z/Rotate/PScale/PX/PY/PZ/PRotate]: Specify a point or enter an option Block Name If you have inserted a block in the current drawing during the current editing session. Y Sets the Y scale factor. you can specify a uniform scale factor only. Enter block name or [?] <last>: Enter a name. Grouped objects in an inserted drawing are inserted as unnamed groups. X Sets the X scale factor. Explode Explodes the block and inserts the individual parts of the block. Z Sets the Z scale factor. Component objects of a block drawn on layer 0 remain on that layer. INSERT Command Line If you enter -insert at the Command prompt. the name of the last block inserted appears as the current block in the prompt. Objects having color BYBLOCK are white. A value specified for X is also reflected in the Y and Z values. INSERT displays prompts on the command line. Y. Angle Sets a rotation angle for the inserted block. enter ?. enter ~. 442 | INSERT . You can list unnamed groups by selecting Unnamed Groups in the Object Grouping dialog box (see page 395). When Explode is selected. Objects with linetype BYBLOCK have the CONTINUOUS linetype.Specify On-Screen Specifies the scale of the block using the pointing device. Rotation Specifies the rotation angle for the inserted block in the current UCS. and Z coordinates. Specify On-Screen Specifies the rotation of the block using the pointing device. Uniform Scale Specifies a single scale value for X.

enter an option. Enter X scale factor. or [Corner/XYZ] <1>: Enter a value. enter the following at the Specify Insertion Point prompt (following the Enter Block Name prompt): block name= If you enter = after the block name. AutoCAD regenerates the drawing and the new definition is applied to all existing insertions of it. Press ESC when AutoCAD prompts you for the insertion point if you do not want AutoCAD to insert a new block into the drawing. or press ENTER INSERT | 443 . You can replace an existing block definition with an external file by entering the following at the Enter Block Name prompt: block name=file name ■ Updating a Block Definition: If you make changes to a block file that is inserted in your drawing and you want to change the existing block definition without creating a new block insertion. ■ ■ Inserting Exploded Blocks: Preceding the name of the block with an asterisk (*) explodes the block and inserts the individual parts of it. AutoCAD displays the following prompt: Block "current" already exists. AutoCAD searches the library path for a file of the same name. Insertion Point Specifies a location for the block or drawing. specify opposite corner. enter n. You can control block insertion behavior in response to the Enter Block Name prompt by following the listed examples. ?—List Block Names Lists the blocks currently defined in the drawing. AutoCAD first searches the current drawing data for an existing block definition by that name. it uses the file name for the block name upon insertion of the block definition. or press ENTER If you choose to redefine the block. Updating a Block Path: If you enter a block name without a path name.Entering a tilde (~) displays the Select Drawing File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box). Redefine it? [Yes/No] <No>: Enter y. AutoCAD replaces the existing block definition with the new block definition. AutoCAD uses the same block definition for subsequent insertions of that block. If no such block definition exists in the current drawing. The block definition is not added to the drawing. If AutoCAD finds such a file.

enter c. The insertion point is the first corner. and Z scale factors. and then defines the Z scale. using the insertion point and another point as the corners of a box. using the insertion point and another point as the corners of a box.X Scale Factor Sets X and Y scale factors. Specify opposite corner: Specify a point Enter Z scale factor <use X scale factor>: Enter a scale factor or press ENTER Specify rotation angle <0>: Specify an angle or press ENTER 444 | INSERT . and Z scale factors for the block or drawing. Specify X scale factor or [Corner] <1>: Specify a nonzero value. The X and Y dimensions of the box become the X and Y scale factors. Enter Y scale factor <use X scale factor>: press ENTER to use the same scale factor Specify rotation angle <0>: Enter a value or All X and Y dimensions of the block or drawing are multiplied by the X and Y scale factors. The block or drawing is rotated by the specified angle. Y. Specify Y scale factor or <use X scale factor>: Enter a scale factor or press ENTER Enter Z scale factor <use X scale factor>: Enter a scale factor or press ENTER Specify rotation angle <0>: Specify an angle or press ENTER ■ Corner: Defines the X and Y scales at the same time. using the insertion point as the center of rotation. Y. or press ENTER ■ X Scale Factor: Defines X. Specify opposite corner: Specify a point Specify rotation angle <0>: XYZ Sets X. Corner Defines the X and Y scale factors at the same time.

enter an option. or [Corner/XYZ] <1>: Enter a value. or press ENTER The descriptions of the X Scale Factor. Specify scale factor for XYZ axes: Enter a nonzero value Specify insertion point: Specify rotation angle <0>: X Sets the X scale factor. Specify Y scale factor: Enter a nonzero value Specify insertion point: Specify rotation angle <0>: Z Sets the Z scale factor. Specify Z scale factor: Enter a nonzero value Specify insertion point: Specify rotation angle <0>: Rotate Sets the angle of insertion for the block. INSERT | 445 . specify opposite corner. and XYZ options under Rotation match the descriptions of the corresponding options under Insertion Point (see page 443). Specify rotation angle <0>: Specify insertion point: Enter X scale factor. Specify X scale factor: Enter a nonzero value Specify insertion point: Specify rotation angle <0>: Y Sets the Y scale factor.Scale Sets the scale factor for the X. The scale for the Z axis is the absolute value of the specified scale factor. and Z axes. Y. Corner.

PScale Sets the scale factor for the X. or press ENTER The descriptions of the X Scale Factor. Corner. specify opposite corner. Corner. or [Corner/XYZ] <1>: Enter a value. or [Corner/XYZ] <1>: Enter a value. PX Sets the scale factor for the X axis to control the display of the block as it is dragged into position. Corner. Specify preview scale factor for XYZ axes: Enter a nonzero value Specify insertion point: Enter X scale factor. Specify preview Y scale factor: Enter a nonzero value Specify insertion point: Enter X scale factor. Specify preview X scale factor: Enter a nonzero value Specify insertion point: Enter X scale factor. enter an option. enter an option. and Z axes to control the display of the block as it is dragged into position. 446 | INSERT . Y. or [Corner/XYZ] <1>: Enter a value. specify opposite corner. and XYZ options under PScale match the descriptions of the corresponding options under Insertion Point (see page 443). or press ENTER The descriptions of the X Scale Factor. enter an option. or press ENTER The descriptions of the X Scale Factor. PY Sets the scale factor for the Y axis to control the display of the block as it is dragged into position. and XYZ options under PY match the descriptions of the corresponding options under Insertion Point (see page 443). and XYZ options under PX match the descriptions of the corresponding options under Insertion Point (see page 443). specify opposite corner.

Corner. enter an option. INSERT | 447 . Commands BASE specifies a base insertion point in drawings that you intend to insert as blocks into other drawings. System Variables INSNAME stores the current block name used by INSERT. into the current drawing. or press ENTER The descriptions of the X Scale Factor. PRotate Sets the rotation angle of the block as it is dragged into position. Specify preview rotation angle: Specify insertion point: Enter X scale factor. in an array. WBLOCK creates a drawing from a block. BLOCK creates a named set of objects that you can insert into a drawing. specify opposite corner. MINSERT inserts multiple instances of a block. specify opposite corner. or [Corner/XYZ] <1>: Enter a value. Corner. enter an option.PZ Sets the scale factor for the Z axis to control the display of the block as it is dragged into position. or [Corner/XYZ] <1>: Enter a value. See Also See “Insert Blocks” in the User’s Guide. and XYZ options under PZ match the descriptions of the corresponding options under Insertion Point (see page 443). EXPLODE separates the objects in a block. and XYZ options under PRotate match the descriptions of the corresponding options under Insertion Point (see page 443). XREF attaches a drawing to the current drawing and reflects updates made to the attached drawing. or press ENTER The descriptions of the X Scale Factor. Specify preview Z scale factor: Enter a nonzero value Specify insertion point: Enter X scale factor.

Insert Object Dialog Box Inserts a linked or embedded object. You edit the embedded data in the AutoCAD drawing using the source application. See “Link and Embed Data (OLE)” in the User’s Guide. When you return from that application to your AutoCAD drawing. An embedded object is not associated with its source file. the OLE Properties dialog box is displayed. Linked or embedded objects are displayed in AutoCAD and can be printed or plotted using Windows system drivers. the source file changes. A linked object remains associated with its source file. the object can maintain a connection with its source file. depending on whether you select Create New or Create from File. 448 | INSERTOBJ . Options vary. the linked object in AutoCAD changes. When you edit the object in the source file. the source file does not change. When you edit a linked object in AutoCAD.INSERTOBJ Inserts a linked or embedded object When you insert an object into an AutoCAD drawing from an application that supports OLE. Insert toolbar: Insert menu: OLE Object Command line: insertobj The Insert Object dialog box is displayed. Create New Opens the application that's highlighted in the Object Type list so that you can create a new object to insert.

Create from File Specifies a file to link or embed. To create an object to embed. Display as Icon Displays the source application’s icon in the AutoCAD drawing. double-click an application to open it. Choosing Update inserts the object into the drawing or updates it. INSERTOBJ | 449 . On the application’s File menu.Object Type Lists available applications that support linking and embedding. AutoCAD replaces the Save option with a new Update option. Double-clicking the icon displays the embedded information.

Browse Displays the Browse dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box). OLELINKS updates. modifies. Display as Icon Displays the source application’s icon in the AutoCAD drawing. If you include the same 3D solid in both selection sets. If you define a single selection set. INTERFERE Creates a composite 3D solid from the common volume of two or more solids Solids toolbar: Draw menu: Solids ➤ Interference Command line: interfere Select the first set of solids: Use an object selection method first solid selected INTERFERE highlights 3D solids that overlap. PASTECLIP inserts data from the Clipboard into a drawing. AutoCAD checks the solids in the first selection set against those in the second selection set. in which you select a file to link or embed. Select the second set of solids: 450 | INTERFERE Use an object selection method or press ENTER . Link Creates a link to the selected file rather than embedding it. AutoCAD considers the 3D solid part of the first selection set and ignores it in the second selection set. PASTESPEC inserts data from the Clipboard and controls the format of the pasted data. and cancels existing links. OLESCALE scales OLE objects.File Specifies the path and name of the file to be embedded or linked. AutoCAD checks all the solids in the set against one another. Commands COPYLINK copies the current view of the AutoCAD drawing to the Clipboard. If you define two selection sets. See Also See “Overview of Importing OLE Objects into Drawings” in the User’s Guide. Double-clicking the icon displays the linked or embedded information.

or press ENTER Entering y creates and highlights new 3D solids on the current layer that are the intersections of the interfering pairs of 3D solids. AutoCAD displays the following prompt: Enter an option [Next pair/eXit] <Next>: Enter x or n. Commands SUBTRACT creates a composite solid or region by subtracting the area of one set of regions or two-dimensional objects from another set and subtracting the volume of one set of solids from another set. it may not be clear which pairs are interfering if all the interfering 3D solids are highlighted at once. INTERSECT creates composite solids or regions from the intersection of two or more solids or regions and removes the areas outside of the intersection. If there are more than two interfering 3D solids. UNION creates a composite solid or region and combines the total area of two or more existing regions or the total volume of two or more existing solids. or press ENTER Entering n or pressing ENTER cycles through the interfering pairs of 3D solids. Highlight pairs of interfering solids? [Yes/No] <N>: interference solid created Enter y or n. AutoCAD highlights all interfering 3D solids and displays the number of interfering 3D solids and interfering pairs. or press ENTER If there is more than one interfering pair.Pressing ENTER begins the interference testing of pairs of 3D solids. INTERSECT Creates composite solids or regions from the intersection of two or more solids or regions and removes the areas outside of the intersection Solids Editing toolbar: Modify menu: Solids Editing ➤ Intersect Command line: intersect Select objects: Use an object selection method INTERSECT | 451 . Create interference solids? [Yes/No] <N>: second solid selected Enter y or n. Entering x ends the command. See Also See “Create 3D Solids” in the User’s Guide.

INTERSECT calculates the overlapping area of two or more existing regions and the common volume of two or more existing solids. The third subset contains the next region that is not coplanar with the first region and all subsequent coplanar regions. AutoCAD divides the selection set into subsets and tests for intersections within each subset. solids before INTERSECT solid after INTERSECT The selection set can contain regions and solids that lie in any number of arbitrary planes. Commands 452 | INTERSECT SUBTRACT creates a composite solid or region by subtracting the area of one set of regions or two-dimensional objects from another set and subtracting the volume of one set of solids from another set. and so on until all regions belong to a subset.You can select only regions and solids for use with INTERSECT. regions before INTERSECT region after INTERSECT See Also See “Create and Combine Areas (Regions)” in the User’s Guide. UNION creates a composite solid or region and combines the total area of two or more existing regions or the total volume of two or more existing solids. INTERFERE finds the interference (or overlap) of two or more 3D solids and creates a composite 3D solid from their common volume. . The first subset contains all the solids in the selection set. The second subset contains the first selected region and all subsequent coplanar regions.

defined by the 30-degree and 150-degree axis pair. See Also Commands System Variables DSETTINGS sets drawing aids. SNAPISOPAIR stores the current isometric plane setting.ISOPLANE Specifies the current isometric plane Command line: isoplane (or 'isoplane for transparent use) Enter isometric plane setting [Left/Top/Right] <Top>: Enter an option or press ENTER The isometric plane affects the cursor movement keys only when Snap mode is on and the snap style is Isometric. including the current drawing plan. SNAP sets the Isometric snap style. called the top plane. Right Selects the right-hand plane. You can cycle through the isometric planes by pressing CTRL + E or F5 . The current isometric plane also determines the orientation of isometric circles drawn by ELLIPSE. ISOPLANE | 453 . Ortho mode uses the appropriate axis pair even if Snap mode is off. defined by the 90-degree and 30-degree axis pair. defined by the 90-degree and 150-degree axis pair. Left Selects the left-hand plane. Top Selects the top face of the cube. If the snap style is Isometric.

454 .

JUSTIFYTEXT Changes the justification point of selected text objects without changing their locations Text toolbar: Modify menu: Justify Text Modify menu: Object ➤ Text ➤ Justify Command line: justifytext Select objects: Use an object selection method and press ENTER when you finish You can choose single line text objects. Enter a justification option [Existing/Align/Fit/Center/Middle/Right/TL/TC/TR/ ML/MC/MR/BL/BC/BR]<Existing>: Specify a location to serve as the new justification point JPGOUT | 455 .JPGOUT Saves selected objects to a file in JPEG file format Command line: jpgout The Create Raster File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box) is displayed. and attribute objects. prompts are displayed on the command line. multiline text objects. leader text objects. Note When the FILEDIA system variable is set to 0 (Off). Select objects or <all objects and viewports>: Press ENTER to select all objects and viewports or use an object selection method and press ENTER AutoCAD creates a JPEG file that contains the objects you select. Shade Plot options are preserved in the file when you use this command. Enter the file name in the dialog box.

modifies. Commands 456 | JUSTIFYTEXT STYLE creates. and Left text options are equivalent to the bottom left (BL) multiline text attachment point. The justification point options for single line text are similar to those for multiline text except that the Align. See Also See “Change Text Scale and Justification” in the User’s Guide. Fit. or sets named text styles. .The justification point options shown above are described in the TEXT command.

deletes layers. lock and unlock layers. turn layers on and off. Layer Properties Manager Makes a layer current.LAYER Manages layers and layer properties Layers toolbar: Format menu: Layer Command line: layer (or 'layer for transparent use) The Layer Properties Manager is displayed. LAYER displays prompts on the command line (see page 469). and renames layers. set plot styles for layers. You can assign properties to layers. annotations dimensions objects sample layers If you enter -layer at the Command prompt. adds new layers. freeze and thaw layers globally or by viewport. and you can save and restore layer states and properties settings. You can filter the layer names displayed in the Layer Properties Manager. LAYER | 457 . and turn plotting on and off for layers.

You can also filter layers based on name. (To display the layer list tooltip.] Button Displays the Named Layer Filters dialog box (see page 464). whether they are plotted. visibility... The layer list tooltip on the Layers toolbar displays the filter status of layers in the drawing. 458 | [. or whether they contain objects. Invert Filter Displays layers based on the opposites of the criteria in a named layer filter. Layers that fit the inverse criteria are displayed in the layer name list. lineweight.) LAYER .Named Layer Filters Determines which layers to display in the list of layers. color. position the pointing device over the layer list on the Layers toolbar. You can filter layers based on whether they’re xref-dependent. Apply to Layers Toolbar Displays in the Layers toolbar only layers that match the current filter. linetype. plot style name. or whether they are frozen in the current viewport or in new viewports.

in which you save layer state and layer properties settings of all layers in a drawing. layers containing objects (including objects in block definitions).New Creates a new layer. Referenced layers include layers 0 and DEFPOINTS. Any layer states saved in a drawing that is inserted in your current drawing as a block are also added to the current drawing. the Layer Properties Manager does not restore those settings. The CLAYER system variable stores the layer name. Current Sets the selected layer as the current layer. You can edit this layer immediately. are not current. Show/Hide Details Controls whether the Details section (see page 461) is displayed in the Layer Properties Manager. On/Off state. and so on). and are not xref-dependent can be deleted by using the PURGE command. Delete Deletes selected layers from the drawing file definition. You can choose which layer states and properties that you want to preserve. You save a layer state by assigning it a name. If you create a new layer. To create layers with default settings. make sure that there are no selected layers in the list or that you select a layer with default settings before beginning layer creation. The saved layer states of referenced drawings (xrefs) are not accessible from the current drawing. You can delete only unreferenced layers. you can select a layer name for editing and enter multiple layer names separated by commas. Layers that don’t contain objects (including objects in block definitions). and xref-dependent layers. If one or more of these settings are cleared. the list displays a layer named LAYER1. the new layer inherits the properties of the currently selected layer in the layer list (Color. After you choose New. Warning! Be careful about deleting layers if you are working on a drawing in a shared project or one based on a set of layering standards. the current layer. Save State Displays the Save Layer States dialog box (see page 466). To create multiple layers more quickly. LAYER | 459 .

You can select a name. right-click and use the shortcut menu. saved layer states are preserved only if you specify Entire Drawing as the source in the Write Block dialog box (equivalent to -wblock /* on the command line). To quickly select all layers. and reduce regeneration time for complex drawings. On/Off Turns layers on and off. hide. 460 | Lock/Unlock Locks and unlocks the layers. Freeze the layers you want to be invisible for long periods. To modify a property. in the current layout viewport. Clicking the color name displays the Select Color dialog box (see page 169). You cannot edit objects on a locked layer. use the On/Off setting. or regenerate objects on frozen layers. AutoCAD does not display. List of Layers Displays layers and their properties. You can freeze layers in all viewports. even if Plot is on. in which you can manage named layer states. LAYER . render. When a layer is off. and many other operations. it is visible and available for plotting. AutoCAD regenerates and displays the objects on that layer. or in new layout viewports as they are created. Locking a layer is useful if you want to view information on a layer for reference but do not want to edit objects on that layer.If you use WBLOCK to create a new drawing from the current drawing. improve object selection performance. Freeze/Thaw in All Viewports Freezes selected layers in all viewports. click its icon. Names Displays the names of the layers. and then click and enter a new name. If you plan to switch between visible and invisible states frequently. Clicking any linetype name displays the Select Linetype dialog box (see page 468). it is invisible and not plotted. plot. You can freeze layers to speed up ZOOM. When you thaw a frozen layer. When a layer is on. These saved layer states will refer only to layers that contain objects. PAN. Linetype Changes the linetype associated with the selected layers. State Manager Displays the Layer States Manager (see page 467). Color Changes the color associated with the selected layers.

they are not regenerated or plotted. freezing the DIMENSIONS layer in all new viewports restricts the display of dimensions on that layer in any newly created layout viewports but does not affect the DIMENSIONS layer in already existing viewports. If you turn off plotting for a layer. you cannot change the plot style associated with a layer. Turning off plotting for layers containing reference information such as construction lines can be useful. Turning off plotting for a layer affects only visible layers in the drawing (layers that are on and thawed). Plot/Don’t Plot Controls whether the selected layers are plotted. Clicking any lineweight name displays the Lineweight dialog box (see page 468). Frozen layers are invisible. AutoCAD does not plot the layer. LAYER | 461 . If you are working with color-dependent plot styles (the PSTYLEPOLICY system variable is set to 1). Details Displays an extension of the Layer Properties Manager with alternative access to properties and additional options. If you then create a viewport that requires dimensions. Plot Style Changes the plot style associated with the selected layers. You can freeze or thaw layers in the current viewport without affecting layer visibility in other viewports. For example.Lineweight Changes the lineweight associated with the selected layers. If a layer is set to plot but is currently frozen or off in the drawing. the objects on that layer are still displayed. Thawing restores the layer's visibility. Current VP Freeze (available only from a layout tab) Freezes selected layers in the current layout viewport. you can override the default setting by changing the current viewport setting. New VP Freeze (available only from a layout tab) Freezes selected layers in new layout viewports. Clicking any plot style displays the Select Plot Style dialog box (see page 746).

462 | Name Displays the selected layer name. To define the color of layers. You can also customize lineweights to plot at whatever width you want by using the Plot Style Table Editor. which can be edited. The name can include letters. LAYER . choose a linetype in the list of layers to display the Select Linetype dialog box (see page 468). numbers. and then choose Load. Color Displays a list of colors available to apply to the selected layers. Linetype Displays linetypes available to apply to the selected layers. and color book colors. To assign a color other than those displayed in the list. true colors. blank spaces. Lineweight Displays a list of fixed lineweights available to apply to the selected layers including DEFAULT. you can select from the 255 AutoCAD Color Index (ACI) colors. To load additional linetypes. and any special character not used by Microsoft® Windows® or AutoCAD for other purposes. choose Select Color.

but you can turn off plotting for that layer to ensure that the reference information does not appear in the plotted drawing. you cannot change the plot style associated with a layer. This option affects only visible layers in the drawing (layers that are on or thawed). You can view the reference information while you work. or regenerate objects on frozen layers. PAN. It can be useful to turn off plotting for a layer that contains reference information. Locking layers is useful when you want to edit objects that are associated with particular layers but also want to view objects on other layers. When you turn a layer on that has been turned off. you avoid regenerating the drawing every time you restore visibility. AutoCAD does not display. the objects are only redrawn on that layer. render. You can freeze layers to speed up ZOOM. The default plot style is Normal. and reduce regeneration time for complex drawings. but is currently frozen or off in the drawing. Lock for Editing Prevents objects on selected layers from being edited. You can turn layers off rather than freeze layers if you frequently change layers from visible to invisible. If a layer is set to plot. Turned-off layers regenerate with the drawing but are not displayed or plotted. You can make a locked layer current. plot. and many other operations.Plot Style Displays a list of plot styles available to apply to the selected layers. LAYER | 463 . Do Not Plot Prevents the selected layers from being plotted. hide. and you can add objects to it. Freeze in All Viewports Freezes selected layers in all viewports. Although you cannot edit objects on a locked layer. they are still visible if the layer is on and thawed. If you are working with colordependent plot styles (the PSTYLEPOLICY system variable is set to 1). By turning layers off to make their objects invisible. improve object selection performance. Off for Display Turns selected layers on or off. the layer is not plotted.

If you plan to switch between visible and invisible states frequently. in the current layout viewport. This option is available only when you are working on a layout. AutoCAD regenerates and displays the objects on that layer. This option is available only when you are working on a layout. use the On/Off setting. You can freeze layers in all viewports. they are not regenerated or plotted. Thawing restores the layer’s visibility. Freeze in New Viewports Freezes selected layers in new layout viewports. You can freeze or thaw layers in the current layout viewport without affecting layer visibility in other viewports. If you then create a viewport that requires dimensions. Layers that match the filter criteria are displayed in the Layer Properties Manager. 464 | LAYER . you can override the default setting by thawing the layer in that viewport. freezing the DIMENSIONS layer in all new viewports restricts the display of dimensions on that layer in any newly created layout viewports but does not affect the DIMENSIONS layer in viewports that already exist.Freeze the layers you want to be invisible for long periods. if you want to create an annotation layer that is visible only in a particular viewport. This feature is useful. For example. or in new layout viewports as they are created. Freeze in Current Viewport Freezes selected layers in the current layout viewport. for example. Frozen layers are invisible. Named Layer Filters Dialog Box Filters layers based on criteria you select. When you thaw a frozen layer.

or both. unlocked. thawed. thawed. On/Off Specifies whether filtered layers are on. or both. New Viewport Specifies whether filtered layers in new viewports are frozen. or both. thawed. Layer Name Specifies which layers to filter. not plot. or both. or both. Current Viewport Specifies whether filtered layers in the current viewport are frozen. Lock/Unlock Specifies whether filtered layers are locked. Plot Specifies whether filtered layers are set to plot. off. Freeze/Thaw Specifies whether filtered layers are frozen. LAYER | 465 .Filter Name Specifies a name for the saved filter. or both.

Plot Style Specifies the layer plot styles to filter. Save Layer States Dialog Box Saves state and properties settings of the layers in a drawing under a specified layer state name. Delete Deletes a saved filter from the Filter Name list.Color Specifies the layer colors to filter. When saving a layer state. Locked/ Unlocked. Add Saves a filter and adds it to the Filter Name list. Layer Properties Specifies the layer properties settings that are to be saved in the layer state: Color. New VP Frozen/Thawed. Linetype Specifies the layer linetypes to filter. you specify which layer settings are affected when the layer state is later restored. Lineweight Specifies the layer lineweights to filter. LAYER . Reset Resets all filters to their default values. and Plot Style. Linetype. Layer States Specifies the layer states settings that are to be saved in the layer state: On/Off. Lineweight. 466 | New Layer State Name Specifies a name for the new layer state to be saved. Frozen/Thawed. Plot/No Plot.

Edit Changes the saved layer settings for a specified layer state. Restore Restores state and properties settings of all layers in a drawing to previously saved settings. When the layer state is restored. Delete Removes a saved layer state. Import Displays a standard file selection dialog box where you can load a previously exported layer state (LAS) file into the current drawing. LAYER | 467 . the specified settings are used.Layer States Manager Manages saved layer states. Additional layers may be created as a result of importing a layer state file. Restores only those layer state and properties settings that were selected when the layer state was saved. Rename Changes the name of a saved layer state. Export Displays a standard file selection dialog box where you can save a selected named layer state to a layer state (LAS) file.

in which you can load selected linetypes into the drawing and add them to the list of linetypes. Loaded Linetypes Displays the list of linetypes loaded in the current drawing. See “Control Plotted Lineweight and Linetype. You can customize your lineweights to plot at other values by using the Plot Style Table Editor. 468 | LAYER . Load Displays the Load or Reload Linetypes dialog box (see page 509).Select Linetype Dialog Box Displays linetypes available in the current drawing.” in the User’s Guide. Lineweight Dialog Box Displays fixed lineweight values available in AutoCAD.

sets the color. and whether they are externally dependent layers. Current layer: <"current"> Enter an option [?/Make/Set/New/ON/OFF/Color/Ltype/LWeight/Plot/PStyle/ Freeze/Thaw/LOck/Unlock/stAte]: Note The Pstyle option is available only when you are using named plot styles. and plot style for designated layers. or press ENTER to list all layers Make Creates a layer and makes it current. New Displays the new lineweight assigned to the layer. freezes and thaws layers. New objects are drawn on the current layer.01 inches or 0.Lineweights Displays the available lineweights that can be applied to a layer. turns layers on and off. lineweights. states. LAYER displays prompts on the command line. ?—List Layers Displays a list of the currently defined layers. linetypes. turns plotting on and off for visible layers. and lists defined layers. linetype. lineweight. LAYER Command Line If you enter -layer at the Command prompt. Enter layer name(s) to list <*>: Enter a name list. Original Displays the previous lineweight assigned to the layer. locks and unlocks layers. color numbers. Select a lineweight to apply it. Enter name for new layer (becomes the current layer) <current>: Enter a name or press ENTER LAYER | 469 . The value of DEFAULT is controlled by the LWDEFAULT system variable.25 mm). The command line version of LAYER creates new layers. showing their names. The default lineweight assigned when a layer is created is DEFAULT (which plots to a default value of 0. sets the current layer. Available lineweights consist of fixed values that are most commonly used in drawings.

Enter name list of layer(s) to turn Off or <select objects>: Enter a name list or press ENTER and select objects Color Changes the color associated with a layer. enter t. AutoCAD creates a new layer with that name. Red. You can create two or more layers by entering names separated by commas. Enter color name or number (1-255)[Truecolor/Colorbook]: or a number from 1 through 255. Enter a layer name to make current or <select object>: Enter a name or press ENTER and select an object New Creates layers. the CONTINUOUS linetype. AutoCAD turns it on and makes it current. If the layer exists but is turned off. AutoCAD turns it on. and a lineweight of DEFAULT. Green.If no layer exists for the name you enter. Enter name list of layer(s) to turn On: Off Makes selected layers invisible and excludes them from plotting. If the layer exists but is turned off. or enter c True Color Enter a color name Specifies a true color to be used for the selected object. Blue: Enter three integer values from 0 to 255 separated by commas to specify a true color 470 | LAYER . Enter name list for new layer(s): On Makes selected layers visible and available for plotting. The new layer is on and assumes the following properties by default: color number 7. A frozen layer cannot be made current. Set Specifies a new current layer but does not create the layer if it does not already exist.

Enter color name: Enter the name of a color included in the selected color book such as PANTONE®573 AutoCAD prompts for a list of layer names to which the color should be applied. Enter name list of layer(s) for color current <current>: Enter a name or a list of names separated by commas.11mm): LAYER | 471 . precede the color with a minus sign (–). AutoCAD prompts you to enter the color name in the color book. Enter linetype name(s) to list <*>: Enter a wild-card pattern. or press ENTER The layers are turned on. or press ENTER If you enter ? at the Enter a Loaded Linetype Name prompt. or a list of names separated by commas. or press ENTER If you enter a linetype or press ENTER . enter ?. or press ENTER to list all names in the drawing Lweight Changes the lineweight associated with a layer. AutoCAD prompts for a list of layer names to which the linetype should be applied. AutoCAD prompts for the linetypes to list. a name. Ltype Changes the linetype associated with a layer. To assign a color but turn off the layer. Enter a loaded linetype name or [?] <CONTINUOUS>: Enter a currently loaded linetype name. Enter Color Book name: Enter the name of a color book that has been installed such as PANTONE® If you enter a color book name.2. Enter lineweight (0.0mm . Enter name list of layer(s) for linetype "current" <current>: Enter a wild-card pattern.Color Book Specifies a color from a loaded color book to used for the selected object.

making them invisible and excluding them from regeneration and plotting. Enter plot style or [?] <Normal>: Enter a name. AutoCAD sets the current lineweight to the new value. Enter a plotting preference [Plot/No plot] <Plot>: Enter an option or press ENTER AutoCAD prompts you for a list of layer names to which the plotting preference should be applied. This option is not available if you are using color-dependent plot styles in the current drawing (the PSTYLEPOLICY system variable is set to 1). enter ? to list existing plot styles. AutoCAD prompts you for a list of layer names to which the lineweight should be applied. If you would like to plot an object with a custom width not found in the list of fixed lineweight values.If you enter a valid lineweight. Enter name list of layer(s) to freeze or <select objects>: Enter a name list or press ENTER and select objects 472 | LAYER . Enter name list of layers(s) for lineweight current <current>: Enter a name list or press ENTER Plot Controls whether visible layers are plotted. or press ENTER If you select a plot style other than NORMAL. or press ENTER to apply the style to the current layer only Freeze Freezes layers. you can use the Plot Style Table Editor to customize plotted lineweights. If you enter a lineweight that is not valid. If a layer is set to plot but is currently frozen or turned off. See “Use Plot Styles to Control Plotted Objects” in the User’s Guide. the layer is not plotted. AutoCAD displays the following prompt: Enter name list of layer(s) for plot style current <current>: Enter the names of the layers to use this plot style. Enter layer name(s) for this plot preference <current>: Enter a name list or press ENTER Pstyle Sets the plot style assigned to a layer. AutoCAD sets the current lineweight to the nearest fixed lineweight value.

Enter a name list of layer(s) to unlock or <select objects>: press ENTER and select objects Enter a name list or State Saves and restores the state and properties settings of the layers in a drawing. preventing editing of objects on those layers. Enter an option [?/Save/Restore/Edit/Name/Delete/Import/EXport]: Save Saves the state and properties settings of the layers in a drawing under a specified layer state name. When saving a layer state. Enter a name list of layer(s) to lock or <select objects>: Enter a name list or press ENTER and select objects Unlock Unlocks selected locked layers. Enter new layer state name: Enter a name and press ENTER Enter states to change [On/Frozen/Lock/Plot/Newvpfreeze/Color/lineType/ lineWeight/plotStyle]: Enter the settings that you want to save and then press ENTER Restore Restores the state and properties settings of all layers to previously saved settings. Enter name of layer state to restore or [?]: Enter the layer state name or enter ? to see a list of saved layer state names LAYER | 473 . permitting editing of objects on those layers. you specify which layer settings are affected when the layer state is later restored. Restores only those layer state and properties settings that were selected when the layer state was saved. Enter a name list of layer(s) to thaw: Lock Locks layers. making them visible and available for regeneration and plotting.Thaw Thaws frozen layers.

Edit Changes the saved layer settings for a specified layer state. Commands COLOR sets the color for new objects. the specified settings are used. Enter name of layer state to export or [?]: Enter the layer state name or enter ? to see a list of saved layer state names Export state to file name: See Also See “Work with Layers” in the User’s Guide. LWEIGHT sets the lineweight for new objects. LINETYPE creates. loads. Additional layers may be created as a result of importing a layer state file. Enter file name to import <current>: Export Saves a selected named layer state to a layer state (LAS) file. VISRETAIN controls the layer properties and states of xref-dependent layers in the host drawing. Enter name of layer state to delete or [?]: Enter the layer state name or enter ? to see a list of saved layer state names Import Loads a previously exported layer state (LAS) file into the current drawing. . VPLAYER sets visibility in viewports for new and existing layers. When the layer state is restored. Enter name of layer state to edit or [?]: Enter the layer state name or enter ? to see a list of saved layer state names Enter states to change [On/Frozen/Lock/Plot/Newvpfreeze/Color/lineType/ lineWeight/plotStyle]: Enter the settings that you want to change and then press ENTER Name Changes the name of a saved layer state. and sets linetypes. System Variables 474 | LAYER CLAYER stores the name of the current layer. Enter name of layer state to rename or [?]: Enter the layer state name or enter ? to see a list of saved layer state names Enter new layer state name: Delete Removes a saved layer state.

Added layers: If you add a new layer to a drawing. or press ENTER When Layer Previous mode is on. LAYOUT Creates and modifies drawing layout tabs A layout is used to compose or lay out your drawing for plotting. If settings are restored. A layout may consist of a title block. one or more viewports. LAYERPMODE Turns the tracking of changes made to layer settings on and off Command line: layerpmode Enter LAYERP mode <ON>: Enter on or off. changes made to layers are no longer tracked. Note Many of these options are available by right-clicking a layout tab name. Layouts toolbar: Insert Menu: Layout LAYERP | 475 .” LAYERP (Layer Previous) does not undo the following changes: ■ ■ ■ Renamed layers: If you rename a layer and change its properties. using Layer Previous does not restore it.LAYERP Undoes the last change or set of changes made to layer settings Layers toolbar: Command line: layerp Undoes changes you have made to layer settings such as color or linetype. When Layer Previous mode is off. using Layer Previous does not remove it. Deleted layers: If you delete or purge a layer. AutoCAD displays the message “Restored previous layer states. Layer Previous restores the original properties but not the original name. changes made to layers are tracked. and annotations.

the new layout assumes the name of the copied layout with an incremental number in parentheses. AutoCAD displays the Insert Layouts dialog box. If the FILEDIA system variable is set to 1. the layout and all objects from the specified template or drawing file are inserted into the current drawing. DWG. Template 476 | LAYOUT Creates a new layout tab based on an existing layout in a template (DWT). or DXF file. drawing (DWG). The new tab is inserted before the copied layout tab. After you select a layout. Enter name of new layout <Layout#>: Layout names must be unique. The most current layout is the default. or drawing interchange (DXF) file. Up to 255 layouts can be created in a single drawing. If you do not provide a name. Enter name of layout to delete <current>: The Model tab cannot be deleted. Layout names can be up to 255 characters long and are not case sensitive. which displays the layouts saved in the selected file. . To remove all the geometry from the Model tab.Command line: layout Enter layout option [Copy/Delete/New/Template/Rename/SAveas/Set/?] <set>: Copy Copies a layout. After you select a file. New Creates a new layout tab. Enter name of layout to copy <current>: Enter layout name for copy <default>: Delete Deletes a layout. you must select all geometry and use the ERASE command. Only the first 31 characters are displayed on the tab. a standard file selection dialog box is displayed for selecting a DWT.

a standard file selection dialog box is displayed in which you can specify the template file in which to save the layout. Enter layout to rename <current>: Enter new layout name <current>: Layout names must be unique. Enter layout to save to template <current>: The last current layout is used as the default for the layout to save as a template. The last current layout is used as the default for the layout to rename. LAYOUTWIZARD Creates a new layout tab and specifies page and plot settings Insert menu: Layout ➤ Layout Wizard Tools menu: Wizards ➤ Create Layout Command line: layoutwizard The Layout wizard is displayed. Saveas Saves a layout as a drawing template (DWT) file without saving any unreferenced symbol table and block definition information. If the FILEDIA system variable is set to 1. LAYOUTWIZARD | 477 . Set Makes a layout current. Layout names can be up to 255 characters long and are not case sensitive. See “Create a Layout Using a Template” in the User’s Guide. The default layout template directory is specified in the Options dialog box (see page 633).Rename Renames a layout. Only the first 31 characters are displayed on the tab. Enter layout to make current <last>: ?—List Layouts Lists all the layouts defined in the drawing. You can then use the template to create new layouts in your drawings without having to eliminate unnecessary information.

LAYTRANS Changes a drawing's layers to layer standards you specify CAD Standards toolbar: Tools menu: CAD Standards ➤ Layer Translator Command line: laytrans The Layer Translator is displayed. Layer Translator In the Layer Translator. and the layers to translate them to. you specify the layers in the current drawing that you want to translate. Depending on which plotting device is currently configured. The Preview area displays a preview image of the title block you select. you can modify any of the settings using the PAGESETUP command from within the new layout. Translate From Specifies the layers to be translated in the current drawing. You can select a predefined title block to apply to your new layout. You can specify layers by selecting layers in the Translate From list or by supplying a selection filter. When you’ve finished using the wizard to specify your layout settings. you can select a paper size from those available. See Also See “Use the Layout Wizard to Specify Layout Settings” in the User’s Guide. 478 | LAYTRANS .Layout Wizard The Layout wizard contains a series of pages that step you through the process of creating a new layout. You can choose to create a new layout from scratch or use an existing layout template on which to base your new layout.

those mappings are applied to the layers in the Translate From list and are displayed in Layer Translation Mappings. drawing template. For a list of valid wild-cards. You can load layers from more than one file. If you load a file that contains layers of the same name as layers already loaded. or standards file that you specify. using a naming pattern that can include wild-cards. Map Same Maps all layers that have the same name in both lists. Selection Filter Specifies layers to be selected in the Translate From list. The layers identified by the selection filter are selected in addition to any layers previously selected. You cannot create a new layer with the same name as an existing layer. a white icon indicates the layer is unreferenced. the original layers are retained and the duplicate layers are ignored. if you load a file containing mappings that duplicate mappings already loaded. If the specified file contains saved layer mappings. see the table in “Filter and Sort the List of Layers” in the User’s Guide. Translate To Lists the layers you can translate the current drawing’s layers to. Unreferenced layers can be deleted from the drawing by right-clicking in the Translate From list and choosing Purge Layers. Select Selects the layers specified in Selection Filter. Similarly. the original mappings are retained and the duplicates are ignored. If you select a Translate To layer before choosing New. Map Maps the layers selected in Translate From to the layer selected in Translate To. the selected layer’s properties are used as defaults for the new layer.The color of the icon preceding the layer name indicates whether or not the layer is referenced in the drawing. New Defines a new layer to be shown in the Translate To list for translation. LAYTRANS | 479 . Load Loads layers in the Translate To list using a drawing. A dark icon indicates that the layer is referenced.

every object retains its original color. Save Saves the current layer translation mappings to a file for later use. If this option is cleared. You can change the layer’s linetype. Remove Removes the selected translation mapping from the Layer Translation Mappings list. Layer mappings are saved in the DWG or DWS file format.Layer Translation Mappings Lists each layer to be translated and the properties to which the layer will be converted. you can also change the plot style for the mapping. Edit Opens the Edit Layer dialog box. every object takes on the color of its layer. Translate Starts layer translation of the layers you have mapped. where you can edit the selected translation mapping. where you can customize the process of layer translation. All linetypes used by those layers are also copied into the file. If all drawings involved in translation use plot styles. and lineweight. . Settings Opens the Settings dialog box. You can replace an existing file or create a new file. Force Object Color to BYLAYER 480 | LAYTRANS Specifies whether or not every object translated takes on the color assigned to its layer. If this option is selected. You can select layers in this list and edit their properties using Edit. color. The Layer Translator creates the referenced layers in the file and stores the layer mappings in each layer. Settings Dialog Box Controls the process of layer translation. you are prompted to save the mappings before translation begins. If you have not saved the current layer translation mappings.

nested objects in blocks are translated. If this option is selected. The log file is assigned the same name as the translated drawing. all layers in the drawing are displayed. every object retains its original linetype. Lineweight Specifies the layer lineweight. Show Layer Contents When Selected Specifies which layers to display in the drawing area. If this option is selected. If the Write Transaction Log option is cleared. LAYTRANS | 481 . with a . Translate Objects in Blocks Specifies whether or not objects nested within blocks are translated. Edit/New Layer Dialog Box Sets or modifies layer properties. no log file is created.Force Object Linetype to BYLAYER Specifies whether or not every object translated takes on the linetype assigned to its layer. If this option is cleared. Write Transaction Log Specifies whether or not a log file detailing the results of translation is created. If this option is selected. Name Specifies the layer name. Linetype Specifies the layer linetype. Color Specifies the layer color. nested objects in blocks are not translated. If this option is selected.log file name extension. If this option is cleared. You can only modify the plot style if all drawings referenced by the Layer Translator use named plot styles. Plot Style Specifies the layer plot style. a log file is created in the same folder as the translated drawing. every object takes on the linetype of its layer. only the layers selected in the Layer Translator dialog box are displayed in the drawing area. If this option is cleared.

the arrowhead remains attached to the object and the leader line stretches. LEADER creates complex leader lines that can be made up of more than two line segments. If the object is relocated. called a hook line. but the text or feature control frame remains in place. If associative dimensioning is turned on with DIMASSOC. enter an option. a short horizontal line. enter an option. the leader start point can be associated with a location on an object. Command line: leader Specify leader start point: Specify next point: AutoCAD draws a leader line segment to the point specified and continues to prompt for points and options. In some cases. or press ENTER 482 | LEADER . connects text and feature control frames to the leader line. Specify next point or [Annotation/Format/Undo] <Annotation>: Specify a point. You can use various dimensioning system variables to format the leader line. dogleg. such as placing the text above the hook line with DIMTAD.LEADER Creates a line that connects annotation to a feature A leader line is an object that can be composed of an arrowhead attached to splines or straight line segments. or landing. or press ENTER Point Specification Draws a leader line segment to the point specified and continues to prompt you for points and options. Specify next point or [Annotation/Format/Undo] <Annotation>: Specify a point. DIMDIAMETER and DIMRADIUS create simple automatic leader lines with two line segments for circles and arcs.

meaning that if the end of the leader line moves. The value of the current text gap (see DIMSTYLE or the DIMGAP system variable) determines where AutoCAD inserts the text and multiline text objects. a feature control frame with geometric tolerances. LEADER ends.Annotation Inserts an annotation at the end of the leader line. AutoCAD prompts you for additional lines of text until you end the command by pressing ENTER twice. If you press ENTER at the Annotation prompt without entering text first. AutoCAD displays the following prompt: Enter an annotation option [Tolerance/Copy/Block/None/Mtext] <Mtext>: Enter an option or press ENTER Tolerance Creates a feature control frame containing geometric tolerances using the Geometric Tolerance dialog boxes (see TOLERANCE). a multiline text object. You can create datum indicators and basic dimension notation in these dialog boxes. Select an object to copy: AutoCAD places the object and ends LEADER. or a block and connects the copy to the end of the leader line. Enter first line of annotation text or <options>: Enter text or press ENTER If you enter text at the Annotation prompt. AutoCAD attaches any blocks or feature control frames with geometric tolerances to the end of the leader line. The display of the hook line depends on the object copied. a feature control frame containing geometric tolerances. Copy Copies text. LEADER | 483 . The copy is associated with the leader line. AutoCAD places the text at the end of the leader line. or a block. the copied object moves with it. After you specify the geometric tolerance. The annotation can be single or multiple lines of text.

The block reference is inserted at an offset from the end of the leader line and is associated to the leader line. If the offset specified is negative. meaning that if the end of the leader line moves. AutoCAD offsets the multiline text from the hook line by the distance specified under Offset from Dim Line on the Text tab of the New. Modify. LEADER ends. or Override Dimension Style dialog box (see page 288). AutoCAD uses the same prompts as the INSERT command. No hook line is displayed. AutoCAD returns you to the Specify Next Point prompt. see “Control the Display of Dimension Units” in the User’s Guide. Format Controls the way AutoCAD draws the leader and whether it has an arrowhead. Mtext Creates text using the Multiline Text Editor (see page 577) when you specify an insertion point and a second point for the text boundary. AutoCAD vertically centers the multiline text and horizontally aligns it according to the X axis direction of the last two vertices of the leader line. the block moves with it.Block Inserts a block at the end of the leader line. Enclose format strings for alternate units in square brackets ([ ]). Enter block name or [?]: Enter a block name or enter ? to list all blocks in the drawing None Ends the command without adding any annotation to the leader line. For more information about adding a prefix or suffix. After you specify the text. 484 | LEADER . Enter the characters for the text. AutoCAD encloses the multiline text in a box as a basic dimension. Enter leader format option [Spline/STraight/Arrow/None] <Exit>: Enter an option or press ENTER to return to the previous prompt After each option. Enclose format strings for prefixes and suffixes in angle brackets (< >). The units settings and the current text style determine how AutoCAD displays the text.

See Also See “Create Text with Leaders” in the User’s Guide. Commands DIMSTYLE creates and modifies dimension styles.spline leader line straight leader line sample arrowheads no arrowhead Spline Draws the leader line as a spline. System Variables DIMASZ controls the size of arrowheads. DIMGAP controls the text gap. DIMBLK1 defines the block for the first arrowhead. Undo Undoes the last vertex point on the leader line. Arrow Draws an arrowhead at the start point of the leader line. DIMBLK defines the block for arrowheads. each of equal unit weight. Exit Exits the Format options. AutoCAD then redisplays the previous prompt. DIMASSOC controls the associativity property of dimensions and leaders. LEADER | 485 . DIMCLRD controls the color of the dimension line. DIMTAD controls the vertical position of text in relation to the dimension line. The vertices of the leader line are the control points. Straight Draws the leader line as a set of straight line segments. DIMSCALE controls the overall scale of dimension objects. None Draws a leader line with no arrowhead at the start point.

where applicable. Modify menu: Lengthen Command line: lengthen Select an object or [DElta/Percent/Total/DYnamic]: option Select one object or enter an Object Selection Displays the length and. or press ENTER Delta Length Changes the length of the object by the specified increment. measured from the endpoint that is closest to the selection point. A positive value extends the object. Select an object to change or [Undo]: Select one object or enter u The prompt repeats until you press ENTER to end the command. or press ENTER to end the command Delta Changes the length of an object by a specified increment. the included angle of the object. enter an option. Current length: <current>. measured from the endpoint that is closest to the selection point. The extrusion direction of the selected object need not be parallel to the Z axis of the current user coordinate system (UCS). enter a. Delta also changes the angle of an arc by a specified increment.LENGTHEN Changes the length of objects and the included angle of arcs LENGTHEN does not affect closed objects. a negative value trims it. Enter delta length or [Angle] <current>: Specify a distance. included angle: <current> Select an object or [DElta/Percent/Total/DYnamic]: Select one object. delta length object selected 486 | LENGTHEN .

delta angle object selected Percent Sets the length of an object by a specified percentage of its total length. Total Sets the length of a selected object by specifying the total absolute length from the fixed endpoint. Percent also changes the angle of an arc by a specified percentage of the total included angle of the arc. enter a. Enter percentage length <current>: Enter a positive nonzero value or press ENTER Select an object to change or [Undo]: Select one object or enter u The prompt repeats until you press ENTER to end the command. Specify total length or [Angle] <current>: Specify a distance. Enter delta angle <current>: Specify an angle or press ENTER Select an object to change or [Undo]: Select one object or enter u The prompt repeats until you press ENTER to end the command. or press ENTER total length object selected LENGTHEN | 487 . Total also sets the included angle of a selected arc by a specified total angle.Angle Changes the included angle of the selected arc by the specified angle. enter a positive nonzero value.

The other end remains fixed. Angle Sets the included angle of the selected arc. total angle object selected Dynamic Turns on Dynamic Dragging mode.Total Length Lengthens the object to the specified value from the endpoint that is closest to the selection point. . CHAMFER bevels the edges of objects. Select an object to change or [Undo]: Select one object or enter u The prompt repeats until you press ENTER to end the command. TRIM trims objects at a cutting edge defined by one or more objects. Specify total angle <current>: Specify an angle or press ENTER Select an object to change or [Undo]: Select one object or enter u The prompt repeats until you press ENTER to end the command. Commands 488 | LENGTHEN EXTEND extends an object to meet another object. FILLET rounds and fillets the edges of objects. Select an object to change or [Undo]: Select one object or enter u The prompt repeats until you press ENTER to end the command. See Also See “Resize or Reshape Objects” in the User’s Guide. You change the length of a selected object by dragging one of its endpoints.

Gouraud Shaded. To display these lights. from the Tools menu. you must set SHADEMODE to Flat Shaded. On the System tab under Current 3D Graphics Display. To turn on lights. The Wireframe and Hidden SHADEMODE options do not display lights. Note In the 3DCONFIG command. or Gouraud Shaded Edges On. select Options. Render toolbar: View menu: Render ➤ Light Command line: light The Lights dialog box is displayed. and intensity of lighting effects. In the Options dialog box. Lights Dialog Box Manages lighting and controls the location.LIGHT Manages lights and lighting effects You can use light in model space only. distant. the Lights option must be set to ON for lights to appear in your drawing. select the System tab. Flat Shaded Edges On. under Render Options. choose Properties. color. LIGHT | 489 . and spot lights in SHADEMODE and 3DORBIT. You can display ambient. point.

Distant lights have no attenuation. AutoCAD displays the New Point Light dialog box (see page 492). New Distant Light dialog box (see page 494). Modify Distant Light dialog box (see page 494). Select Selects a light using the pointing device. See “Add. and Delete Lights” in the User’s Guide. You can specify no attenuation. AutoCAD inserts a light block in the drawing to show the light’s type and position. See “Overview of Lights in Rendering” in the User’s Guide. When you create a light. Point Light Emits radiating light beams. Emitted light remains at constant intensity no matter how far it travels. or New Spotlight dialog box (see page 496). Modify.Lights Lists all lights in the current drawing. Distant Light Emits parallel light beams in one direction. AutoCAD temporarily closes the dialog box while you select a light. or Modify Spotlight dialog box (see page 496). AutoCAD displays the Modify Point Light dialog box (see page 492). Spotlight Emits light in a cone in a specified direction. or attenuation that is inverse linear or inverse square. New Creates a new light in the current drawing. Modify Modifies the selected light. The Lights dialog box is redisplayed with the name of the light selected in the Lights list. 490 | LIGHT . Delete Deletes the selected light from the drawing. depending on the type of light you select. depending on the type of light you select.

you can select from the 255 AutoCAD Color Index (ACI) colors. and color book colors. Keep ambient light low to avoid saturating or dulling your image.point light block distant light block spotlight block North Location Displays the North Location dialog box (see page 498). Color Uses RGB values to control the color of ambient light. To define the color of light. LIGHT | 491 . true colors. The color swatch shows the current color. Intensity Adjusts the intensity of ambient light from no ambient light (0) to full brightness (1). in which you can set the north direction. Ambient Light Controls background light that provides constant illumination of all the surfaces in your model. Select Custom Color Displays the Select Color dialog box.

maximum intensity is twice the square of the extents distance. maximum intensity is 1. The default value for inverse linear is half the maximum intensity. 492 | LIGHT .New or Modify Point Light Dialog Box Creates a new point light or modifies the selected point light. The name must be no more than eight characters long. If attenuation is inverse linear. If attenuation is inverse square. maximum intensity is the value of twice the extents distance: the distance from the minimum lower-left coordinate to the maximum upper-right coordinate. If attenuation is none. Entering 0 turns off a light. The maximum point light intensity depends on the attenuation setting and the extents of the drawing. Light Name Specifies the name of the light. Intensity Sets the intensity or brightness of the light.

Y. at a distance of 2 units from a point light. at a distance of 4 units. Enter light location <current>: Specify a point or press ENTER Show Displays the Show Light Position dialog box. and color book colors. The color swatch shows the current color. Point lights radiate light in all directions with no target. light is one quarter as strong as at the point light.Z coordinate of the light’s location and target. Modify Temporarily closes the dialog box so you can use the pointing device to specify a location for the light. Inverse Square Sets attenuation to be the inverse of the square of the distance from the point light.Z coordinate location of the light and its target. light is one sixteenth as strong. Objects far from the point light are as bright as objects close to the light. which displays the X. Attenuation Controls how light diminishes over distance.Position Modifies or displays the X. To define the color of light.Y. at a distance of 4 units. None Sets no attenuation. Inverse Linear Sets attenuation to be the inverse of the linear distance from the point light. For example. For example. The default value for inverse linear is half the maximum intensity. you can select from the 255 AutoCAD Color Index (ACI) colors. at a distance of 2 units from a point light. true colors. light is one quarter as strong. the darker the object appears. Color Uses RGB values to control the color of the point light. Select Custom Color Displays the Select Color dialog box. LIGHT | 493 . The farther away an object is from a point light. light is half as strong as at the point light.

The color swatch shows the current color. The type of shadow depends on the current renderer type and on the settings in the Shadow Options dialog box. Color Uses RGB values to control the color of the distant light.Shadows Controls shadows and shadow mapping. Intensity Sets the intensity or brightness of the light. The intensity value can range from 0 (off) to 1 (full intensity). Shadow Options Displays the Shadow Options dialog box (see page 499). Shadow On Makes the point light cast shadows. The name must be no more than eight characters long. Light Name Specifies the name of the light. 494 | LIGHT . New or Modify Distant Light Dialog Box Creates a new distant light or modifies the selected distant light.

The Azimuth scroll bar ranges from –180 to 180. the diagrams change to represent them visually. You can also change the values of azimuth and altitude by clicking positions in the diagrams themselves. The type of shadow depends on the current renderer type and on the settings in the Shadow Options dialog box. and color book colors. For example. true colors. Altitude Specifies the position of the distant light by using site-based coordinates. Shadow On Makes the distant light cast shadows. Azimuth Specifies the position of the distant light by using site-based coordinates. You can also change the values of Azimuth or Altitude by clicking positions in the diagrams themselves. you can select from the 255 AutoCAD Color Index (ACI) colors. When you enter values or use the scroll bars to adjust the azimuth and altitude. The Altitude scroll bar ranges from 0 to 90. if you enter 315. in which you can specify a time and place so the renderer can calculate the position of the sun. the scroll bar correctly displays this as equivalent to –45.Select Custom Color Displays the Select Color dialog box. Values you enter are converted to this range. the diagrams change to represent them visually. LIGHT | 495 . Sun Angle Calculator Displays the Sun Angle Calculator dialog box (see page 500). Shadows Controls shadows and shadow mapping. You can enter values between 0 and 90. When you enter values or use the scroll bars to adjust the azimuth and altitude. To define the color of light. Shadow Options Displays the Shadow Options dialog box (see page 499).

New or Modify Spotlight Dialog Box Creates a new spotlight or modifies the selected spotlight. maximum intensity is 1. The maximum spotlight intensity depends on the attenuation setting and the extents of the drawing.Light Source Vector Displays the light source vector that results from the light position you set using Azimuth and Altitude. and Z. Modify Temporarily closes the dialog box so you can use the pointing device to define a light source vector by specifying two points. 496 | LIGHT . If attenuation is none. AutoCAD updates the Azimuth and Altitude controls to show the new position. When you use the light source vector to specify the distant light’s direction. You can also enter values directly in X. Y. Light Name Specifies the name of the light. Intensity Sets the intensity or brightness of the light. The name must be no more than eight characters long.

maximum intensity is the value of twice the extents distance: the distance from the minimum lower-left coordinate to the maximum upper-right coordinate. maximum intensity is twice the square of the extents distance. This value can range from 0 to 160 degrees.Z coordinate location of the light and its target. which is known to lighting designers as the beam angle.Y. and color book colors. Enter light target <current>: Specify a point or press ENTER Enter light location <current>: Specify a point or press ENTER Show Displays the Show Light Position dialog box. To define the color of light. Modify Temporarily closes the dialog box so you can use the pointing device to specify a location for the light and its target. Select Custom Color Displays the Select Color dialog box. Falloff Specifies the angle that defines the full cone of light. Position Modifies or displays the X. Color Uses RGB values to control the color of the spotlight. The default is 44 degrees.Z coordinates of the light’s location and target. A vector connects the spotlight location to its current target. The default is 45 degrees. This value can range from 0 to 160 degrees. The color swatch shows the current color. you can select from the 255 AutoCAD Color Index (ACI) colors. true colors. which displays the X. If attenuation is inverse square. which is also known as the field angle.If attenuation is inverse linear. LIGHT | 497 . Hotspot Specifies the angle that defines the brightest cone of light.Y. The default value for inverse linear is half the maximum intensity.

at a distance of 4 units. For example. The farther away an object is from a spotlight. Inverse Linear Sets attenuation to be the inverse of the linear distance from the spotlight.Attenuation Controls how light diminishes over distance. Shadows Controls shadows and shadow mapping. Shadow On Makes the spotlight cast shadows. The default value for inverse linear is half the maximum intensity. North Location Dialog Box Sets the north direction. the darker the object appears. light is one quarter as strong as at the spotlight. For example. Objects far from the spotlight are as bright as objects close to the light. light is half as strong as at the spotlight. light is one sixteenth as strong. The type of shadow depends on the current renderer type and on the settings in the Shadow Options dialog box. Inverse Square Sets attenuation to be the inverse of the square of the distance from the spotlight. at a distance of 2 units from a spotlight. Shadow Options Displays the Shadow Options dialog box (see page 499). at a distance of 4 units. None Sets no attenuation. light is one quarter as strong. at a distance of 2 units from a spotlight. 498 | LIGHT .

but the longer it takes to render them. Shadow Bounding Objects Prompts you to modify a selection set of objects whose bounding box is used to clip the shadow maps. Shadow Softness Controls the softness or fuzziness of shadow-mapped shadows. in pixels. the more accurate the shadows. The value you enter represents the number of pixels at the edge of the shadow that are blended into the underlying image. north is the positive Y direction in the world coordinate system (WCS). Shadow maps are not available. and so on clockwise. AutoCAD uses the Y axis in that UCS as the north direction. Select from the Use UCS list. but the shadow map size and softness settings are retained. enter a new angle. The value can range from 1 to 10. The Y axis is 0 degrees. Select from a range of values between 64 and 4096. You can also specify north in a user coordinate system (UCS) if there are any named in your drawing. Shadow Map Size Controls the size. or use the scroll bar. the X axis is 90 degrees. To change it.By default. Shadow Volumes/Ray Traced Shadows Produces volumetric shadows (Photo Real renderer) and raytraced shadows (Raytrace renderer) for this light. but usually values from 2 to 4 give the best results. Shadow Options Dialog Box Specifies the type of shadow. The larger the map size. of one side of the shadow map. LIGHT | 499 .

Zero degrees indicates the Greenwich meridian. Clock Time Sets the local time on a 24-hour clock. Zero degrees indicates the equator. as opposed to daylight savings). 500 | Date Specifies the date. You can enter a value or use the scroll bar. You can enter a value or use the scroll bar. Latitude Specifies the latitude. altitude. The right side of the dialog box shows the azimuth. The date can range from January 1 (1/1) to December 31 (12/31). Time Zone Specifies the time zone (assuming standard hours.) You specify time on the left side of the dialog box. Daylight Savings Specifies daylight savings for the date and time zone. You can enter a time or use the scroll bar. and solar time resulting from the local time you select. (You cannot alter the azimuth and altitude directly as you can in the New Distant Light or Modify Distant Light dialog box.Sun Angle Calculator Dialog Box Specifies a time and place so that the renderer can calculate the position of the sun. 180 degrees indicates the opposite meridian in the direction of the current hemisphere—east or west. You can enter a date or use the scroll bar. 90 degrees indicates the pole in the current hemisphere—north or south. LIGHT . Longitude Specifies the longitude.

Note The Sun Angle Calculator takes its north as the current AutoCAD north direction. You can change the north direction in the North Location dialog box (see page 498).Northern or Southern Hemisphere Specifies the northern or southern hemisphere. Western or Eastern Hemisphere Specifies the eastern or western hemisphere. Click the map to change the longitude and latitude. The map panel shows one of several maps. Use the list above the map to select the map you want. Geographic Location Dialog Box Specifies the sun’s latitude and longitude indirectly by using a city or a location on a map. LIGHT | 501 . Geographic Location Displays the Geographic Location dialog box (see page 501). By default this is the positive Y direction of the current coordinate system. in which you can specify the sun’s latitude and longitude indirectly by naming a city or pointing to a map.

502 | LIMITS . You can also enter these values directly. Current Map Specifies the current map. SCENE creates new scenes and modifies or deletes existing scenes in model space only. The currently selected city is displayed below the list. see “Render 3D Objects for Realism” in the User’s Guide. you can specify the latitude and longitude as less than 0. Commands ARX loads. unloads. Select a city from this list to display its latitude and longitude. and materials information. In this dialog box. If you select a map location while the Nearest Big City option is cleared. To change the map. depending on which hemisphere is current. Latitude and Longitude Displays the location of the currently selected city or your most recent map selection. System Variables TARGET stores the light target location. and deleting lights. no city name is displayed below the list. LIMITS Sets and controls the limits of the drawing boundaries and grid display in the current Model or layout tab The drawing limits are two-dimensional points in the world coordinate system that represent the lower-left and upper-right boundaries. You cannot impose limits on the Z direction. Nearest Big City Finds the city nearest the map position that you click and makes that city current. lighting. modifying. and provides information about ObjectARX™applications. When you choose OK. AutoCAD updates the Sun Angle Calculator with the new latitude and longitude. RENDER creates a photoreal- istic or realistically shaded image of a three-dimensional wireframe or solid model using geometry. select another option from the list. See Also For more information about adding.City Lists the cities available on the current map.

Drawing limits also determine the area of the drawing that can display grid dots.When limits checking is turned on (controlled by the On and Off options from the first LIMITS prompt). In this case. the drawing limits restrict the coordinates you can enter to within the rectangular area. or press ENTER Lower-Left Corner Specifies the lower-left corner for the drawing limits. Because limits checking tests only points that you enter. LIMITS | 503 . System Variables LIMCHECK turns limits checking on and off for the current space. and the minimum area displayed by ZOOM All. lower left Specify upper right corner <current>: Specify a point or press ENTER See Also See “Adjust Grid and Grid Snap” in the User’s Guide. You can control the display of the paper background and paper margins from the Display tab of the Options dialog box (see page 633). AutoCAD rejects attempts to enter points outside the drawing limits. Format menu: Drawing Limits Command line: limits (or 'limits for transparent use) upper right Specify lower left corner or [ON/OFF] <current>: Specify a point. the area displayed by one of the scale options of ZOOM. Off Turns off limits checking but maintains the current values for the next time you turn on limits checking. limits are calculated and set by the layout according to the selected paper size. On Turns on limits checking. you can also specify the drawing limits as the area to plot. when either the paper background or paper margins are displayed. portions of objects such as circles can extend outside the limits. enter on or off. you cannot set the drawing limits with LIMITS. When plotting a drawing. LIMMAX sets upper-right drawing limits for the current space. LIMMIN sets lower-left drawing limits for the current space. From a layout tab. When limits checking is on.

You can draw a continuing series of line segments. AutoCAD draws a line segment and continues to prompt for points. For example. but each line segment is a separate object. 504 | LINE . and the line is drawn tangent to the arc. before pressing ENTER after pressing ENTER If the most recently drawn line is an arc. Press ENTER to end the command.LINE Creates straight line segments You can specify the endpoints of lines using two-dimensional (2D) or threedimensional (3D) coordinates. the following command sequence draws a single line segment. Command: line Specify first point: Specify a point (1) Specify next point or [Undo]: Specify a point (2) Specify next point or [Undo]: Press ENTER 2 1 Draw toolbar: Draw menu: Line Command line: line Specify first point: Specify a point or press ENTER to continue from the last drawn line or arc Specify next point or [Close/Undo]: Continue Continues a line from the endpoint of the most recently drawn line. its endpoint defines the starting point of the line.

RAY creates a semi-infinite line. See Also See “Draw Lines” in the User’s Guide. MLINE creates multiple parallel lines. before entering c Undo after pressing ENTER after entering c Erases the most recent segment of a line sequence. XLINE creates an infinite line.before pressing ENTER Close Ends the last line segment at the beginning of the first line segment. 3DPOLY creates 3D polylines. Commands PLINE creates 2D polylines. You can use Close after you have drawn a series of two or more segments. before entering u after entering u Entering u more than once backtracks through line segments in the order you created them. LINE | 505 . which forms a closed loop of line segments.

dots. sample complex linetype Linetype Manager Loads linetypes and sets the current linetype. dash-dot If you enter -linetype at the Command prompt. or modify linetype scales. 506 | LINETYPE . and modifies linetypes Line characteristics consist of combinations of dashes. and spaces.LINETYPE Loads. continuous hidden Format menu: Linetype Command line: linetype (or 'linetype for transparent use) center The Linetype Manager is displayed. sets. You can use LINETYPE to load linetype definitions from a linetype library (LIN) file. make a linetype current. LINETYPE displays prompts on the command line (see page 510).

The CELTYPE system variable stores the linetype name. You can filter linetypes based on whether they are xref-dependent. in which you can load into the drawing selected linetypes from the acad.lin file and can be reloaded.lin or acadiso.lin file and add them to the linetype list. or whether they are referenced by objects. Note Be careful about deleting linetypes if you are working on a drawing in a shared project or one based on a set of layering standards. Setting the linetype to BYBLOCK means that an object assumes the CONTINUOUS linetype until it is grouped into a block. Whenever the block is inserted. and CONTINUOUS. BYBLOCK. Default referenced linetypes include BYLAYER. Invert Filter Displays linetypes based on the opposites of the criteria you select. LINETYPE | 507 . Linetypes that fit the inverse filter criteria are displayed in the linetype list. Load Displays the Load or Reload Linetypes dialog box (see page 509).Linetype Filters Determines which linetypes to display in the linetype list. The deleted linetype definition remains stored in the acad. Setting the current linetype to BYLAYER means that an object assumes the linetype that is assigned to a particular layer. Current Sets the selected linetype to be the current linetype. all objects inherit the block's linetype. Delete Deletes selected linetypes from the list. Show Details or Hide Details Controls whether the Details section (see page 508) of the Linetype Manager is displayed. You can only delete unreferenced linetypes.

Linetype names cannot include the special characters comma (. Linetype names can contain letters. and the special characters dollar sign ($). right-click in the linetype list to display the shortcut menu. Linetype Displays names of loaded linetypes. The linetype name can include up to 255 characters. Details Displays an extension of the dialog box with alternative access to properties and additional settings. To rename a linetype. equal sign (=). digits. and underscore (_). asterisk (*). To quickly select all or clear all linetypes. question mark (?). CONTINUOUS. 508 | LINETYPE . BYBLOCK.List of Linetypes Displays the loaded linetypes according to the option specified in Linetype Filters. and xrefdependent linetypes cannot be renamed. hyphen (–).). forward and back slashes (/ \). or back quote (‘). select it and then click it again and enter a new name. Appearance Displays a sample of selected linetypes. quote (“). blank spaces. colon (:). which can be edited in the Details area. Description Displays descriptions of the linetypes. vertical bar (|). greater and lesser than symbols (< >). BYLAYER.

and underscore (_). This option is also controlled by the PSLTSCALE system variable. Useful when working with multiple viewports. ISO Pen Width Sets the linetype scale to one of a list of standard ISO values. hyphen (–). and the special characters dollar sign ($). Global Scale Factor Displays the global scale factor for all linetypes.). digits. or back quote (‘). Use Paper Space Units for Scaling Scales linetypes in paper space and model space identically. LINETYPE | 509 . (LTSCALE system variable) Current Object Scale Sets linetype scale for newly created objects.lin file contains the standard linetypes. Description Displays the description of the selected linetype. Load or Reload Linetypes Dialog Box Loads a linetype whose definition exists in a linetype library (LIN) file. which can be edited. The resulting scale is the global scale factor multiplied by the object’s scale factor. The resulting scale is the global scale factor multiplied by the object’s scale factor. The acad. question mark (?). greater and lesser than symbols (< >). The linetype name can include up to 255 characters. colon (:). quote (“).Name Displays the selected linetype name. Linetype names cannot include the special characters comma (. which can be edited. blank spaces. Linetype names can contain letters. This option is also controlled by the CELTSCALE system variable. vertical bar (|). forward and back slashes (/ \). equal sign (=). asterisk (*).

To select or clear all of the linetypes on the list. Available Linetypes Displays the linetypes available to load. Create Creates a new linetype and stores it in an LIN file.File Displays the name of the current LIN file. After you select an LIN file. Descriptive text: Enter optional descriptive text 510 | LINETYPE . Enter an option [?/Create/Load/Set]: ?—List Linetypes Displays the Select Linetype File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box). Enter name of linetype to create: AutoCAD displays the Create or Append Linetype File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box). You can enter the name of another LIN file or choose File to select a different file from the Select Linetype File dialog box. LINETYPE displays prompts on the command line. Specify the file to which you want the linetype added. AutoCAD lists the linetypes available in a file. LINETYPE Command Line If you enter -linetype at the Command prompt. right-click and choose Select All or Clear All.

The A is automatically included in the definition. AutoCAD guarantees that lines and arcs start and end with a dash.5 -. If you use a text editor to create a linetype. The description can be a comment or a series of underscores. and arcs. AutoCAD supports A-type alignment only.5 -. Enter positive values to specify lengths of dashes and negative values to specify lengths of spaces. The acad.lin file contains the standard linetypes. For more information. Enter a pattern definition as a series of numbers separated by commas. Enter or select the file in which the linetype you want to load is stored. LINETYPE | 511 .5 the pattern is repeated The “A” in the pattern definition prompt specifies the pattern alignment used at the ends of individual lines. With A-type alignment. dots. Enter linetype(s) to load: Enter a name or a list of names separated by commas AutoCAD displays the Select Linetype File dialog box. see “Custom Linetypes” in the Customization Guide.Enter a linetype description up to 47 characters long.5 . You cannot create complex linetypes with LINETYPE. you must enter a at the beginning of the definition. circles. dashes. Enter linetype pattern (on next line): A. you must load it to make it accessible. Load Loads a linetype whose definition exists in a file. 2. Use a zero to represent a dot. and spaces to show a simple representation of the linetype pattern. After creating a linetype.

or press ENTER The linetype you enter becomes the current linetype. If the linetype is neither loaded nor in acad. Whenever you insert that block.lin file. bylayer. new objects are drawn using the CONTINUOUS linetype until they are grouped into a block. You can control the linetype of objects individually or by layer. AutoCAD draws all new objects with this linetype. or byblock. AutoCAD searches for its definition in the acad.Set Sets the current linetype for objects that will be drawn subsequently. 512 | LINETYPE . Enter ? to list all loaded linetype names. If you enter byblock. If you enter bylayer. new objects inherit the linetype associated with the layer on which the object is drawn. If the linetype you request is not loaded. See Also See “Work with Linetypes” in the User’s Guide. the objects inherit the linetype of the block.lin. regardless of the current layer. ? to list all loaded linetype names. AutoCAD displays a message and returns you to the Command prompt. Specifies linetype name or [?] <current>: Enter a linetype name.

AREA calculates the area and perimeter of objects or of defined areas. LIST | 513 . PSLTSCALE controls paper space linetype scaling. The thickness of an object is displayed if it is nonzero. System Variables CELTSCALE sets the current object linetype scaling fac- tor. MASSPROP calculates and displays the mass properties of regions or solids.5 would appear the same as a line created with CELTSCALE=1 in a drawing with LTSCALE=1. This sets the linetype scaling for new objects relative to the LTSCALE setting. and X. linetype. DIST measures the distance and angle between two points. LIST reports additional information related to the specific object selected.Z position relative to the current user coordinate system (UCS) and whether the object is in model space or paper space. See Also Commands ID displays the coordinate values of a location. If the extrusion direction of the entry differs from the Z axis (0. Z coordinate information defines the elevation. A line created with CELTSCALE=2 in a drawing with LTSCALE set to 0. LTSCALE stores the global linetype scale factor.0.Y. LIST also reports the extrusion direction in UCS coordinates. LIST Displays database information for selected objects Inquiry toolbar: Tools menu: Inquiry ➤ List Command line: list Select objects: Use an object selection method AutoCAD lists the object type. LIST reports color. object layer. and lineweight information if these items are not set to BYLAYER.1) of the current UCS.Commands LTSCALE sets the linetype scale factor.

See Also Commands System Variables LOGFILEON writes to a file everything that appears in the text window. LOGFILEMODE specifies whether the contents of the text window are written to a log file. LOGFILENAME specifies the path for the log file. Command line: load AutoCAD displays the Select Shape File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box). LOGFILEOFF Closes the log file opened by LOGFILEON Command line: logfileoff AutoCAD stops recording the text window contents and closes the log file.log) that may need periodic deletion as the number of log files continues to grow. COMPILE compiles AutoCAD shape (SHP) files and Post- Script font (PFB) files into SHX files. See Also Commands SHAPE inserts a shape from a compiled shape file. AutoCAD loads it thereafter. Enter the shape file name. Each drawing saves a log file (with the extension . or select a file name from the list. The shape file must be available each time you edit the drawing. Use the Files tab to change the location of the log file. OPTIONS changes AutoCAD environment settings. Use the Maintain a Log File option on the Open and Save tab in the Options dialog box to turn the log file off and on. You can also control the log file with the OPTIONS command.LOAD Makes shapes available for use by the SHAPE command You must load a shape (SHP) file the first time you need it. 514 | LOAD .

and rotating landscape objects. top. Use the Files tab to change the location of the log file. LOGFILEON | 515 . OPTIONS changes AutoCAD environment settings. Each landscape object has grips at the base. You can also control the log file with the OPTIONS command. scaling. and the bottom corner grips to scale it and. if it’s not view aligned. See Also Commands System Variables LOGFILEOFF closes the log file. The geometry of the object depends on whether you choose one or two faces for it and whether it is view aligned. Each drawing saves a log file (with the extension .log) that may need periodic deletion as the number of log files continues to grow. LOGFILENAME specifies the path for the log file. rotate it. Use the base grip to move the object. LOGFILEMODE specifies whether the contents of the text window are written to a log file. LSEDIT Edits a landscape object A landscape object is an extended-entity object with a bitmap image mapped onto it. You make these choices according to your rendering requirements. You can manipulate the object directly in the drawing as well as in the Landscape New dialog box. Use the Maintain a Log File option on the Open and Save tab in the Options dialog box to turn the log file off and on.LOGFILEON Writes the text window contents to a file Command line: logfileon AutoCAD records the text window contents in the log file until you exit AutoCAD or use the LOGFILEOFF command. the top grips to adjust its height. You can use all standard AutoCAD grip editing modes for stretching. and each corner.

if the list is unavailable. The object type is selected in the library list.With two related commands. For a description of the available options. LSNEW and LSLIB. Render toolbar: View menu: Render ➤ Landscape Edit Command line: lsedit Select a landscape object: Use an object selection method When you select a landscape object. 516 | LSEDIT . you cannot change the object type. AutoCAD displays the Landscape Edit dialog box. see LSNEW. you can create landscape objects and maintain landscape object libraries. Landscape Edit Dialog Box Previews landscape objects and defines the geometry and height of the objects.

Landscape Library Dialog Box Defines libraries of landscape objects. Commands LSNEW creates a new landscape object. LSLIB maintains landscape object libraries. RMAT attaches and manages rendering materials.See Also See “Render a Model” in the User’s Guide. LSLIB Maintains libraries of landscape objects Render toolbar: View menu: Render ➤ Landscape Library Command line: lslib AutoCAD displays the Landscape Library dialog box. Select one to modify or delete. Library Contents Lists the objects in the current library. and materials information. RENDER creates a photorealistic or realistically shaded image of a three-dimensional wireframe or solid model using geometry. LSLIB | 517 . lighting.

All landscape objects require both an image file and an opacity map file to define the see-through areas of the image. Enter an object name. This does not delete the files associated with the object name. an image file name. Landscape Library Edit Dialog Box Changes the image files associated with the object selected in the Landscape Library dialog box. A standard file selection dialog box is displayed so that you can save the library under another name if you want. Open Displays a standard file selection dialog box. Delete Deletes the selected object from the library. Save Saves the current library file. New Displays the New Landscape Library dialog box. Changes the image files associated with the selected object (or double-click the object name). and an opacity map file name for your new object. The contents of the file appear in the Library Contents list. which is identical to the Landscape Library Edit dialog box except that the boxes are blank. the program prompts you to replace it.Modify Displays the Landscape Library Edit dialog box (see page 518). Locate and select an LLI file to open a new library file. 518 | LSLIB . If the file already exists. but deletes only the object definition in the library.

You cannot use grips to rotate it. This type of object also displays its name either forward or backward to indicate its orientation to the camera. you can change its rotation. Single Face/ Crossing Faces Specifies a single-face object or a crossing-face object. Name Shows the current name of the object. especially for animation and raytraced shadows. The geometry of an object depends on its number of faces and alignment. When view-aligned. they face the camera at 45-degree angles and you can’t change their rotation. A crossing-face object always appears as two triangles intersecting at right angles. This is generally a good choice for trees and other nonplanar objects. When the View Aligned option is cleared. This can be effective with planar objects like road signs that you don’t want to view straight on. Image File Specifies a file name. Opacity Map File Specifies a file name. To change the name. A single-face fixed object appears as a rectangle that you can rotate with grips. the object maintains a fixed orientation. When the object is fixed.Default Geometry Specifies the geometry and alignment of the object. You can choose Find File to display a standard file selection dialog box in which you can locate the file you want. LSLIB | 519 . A single-face object is faster to render but not quite as realistic as a crossing-face object. edit the entry. A single-face viewaligned object appears in the drawing as a triangle. which is helpful for signs. View Aligned Makes the object always face the camera. You can choose Find File to display a standard file selection dialog box in which you can locate the file you want.

and inserts a landscape object into a drawing. such as trees and bushes. RENDER creates a photorealistic or realistically shaded image of a three-dimensional wireframe or solid model using geometry. LSNEW Adds realistic landscape items. lighting. RMAT attaches and manages rendering materials. defines the geometry and height of new objects. to your drawings Render toolbar: View menu: Render ➤ Landscape New Command line: lsnew AutoCAD displays the Landscape New dialog box. and materials information. LSNEW creates new landscape objects. unloads. and provides information about ObjectARX applications.See Also See “Use Materials in Rendering” in the User’s Guide. Landscape New Dialog Box Previews landscape objects. Commands ARX loads. 520 | LSNEW . LSEDIT modifies landscape objects.

Single Face/ Crossing Faces Specifies a single-face object or a crossing-face object. A single-face object is faster to render but not quite as realistic as a crossing-face object. the top grips to adjust its height. Landscape Objects Lists landscape objects available in the current landscape library. top.A landscape object is an extended-entity object with a bitmap image mapped onto it. A crossing-face object always appears as two triangles intersecting at right angles. When the object is fixed. you can change its rotation. A single-face fixed object appears as a rectangle that you can rotate with grips. rotate it. This type of object also displays its name either forward or backward to indicate its orientation to the camera. Each landscape object has grips at the base. which is helpful for signs. You can use all standard AutoCAD grip editing modes for stretching. You cannot use grips to rotate it. Select the one you want to insert in the drawing. LSEDIT and LSLIB. View Aligned Makes the object always face the camera. you can modify landscape objects and maintain landscape object libraries. The geometry of the object depends on whether you choose one or two faces for it and whether it is view aligned. if it’s not view aligned. When the View Aligned option is cleared. This is generally a good choice for trees and other nonplanar objects. and the bottom corner grips to scale it and. Geometry Specifies the geometry and alignment of the landscape object. With two related commands. The geometry of an object depends on its number of faces and alignment. You make these choices according to your rendering requirements. scaling. LSNEW | 521 . Use the base grip to move the object. A single-face view-aligned object appears in the drawing as a triangle. You can manipulate the object directly in the drawing as well as in the Landscape New dialog box. they face the camera at 45-degree angles and you can’t change their rotation. When view-aligned. This can be effective with planar objects like road signs that you don’t want to view straight on. the object maintains a fixed orientation. especially for animation and raytraced shadows. and rotating landscape objects. and each corner.

5 Use LTSCALE to change the scale factor of linetypes for all objects in a drawing. LTSCALE = . Position Uses the pointing device to specify a location in the drawing. The default is 20. lighting. unloads. and materials information.25 See Also System Variables LTSCALE stores the current scale factor. LTSCALE Sets the global linetype scale factor Command line: ltscale (or 'ltscale for transparent use) LTSCALE = 1 Enter new linetype scale factor <current>: Enter a positive real value or press ENTER LTSCALE = . LSEDIT modifies landscape objects. The default position is at the origin of the UCS. LSLIB maintains landscape object libraries. See Also See “Use Materials in Rendering” in the User’s Guide. PSLTSCALE controls paper space linetype scaling. Changing the linetype scale factor causes the drawing to regenerate. Use the scroll bar or enter a value. Commands ARX loads.Height Specifies the height of the landscape object in current drawing units. and provides information about ObjectARX applications. 522 | LTSCALE . RMAT attaches and manages rendering materials. You must use the SETVAR command to access the LTSCALE system variable. RENDER creates a photorealistic or realistically shaded image of a three-dimensional wireframe or solid model using geometry. and the height is always in the positive Z direction of the current user coordinate system (UCS).

the default lineweight value for layers is set by the Default option in the Lineweights Settings dialog box. sets the lineweight units. see “Overview of Lineweights” in the User’s Guide. Format menu: Lineweight Shortcut menu: Right-click the Lwt button on the status bar and choose Settings. Lineweight Settings Dialog Box Sets the current lineweight. controls the display and display scale of lineweights in the Model tab. and solid fills (2D solids). Command line: lweight (or 'lweight for transparent use) The Lineweight Settings dialog box is displayed. raster images (except the image border). The default lineweight value for objects is BYLAYER. LWEIGHT | 523 . points. Lineweight can be applied to all graphical objects except TrueType fonts. To optimize AutoCAD performance when working in the Model tab. LWEIGHT displays prompts on the command line (see page 525). Wide polylines in a plan view are displayed at their width setting rather than their lineweight setting. Note Objects with lineweights of more than one pixel may increase regeneration time. and sets the DEFAULT lineweight value for layers. set the lineweight display scale to the minimum value. Lineweights are useful for the graphical representation of different objects and information. and lineweight units Use lineweights to add width to your objects.LWEIGHT Sets the current lineweight. If you enter -lweight at the Command prompt. but they should not be used to represent specific object widths. You can also customize lineweights to plot at whatever width you want by using the Plot Style Table Editor of the PLOT command. lineweight display options. These exceptions plot with a default lineweight of 0 (the thinnest possible line that the printer or plotter can plot). For a table of valid lineweights. or turn off Display Lineweight altogether. See “Control Plotted Lineweight and Linetype” in the User’s Guide.

Lineweights Displays the available lineweight values. The lineweight value of 0 plots at the thinnest lineweight available on the specified plotting device and is displayed at one pixel wide in model space. 524 | Millimeters (mm) Specifies lineweight values in millimeters. which has an initial value of 0. You can also set Units for Listing by using the LWUNITS system variable.01 inches or 0. and DEFAULT. Units for Listing Specifies whether lineweights are displayed in millimeters or inches. Lineweight values consist of standard settings including BYLAYER. All new layers use the default setting.) Specifies lineweight values in inches. LWEIGHT . The DEFAULT value is set by the LWDEFAULT system variable. select a lineweight from the lineweight list and choose OK. Current Lineweight Displays the current lineweight. Inches (in. To set the current lineweight. BYBLOCK.25 mm.

LWEIGHT Command Line If you enter -lweight at the Command prompt. set the lineweight display scale to the minimum value or turn off lineweight display altogether. On the Model tab. Objects with lineweights that are displayed with a width of more than one pixel may increase AutoCAD regeneration time. Current lineweight: current Enter default lineweight for new objects or [?]: Enter a valid lineweight or enter ? The current lineweight value is displayed. Clear Display Lineweight if AutoCAD performance slows down when working with lineweights turned on in a drawing. You can also set Display Lineweight by using the LWDISPLAY system variable. If you want to optimize AutoCAD performance when working in the Model tab. Default Controls the DEFAULT lineweight for layers. the value is displayed in millimeters or inches. Lineweights are displayed using a pixel width in proportion to the real-world unit value at which they plot. you can adjust the lineweight display scale to better display different lineweight widths. You can also set the DEFAULT lineweight by using the LWDEFAULT system variable. The initial DEFAULT lineweight is 0. lineweights are displayed in pixels. If selected.01 inches or 0. AutoCAD regeneration time increases with lineweights that are represented by more than one pixel.25 mm. BYBLOCK or DEFAULT. LWEIGHT displays prompts on the command line. if the value is not BYLAYER. This option does not affect how objects are plotted. The Lineweight list reflects the current display scale.Display Lineweight Controls whether lineweights are displayed in the current drawing. If you are using a high-resolution monitor. Adjust Display Scale Controls the display scale of lineweights on the Model tab. lineweights are displayed in model space and paper space. LWEIGHT | 525 .

25 mm.” in the User’s Guide. System Variables LWDEFAULT sets the default value for the lineweight DEFAULT. Values are calculated in either inches or millimeters. The lineweight value of 0 plots at the thinnest lineweight available on the specified plotting device and is displayed at a value of one pixel in model space. CHANGE. including BYLAYER. To plot an object with a lineweight that is not found in the list of fixed lineweight values. With any other value. Note If you save a drawing using the AutoCAD Release 14. LWEIGHT . The DEFAULT value is set by the LWDEFAULT system variable and has an initial value of 0. MATCHPROP copies a lineweight from one object to another. See Also See “Work with Linetypes” in the User’s Guide. ?—List Lineweights Displays a list of valid lineweight values in the current lineweight units. millimeters are the default.Default Lineweight Sets the current default lineweight. CELWEIGHT sets the lineweight of new objects. the drawing preview displays lineweights even though the drawing saved in the earlier format does not display lineweights. BYBLOCK. and DEFAULT. or earlier. If you enter a valid lineweight. AutoCAD adjusts the value entered and sets the current default lineweight to the nearest valid value. 526 | Commands PROPERTIES. Lineweight values consist of fixed settings. format.01 inches or 0. LWUNITS sets lineweight units in millimeters or inches. AutoCAD sets the current default lineweight to the new value. or CHPROP assign a lineweight to an object. LWDISPLAY controls display of lineweights. LAYER assigns a lineweight to a layer. See “Control Plotted Lineweight and Linetype. you can use the Plot Style Table Editor to customize plotted lineweights.

Regions The table shows the mass properties AutoCAD displays for all regions.MASSPROP Calculates the mass properties of regions or solids MASSPROP calculates properties of two-dimensional (2D) and threedimensional (3D) objects that are essential in analyzing the characteristics of the drawn objects. Perimeter The total length of the inside and outside loops of a region. AutoCAD does not calculate the perimeter of solids. see Calculations Based on the Current UCS (see page 530). Mass properties for all regions Mass property Description Area The surface area of solids or the enclosed area of regions. MASSPROP displays the mass properties in the text window. and then asks if you want to write the mass properties to a text file. Write analysis to a file? <N>: Enter y or n. The properties that MASSPROP displays depends on whether the selected objects are regions (and whether the selected regions are coplanar with the XY plane of the current UCS) or solids. MASSPROP | 527 . MASSPROP prompts you to enter a file name. or press ENTER If you enter y. only those that are coplanar with the first selected region are accepted. For a list of the parameters that control the MASSPROP units. Inquiry toolbar: Tools menu: Inquiry ➤ Region/Mass Properties Command line: massprop Select objects: Use an object selection method If you select multiple regions.

Mass properties for all regions (continued) Mass property Description Bounding box The two coordinates that define the bounding box. The formula for the radii of gyration is gyration_radii = (moments_of_ inertia/body_mass)1/2 Radii of gyration are expressed in distance units. It is always calculated with respect to two orthogonal planes. or when calculating the forces inside a bending or twisting beam. The formula for determining area moments of inertia is area_moments_of_inertia = area_of_interest * radius2 The area moments of inertia has units of distance to the fourth power. this coordinate is a 2D point. AutoCAD displays the additional properties shown in the table. For regions that are not coplanar with the XY plane of the current UCS. Products of inertia Property used to determine the forces causing the motion of an object. the bounding box is defined by the diagonally opposite corners of a rectangle that encloses the region. 528 | MASSPROP . If the regions are coplanar with the XY plane of the current UCS. For regions that are coplanar with the XY plane of the current UCS.XZ = mass * distcentroid_to_YZ * distcentroid_to_XZ This XY value is expressed in mass units times the length squared. The formula for product of inertia for the YZ plane and XZ plane is product_of_inertiaYZ. this coordinate is a 3D point. such as fluid pressure on a plate. Additional mass properties for coplanar regions Mass property Description Moments of inertia A value used when computing the distributed loads. the bounding box is defined by the diagonally opposite corners of a 3D box that encloses the region. Radii of gyration Another way of indicating the moments of inertia of a solid. For regions that are coplanar with the XY plane of the current user coordinate system (UCS). Centroid A 2D or 3D coordinate that is the center of area for regions. For regions that are not coplanar with the XY plane of the current UCS.

XZ = mass * distcentroid_to_YZ * distcentroid_to_XZ This XY value is expressed in mass units times the length squared. A third value included in the results is somewhere between the high and low values. The formula for product of inertia for the YZ plane and XZ plane is product_of_inertiaYZ. Solids The table shows the mass properties AutoCAD displays for solids. Mass properties for solids Mass property Description Mass The measure of inertia of a body.Z directions about centroid Calculations derived from the products of inertia and that have the same unit values. The formula for mass moments of inertia is mass_moments_of_inertia = object_mass * radiusaxis2 Mass moments of inertia unit is mass (grams or slugs) times the distance squared. such as a wheel rotating about an axle. Products of inertia Property used to determine the forces causing the motion of an object. which is used when computing the force required to rotate an object about a given axis. The moment of inertia is lowest through the second axis that is normal to the first axis and also passes through the centroid. AutoCAD assumes a solid of uniform density. Bounding box The diagonally opposite corners of a 3D box that encloses the solid. It is always calculated with respect to two orthogonal planes.Y. mass and volume have the same value. Moments of inertia The mass moments of inertia. Volume The amount of 3D space that a solid encloses. Because AutoCAD uses a density of one. The moment of inertia is highest through a certain axis at the centroid of an object. Centroid A 3D point that is the center of mass for solids.Additional mass properties for coplanar regions (continued) Mass property Description Principal moments and X. MASSPROP | 529 .

Y. and principal moments See Also Commands 530 | MASSPROP REGION creates a region object from a selection set of existing objects. and perimeter DENSITY*LENGTH*LENGTH Moments of inertia. Principal moments and X. The moment of inertia is lowest through the second axis that is normal to the first axis and also passes through the centroid. The formula for the radii of gyration is gyration_radii = (moments_of_inertia/body_mass)1/2 Radii of gyration are expressed in distance units. Calculations Based on the Current UCS The table shows the parameters that control the units in which mass properties are calculated.Z directions about centroid Calculations derived from the products of inertia and that have the same unit values. The moment of inertia is highest through a certain axis at the centroid of an object. radii of gyration. Parameters that control MASSPROP units Parameter Used to calculate DENSITY Mass of solids LENGTH Volume of solids LENGTH*LENGTH Area of regions and surface area of solids LENGTH*LENGTH*LENGTH Bounding box.Mass properties for solids (continued) Mass property Description Radii of gyration Another way of indicating the moments of inertia of a solid. centroid. . products of inertia. SOLID creates solid-filled polygons. A third value included in the results is somewhere between the high and low values.

multiline text. Linetype Changes the linetype of the destination object to that of the source object. Property Settings Dialog Box Specifies properties to be copied with MATCHPROP. Settings Displays the Property Settings dialog box (see page 531). You can continue selecting destination objects. or press ENTER to apply the properties and end the command. MATCHPROP | 531 . Available for all objects except attributes. hatches. Select one or more of the these settings. AutoCAD selects all object properties in the Property Settings dialog box for copying. Available for all objects except OLE objects. Color Changes the color of the destination object to that of the source object. Layer Changes the layer of the destination object to that of the source object. in which you can control which object properties to copy to the destination objects. By default. and viewports. Available for all objects except OLE objects. points. OLE objects.MATCHPROP Applies the properties of a selected object to other objects Standard toolbar: Modify menu: Match Properties Command line: matchprop or painter (or 'matchprop for transparent use) Select source object: Select the object whose properties you want to copy Current active settings: Currently selected matchprop settings Select destination object(s) or [Settings]: Enter s or select one or more objects to copy properties to Destination Object(s) Specifies the objects to which you want to copy the properties of the source object.

attributes. Available for all objects except attributes. points. Plot Style Changes the plot style of the destination object to that of the source object. Text In addition to basic object properties. Viewport In addition to basic object properties. Polyline In addition to basic object properties. circles. and UCS icon visibility and location. regions. shade plot. If you are working in colordependent plot style mode (PSTYLEPOLICY is set to 1). Available only for arcs. Dimension In addition to basic object properties. and traces. display locking. The settings for clipping and for UCS per viewport and the freeze/thaw state of the layer are not transferred to the destination object. and viewports. Thickness Changes the thickness of the destination object to that of the source object. snap. lines. MATCHPROP . The fit/smooth property and the elevation of the source polyline are not transferred to the destination polyline. text. changes the width and linetype generation properties of the destination polyline to those of the source polyline. the width property is not transferred to the destination polyline. this option is unavailable. changes the text style of the destination object to that of the source object. hatches. If the source polyline has variable width. Available for all objects. and tolerance objects. Available only for single-line and multiline text objects. leader. Lineweight Changes the lineweight of the destination object to that of the source object.532 | Linetype Scale Changes the linetype scale factor of the destination object to that of the source object. standard or custom scale. changes the dimension style of the destination object to that of the source object. OLE objects. 2D polylines. Available for all objects except OLE objects. multiline text. changes the following properties of the destination paper space viewport to match those of the source viewport: on/off. Available only for dimension. points. grid.

Materials Library Dialog Box Imports materials into and exports materials from the drawing. Available only for hatch objects. MATLIB | 533 . Render toolbar: View menu: Render ➤ Materials Library Command line: matlib The Materials Library dialog box is displayed. A new drawing contains only the GLOBAL material. MATLIB Imports and exports materials to and from a library of materials You can import a predefined material from a materials library file (MLI).Hatch In addition to basic object properties. changes the hatch pattern of the destination object to that of the source object. You can use a material as is or modify it. The GLOBAL material is a set of default material values.

where you can specify the name of the materials library (MLI) file in which AutoCAD saves the Current Drawing list. The default library is render. Preview Displays a sample of the material selected in the Current Library list or Current Drawing list. A material can be in the drawing but not assigned to any object. In the Current Drawing list. Selecting materials in the Current Library list removes selection from all items selected in the Current Drawing list and vice versa. 534 | MATLIB . You can preview only one material at a time. you can save or purge materials.mli. AutoCAD displays the Reconcile Imported Material Names dialog box (see page 535). which lists MLI files. If you try to import a material already in the Current Drawing list. where you can specify the name of the materials library (MLI) file in which AutoCAD saves the Current Library list. Purge Deletes all unattached materials from the Current Drawing list.Current Drawing Displays the materials currently in the drawing. Import Adds one or more materials selected in the Current Library list to the Current Drawing list. Such a material is called unattached or unassigned. Use the list to specify whether the sample is applied to a sphere or a cube. Save Saves the changes to the MLI file in the current folder. Save As Displays the Library File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box). Current Library Displays the materials in the currently selected library file. Save As Displays the Library File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box). Open Displays the Library File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box).

Options Determines how AutoCAD treats the material you are reconciling and the objects that are currently attached to that material. If you try to export a material already in the Current Library list. Delete Deletes materials selected in the Current Drawing list or the Current Library list.Export Adds one or more materials selected in the Current Drawing list to the Current Library list. Reconcile Imported Material Names Dialog Box Creates and modifies imported material names. Transfer Attachments Attaches the object to the material being imported from the library. AutoCAD keeps the object attached to the material in the Current Drawing list. AutoCAD displays the Reconcile Exported Material Names dialog box (see page 536). MATLIB | 535 . Overwrite Existing Material Replaces the material in the Current Drawing list with the selected material in the Current Library list. If this option is cleared. AutoCAD adds the library material to the Current Drawing list. If this option is cleared and you enter different names for the materials under Old Material in List and New Material from Library.

OK to All Reconciles all materials and closes the dialog box. If this option is cleared and you enter different names under Old Material in Library and New Material from List. Options Determines how AutoCAD treats the material you are reconciling and the objects selected. you can edit the name of the material. If Overwrite Existing Material is not selected. Reconcile Exported Material Names Dialog Box Creates and modifies exported material names. If Overwrite Existing Material is not selected. You can always edit this name. New Material from Library Displays the name of the material in the Current Library list. Overwrite Existing Material Replaces the material in the Current Library list with the selected material in the Current Drawing list. Old Material in List Displays the name of the material in the Current Drawing list. 536 | MATLIB . AutoCAD adds the material to the Current Library list. OK Reconciles only the last selected material name and closes the dialog box. you must enter a different name for the new material.Material Names Modifies the names of the old and new materials that are being imported.

If Overwrite Existing Material is not selected. You can always edit this name. and provides information about ObjectARX™ applications. If Overwrite Existing Material is not selected. MEASURE | 537 . Old Material in Library Displays the name of the material in the Current Library list. New Material from List Displays the name of the material in the Current Drawing list. edits. You can use the Node object snap to draw an object by snapping to the point objects. OK Reconciles only the last selected material name and closes the dialog box. Markers are always placed on the object.Material Names Modifies the names of the old and new materials that are being exported. You can then remove the points by entering erase previous. regardless of the elevation settings. AutoCAD places the markers in the user coordinate system (UCS) of the object being measured (except for 3D polylines in the current UCS). MEASURE Places point objects or blocks at measured intervals on an object Draw menu: Point ➤ Measure Command line: measure Select object to measure: Specify length of segment or [Block]: Specify a distance or enter b The points or blocks drawn by MEASURE are placed in the Previous selection set. unloads. and detaches rendering materials. so you can choose them all by entering p at the next Select Objects prompt. Commands ARX loads. you must enter a different name for the new material. OK to All Reconciles all materials and closes the dialog box. See Also See “Use Materials Libraries” in the User’s Guide. RMAT creates. you can edit the name of the material. attaches.

on its circumference. Measurement of closed polylines starts at their initial vertex (the first one drawn). you can make the points easier to see by changing their appearance with the PDMODE system variable. segment length select polyline Block measure every 0. If the snap rotation angle is 0. with the PDMODE system variable set to 35. Length of Segment Places point objects at the specified interval along the selected object. starting at the endpoint closest to the point you used to select the object. Measurement of circles starts at the angle from the center set as the current snap rotation angle. then the measurement of the circle starts to the right of center.5 units Places blocks at a specified interval along the selected object.If you use point objects for the markers. Enter name of block to insert: Enter the name of a block currently defined in the drawing Align block with object? [Yes/No] <Y>: Enter y or n or press ENTER 538 | MEASURE . segment length selected object The illustration shows how MEASURE marks 0.5-unit distances along a polyline.

If the block has variable attributes. these attributes are not included. and drawn tangent to. System Variables PDMODE controls the appearance of the point objects. the block is rotated about its insertion point so that its horizontal lines are aligned with. Enter or select a menu file name. AutoCAD inserts the block at the specified interval. MENU | 539 . See Also See “Specify Measured Intervals on Objects” in the User’s Guide. You can create a customized menu file and use MENU to load the file for use in AutoCAD. See Also For information about AutoCAD menus.If you enter y. PDSIZE controls the size of the point objects. Specify length of segment: After you specify the segment length. Command line: menu The Select Menu File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box) is displayed. DIVIDE places evenly spaced point objects or blocks along the length or perimeter of a selected object. MENU Loads a menu file A menu file is a text file containing the AutoCAD command strings and menu syntax that define the menu labels and menu macros. accelerator keys. screen menus. Commands BLOCK creates blocks of objects. and digitizer tablet menus. shortcut menus. pointing device button menus. When you press ENTER or choose Open. the block is always inserted with a 0 rotation angle. the object being measured. A menu file can contain a section for each of these menu areas: drop-down menus. see “The Command Window” in the User’s Guide. image tile menus. the named file is loaded into AutoCAD. If you enter n. toolbars.

MENUUNLOAD unloads partial menu files. you can customize the AutoCAD menu bar by adding or deleting drop-down menus. Menu Groups Tab (Menu Customization Dialog Box) Loads or unloads specified menus. System Variables MENUNAME stores the name of the currently loaded menu file. When FILEDIA is set to 0. such as acad. After you load the partial menus. From each menu group. Menu Customization Dialog Box Controls the view of menu groups and menu bars for the AutoCAD window. Commands MENULOAD loads partial menu files. you can access each drop-down menu that resides in its associated menu file. see “The Menu File” in the Customization Guide.For information about creating and modifying menu files. MENUECHO determines whether menu items and system prompts are displayed on the command line. MENULOAD Loads partial menu files MENULOAD adds partial menu files to an existing base menu file.mnu. Tools menu: Customize ➤ Menus Command line: menuload The Menu Customization dialog box is displayed (see page 540). Each menu file (base and partial) has an associated menu group name. 540 | MENULOAD . MENULOAD displays a prompt on the command line (see page 543).

MENULOAD | 541 . Browse Displays the Select Menu File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box). in which you can select a menu file to load. Replace All Removes all existing menu groups from the Menu Groups list when you load a new file menu.Menu Groups Lists the currently loaded menu files. Load Loads the file specified under File Name. File Name Specifies the file to load when you choose Load. Unload Unloads the menu group selected in the Menu Groups list. You can either enter the file name or choose Browse to display the Select Menu File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box).

542 | Menu Group Displays a selected menu file in the Menu Group list.Menu Bar Tab (Menu Customization Dialog Box) Adds or deletes menus from the menu bar. Insert Inserts the menu selected in the Menus list above the selected menu in the Menu Bar list. The menu at the top of the list corresponds to the leftmost menu on the menu bar in the AutoCAD window. If no menu is selected in the Menu Bar list. MENULOAD . The menu at the bottom of the list corresponds to the rightmost drop-down menu. Remove Removes the selected menu from the Menu Bar list. the menu selected in the Menus list is inserted at the top of the Menu Bar list. Menus Lists all the menus from the menu group specified in the Menu Group list. Remove All Removes all menus from the menu bar in the AutoCAD window. Menu Bar Lists all the menus loaded in the AutoCAD window.

MENULOAD Command Line When FILEDIA is set to 0 (off). Commands MENULOAD loads partial menu files. MENULOAD displays the following prompt on the command line. Enter the name of the MENUGROUP to unload: Enter a name See Also See “The Menu File” in the Customization Guide. MENUUNLOAD | 543 . Enter name of menu file to load: Enter a file name See Also See “The Menu File” in the Customization Guide. which has the same options as MENULOAD. MENUUNLOAD Unloads partial menu files Command line: menuunload The Menu Customization dialog box (see page 540) is displayed. The only difference between the two commands is in the command line prompts. Commands MENUUNLOAD unloads partial menu files. MENUUNLOAD displays the following prompt on the command line. When FILEDIA is set to 0 (off).

or enter ~ to display the Select Drawing File dialog box Note You cannot precede the name of a block with an asterisk to explode the block’s objects during insertion. enter an option. If you enter one of the options. AutoCAD displays the following prompt: 544 | MINSERT . as you can with INSERT. Command line: minsert Enter block name or [?]: Enter a name. Specify insertion point or [Scale/X/Y/Z/Rotate/PScale/PX/PY/PZ/PRotate]: Specify a point or enter an option Options at the insertion point preset the scale and rotation of a block before you specify its position. respond to the AutoCAD prompts by specifying a distance for the scale options or an angle for rotation. Enter Y scale factor <use X scale factor>: press ENTER to use the same scale factor Specify rotation angle <0>: Enter a value or The rotation angle sets the angle of the individual block inserts and also sets the angle of the entire array. or press ENTER X Scale Factor Sets X and Y scale factors. Enter number of rows (---) <1>: Enter a positive value Enter number of columns (| | |) <1>: Enter a positive value If you specify more than one row. enter ? to list the currently defined blocks in the drawing. specify opposite corner. Presetting is useful for dragging a block using a scale factor and a rotation other than 1 or 0.MINSERT Inserts multiple instances of a block in a rectangular array Blocks inserted using MINSERT cannot be exploded. Enter X scale factor. or [Corner/XYZ] <1>: Enter a value. Insertion Point Specifies a location for the blocks.

Enter number of rows (---) <1>: Enter a positive value Enter number of columns (| | |) <1>: Enter a positive value If you specify more than one row. or specify two points to define a box whose width and height represent the distance between rows and between columns If you specify more than one column and no unit cell.Enter distance between rows or specify unit cell (---): Enter a value. AutoCAD displays the following prompt: Specify distance between columns ( | | | ): Enter a value or specify a distance MINSERT | 545 . or specify two points to define a box whose width and height represent the distance between rows and between columns If you specify more than one column and no unit cell. AutoCAD displays the following prompt: Enter distance between rows or specify unit cell (---): Enter a value. AutoCAD displays the following prompt: Specify distance between columns ( | | | ): Enter a value or specify a distance Corner Sets the scale factor by using the block insertion point and the opposite corner. Specify opposite corner: Specify a point Specify rotation angle <0>: The rotation angle sets the angle of the individual block inserts and also sets the angle of the entire array.

The scale for the Z axis is the absolute value of the specified scale factor. AutoCAD displays the following prompt: Specify distance between columns ( | | | ): Enter a value or specify a distance Scale Sets the scale factor for the X. or specify two points to define a box whose width and height represent the distance between rows and between columns If you specify more than one column and no unit cell. The specified point and the block insertion point determine the X and Y scale factors.XYZ Sets X. and Z scale factors. Specify Y scale factor or <use X scale factor>: Enter a value or press ENTER to use the same scale factor Enter Z scale factor <use X scale factor>: Enter a value or press ENTER to use the same scale factor Specify rotation angle <0>: The rotation angle sets the angle of the individual block inserts and also sets the angle of the entire array. Enter number of rows (---) <1>: Enter a positive value Enter number of columns (| | |) <1>: Enter a positive value If you specify more than one row. Y. Y. Specify X scale factor or [Corner] <1>: Enter a value or press ENTER to use the same scale factor If you enter c. you specify a corner point. AutoCAD displays the following prompt: Enter distance between rows or specify unit cell (---): Enter a value. Specify scale factor for XYZ axes: Enter a nonzero value Specify insertion point: Specify rotation angle <0>: 546 | MINSERT . and Z axes.

AutoCAD displays the following prompt: Specify distance between columns ( | | | ): Enter a value or specify a distance MINSERT | 547 . AutoCAD displays the following prompt: Specify distance between columns ( | | | ): Enter a value or specify a distance X Sets the X scale factor. Enter number of rows (---) <1>: Enter a positive value Enter number of columns (| | |) <1>: Enter a positive value If you specify more than one row. or specify two points to define a box whose width and height represent the distance between rows and between columns If you specify more than one column and no unit cell. AutoCAD displays the following prompt: Enter distance between rows or specify unit cell (---): Enter a value.The rotation angle sets the angle of the individual block inserts and also sets the angle of the entire array. Enter number of rows (---) <1>: Enter a positive value Enter number of columns (| | |) <1>: Enter a positive value If you specify more than one row. AutoCAD displays the following prompt: Enter distance between rows or specify unit cell (---): Enter a value. Specify X scale factor: Enter a nonzero value Specify insertion point: Specify rotation angle <0>: The rotation angle sets the angle of the individual block inserts and also sets the angle of the entire array. or specify two points to define a box whose width and height represent the distance between rows and between columns If you specify more than one row.

Enter number of rows (---) <1>: Enter a positive value Enter number of columns (| | |) <1>: Enter a positive value If you specify more than one row. Specify Y scale factor: Enter a nonzero value Specify insertion point: Specify rotation angle <0>: The rotation angle sets the angle of the individual block inserts and also sets the angle of the entire array. AutoCAD displays the following prompt: Enter distance between rows or specify unit cell (---): Enter a value. Enter number of rows (---) <1>: Enter a positive value Enter number of columns (| | |) <1>: Enter a positive value 548 | MINSERT .Y Sets the Y scale factor. AutoCAD displays the following prompt: Specify distance between columns ( | | | ): Enter a value or specify a distance Z Sets the Z scale factor. Specify Z scale factor: Enter a nonzero value Specify insertion point: Specify rotation angle <0>: The rotation angle sets the angle of the individual block inserts and also sets the angle of the entire array. or specify two points to define a box whose width and height represent the distance between rows and between columns If you specify more than one column and no unit cell.

enter an option or press ENTER X Scale Factor Sets the X scale factor. or [Corner/XYZ] <1>: Enter a value. specify opposite corner. AutoCAD displays the following prompt: Specify distance between columns ( | | | ): Enter a value or specify a distance Rotate Sets the angle of insertion for both the individual blocks and the entire array. AutoCAD displays the following prompt: Enter distance between rows or specify unit cell (---): Enter a value or specify a distance If you specify more than one column and no unit cell. AutoCAD displays the following prompt: Enter distance between rows or specify unit cell (---): Enter a value. Enter Y scale factor <use X scale factor>: Enter a value or press ENTER to use the same scale factor Enter number of rows (---) <1>: Enter a positive value Enter number of columns (| | |) <1>: Enter a positive value If you specify more than one row. AutoCAD displays the following prompt: Specify distance between columns ( | | | ): Enter a value or specify a distance MINSERT | 549 . or specify two points to define a box whose width and height represent the distance between rows and between columns If you specify more than one column and no unit cell. Specify rotation angle <0>: Specify insertion point: Enter X scale factor.If you specify more than one row.

Corner Sets the scale factor by the specified point and the block insertion point. AutoCAD displays the following prompt: Enter distance between rows or specify unit cell (---): Enter a value or specify a distance If you specify more than one column and no unit cell. If you specify a corner point. AutoCAD displays the following prompt: Specify distance between columns ( | | | ): Enter a value or specify a distance XYZ Specify X scale factor or [Corner] <1>: Specify a nonzero value. Enter Z scale factor <use X scale factor>: Enter a value or press ENTER to use the same scale factor Enter number of rows (---) <1>: Enter a positive value Enter number of columns (| | |) <1>: Enter a positive value If you specify more than one row. AutoCAD displays the following prompt: Enter distance between rows or specify unit cell (---): Enter a value or specify a distance If you specify more than one column and no unit cell. the specified point and the block insertion point determine the X and Y scale factors for the block. or press ENTER You can determine the X and Y scale factors by entering a scale factor value or by specifying a corner point. AutoCAD displays the following prompt: Specify distance between columns ( | | | ): Enter a value or specify a distance 550 | MINSERT . enter c. Specify opposite corner: Specify a point Enter number of rows (---) <1>: Enter a positive value Enter number of columns (| | |) <1>: Enter a positive value If you specify more than one row.

PY Sets the scale factor for the Y axis to control the display of the block as it is dragged into position.PScale Sets the scale factor for the X. Corner. Corner. Specify preview scale factor for XYZ axes: Enter a nonzero value Specify insertion point: Enter X scale factor. specify opposite corner. enter an option. enter an option. and XYZ options match those of the corresponding options under Rotate (see page 549). Corner. Y. Specify preview X scale factor: Enter a nonzero value Specify insertion point: Enter X scale factor. MINSERT | 551 . or [Corner/XYZ] <1>: Enter a value. or [Corner/XYZ] <1>: Enter a value. and Z axes to control the display of the block as it is dragged into position. or press ENTER The descriptions of the X Scale Factor. specify opposite corner. or press ENTER The descriptions of the X Scale Factor. or [Corner/XYZ] <1>: Enter a value. specify opposite corner. PX Sets the scale factor for the X axis to control the display of the block as it is dragged into position. enter an option. and XYZ options match those of the corresponding options under Rotate (see page 549). Specify preview Y scale factor: Enter a nonzero value Specify insertion point: Enter X scale factor. and XYZ options match those of the corresponding options under Rotate (see page 549). or press ENTER The descriptions of the X Scale Factor.

specify opposite corner. 552 | MINSERT . Corner. specify opposite corner. See Also See “Insert Blocks. enter an option. and XYZ options match those of the corresponding options under Rotate (see page 549). Specify preview rotation angle: Specify insertion point: Enter X scale factor. Corner. Commands ARRAY creates multiple copies of selected objects in a rectangular or polar pattern.” in the User’s Guide. INSERT places a block or drawing inside the current drawing. enter an option. or [Corner/XYZ] <1>: Enter a value. or press ENTER The descriptions of the X Scale Factor. PRotate Sets the rotation angle of the block as it is dragged into position. or [Corner/XYZ] <1>: Enter a value.PZ Sets the scale factor for the Z axis to control the display of the block as it is dragged into position. and XYZ options match those of the corresponding options under Rotate (see page 549). Specify preview Z scale factor: Enter a nonzero value Specify insertion point: Enter X scale factor. or press ENTER The descriptions of the X Scale Factor.

When MIRRTEXT is off (0). Delete source objects? [Yes/No] <N>: Enter y or n. No Places the reflected image into the drawing and retains the original objects. To manage the reflection properties of text objects. MIRROR | 553 . The default setting of MIRRTEXT is 1 (on). before mirroring after mirroring (MIRRTEXT=1) after mirroring (MIRRTEXT=0) See Also See “Mirror Objects” in the User’s Guide. System Variables MIRRTEXT controls whether text is reflected with the MIRROR command. which causes a text object to be mirrored just like any other object.MIRROR Creates a mirror image copy of objects Modify toolbar: Modify menu: Mirror Command line: mirror objects selected 2 1 Select objects: Use an object selection method and press ENTER to finish Specify first point of mirror line: Specify a point (1) Specify second point of mirror line: Specify a point (2) The two specified points become the endpoints of a line about which the selected objects are reflected. In 3D. text is not mirrored. this line orients a mirroring plane perpendicular to the XY plane of the user coordinate system (UCS) containing the mirror line. use the MIRRTEXT system variable. or press ENTER original objects deleted original objects retained Yes Places the reflected image into the drawing and deletes the original objects.

If you enter n or press ENTER . Specify point on mirror plane: Specify a point (1) Specify point on Z-axis (normal) of mirror plane: Specify a point (2) Delete source objects? [Yes/No] <N>: Enter y or n. arc or 2D-polyline segment: Delete source objects? [Yes/No] <N>: Enter y or n.MIRROR3D Creates a mirror image of objects about a plane Modify menu: 3D Operation ➤ Mirror 3D Command line: mirror3d Select objects: Use an object selection method and press ENTER to finish Specify first point of mirror plane (3 points) or [Object/Last/Zaxis/View/XY/YZ/ ZX/3points] <3points>: Enter an option. or press ENTER 554 | MIRROR3D . or press ENTER Object Uses the plane of a selected planar object as the mirroring plane. or press ENTER If you enter y. If you enter n or press ENTER . Delete source objects? [Yes/No] <N>: Enter y or n. select object as mirroring plane Last Mirrors the selected objects about the last defined mirroring plane. Z Axis Defines the mirroring plane by a point on the plane and a point normal to the plane. AutoCAD places the reflected object into the drawing and deletes the original objects. AutoCAD places the reflected object into the drawing and retains the original objects. AutoCAD places the reflected object into the drawing and deletes the original objects. AutoCAD places the reflected object into the drawing and retains the original objects. Select a circle. or press ENTER If you enter y. specify a point.

AutoCAD places the reflected object into the drawing and retains the original objects.0>: Specify a point or press ENTER Delete source objects? [Yes/No] <N>: Enter y or n. YZ. or press ENTER MIRROR3D | 555 . AutoCAD places the reflected object into the drawing and retains the original objects. or press ENTER If you enter y. or press ENTER If you enter y. Specify point on view plane <0. or ZX) through a specified point.2 If you enter y. AutoCAD places the reflected object into the drawing and deletes the original objects. If you enter n or press ENTER . XY/YZ/ZX Aligns the mirroring plane with one of the standard planes (XY.0>: Specify a point (1) or press ENTER 1 XY 1 1 YZ ZX Delete source objects? [Yes/No] <N>: Enter y or n. 1 View Aligns the mirroring plane with the viewing plane of the current viewport through a point. 3 Points Defines the mirroring plane by three points. Specify first point on mirror plane: Enter a point (1) Specify second point on mirror plane: Enter a point (2) Specify third point on mirror plane: Enter a point (3) Delete source objects? [Yes/No] <N>: Enter y or n. If you select this option by specifying a point. Specify point on (XY.0. AutoCAD places the reflected object into the drawing and retains the original objects. ZX) plane <0. If you enter n or press ENTER . AutoCAD does not display the First Point on Mirror Plane prompt. AutoCAD places the reflected object into the drawing and deletes the original objects. YZ.0. If you enter n or press ENTER . AutoCAD places the reflected object into the drawing and deletes the original objects.

MLEDIT Edits multiple parallel lines Multiple parallel lines are called multilines. The dialog box displays sample images in four columns. AutoCAD places the reflected object into the drawing and retains the original objects.1 If you enter y. If you enter n or press ENTER . the third governs corner joints and vertices. MIRROR creates a mirror image of objects about a mir- roring plane perpendicular to the XY plane of the UCS containing a specified mirror line. 2 Commands ROTATE3D rotates an object about an arbitrary 3D axis. 3 See Also See “Mirror Objects” in the User’s Guide. Multiline Edit Tools Dialog Box Creates and modifies multiline patterns. 556 | MLEDIT . AutoCAD places the reflected object into the drawing and deletes the original objects. MLEDIT controls intersections between multilines. and the fourth governs multilines to be cut or joined. The first column governs multilines that cross. Modify menu: Object ➤ Multiline Command line: mledit AutoCAD displays the Multiline Edit Tools dialog box. the second governs multilines that form a tee.

AutoCAD displays the following prompt: Select first mline: Select a multiline Select second mline: Select the intersecting multiline AutoCAD completes the open-cross intersection and displays the following prompt: Select first mline or [Undo]: Select another multiline or enter u First Mline Edits another multiline. Closed Cross Creates a closed-cross intersection between two multilines. Open Cross Creates an open-cross intersection between two multilines. AutoCAD breaks all elements of the first multiline and only the outside elements of the second multiline. After you select the sample image. AutoCAD displays the Select First Mline prompt. second mline selected result Undoes the closed-cross intersection. MLEDIT | 557 . After you select the sample image. AutoCAD displays the following prompt: Select first mline: Select the foreground multiline Select second mline: Select the intersecting multiline AutoCAD completes the closed-cross intersection and displays the following prompt: Select first mline or [Undo]: Select another multiline or enter u First Mline first mline selected Undo Edits another multiline. AutoCAD displays the Select Second Mline prompt.You can click any of the image samples to display a brief description in the lower-left corner of the dialog box. AutoCAD displays the Select Second Mline prompt.

Closed Tee Creates a closed-tee intersection between two multilines. AutoCAD displays the Select First Mline prompt. The order in which you select the multilines is not important. second mline selected result Undoes the merged-cross intersection. After you select the sample image. Merged Cross Creates a merged-cross intersection between two multilines.first mline selected Undo second mline selected result Undoes the open-cross intersection. After you select the sample image. AutoCAD displays the Select First Mline prompt. AutoCAD displays the following prompt: 558 | MLEDIT . AutoCAD displays the following prompt: Select first mline: Select a multiline Select second mline: Select the intersecting multiline AutoCAD completes the merged-cross intersection and displays the following prompt: Select first mline or [Undo]: First Mline first mline selected Undo Select another multiline or enter u Edits another multiline. AutoCAD trims or extends the first multiline to its intersection with the second multiline. AutoCAD displays the Select Second Mline prompt.

Open Tee Creates an open-tee intersection between two multilines. AutoCAD displays the Select Second Mline prompt. second mline selected result Undoes the closed-tee intersection. second mline selected result MLEDIT | 559 .Select first mline: Select the multiline to trim Select second mline: Select the intersecting multiline AutoCAD completes the closed-tee intersection and displays the following prompt: Select first mline (or Undo): Select another multiline or enter u First Mline first mline selected Undo Edits another multiline. AutoCAD trims or extends the first multiline to its intersection with the second multiline. AutoCAD displays the Select Second Mline prompt. After you select the sample image. AutoCAD displays the Select First Mline prompt. AutoCAD displays the following prompt: Select first mline: Select the multiline to trim or extend Select second mline: Select the intersecting multiline AutoCAD completes the open-tee intersection and displays the following prompt: Select first mline (or Undo): Select another multiline or enter u First Mline first mline selected Edits another multiline.

Corner Joint Creates a corner joint between multilines. AutoCAD displays the Select First Mline prompt. AutoCAD trims or extends the multilines to their intersection. AutoCAD displays the Select Second Mline prompt. Merged Tee Creates a merged-tee intersection between two multilines. After you select the sample image. AutoCAD displays the following prompt: Select first mline: Select the multiline to trim or extend Select second mline: Select the second half of the corner AutoCAD completes the corner joint and displays the following prompt: Select first mline (or Undo): Select another multiline or enter u First Mline 560 | MLEDIT Edits another multiline. AutoCAD displays the following prompt: Select first mline: Select the multiline to trim or extend Select second mline: Select the intersecting multiline AutoCAD completes the merged-tee intersection and displays the following prompt: Select first mline (or Undo): Select another multiline or enter u First Mline first mline selected Undo Edits another multiline. AutoCAD trims or extends the multiline to its intersection with the other multiline. After you select the sample image. AutoCAD displays the Select First Mline prompt. second mline selected result Undoes the merged-tee intersection.Undo Undoes the open-tee intersection. . AutoCAD displays the Select Second Mline prompt.

After you select the sample image. AutoCAD displays the Select Mline prompt. AutoCAD displays the Select First Mline prompt. mline selected Undo result Removes the added vertex. Delete Vertex Deletes a vertex from a multiline. Add Vertex Adds a vertex to a multiline. AutoCAD displays the following prompt: Select mline: Select a multiline MLEDIT | 561 . AutoCAD displays the Select Mline prompt again.first mline selected Undo second mline selected result Undoes the corner joint. After you select the sample image. AutoCAD displays the following prompt: Select mline: Select a multiline AutoCAD adds the vertex at the selected point and displays the following prompt: Select mline or [Undo]: Select another multiline or enter u Mline Edits another multiline.

AutoCAD displays the Select Mline prompt again. mline selected Undo result Restores the deleted vertex. second point selected result Undoes the cut. After you select the sample image. AutoCAD displays the Select Mline prompt again.AutoCAD deletes the vertex nearest to the selected point and displays the following prompt: Select mline or [Undo]: Select another multiline or enter u Mline Edits another multiline. AutoCAD displays the Select Mline prompt. Cut Single Cuts a selected element of a multiline. AutoCAD displays the following prompt: Select mline: Select a multiline AutoCAD uses the selection point on the multiline as the first cut point and displays the following prompt: Select second point: Specify the second cut point on the multiline AutoCAD cuts the element and displays the following prompt: Select mline or [Undo]: Select another multiline or enter u Mline mline selected Undo 562 | MLEDIT Edits another multiline. AutoCAD displays the Select Mline prompt. .

Weld All Rejoins multiline segments that have been cut. AutoCAD displays the following prompt: Select mline: Select a multiline AutoCAD uses the selected point on the multiline as the start of the weld and displays the following prompt: Select second point: Specify the end of the weld on the multiline MLEDIT | 563 . AutoCAD displays the following prompt: Select mline: Select a multiline AutoCAD uses the selected point on the multiline as the first cut point and displays the following prompt: Select second point: Specify the second cut point on the multiline AutoCAD cuts all elements of the multiline and displays the following prompt: Select mline or [Undo]: Select another multiline or enter u Mline mline selected Undo Edits another multiline. After you select the sample image. After you select the sample image.Cut All Cuts a multiline in two. second point selected result Undoes the cut. AutoCAD displays the Select Mline prompt. AutoCAD displays the Select Mline prompt again.

CMLSTYLE stores the name of the current multiline style. See Also See “Modify Multilines” in the User’s Guide. Draw menu: Multiline Command line: mline Current settings: Justification = current. Commands MLINE creates multilines. MLINE Creates multiple parallel lines Multiple parallel lines are called multilines. and sets multiline styles. AutoCAD displays the Select Mline prompt again. Scale = current. mline selected Undo second point selected result Undoes the weld. loads. System Variables CMLJUST stores the justification of the current multiline. CMLSCALE stores the scale of the current multiline.AutoCAD welds the multiline and displays the following prompt: Select mline or [Undo]: Select another multiline or enter u Mline Edits another multiline. MLSTYLE creates. AutoCAD displays the Select Mline prompt. Style = current Specify start point or [Justification/Scale/STyle]: Specify a point or enter an option 564 | MLINE .

so that the line with the most negative offset is at the specified points.Start Point Specifies the next vertex of the multiline. Zero Draws the multiline with its origin centered at the cursor. so that the line with the most positive offset is at the specified points. Close Closes the multiline by joining the last segments with the first segments. Bottom Draws the multiline above the cursor. AutoCAD displays a prompt that includes the Close option. Specify next point: Specify next point or [Undo]: Specify a point or enter u If you create a multiline with two or more segments. zero Scale bottom Controls the overall width of the multiline. Justification Determines how the multiline is drawn between the points you specify. Specify next point or [Close/Undo]: Specify a point or enter an option Next Point Draws a multiline segment to the specified point using the current multiline style and continues to prompt for points.0 is at the specified points. AutoCAD redisplays the previous prompt. Enter justification type [Top/Zero/Bottom] <current>: Enter an option or press ENTER top Top Draws the multiline below the cursor. This scale does not affect linetype scale. Enter mline scale <current>: Enter a scale or press ENTER MLINE | 565 . Undo Undoes the last vertex point on the multiline. so that the MLSTYLE Element Properties offset of 0.

For information about the multiline style definition. MLSTYLE also controls the background color and the end caps of each multiline. Commands MLEDIT edits multilines. Format menu: Multiline Style Command line: mlstyle AutoCAD displays the Multiline Styles dialog box. A scale factor of 0 collapses the multiline into a single line. See “Draw Multiple-Line Objects” in the User’s Guide. and see MLSTYLE. MLSTYLE Defines a style for multiple parallel lines Multilines comprise up to 16 lines called elements. Enter mline style name or [?]: Enter a name or enter ? Style Name Specifies the name of a style that has already been loaded or that’s defined in a multiline library (MLN) file you’ve created. MLSTYLE creates. ?—List Styles Lists the loaded multiline styles. System Variables CMLJUST stores the justification of the current multiline. A scale factor of 2 produces a multiline twice as wide as the style definition. and sets multiline styles. 566 | MLSTYLE . scale at 1 scale at 2 Style Specifies a style to use for the multiline. loads. A negative scale value also alters the scale by the absolute value. A negative scale factor flips the order of the offset line—the smallest on top when the multiline is drawn from left to right. CMLSCALE stores the scale of the current multiline. CMLSTYLE stores the name of the current multiline style. See Also See “Draw Multiple-Line Objects” in the User’s Guide.The scale factor is based on the width established in the multiline style definition. The multiline style controls the number of elements and the properties of each element. see MLSTYLE.

Current Displays and sets the current multiline style. the name of the current style is selected. If you try to edit the options in either the Element Properties dialog box (see page 569) or the Multiline Properties dialog box (see page 570). the options are unavailable. AutoCAD displays externally referenced multiline style names using the same syntax it uses for other externally dependent nongraphical objects. The list of multiline styles can include externally referenced multiline styles—that is. makes them current. See “Overview of External References” in the User’s Guide. and renames them. The Multiline Styles dialog box displays multiline style names. You can also create or edit a description of a style. MLSTYLE | 567 . loads them from a file. and saves. To edit an existing multiline style. Note You cannot edit the element and multiline properties of the STANDARD multiline style or any multiline style that is being used in the drawing. If there are multiple styles. multiline styles that exist in an externally referenced drawing (xref).Multiline Styles Dialog Box Defines the style and properties of multilines. adds. you must do so before you draw any multilines in that style. Select a name from the list to make it current.

modify. enter a name and then choose Save. The element and multiline properties are unavailable until you enter a new name and make it current by choosing Add. Rename Renames a multiline style. AutoCAD saves the definition in the MLN file you specify. Description Adds a description to a multiline style. The default file name is acad. To make a copy of the current style. . in which you can load multiline styles from a specified MLN file. or delete the default STANDARD multiline style. Load Displays the Load Multiline Styles dialog box (see page 569).mln. You cannot rename. Element Properties Displays the Element Properties dialog box (see page 569). enter a name and choose Rename. Enter a name and then choose Rename. the new style definition is added to the file and existing definitions are not erased. If you specify an MLN file that already exists. Enter a name and then choose Save. Enter up to 255 characters. Enter a name and choose Add. and then save the multiline style to a multiline library (MLN) file. You cannot edit the element properties of an existing multiline style. Multiline style names adhere to the naming conventions for named objects. Add Adds the multiline style in Name to the Current list. including spaces. Multiline Properties 568 | MLSTYLE Displays the Multiline Properties dialog box (see page 570).Name Names a new multiline style or renames one. Save Saves or copies a multiline style. To rename a style.

To load another multiline style. List Lists the multiline styles available in the current library file.mln does not exist. Not available until color or linetype has been selected for a multiline style other than STANDARD. The default file name is acad.mln. and linetype. File Displays a standard file selection dialog box in which you can locate and select another library file. Element Properties Dialog Box Sets the properties. MLSTYLE | 569 .Load Multiline Styles Dialog Box Loads a multiline style from an MLN file. choose File to specify another file or file location. The line elements are always displayed in descending order of their offsets. Elements Displays all the line elements in the current multiline style. If acad. color. of new and existing multiline elements. such as the number. Add Adds a new line element to the multiline style. or if it exists but AutoCAD cannot find it. Offset Specifies the offset for line elements in the multiline style.0). color. select a style from the list and choose OK. Delete Deletes a line element from the multiline style. and linetype. offset. Each line element in the style is defined by its offset from the multiline origin (0.

AutoCAD displays the Select Linetype Properties dialog box. the start and end caps and their angle. Linetype Displays and sets the linetype for line elements in the multiline style. each element offset from 0. Multiline Properties Dialog Box Sets the multiline properties. such as the display of segment joints.0 0.0 Color Displays and sets the color for line elements in the multiline style. AutoCAD displays the Select Color dialog box (see page 169).45 a four-element multiline. choose Load. and the background color. Select a linetype from this dialog box. When you choose Linetype.1 –0.0. which displays loaded linetypes. and Color Book colors. You can use the Select Color dialog box to define the color of objects by selecting from the 255 AutoCAD Color Index (ACI) colors. When you choose Color or the color swatch. True Colors.1 –0. To load a new linetype. 570 | MLSTYLE . AutoCAD displays the Load or Reload Linetypes dialog box (see page 509) for loading selected linetypes into the drawing from linetype files.3 –0.

Display Joints off Display Joints on Caps Controls the start and end caps of the multiline.Display Joints Controls the display of the joints at the vertices of each multiline segment. without Outer Arc with Outer Arc MLSTYLE | 571 . Line Creates a straight line across each end of the multiline. without Line Outer Arc with Line Creates an arc between the outermost elements of the multiline. A joint is also known as a miter.

AutoCAD displays the Select Color dialog box (see page 169). the center line is unconnected. CMLSCALE stores the scale of the current multiline. inner arcs connect elements 2 and 6 and elements 3 and 5. 572 | MLSTYLE . Commands MLEDIT edits multilines. On Turns background fill on. When you choose Color or the color swatch. If there are seven elements. inner arcs connect elements 2 and 5 and elements 3 and 4. without Inner Arc Angle with Inner Arc Specifies the angle of the end caps. MLINE creates multilines. If there’s an odd number of elements.Inner Arcs Creates an arc between pairs of inner elements. System Variables CMLJUST stores the justification of the current multiline. See Also See “Modify Multilines” in the User’s Guide. Element 4 is left unconnected. Color Displays and sets the color of the background fill. For example. if there are six elements. CMLSTYLE stores the name of the current multiline style. without Angle with Angle Fill Controls the background fill of the multiline.

you can choose a layout tab to begin designing a layout environment from which to plot. Once you’ve completed your drawing. System Variables LAYOUTREGENCTL specifies how the display list is updated in the Model and layout tabs. MOVE Displaces objects a specified distance in a specified direction Modify toolbar: Modify menu: Move Shortcut menu: Select the objects to move. Command line: move Select objects: Use an object selection method and press ENTER when you finish Specify base point or displacement: Specify a base point (1) Specify second point of displacement or <use first point as displacement>: Specify a point (2) or press ENTER MODEL | 573 . Note The Model tab replaces the TILE button that appeared on the status bar in earlier releases of AutoCAD. use the LAYOUTREGENCTL system variable to control how the display list is updated. right-click in the drawing area. you can create drawings in model space. and you can create model viewports to display various views of your drawing.MODEL Switches from a layout tab to the Model tab Command line: model On the Model tab. The Model tab automatically sets the TILEMODE system variable to 1. See Also See “Work in Paper Space and Model Space” in the User’s Guide. and choose Move. For possible performance gains when you switch between layout tabs or between the Model tab and a layout tab.

For example. MREDO . MREDO Reverses the effects of several previous UNDO or U commands Reverses the action of multiple UNDO commands.Z displacement. Commands COPY duplicates objects.3 for the base point and press ENTER at the next prompt. the object moves 2 units in the X direction and 3 units in the Y direction from its current position. Last Reverses only the last action. If you press ENTER at the Specify Second Point of Displacement prompt. All Reverses all previous actions. See Also See “Move Objects” in the User’s Guide. To redo more than one action at a time. and then select the last in the sequence of actions you want to redo.Y. click the arrow next to the Redo button on the Standard toolbar.1 2 object selected object moved The two points you specify define a displacement vector that indicates how far the selected objects are to be moved and in what direction. or press ENTER 574 | Number of Actions Reverses the specified number of actions. Standard toolbar: Command line: mredo Enter number of actions or [All/Last]: Specify an option. the first point is interpreted as relative X. if you specify 2. enter a positive number.

You use paper space (a layout tab) to create a finished layout of a drawing for plotting. Use the VSLIDE command to view slides. use a full screen that is set at the highest resolution when creating slides. You use model space (the Model tab) to do drafting and design work and to create two-dimensional drawings or three-dimensional models. See Also See “Prepare Slides for Image Tile Menus” in the Customization Guide. Utilities SLIDELIB creates slide library (SLB) files. or layers that are off or frozen. This utility is found in the AutoCAD Support directory. including all viewports and their contents. Commands VSLIDE displays slide files in the current viewport. are not included in the slide. MSLIDE makes a slide file of the paper space display. Enter a file name or select a slide (SLD) file from the list. In paper space. To avoid this situation. MSLIDE | 575 . In model space. black lines may appear interspersed among the lines of the shaded image. MSPACE Switches from paper space to a model space viewport AutoCAD operates in either model space or paper space. MSLIDE makes a slide file of the current viewport only. When you view slides of images shaded with the -SHADE command in a larger window or at a higher resolution than was used for creating the slide.MSLIDE Creates a slide file of the current model viewport or the current layout Command line: mslide The Create Slide File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box) is displayed. Off-screen portions of the drawing. A slide file is a raster image of a viewport. or the SLIDELIB utility to create a slide library.

VISRETAIN specifies precedence of settings for external reference layers. although not plotted. The text boundary. VPORTS creates a new viewport object and turns on existing viewport objects.When you are in a layout. Command line: mspace See Also See “Work in Paper Space and Model Space” in the User’s Guide. DIMLFAC controls scaling for linear dimensioning measurements. or displayed. 576 | MTEXT . printed. you can enter mspace on the command line to make the last viewport in the layout current. MAXACTVP specifies the maximum number of viewports to regenerate. Draw toolbar: Draw menu: Text ➤ Multiline Text Command line: mtext Current text style: current Text height: current Specify first corner: Specify opposite corner or [Height/Justify/Line spacing/Rotation/Style/Width]: After you specify the point for the opposite corner. VPLAYER sets the visibility for layers in specific viewports. You can switch to model space by doubleclicking a viewport. System Variables PSVPSCALE sets the default viewport scale factor applied to newly created viewports. regardless of the number of lines it contains. and you can switch to paper space by double-clicking an area of paper space. MTEXT Creates multiline text MTEXT creates paragraphs that fit within a boundary that defines the width of the paragraph and its location in the drawing. and then work in model space in that viewport within the layout. PSLTSCALE controls paper space linetype scaling. remains part of the object’s framework. the Multiline Text Editor is displayed. Each multiline text (mtext) object is a single object. Commands PSPACE switches from model space to paper space.

Stacking. and bold or italic attributes is overridden if you apply a new style to an existing multiline text object. MTEXT bypasses the Multiline Text Editor and displays additional prompts on the command line (see page 585). the text is displayed horizontally in the Multiline Text Editor. or if you enter -mtext at the Command prompt. Style Applies a text style to the multiline text object. and color attributes are retained in characters to which a new style is applied. underlining. MTEXT | 577 . The current style is saved in the TEXTSTYLE system variable. Text Formatting Toolbar Controls the text style for the multiline text object and the character formatting for selected text. Character formatting for font. height. text style user set tab stop font stack/unstack text text height text color ruler default tab stops paragraph indent marker first line indent marker save changes and close the editor The Multiline Text Editor includes a Text Formatting toolbar and a shortcut menu. Multiline Text Editor Creates or modifies multiline text objects and imports or pastes text from other files. If a style defined with a vertical effect is applied to an SHX font.If you specify one of the other options. Styles that have backward or upside-down effects are not applied.

and pound sign (#). Also. Italic Turns on and off italic formatting for new or selected text.dwg) showing each font is provided in the sample directory. carat (^). Text that contains the forward slash converts to center-justified fractional numbers. are used. Bold Turns on and off bold formatting for new or selected text. The 578 | MTEXT . for example. Redo Redoes actions in the Multiline Text Editor. Custom fonts or third-party fonts are displayed in the editor with Autodesk-supplied proxy fonts. including changes to either text content or text formatting. A sample drawing (truetype. This option is available only for characters using TrueType fonts. the slash is converted to a horizontal bar the length of the longer text string. When the stack characters.Font Specifies a font for new text or changes the font of selected text. fractions. Underline Turns on and off underlining for new or selected text. You can also use CTRL + Z . text that contains a carat converts to leftjustified tolerance values. the text height is the value stored in the TEXTSIZE system variable. By default. TrueType® fonts are listed by font family name. You can also use CTRL + Y . A multiline text object can contain characters of various heights. including changes to either text content or text formatting. If the current text style has no fixed height. Undo Undoes actions in the Multiline Text Editor. This option is available only for characters using TrueType fonts. if the selected text contains stack characters. AutoCAD compiled shape (SHX) fonts are listed by the name of the file in which the fonts are stored. Text Height Sets the character height in drawing units for new text or changes the height of selected text. Stack Creates stacked text. the text to the left of the stack character is stacked on top of the text to the right. Text that contains the pound sign converts to a fraction separated by a diagonal bar the height of the two text strings. forward slash (/). unstacks text if stacked text is selected.

and Paste. Top Left is the default setting. or right-justified with respect to the left and right text boundaries. or bottom-aligned with respect to the top and bottom text boundaries. You can assign text the color associated with the layer it is on (BYLAYER) or the color of the block it is contained in (BYBLOCK). Indents and Tabs Displays the Indents and Tabs dialog box (see page 581). The options at the top of the menu are basic editing options: Undo. Text is center-. Spaces entered at the end of a line are included as part of the text and affect the justification of the line. in which you can specify a width for the multiline text object in drawing units. You can also click in the drawing outside the editor to save changes and exit the editor. top-.characters above the diagonal fraction bar are bottomright aligned. where you can set indentation for the paragraph and also set up tab stops. MTEXT | 579 . Set Mtext Width Displays the Set Mtext Width dialog box. Multiline Text Editor Shortcut Menu Provides standard editing options and options specific to multiline text (mtext). Right-click in the Multiline Text Editor to display the shortcut menu. Close Closes the Multiline Text Editor and saves any changes that you made. Redo. the characters beneath the diagonal bar are top-left aligned. The following options are specific to the Multiline Text Editor. left-. To close the Multiline Text Editor without saving changes. Find and Replace Displays the Replace dialog box (see page 582). Text is middle-. See “Justify Multiline Text” in the User’s Guide for an illustration of the nine justification options. Copy. press ESC . Text Color Specifies a color for new text or changes the color of selected text. Justification Sets justification and alignment for the multiline text object. You can use different indentation for the first line and the remaining lines in the paragraph. You can also select one of the colors in the color list or click Other to open the Select Color dialog box (see page 169). Cut.

AutoCAPS Converts all newly typed and imported text to uppercase. Control Codes. Stack/Unstack Stacks text if any of the stack characters are contained in the selected text. and Special Characters” on page 589. the diameter symbol is displayed as %%c and the nonbreaking space is displayed as a hollow rectange. Change Case Changes the case of selected text. See “Unicode Strings. Rightclick in the Multiline Text Editor and click Paste on the shortcut menu. select it and click Select. Symbol Inserts a listed symbol or nonbreaking space at the cursor position. Note In the Multiline Text Editor. which contains the entire character set for the current font. Both are displayed correctly in the drawing. select the text. If your keyboard does not contain a Euro symbol. AutoCAPS does not affect existing text. hold down the ALT key and enter 0128 on the numeric keypad. italic.Select All Selects all the text in the multiline text object. Imported text retains its original character . To change the case of existing text. Select any file that is in ASCII or RTF format. Options are Uppercase or Lowercase. Import Text 580 | MTEXT Displays the Select File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box). You can use the Euro symbol with SHX fonts and their TrueType equivalent fonts shipped with AutoCAD 2000 and later releases. Symbols can also be inserted manually. Remove Formatting Removes bold. Properties Displays the Stack Properties dialog box (see page 582). and click Change Case on the shortcut menu. To insert a character from the dialog box. Unstacks text if stacked text is selected. or underline formatting from the selected text. rightclick. Click Other in the Symbols list to display the Character Map dialog box. Combine Paragraphs Combines selected paragraphs into a single paragraph and replaces each paragraph return with a space. Select all the characters you want to use and then click Copy.

Help Displays the MTEXT topic in the Help system. First Line Sets indentation for the first line of the current paragraph or selected paragraphs. but you can edit and format the imported text in the Multiline Text Editor. The file size for imported text is limited to 32K.formatting and style properties. or append the inserted text to text selected within the text boundary. Note An Excel spreadsheet imported into an AutoCAD drawing is truncated at 72 rows unless the spreadsheet was created in Office 2002 with service pack 2 installed. you can replace either selected text or all text. Paragraph Sets indentation for the current paragraph or selected paragraphs. The same limitation applies when the drawing that contains the OLE object is opened on a system with an earlier version of Office installed: the spreadsheet is truncated. MTEXT | 581 . When black characters are inserted and the background color is black. You can also set indentation by moving the sliders on the ruler and set tab stops by clicking on the ruler. Set Copies the value in the Tab Stop Position box to the list below the box. Clear Removes the selected tab stop from the list. Indents and Tabs Dialog Box Sets indentation for paragraphs and the first lines of paragraphs and sets tab stops. Indentation Sets indentation in the paragraph where the cursor is located or in selected paragraphs. Tab Stop Position Sets tab positions for the current paragraph or selected paragraphs. The list below the text box shows the current tab stops. the Multiline Text Editor automatically changes to white or the current color. After you select a text file to import. The Multiline Text Editor automatically sets the text color to BYLAYER.

Match Case Finds text only if the case of all characters in the text string is identical to the case of the text in Find What. Replace All Finds all instances of the text specified in Find What and replaces it with the text in Replace With. To continue the search. AutoCAD finds a match for specified text strings regardless of case. When this option is cleared. Match Whole Word Only Matches the text in the Find box only if it is a single word. alignment. stack type.Replace Dialog Box Searches for specified text strings and replaces them with new text. You can edit the upper and lower text separately. Replace With Defines the text string to replace the text in Find What. position. and size of stacked text. To open the Stack Properties dialog box. and text size of the stacked text. and click Properties on the shortcut menu. click Find again. The Appearance options control the stack style. Find What Defines the text string to search for. Replace Button Replaces the highlighted text with the text in Replace With. 582 | MTEXT . When this option is cleared. Stack Properties Dialog Box Edits the text. select the stacked text. right-click. Text that is part of another word is ignored. AutoCAD finds a match for text strings whether they are single words or parts of other words. Find Button Starts a search for the text string in Find What.

If a multiline text object contains diagonal fractions. Center alignment is the default. Diagonal fractions are restored when the drawing is re-opened in AutoCAD 2000 or a later release. Note Releases of AutoCAD earlier than AutoCAD 2000 do not support diagonal fractions. Appearance Edits the style.Text Changes the upper and lower numbers of a stacked fraction. MTEXT | 583 . Upper Edits the number in the upper part or first half of a stacked fraction. There is no line between the numbers. Position Specifies how fractions are aligned. Bottom Aligns the bottom of the fraction with the text baseline. All stacked text in an object uses the same alignment. all fractions are converted to diagonal fractions when the drawing is reopened in AutoCAD 2000 or a later release. or text size of a stacked fraction. Lower Edits the number in the lower part or second half of a stacked fraction. Fraction (Horizontal) Stacks the selected text with the first number on top of the second number separated by a horizontal line. position. If a single multiline text object contains both horizontal and diagonal fractions. Tolerance Stacks the selected text with the first number on top of the second number. Fraction (Diagonal) Stacks the selected text with the first number on top of the second number separated by a diagonal line. Style Specifies a style format for stacked text. Top Aligns the top of the fraction with the top of the text line. the fractions are converted to horizontal fractions when you save the drawing to preAutoCAD 2000 releases. Center Centers the fraction vertically at the center of the text line.

Defaults Saves the new settings as defaults or restores the previous default values to the current stacked text. Remove Leading Blank Removes blanks between a whole number and a fraction. specifies whether the slash character converts to diagonal or horizontal fractions. AutoStack Button Displays the AutoStack Properties dialog box. Default text size is 70 percent. 584 | Enable AutoStacking Automatically stacks numeric characters entered before and after the carat. For example. or pound character. or text that includes spaces. and pound characters. This option is available only when AutoStacking is turned on. AutoStack Properties Dialog Box Turns on automatic stacking. slash.Text Size Controls the size of the stacked text as a percentage of the size of the current text style (from 25 to 125 percent). removes leading blank spaces before stacked text. and suppresses display of the AutoStack Properties dialog box. AutoStack only stacks numeric characters immediately before and after the carat. slash. To stack nonnumeric characters. if you type 1#3 followed by a nonnumeric character or space. MTEXT . select the text and choose the Stack button. the text is automatically stacked as a diagonal fraction. Convert It to a Diagonal Fraction Converts the slash character to a diagonal fraction when AutoStack is on.

Specify height <current>: The default height. Height Specifies the text height to use for multiline text characters. is the height of the current style. it is the height stored in the TEXTSIZE system variable. Always Use These Settings Suppresses display of the AutoStack Properties dialog box. Note Whether AutoStack is on or off. MTEXT | 585 . if nonzero. Don’t Show This Dialog Again. or pound sign followed by a space or nonnumeric character. MTEXT Command Line If you enter -mtext at the Command prompt. In the Stack Properties dialog box. click AutoStack. When this option is cleared. right-click. Changing the height updates the value stored in TEXTSIZE. the AutoStack Properties dialog box is automatically displayed if you type two numbers separated by a slash. The current property settings are used for all stacked text.Convert It to a Horizontal Fraction Converts the slash character to a horizontal fraction when AutoStack is on. Note To display the AutoStack Properties dialog box when you have suppressed automatic display. MTEXT bypasses the Multiline Text Editor and displays additional prompts on the command line. otherwise. select stacked text. Arrows within the rectangle indicate the direction of the paragraph's text flow. Current text style: current Text height: current Specify first corner: Specify opposite corner or [Height/Justify/Line spacing/Rotation/Style/Width]: Opposite Corner As you drag the pointing device to specify the opposite corner. Character height is calculated in drawing units. and click Properties on the shortcut menu. carat. and the carat character is always converted to a tolerance format. a rectangle is displayed to show the location and size of the multiline text object. the pound character is always converted to a diagonal fraction.

or right-justified with respect to the left and right text boundaries. Enter justification [TL/TC/TR/ML/MC/MR/BL/BC/BR] <TL>: Justify options Option Meaning TL Top Left TC Top Center TR Top Right ML Middle Left MC Middle Center MR Middle Right BL Bottom Left BC Bottom Center BR Bottom Right The following illustrations show each justification option. for new or selected text. by default) is applied to new text. The current justification (Top Left. Text is center-. 586 | MTEXT . Text flow controls whether text is aligned from the middle. in relation to the text boundary. Spaces entered at the end of a line are included as part of the text and affect the justification of the line. or the bottom of the paragraph with respect to the top and bottom text boundaries. left-. The justification point is based on the first point used to specify the rectangle.Justify Determines both text justification and text flow. the top. The text is justified within the specified rectangle based on the justification setting and one of nine justification points on the rectangle.

spills down middle left: left-justified. spills down top right: right-justified. spills up bottom right: right-justified. spills up Line Spacing Specifies line spacing for the multiline text object. spills up and down middle right: right-justified. spills up and down middle center: center-justified. spills up bottom center: center-justified. Line spacing is the vertical distance between the bottom (or baseline) of one line of text and the bottom of the next line of text. spills up and down bottom left: left-justified.top left: left-justified. Use a smaller text height than the specified line spacing to ensure that text does not overlap. Enter line spacing type [At least/Exactly] <current>: MTEXT | 587 . Note Exact spacing is recommended when you use MTEXT to create a table. spills down top center: center-justified.

Enter line spacing factor or distance <current>: ■ Spacing Factor: Sets the line spacing to a multiple of single-line spacing. the rotation angle is determined by the angle between the X axis and the line defined by the most recently entered point (default 0. or specify double spacing by entering 2x.66 times the height of the text characters. For example. When At Least is selected.66 times the height of the text characters.At Least Adjusts lines of text automatically based on the height of the largest character in the line.3333 (4x).0833 (0. specify single spacing by entering 1x. Valid values must be between 0. Enter line spacing factor or distance <current>: ■ Spacing Factor: Sets the line spacing to a multiple of single-line spacing.3333 (4x). ■ Exactly Distance: Sets the line spacing to an absolute value measured in drawing units. or specify double spacing by entering 2x. Spacing is based on the text height of the object or text style. You enter the spacing increment as a number followed by x to indicate a multiple of single spacing. 588 | MTEXT . Single spacing is 1.25x) and 1.25x) and 1.0) and the specified point. Single spacing is 1. specify single spacing by entering 1x.0833 (0. For example. Specify rotation angle <current>: Specify a point or enter a value If you use the pointing device to specify a point. Forces the line spacing to be the same for all lines of text in the multiline text object. ■ Distance: Sets the line spacing to an absolute value measured in drawing units. Rotation Specifies the rotation angle of the text boundary.0. lines of text with taller characters have added space between lines. You can enter a spacing factor as a number followed by x to indicate a multiple of single spacing. Valid values must be between 0.

Text styles can be defined and saved using the STYLE command. press ENTER at the MTEXT prompt. To end the command.AutoCAD returns to the previous prompt until you specify the opposite corner of the text boundary. Enter style name or [?] <current>: Style Name Specifies a text style name. AutoCAD returns to the previous prompt until you specify the opposite corner of the text boundary. the width is calculated as the distance between the start point and the specified point. Control Codes. You can end a line of text at a specific point by typing the text and pressing ENTER . Words within each line of the multiline text object wrap to fit the width of the text boundary. Style Specifies the text style to use for multiline text. Width Specifies the width of the text boundary. word wrap is turned off and the width of the multiline text object is as wide as the longest line of text. Unicode Strings. Unicode strings and control codes Control Codes Unicode Strings Result %%d \U+00B0 Degree symbol (°) %%p \U+00B1 Tolerance symbol (±) %%c \U+2205 Diameter symbol (∅) MTEXT | 589 . Specify width: Specify a point or enter a value If you use the pointing device to specify a point. ?—List Styles Lists text style names and characteristics. and Special Characters You can enter the following control codes and Unicode strings to create special characters. If you specify a width of 0.

where you can modify multiline text properties. System Variables FONTALT specifies an alternative font that AutoCAD uses when the specified font file cannot be found. Commands DDEDIT displays the Multiline Text Editor so you can edit the selected multiline text object. Note You cannot use MULTIPLE as an argument to the AutoLISP command function. Because MULTIPLE repeats only the command name. See “Unicode. 590 | MULTIPLE . FONTMAP specifies the font mapping file that AutoCAD uses when the specified font cannot be found. MTEXTED specifies the name of the text editor you want to use to create multiline text. MULTIPLE Repeats the next command until canceled Command line: multiple Enter command name to repeat: AutoCADrepeats the command you enter until you press ESC . any parameters must be specified each time. MULTIPLE does not repeat commands that display dialog boxes. PROPERTIES displays the Properties palette for the selected multiline text object. OPTIONS specifies the text editor you want to use to create multiline text.Note that the circle diameter dimensioning symbol appears as %%c in the Multiline Text Editor but converts to the special character in your drawing.” See Also See “Overview of Multiline Text” in the User’s Guide. TEXT creates text on the screen as you enter it. STYLE creates text styles.

3 Viewports. Specify opposite corner: MVIEW | 591 . When working in the Model tab.MVIEW Creates and controls layout viewports When working in a layout tab. you can create as many viewports as you want. Viewports that are not active are blank. MVIEW controls the creation and display of layout viewports. but only up to 64 viewports can be active at one time (see MAXACTVP). Use the On and Off options to control whether viewports are active. Objects in model space are visible only in active viewports. you can use VPORTS to create model viewports. 4 Viewports Command line: mview Specify corner of viewport or [ON/OFF/Fit/Shadeplot/Lock/Object/Polygonal/ Restore/2/3/4] <Fit>: Enter an option or specify a point In a layout. 2 Viewports. View menu: Viewports ➤ 1 Viewport. Corner of Viewport Specifies the first corner of a rectangular viewport.

fit Shade plot? [As displayed/Wireframe/Hidden/Rendered] <As displayed >: Enter a shade plot option As Displayed Specifies that a viewport plots the same way it is displayed. Shadeplot Specifies how viewports in layouts are plotted. If your drawing contains more viewports than the number specified in MAXACTVP. Rendered Specifies that a viewport plots rendered regardless of the current display. An active viewport displays objects in model space. Hidden Specifies that a viewport plots with hidden lines removed regardless of the current display. Wireframe Specifies that a viewport plots wireframe regardless of the current display. Select objects: Select one or more viewports Fit Creates one viewport that fills the layout to the edges of the paper margins. When the paper background and margins are turned off. you must turn one off to make another one active. Select objects: 592 | MVIEW Select one or more viewports . Select objects: Select one or more viewports Off Makes a selected viewport inactive. Objects in model space are not displayed in an inactive viewport. the viewport fills the display.On Makes a selected viewport active. The MAXACTVP system variable controls the maximum number of viewports that can be active at one time.

and it can contain an arc as well as line segments. region. see “Arc” on page 714. Viewport View Locking [ON/OFF]: Enter on or off Select objects: Select one or more viewports Object Specifies a closed polyline. spline. AutoCAD draws the new line segment tangent to that arc segment. If you press ENTER after specifying at least three points. The polyline you specify must be closed and contain at least three vertices. The prompts are similar to those displayed when you specify a polygonal clip boundary for external references (xrefs). Select object to clip viewport: Select an object Polygonal Creates an irregularly shaped viewport using specified points. MVIEW | 593 .Lock Prevents the zoom scale factor in the selected viewport from being changed when working in model space. Length Draws a line segment of a specified length at the same angle as the previous segment. [Angle/CEnter/CLose/Direction/Line/Radius/Second pt/ Undo/Endpoint of arc] <Endpoint>: Enter an option or press ENTER For a description of the options for creating arc segments. It can be self-intersecting. If the previous segment is an arc. Close Closes the boundary. Specify start point: Specify a point Specify next point or [Arc/Close/Length/Undo]: Specify a point or enter an option Arc Adds arc segments to the polygonal viewport. or circle to convert into a viewport. ellipse. but you can specify arcs when you create a polygonal viewport boundary. AutoCAD automatically closes the boundary.

Enter viewport arrangement [Horizontal/Vertical] <Vertical>: Enter h or press ENTER Specify first corner or [Fit] <Fit>: 2/vertical Specify a point or press ENTER First Corner Positions and sizes new viewports using the window selection method. enter a name. or press ENTER Specify first corner or [Fit] <Fit>: Specify a point or press ENTER First Corner Positions and sizes new viewports using the window selection method. 2 Divides the specified area horizontally or vertically into two viewports of equal size. AutoCAD fits the viewports into the selected area. Specify first corner or [Fit] <Fit>: 594 | MVIEW Specify a point or press ENTER . Restore Restores viewport configurations saved with the VPORTS command.Undo Removes the most recent line or arc segment added to the polygonal viewport. Left. The Above. Fit Sizes the viewports to fill the drawing area. The other options split the area into three viewports: one large viewport and two smaller ones. AutoCAD fits the viewports into the selected area. Enter viewport configuration name or [?] <*ACTIVE>: Enter ?. Fit Sizes the viewports to fill the drawing area. Enter viewport arrangement [Horizontal/Vertical/Above/Below/Left/<Right>: Enter an option or press ENTER The Horizontal and Vertical options split the specified area into thirds. and Right options specify where the larger viewport is placed. Below. 3 Divides the specified area into three viewports.

Specify first corner or [Fit] <Fit>: Specify a point or press ENTER First Corner Positions and sizes new viewports using the window selection method. PSPACE switches from model space to paper space. AutoCAD fits the viewports into the selected area. the prompts displayed depend on whether you are on the Model tab (model space) or on a layout tab (paper space). 4 See Also For more information about using model space and paper space. Fit Sizes the viewports to fill the drawing area. see “Create Layout Viewports” in the User’s Guide. Commands VPORTS creates viewports in model or paper space. HIDE eliminates hidden lines from a three-dimensional view of a drawing. VISRETAIN specifies precedence of settings for xref layers. MVSETUP Sets up the specifications of a drawing Command line: mvsetup When you enter mvsetup at the command line. PSLTSCALE controls paper space linetype scaling. System Variables PSVPSCALE sets the view scale factor for all newly created viewports. MAXACTVP specifies the maximum number of viewports to regenerate. VPLAYER sets the visibility for layers in specific viewports. MVSETUP | 595 .3/right First Corner Positions and sizes new viewports using the window selection method. AutoCAD fits the viewports into the selected area. 4 Divides the specified area horizontally and vertically into four viewports of equal size. Fit Sizes the viewports to fill the drawing area. MSPACE switches from paper space to a model space viewport.

Using MVSETUP on a Layout Tab When the TILEMODE system variable is off. AutoCAD draws a rectangular border at the drawing limits. “Using MVSETUP on a Layout Tab. and paper size from the command line using MVSETUP. You can specify a global scale as the ratio between the scale of the title block in the layout and the drawing on the Model tab. To easily specify all layout page settings and prepare your drawing for plotting.” Entering n displays the following prompt: Enter units type [Scientific/Decimal/Engineering/Architectural/Metric]: Enter an option AutoCAD displays a list of available units and prompts for the scale factor and paper size. AutoCAD displays the following prompt: Enable paper space? [No/Yes] <Y>: Enter n or press ENTER Pressing ENTER turns off TILEMODE and proceeds as described in the following section. Using the settings you provide. which is automatically displayed when you select a layout in a new drawing session. The Model tab is most useful for plotting multiple views of a drawing within a single border.On the Model tab. Using MVSETUP on the Model Tab When the TILEMODE system variable is on (the default). you set the units type. On a layout tab. you can insert one of several predefined title blocks into the drawing and create a set of layout viewports within the title block. drawing scale factor. Enter the scale factor: Enter a value Enter the paper width: Enter a value Enter the paper height: Enter a value AutoCAD draws a bounding box and ends the command. or when you enter y or press ENTER at the Enable Paper Space prompt. AutoCAD displays the following prompt: Enter an option [Align/Create/Scale viewports/Options/Title block/Undo]: Enter an option or press ENTER to end the command 596 | MVSETUP . you can also use the Page Setup dialog box.

This option should be used only if the two viewports are oriented horizontally. Specify the distance and angle to the new alignment point in the current viewport where you specified the base point. Otherwise. the view might be panned outside the limits of the viewport. Enter an option [Angled/Horizontal/Vertical alignment/Rotate view/Undo]: Enter an option Angled Pans the view in a viewport in a specified direction.Align Pans the view in a viewport so that it aligns with a base point in another viewport. Specify base point: Specify a point Specify point in viewport to be panned: the viewport to be panned Specify a point in The next two prompts specify the distance and angle from the base point to the second point. This option should be used only if the two viewports are oriented vertically. Specify distance from base point: Specify a distance Specify angle from base point: Specify an angle Horizontal Pans the view in one viewport until it aligns horizontally with a base point in another viewport. Specify base point: Specify a point Specify point in viewport to be panned: the viewport to be panned Specify a point in MVSETUP | 597 . the view might be panned outside the limits of the viewport. Specify base point: Specify a point Specify point in viewport to be panned: the viewport to be panned Vertical Alignment Specify a point in Pans the view in one viewport until it aligns vertically with a base point in another viewport. The current viewport is the viewport that the other point moves to. Otherwise.

Specify base point in the viewport with the view to be rotated: Specify a point Specify angle from base point: Specify an angle Undo Reverses operations performed in the current MVSETUP session. Entering 1 creates a single viewport whose size is determined by the following prompts. Select the objects to delete.Rotate View Rotates the view in a viewport about a base point. or enter r to redisplay the list of viewport layout options Layout Number to Load Controls creation of viewports.. Enter an option [Delete objects/Create viewports/Undo] <Create>: option or press ENTER Enter an Delete Objects Deletes existing viewports. Available layout options: 0: 1: 2: 3: None Single Std. Specify first corner of bounding area for viewport(s): Specify a point for the first corner Opposite corner: Specify a point for the opposite corner 598 | MVSETUP . Select objects: Select the viewports to delete and press ENTER Create Viewports Displays options for creating viewports. Create Creates viewports. Entering 0 or pressing ENTER creates no viewports.. Engineering Array of Viewports Enter layout number to load or [Redisplay]: Enter an option number (0–3).

Entering 2 creates f*our viewports by dividing a specified area into quadrants.0>: Specify a distance or press ENTER The viewing angle for each quadrant is set as shown in the table. Standard engineering viewports Quadrant View Upper-left Top (XY plane of UCS) Upper-right SE isometric view Lower-left Front (XZ plane of UCS) Lower-right Right side (YZ plane of UCS) MVSETUP | 599 . Specify first corner of bounding area for viewport(s): Specify a point for the first corner Opposite corner: Specify a point for the opposite corner Specify distance between viewports in X direction <0.0>: Specify a distance or press ENTER Specify distance between viewports in Y direction <0. AutoCAD prompts you for the area to be divided and the distance between the viewports.

.0>: Specify a distance AutoCAD inserts the array of viewports into the defined area. AutoCAD displays the following prompts: Specify distance between viewports in X direction <0. Specify first corner of bounding area for viewport(s): Specify a point for the first corner Opposite corner: Specify a point for the opposite corner Enter number of viewports in X direction <1>: Enter the number of viewports to place along the X axis Enter number of viewports in Y direction <1>: Enter the number of viewports to place along the Y axis If you enter more than one viewport in each direction. Select the viewports to scale. Set zoom scale factors for viewports.0>: Specify a distance Specify distance between viewports in Y direction <0.. Select objects: Select the viewports to scale If you select only one viewport. The zoom scale factor is a ratio between the scale of the border in paper space and the scale of the drawing objects displayed in the viewports. Specifying points at the next two prompts defines the rectangular area of the drawing that contains the viewport configuration. Undo Reverses operations performed in the current MVSETUP session. the Specify First Corner prompt also includes an option for selecting a default area. Scale Viewports Adjusts the zoom scale factor of the objects displayed in the viewports.0>: Enter a value or press ENTER Enter the number of model space units <1.0>: Enter a value or press ENTER 600 | MVSETUP . AutoCAD skips the next prompt.Entering 3 defines a matrix of viewports along the X and Y axes. Redisplay Redisplays the list of viewport layout options. If you have inserted a title block. Interactively/<Uniform>: Enter i or press ENTER Enter the number of paper space units <1.

<1. Enter an option [Layer/LImits/Units/Xref] <exit>: to return to the previous prompt Layer Enter an option or press ENTER Specifies a layer on which to insert the title block.) for the current layer. Enter the number of paper space units <1.Interactively Selects one viewport at a time and displays the following prompts for each.0>: Enter a value or press ENTER Options Sets the MVSETUP preferences before you change your drawing.0>: Enter a value or press ENTER Number of model space units. enter i.0>: Enter a value or press ENTER For example. Uniform Sets the same scale factor for all viewports. Set drawing limits? [Yes/No] <N>: Units Enter y or press ENTER Specifies whether the sizes and point locations are translated to inch or millimeter paper units. enter 1 for paper space units and 4 for model space units. or press ENTER MVSETUP | 601 .0>: Enter a value or press ENTER Enter the number of model space units <1. Number of paper space units. Enter paper space units type [Feet/Inches/MEters/ Millimeters] <current>: Enter an option or press ENTER Xref Specifies whether the title block is inserted or externally referenced. or quarter scale. Enter layer name for title block or [. enter a period (. <1. for an engineering drawing at a scale of 1:4. or press ENTER Limits Specifies whether to reset the limits to the drawing extents after a title block has been inserted. (for current layer)]: Enter an existing or a new layer name. Enter title block placement method [Xref attach/Insert] <current>: Enter x.

orients the drawing by setting the origin. Specify new origin point for this sheet: Specify a point Undo Reverses operations performed in the current MVSETUP session. Select the objects to delete . Available title blocks:... Select objects: Use an object selection method Origin Relocates the origin point for this sheet. and creates a drawing border and a title block. 0: 1: 2: 3: 4: 5: 6: 7: 8: 9: 10: 11: 12: 13: None ISO A4 Size(mm) ISO A3 Size(mm) ISO A2 Size(mm) ISO A1 Size(mm) ISO A0 Size(mm) ANSI-V Size(in) ANSI-A Size(in) ANSI-B Size(in) ANSI-C Size(in) ANSI-D Size(in) ANSI-E Size(in) Arch/Engineering (24 x 36in) Generic D size Sheet (24 x 36in) Enter number of title block to load or [Add/Delete/Redisplay]: Enter an option number (0 through 13) or enter an option 602 | MVSETUP .Title Block Prepares paper space. . . Enter title block option [Delete objects/Origin/Undo/Insert] <Insert>: option or press ENTER Enter an Delete Objects Deletes objects from paper space. Insert Displays title block options.

Delete Removes entries from the list.99 0. Entering 1 through 13 creates a standard border of the appropriate size.63 17. Entering 0 or pressing ENTER inserts no border.12 0.dfs default file: A/E (24 x 18in). Enter number of entry to delete from list: Enter the number of the entry to delete Redisplay Redisplays the list of title block options.(18.in The last field of the line specifies whether the title block has been created in inches or in millimeters. You can also add title blocks that have variable attributes.02 0. Add Adds title block options to the list.(1. Selecting this option prompts you to enter the title block description to be displayed in the list and the name of a drawing to insert. The list includes ANSI and DIN/ISO standard sheets. Enter title block description: Enter a description Enter drawing name to insert (without extension): Enter a file name Define default usable area? [Yes/No] <Y>: Enter n or press ENTER Pressing ENTER displays the following prompts: Specify lower-left corner: Specify a point Specify upper-right corner: Specify a point AutoCAD adds a line similar to the following example after the last entry in the mvsetup.Title Block to Load Inserts a border and a title block.00).arch-b.dwg.00). The units field allows title blocks created in either unit system to be changed by setting the unit type using the Options option. MVSETUP | 603 .

Undo Reverses operations performed in the current MVSETUP session. 604 | MVSETUP . See Also See “Edit in Layout Viewports” in the User’s Guide. PSPACE switches from model space to paper space. System Variables LTSCALE stores the global linetype scale factor. PAGESETUP displays the Page Setup dialog box in which you can specify page settings. TILEMODE controls paper space access and view- port behavior. PSLTSCALE controls the linetype scale factor in paper space. VPORTS creates new viewports in model or paper space. Commands MSPACE switches from paper space to a model space viewport.

) Choose one of the buttons at the top of the dialog box. To open an existing drawing. see “Use a Template” on page 606. To start a new drawing based on a customized template. (The first option. Create New Drawing Dialog Box Defines the settings for a new drawing. ■ ■ Show the Startup Dialog Box: NEW displays the Create New Drawing dialog box. AutoCAD stores this setting in the MEASUREINIT system variable. Open a Drawing. FILEDIA. NEW | 605 . use OPEN. If the system variable. If you set FILEDIA to 0.NEW Creates a new drawing File menu: New Command line: new The behavior of the NEW command is determined by the Startup setting on the System tab of the Options dialog box. is set to 0 instead of 1. a prompt on the command line is displayed (see page 612). Start from Scratch Starts an empty drawing using default imperial or metric settings. There are three main methods that you can use to create a new drawing. is not available from the NEW command. this prompt is displayed regardless of the Startup setting. You can change the measurement system for a given drawing by using the MEASUREMENT system variable. Do Not Show the Startup Dialog Box: NEW displays the Select Template dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box).

Metric Starts a new drawing based on the metric measurement system.dwt file extension. Several template drawings are included with AutoCAD. The default drawing boundary (the drawing limits) is 12 × 9 inches. Template drawings are distinguished from other drawing files by the . You can make additional template drawings by changing the extensions of drawing file names to . Use a Template Starts a drawing based on a drawing template file.dwt. dimension styles. The default drawing boundary (the drawing limits) is 429 × 297 millimeters. 606 | NEW .Imperial Starts a new drawing based on the Imperial measurement system. Template drawings store all the settings for a drawing and may also include predefined layers. See “Use a Template File to Start a Drawing” in the User’s Guide. They are normally kept in the template directory. and views.

Use a Wizard Sets up a drawing using a step-by-step guide. which is specified in the Options dialog box (see page 633). Choose a file to use as a starting point for your new drawing. A preview image of the selected file is displayed to the right. You can choose from two wizards: Quick Setup and Advanced Setup.Select a Template Lists all DWT files that currently exist in the drawing template file location. NEW | 607 . Browse Displays the Select Template dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box) where you can access template files that are not available in the Select a Template list.

The Quick Setup wizard also changes settings. choose Finish on the last page to close the wizard and create the new drawing with the settings you specified. 608 | NEW . and area for your new drawing. angle direction. such as text height and snap spacing. angle measure. angle. to an appropriate scale. The Quick Setup wizard has two pages: Units and Area. The Quick Setup wizard also changes settings. such as text height and snap spacing. choose Back and Next to switch between pages. to an appropriate scale. Advanced Setup Displays the Advanced Setup wizard (see page 610).Quick Setup Displays the Quick Setup wizard (see page 608). in which you can specify the units and area for your new drawing. As you work in this wizard. in which you can specify the units. Quick Setup Wizard Defines the units and area of your drawing.

and fractional inches. Engineering Displays measurements in feet and decimal inches. Area Indicates the width and length in full-scale units of what you plan to draw. have a specific base unit (inches) assigned to them. this setting also restricts the coordinates you can enter to within the rectangular area.0000). inches. Two of them. Architectural Displays measurements in feet. You can select from other measurement styles that can represent any convenient unit of measurement. When limits checking is turned on with the LIMITS command. The default precision used by Quick Setup is four (0. Decimal Displays measurements in decimal notation. Several formats are available in AutoCAD. Fractional Displays measurements in mixed-number (integer and fractional) notation. This setting limits the area of the drawing covered by grid dots when the grid is turned on. Note You control the precision (the number of decimal places displayed in all measurements) by using the Advanced Setup wizard or the UNITS command. You can change the drawing area and turn limits checking on and off with the LIMITS command. Engineering and Architectural. NEW | 609 .Units Indicates the format in which you enter and in which AutoCAD displays coordinates and measurements. Scientific Displays measurements in scientific notation (numbers expressed in the form of the product of a decimal number between 0 and 10 and a power of 10).

angle measure. and Area. angle.Advanced Setup Wizard Defines the units. angle direction. See “Units” on page 609 for more information. choose Finish on the last page to close the wizard and create the new drawing with the settings you specified. and area of your new drawing. angle. Units Indicates the unit format and precision. The unit precision specifies the number of decimal places or the fractional size for displaying linear measurements. and angle direction using the UNITS command. Angle Direction. and you can change area using the LIMITS command. The Advanced Setup wizard contains five pages: Units. Angle. Angle Measure. The unit format is the format in which you enter and in which AutoCAD displays coordinates and measurements. 610 | NEW . angle measure. The Units page of the Quick Setup wizard includes the same formats. As you work in this wizard. You can later change units. choose Back and Next to navigate between pages.

Radians Displays angles as radians. South Specifies the compass direction south as the 0 angle. When limits checking is turned on with the LIMITS command. East Specifies the compass direction east as the 0 angle. Deg/Min/Sec Displays partial degrees as minutes and seconds. When you enter an angle value in AutoCAD. this setting also restricts the coordinates you can enter to within the rectangular area. Angle Direction Indicates the direction from the 0 angle in which you enter and in which AutoCAD displays positive angle values: counterclockwise or clockwise. North Specifies the compass direction north as the 0 angle. Enter a specific compass angle to treat as the 0 angle. Grads Displays angles as grads. Area Indicates the width and length in full-scale units of what you plan to draw. or south. Decimal Degrees Displays partial degrees as decimals. Other Specifies a direction other than east. Surveyor Displays angles in surveyor’s units. You can change the drawing area and turn limits checking on and off with the LIMITS command. AutoCAD measures the angle either counterclockwise or clockwise from the compass direction that you select on this page. This setting limits the area of the drawing covered by grid dots when the grid is turned on. West Specifies the compass direction west as the 0 angle. You control the counterclockwise/clockwise direction on the Angle Direction page. Angle Measure Indicates the direction of the 0 angle for the entry of angles. west. NEW | 611 . north.Angle Indicates the format in which you enter angles and in which AutoCAD displays angles.

System Variables FILEDIA controls whether the Create New Drawing dialog box is displayed when you enter the NEW command. See Also See “Start and Save a Drawing” and “Specify Units. and Scale” in the User’s Guide.). enter a period (. or if FILEDIA is set to 0.NEW Command Line If you turned off the display of the Create New Drawing dialog box. 612 | NEW . Angles. Enter a tilde (~) at the prompt to display the Select Template dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box). or press ENTER AutoCAD automatically creates a new drawing using the measurement system (imperial or metric) specified by the MEASUREINIT system variable. (for none)] <current>: Enter a name. NEW displays the following prompt: Enter template file name or [.

OFFSET | 613 . press ENTER at the Select Object to Offset prompt. Select object to offset or <exit>: Select one object or press ENTER to end the command Specify point on side to offset?: Specify a point (1) on the side of the object you want to offset 1 offset distance object selected side selected object offset AutoCAD® repeats the two prompts so that you can create multiple offset objects. and parallel curves OFFSET creates a new object at a specified distance from an existing object or through a specified point. Modify toolbar: Modify menu: Offset Command line: offset Specify offset distance or [Through] <current>: Specify a distance. enter t.OFFSET Creates concentric circles. parallel lines. To end the command. or press ENTER polyline Offset Distance polyline with offset Creates an object at a specified distance from an existing object.

To end the command. Select object to offset or <exit>: Select one object or press ENTER to end the command Specify through point: Specify a point (1) through which you want the offset object to pass 1 object selected through point object offset AutoCAD repeats the two prompts so that you can create multiple offset objects. If there is no existing OLE link in the drawing. See “Link and Embed Data (OLE)” in the User’s Guide.Through Creates an object passing through a specified point. OFFSETGAPTYPE controls how to offset polylines when a gap is created as a result of offsetting individual polyline segments. OLE Links is not available on the Edit menu and the Links dialog box is 614 | OLELINKS . MLINE creates multiple parallel lines. Commands COPY duplicates objects. Edit menu: OLE Links Command line: olelinks The Links dialog box is displayed. You can set AutoCAD to update links automatically or manually when information in the source document changes. press ENTER at the Select Object to Offset prompt. System Variables OFFSETDIST stores the current offset value. changes. See Also See “Offset an Object” in the User’s Guide. and cancels existing OLE links AutoCAD supports the Windows® feature called object linking and embedding (OLE). When you use PASTESPEC to insert a linked object into an AutoCAD drawing from an application that supports OLE. the object maintains a connection with its source file. OLELINKS Updates.

The information listed depends on the type of link. Source Displays the path name of the source file and the type of object. Links Dialog Box Lists and modifies linked files and objects. Links Lists information about linked objects. Type Displays the format type. Update: Automatic Updates the link automatically whenever the source changes. If the source is a selection within a file (instead of the entire file). in which you can specify a different source file. To specify a different source application for an embedded object.not displayed. Open Source Opens the source file and highlights the portion linked to the AutoCAD drawing. Update: Manual Prompts you to update a link when you open the document. Item Name displays a string representing the selection. right-click the embedded object and click Convert on the shortcut menu to display the Convert dialog box (see page 616). To change information for a linked object. Update Now Updates the selected links. select the object. OLELINKS | 615 . Change Source Displays the Change Source dialog box (a standard file tdialog box).

To access this dialog box. OLELINKS . which is not affected by future changes to the original file. Display as Icon Displays the source application’s icon in the AutoCAD drawing. Convert To Converts the embedded object to the type specified under Object Type. Result Describes the result of the selected options. This option is available only if you select Display as Icon. AutoCAD changes the object in your AutoCAD drawing into a Windows metafile. Double-clicking the icon displays the linked or embedded information.Break Link Severs the link between the object and the original file. Change Icon Displays the Change Icon dialog box. 616 | Current Type Displays the type of object you are converting or activating. Object Type Displays a list of available object types. Activate As Opens the embedded object as the type selected under Object Type but returns the object to its current type after editing. Convert Dialog Box Specifies a different source application for an embedded object. right-click the embedded object and choose Convert from the shortcut menu. Use this list to select a new type for the embedded object.

OLELINKS | 617 .Change Icon Dialog Box Changes the icon that represents an embedded or linked object in an AutoCAD drawing. DLL. COPYLINK copies the current view to the Clipboard for linking to other OLE applications. Commands COPYCLIP copies objects to the Clipboard. Label Specifies a caption for the icon. AutoCAD displays the file type unless you specify otherwise. Current Specifies the currently selected icon. in which you can select an icon from a file. Icon Specifies an icon to represent an embedded or linked object. Default Specifies the default icon for the source application. and ICO). See Also See “Link and Embed Data (OLE)” in the User’s Guide. From File Specifies an icon from a file (valid types include EXE. PASTECLIP inserts data from the Clipboard into a drawing. Browse Displays the Browse dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box). PASTESPEC inserts data from the Clipboard into the drawing and controls the format of the data.

scales text by assigning a point size to a font contained in the OLE object. 618 | OLESCALE . Note UNDO does not undo a change made in the OLE Properties dialog box. and specifies OLE plot quality. and other properties of a selected OLE object Shortcut menu: Right-click an OLE object and choose Properties. right-click the OLE object and choose Undo from the shortcut menu.OLESCALE Controls the size. Command line: olescale The OLE Properties dialog box is displayed. scale. To undo a change made in the OLE properties dialog box. Note You must select an OLE object before entering the OLESCALE command. OLE Properties Dialog Box Resizes OLE objects in drawing units or by percentage of the current size.

enter a percent value. the other property changes too. Height Scales the height of the OLE object by a percentage of the current height. Width Displays the current width of the OLE object. To change the width. the Height value changes to maintain the ratio between the height and the width of the object. the Width value changes to maintain the ratio between the height and the width of the object. If Lock Aspect Ratio is selected. Enter a number in drawing units to change the height. OLESCALE | 619 . Reset Resets the size of the OLE object to the size it was when you first inserted it into the drawing. the width changes to 50 percent to maintain the ratio. Scale Sets the scale for the OLE object. Width Scales the width of the OLE object by a percentage of the current width. Lock Aspect Ratio affects both size and scale values. Lock Aspect Ratio Maintains the current ratio between height and width. If Lock Aspect Ratio is selected. the Height value changes to maintain the ratio between the width and the height of the object. Height Displays the current height of the OLE object. To change the height.Size Specifies a size for the OLE object. Enter a number in drawing units to change the width. the Width value changes to maintain the ratio between the height and the width of the object. If Lock Aspect Ratio is selected. If Lock Aspect Ratio is selected. enter a percent value. For example. Clear the Lock Aspect Ratio option if you want to change the height or width separately. If you change the height or the width when Lock Aspect Ratio is selected. if you change the height to 50 percent.

Point Size Displays a list of all the point sizes in the OLE object for the selected font. this option is unavailable. OOPS Restores erased objects Command line: oops OOPS restores objects erased by the last ERASE command. Enter a number in drawing units.Text Size Changes the size of text of a selected font and point size in an OLE object. erased objects 620 | OOPS before OOPS after OOPS . When you choose OK. the text in the OLE object of the selected font and point size changes to the height you entered. Font Displays a list of all the fonts used by the selected OLE object. Other text of different fonts and point sizes also changes to adjust to the change to the selected font. If there is no text in the OLE object. OLE Plot Quality Determines the quality of the plotted OLE object. Select the font that you want to change. All the other text in the OLE object adjusts in size to maintain the current size ratio with the font that was changed. Select the point size that you want to change. Select a file type from the list. Text Height Specifies the font size. Display Dialog When Pasting New OLE Object Automatically displays the OLE Properties dialog box when you insert an OLE object in an AutoCAD drawing.

Standard File Selection Dialog Boxes Several AutoCAD commands display standard file selection dialog boxes. In the Select File dialog box. You cannot use OOPS to restore objects on a layer that has been removed with the PURGE command. in which you can navigate through local and network drives and through FTP sites and Web folders to select files. UNDO reverses the effect of multiple commands and provides control over the undo feature. click the arrow next to Open and choose Partial Open or Partial Open Read-Only to display the Partial Open dialog box. When FILEDIA is set to 0 (zero). following is a list of the possible options. OPEN Opens an existing drawing file Standard toolbar: File menu: Open Command line: open The Select File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box) is displayed. Note If the drawing you open contains macros. See Also Commands U reverses the effect of the previous command. You can open and load a portion of a drawing. AutoCAD displays the AutoCAD Macro Virus Protection dialog box (see page 1082). OPEN displays a prompt on the command line (see page 632).You can also use OOPS after BLOCK or WBLOCK because these commands can erase the selected objects after creating a block. including geometry on a specific view or layer. OPEN | 621 . While each dialog box may vary slightly.

Changes to the Places list affect all standard file selection dialog boxes.Places list Places List Provides quick access to predefined file locations. choose Views ➤ Details. You cannot remove the Buzzsaw™ icon. drag a folder from the files list to the Places list. then select the unwanted shortcuts from the Files list and choose Delete. You can reorder the icons in the Places list by dragging them to a new location. This shortcut menu also provides options for removing and modifying icons. OPEN . It is recommended that you periodically remove unwanted shortcuts from the History list. To sort the shortcuts by date. or right-click an existing icon and choose Add or Add Current Folder from the shortcut menu. The name of this location (“Personal” or “My Documents”) depends on your operating system version. and then click the Modified column in the Files list. Select History. Personal/My Documents Displays the contents of the Personal or My Documents folder for the current user profile. or restoring default icons that have been removed. To add a new icon to the Places list. Click the Look In arrow to view the path for each icon. 622 | History Displays shortcuts to the files most recently accessed from the dialog box.

Also. To add FTP locations to this list. or to modify an existing FTP location. Up One Level Navigates one level up in the current path tree. network connections. If you already have a project hosting account. FTP Displays the FTP sites that are available for browsing in the standard file selection dialog box.Favorites Displays the contents of the Favorites folder for the current user profile. You can create Web folders in Windows Explorer. your default web browser opens with the project hosting page displayed.com™. If you do not yet have a project hosting account on Buzzsaw. clicking Buzzsaw shows all of your project sites in the Files list. Desktop Displays the contents of your desktop. Back Returns to the previous file location. Look In/Save In Displays the current folder or drive. or Web folders (either Web Folders or My Network Places depending on the version of your operating system). Consult your system administrator or Windows Explorer Help for more information about Web folders. the first time you access Buzzsaw. choose Tools ➤ Add/Modify FTP Locations in the dialog box. from which you can access and store AutoCAD files on the Internet. To control whether the last used paths in each particular standard file selection dialog box are stored across AutoCAD sessions. Click the arrow to view the hierarchy of the folder path and to navigate up the path tree or to other drives. FTP locations. OPEN | 623 . use the REMEMBERFOLDERS system variable. Search the Web Displays the Browse the Web dialog box. This folder consists of shortcuts to files or folders that you added to Favorites using the Tools ➤ Add to Favorites option in the dialog box. Buzzsaw Provides access to projects hosted by Buzzsaw—a business-to-business marketplace for the building design and construction industry. clicking Buzzsaw displays the Add Site option in the Buzzsaw Folders list where you can set up a project.

Details Displays the contents of the Files list in a single-column format with file details. OPEN . List Displays the contents of the Files list in a multicolumn format. in which you can specify the FTP sites to make available for browsing. Views Controls the appearance of the Files list and specifies whether to show a preview image. in which you can search for files using name. To remove the icon. which you can access by choosing Favorites in the Places list. To browse these sites. You set the search path on the Files tab in the Options dialog box (see page 633). and datemodified filters. Locate Uses the AutoCAD search path to locate the file specified in File Name. or to the selected file or folder. The shortcut is placed in the Favorites folder for the current user profile. Tools Provides the following tools: 624 | Find Displays the Find dialog box (see page 626). providing quick access to that folder from all standard file selection dialog boxes. Create New Folder Creates a new folder in the current path using a name that you specify. location. Preview Displays a bitmap of the selected file. rightclick the icon and choose Remove. Add to Favorites Creates a shortcut to the current Look In location. use the Save a Thumbnail Preview Image option on the Open and Save tab in the Options dialog box. select FTP from the Places list. To save a bitmap with a drawing file. The Preview area is blank if you do not select a file.Delete Deletes the selected file or folder. Add/Modify FTP Locations Displays the Add/Modify FTP Locations dialog box (see page 628). Add Current Folder to Places Adds an icon for the selected folder to the Places list.

If you enter a file name in the File Name box. including geometry on a specific view or layer. File Name Displays the name of the file you select in the Files list. Use the Views menu in the dialog box to switch between List view and Details view. Files List Displays the files and folders in the current path and of the selected file type. Files of Type Filters the list of files by file type. Files of Type specifies the format in which the file is saved. File Name displays each selected file within quotation marks. OPEN | 625 . Preview Displays a bitmap of the selected file when you choose Views ➤ Preview in the dialog box. If you select multiple files. Partial Open Read-Only Opens the specified drawing portions in read-only mode. When you are saving files. You can use wild-card characters to filter files displayed in the Files list. Security Options Provides options for a digital signature and password that are invoked when you save a file. Select Initial View Displays the specified view when you open the drawing if the drawing contains more than one named view. Certain file selection dialog boxes may also include the following options. To save a bitmap with a drawing file. accessed by clicking the arrow next to the Open button: Open Read-Only Opens a file in read-only mode. use the Save a Thumbnail Preview Image option on the Open and Save tab in the Options dialog box. depending on the purpose of the specific file selection dialog box.Options Provides additional options for certain standard file selection dialog boxes. You must use quotation marks when entering multiple file names. You cannot save changes to the file using the original file name. Partial Open Displays the Partial Open dialog box (see page 629). You can only use this option with drawings created in AutoCAD 2000 or later. Open/Save Opens or saves the selected file. The Preview area is blank if you do not select a file. AutoCAD clears any selection. You can open and load a portion of a drawing.

The type of files to include in the search is determined by Type. enter house* and set Type to Drawing (*. and so on. and date modified filters. . Named Specifies the full or partial file names to include in the search.Find Dialog Box Searches for files using name.dwg. ?BC matches ABC. ? (Question mark): Matches any single character. When entering multiple file names.dwg). file name. Type 626 | OPEN Specifies the type of files to include in the search. Available file types are limited to those supported by the specific standard file selection dialog box. so you don’t need to enter a file extension in Named. and location. 3BC. to find house102. enclose each name in quotation marks. Use the following wildcard characters to broaden your search: ■ ■ * (Asterisk): Matches any string and can be used anywhere in the search string. For example. Name & Location Tab Filters the file search based on file type. for example. location.

Browse Displays the Browse for Folder dialog box. OPEN | 627 . Enter a location. in which you can navigate to a location for the search. When entering multiple locations. Find Now Searches for files using the criteria specified in both tabs. or click the month and year. enclose each location in quotation marks. ■ ■ ■ Between: Searches for files created or modified between two dates. Include Subfolders Searches all subfolders within the Look In location. During the Previous N Months: Searches for files created or modified within a specified number of months. or choose Browse to navigate to a location. Date Modified Tab Filters the file search based on the file’s creation or modified date. Find All Files Created or Modified Restricts the search to files created or modified within a specified time. During the Previous N Days: Searches for files created or modified within a specified number of days. Enter the dates or click the arrows to choose dates from a calendar. Stop Ends the search.Look In Specifies the location to search. OK When one or more files are selected in the search results. New Search Clears the search results and resets the default values for all search options. closes the Find dialog box and enters the selected file names in the standard file selection dialog box. All Files Searches without a date filter. use the left and right arrows. choose a location from the list. To navigate the calendar.

When used with a standard file selection dialog box that allows multiple file selection. To browse the sites that you add. Anonymous 628 | OPEN Logs you on to the FTP site as an anonymous user. Name of FTP Site Specifies the site name for the FTP location (for example. click a column heading. you can pass multiple files from the Search Results. Add/Modify FTP Locations Dialog Box Defines the FTP sites that you can browse within standard file selection dialog boxes. . ftp. To pass a file to the standard file selection dialog box. select FTP from the Places list in the standard file selection dialog box.Search Results Lists all files found by the search.com). Log On As Specifies whether to log on to the FTP site anonymously or with a specific user name. To change the sort order of the files. If the FTP site does not allow anonymous logons.autodesk. select a file and choose OK. select User and enter a valid user name.

all AutoCAD named objects. Modify Modifies the selected FTP site to use the specified site name. and password. Partial Open Dialog Box Displays the drawing views and layers available for specifying what geometry to load into the selected drawing. views. FTP Sites Lists the FTP sites that are available from the Places list in all standard file selection dialog boxes. URL Displays the URL for the selected FTP site. as well as the specified geometry. Password Specifies the password to use to log on to the FTP site. Remove Removes the selected FTP site from the list of FTP locations available from the standard file selection dialog box. UCSs. layouts. AutoCAD named objects include blocks. OPEN | 629 . When a drawing is partially open. dimension styles. layers. are loaded into the file. When working with large drawing files. text styles. Add Adds a new FTP site to the list of FTP locations available from the standard file selection dialog box. logon name. you can select the minimal amount of geometry you need to load when opening a drawing. linetypes. and viewport configurations.User Logs you on to the FTP site using the specified user name.

but only geometry from the view specified to load is displayed in the drawing. 630 | OPEN . When a view is selected. Geometry that is common to both the selected view and the layers is loaded into the drawing. The default view is Extents. You can load paper space geometry by loading the layer that the paper space geometry is drawn on. named objects are still loaded into the file along with the specified geometry from the selected view. Only model space views are available for loading. View List Displays all the model space views available in the selected drawing file. Note When a drawing is partially open. AutoCAD loads only the geometry in the selected view. You can load geometry from only one view. You can use the PARTIALOAD command to load additional geometry into a partially open drawing. View Name Displays the currently selected view. Geometry that is common to both the selected view and the layers is loaded into the drawing.View Geometry to Load Displays the selected view and available views in the drawing. All views are still available in the partially open drawing.

OPEN | 631 . Layer Name Displays the layer names in the selected drawing. No geometry at all is loaded. including both model space and paper space geometry. You can use the PARTIALOAD command to load additional geometry into a partially open drawing. Load Geometry Loads geometry from the layer when the drawing is opened. You can rightclick and use the shortcut menu to load no geometry into the drawing. All layers are still available in the partially open drawing. Any layers created in the xref since the xref was loaded into the selected drawing are not displayed in the Layer Geometry to Load list. Xref-dependent layers are displayed in the Layer Geometry to Load list only if the selected drawing was last saved with the VISRETAIN system variable set to 1. Note When a drawing is partially open. no geometry from the selected view is loaded either because no layer geometry in that view or in the entire drawing is loaded. but only geometry from the layers specified to load appears in the drawing. Index Status Displays whether the selected drawing file contains a spatial or layer index. You can right-click and use the shortcut menu to load geometry from all layers into the drawing. The default loads no layer geometry into the drawing. INDEXCTL controls whether layer and spatial indexes are saved with the drawing file. If you specify to load no layer geometry into the drawing. The geometry on selected layers is loaded into the drawing. Clear All Loads no geometry from any layer when the drawing is opened. but you can load geometry from one or more layers. Load All Loads geometry from all layers when the drawing is opened. named objects are still loaded into the file along with the specified geometry from the selected layers. including geometry specified to load from a view.Layer Geometry to Load Displays all the layers available in the selected drawing file.

Spatial Index Displays whether the selected drawing file contains a spatial index. Unload All Xrefs on Open Loads all external references when opening the drawing. 632 | OPEN . Enter name of drawing to open: Enter ~ (tilde) at the prompt to ignore FILEDIA and display the Select File dialog box (see page 621). AutoCAD uses a layer index to locate what portion of the drawing is read. A layer index is a list showing the objects that are on each layer. See Also See “Open an Existing Drawing” in the User’s Guide. only the portion of the xref that is loaded (defined by the selected view) is bound to the partially open drawing. Selecting this option enhances the opening process. If you partially open a drawing that contains a bound xref. When partially opening a drawing. Layer Index Displays whether the selected drawing file contains a layer index. this minimizes the time required to open the drawing. If a drawing does not contain a spatial index. OPEN Command Line When FILEDIA is set to 0 (zero).Use Spatial Index Controls whether a spatial index is used when partially opening a drawing. this minimizes the time required to open the drawing. A spatial index organizes objects based on their location in space. Open Opens the drawing file. this option is unavailable. this minimizes the time required to open the drawing. AutoCAD uses a spatial index to locate what portion of the drawing is read. When partially opening a drawing. OPEN displays the following prompt on the command line. AutoCAD uses a spatial index to locate what portion of the drawing is read. loading only combined geometry from the selected view and layers.

OPTIONS | 633 . OPTIONS Customizes the AutoCAD settings Tools menu: Options Shortcut menu: Right-click in the command window. Options Dialog Box Customizes many AutoCAD settings. Command line: options The Options dialog box is displayed. or (with no commands active and no objects selected) right-click in the drawing area. PARTIALOAD loads additional information into a drawing file if the current drawing is a partially opened drawing.Commands NEW creates a new drawing file. and choose Options. System Variables FULLOPEN indicates whether the current drawing is partially opened.

user-defined settings such as which dictionary to use for checking spelling. (DWGNAME system variable) Files Tab (Options Dialog Box) Specifies the folders in which AutoCAD searches for support. Choose Browse and use the Browse for Folder dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box) to locate the folder or file you want to use. use the Profiles tab. create a new profile. To specify a location for a folder or file. 634 | OPTIONS . double-click its name in the list. menu. and other files. An option saved in the registry affects all drawings in an AutoCAD session. (CPROFILE system variable) Current Drawing Displays the name of the current drawing above the tabs. Options that are saved in the registry (and are not displayed with a drawing file icon) are saved in the current profile. A drawing file icon is displayed next to any option saved with the drawing. Also specifies optional. An option saved with the drawing affects only the current drawing. or edit an existing profile. driver.Current Profile Displays the name of the current profile above the tabs. To set the current profile.

and plotters. Any valid environment variables listed in the support file search path are displayed as expanded folders in the Working Support File Search Path. Menu File Specifies the location of the AutoCAD menu file. pointing devices. You can create any number of project names with associated folders. Environment variables can also be included in the support file search path. The project name corresponds to a search path for external reference (xref) files associated with the project. OPTIONS | 635 . drawings to insert. but each drawing can have only one project name. linetypes. This value is read-only and can only be changed by using the /c command line switch. Environment variables that contain other environment variables are displayed with only the parent variable as an expanded folder. In addition to the files required to run AutoCAD.Support File Search Path Specifies the folders in which AutoCAD searches for support files. Help File Specifies the location of the AutoCAD Help file. Working Support File Search Path Specifies the active folders in which AutoCAD searches for support files specific to your system. See “Customize Startup” in the User’s Guide. Help. you can include files for fonts. Default Internet Location Specifies the default Internet location used by both the BROWSER command and the Browse the Web button on the Web toolbar. Device Driver File Search Path Specifies where AutoCAD looks for device drivers for the video display. Project Files Search Path Specifies a project name for the drawing. The working support file list displays valid paths from the support file search path that exist within the current folder structure and network paths. and Miscellaneous File Names Specifies the names and locations of various types of files. menus. Configuration File Specifies the location of th